MTS Series 793 Control Software

Software Reference

100-147-130 N be certain.
© 2014 MTS Systems Corporation. All rights reserved.

Trademark Information
MTS, FlexTest, RPC, Temposonics, and TestWare are registered trademarks of MTS Systems
Corporation; MPT, Station Builder, Station Manager, and Profile Editor are trademarks of MTS Systems
Corporation within the United States. These trademarks may be protected in other countries.Microsoft
and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks or service
marks are property of their respective owners.

Proprietary Software
Software use and license is governed by MTS’s End User License Agreement which defines all rights
retained by MTS and granted to the End User. All Software is proprietary, confidential, and owned by
MTS Systems Corporation and cannot be copied, reproduced, disassembled, decompiled, reverse
engineered, or distributed without express written consent of MTS

Software Verification and Validation

MTS software is developed using established quality practices in accordance with the requirements
detailed in the ISO 9001 standards. Because MTS-authored software is delivered in binary format, it
is not user accessible. This software will not change over time. Many releases are written to be
backwards compatible, creating another form of verification.The status and validity of MTS’s operating
software is also checked during system verification and routine calibration of MTS hardware. These
controlled calibration processes compare the final test results after statistical analysis against the
predicted response of the calibration standards. With these established methods, MTS assures its
customers that MTS products meet MTS’s exacting quality standards when initially installed and will
continue to perform as intended over time
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Technical Support
How to Get Technical Support.......................................................................................................19
Before You Contact MTS...............................................................................................................19
If You Contact MTS by Phone........................................................................................................21
Problem Submittal Form in MTS Manuals.....................................................................................22
Preface
Before You Begin...........................................................................................................................23
Documentation Conventions..........................................................................................................23

Project Manager
Overview........................................................................................................................................28
Project Definitions...............................................................................................................28
Project Contents..................................................................................................................28
About the Project Settings File............................................................................................29
How to Configure Projects with the Project Manager.........................................................29
About Project Folder Icons..................................................................................................29
More about Project Information...........................................................................................32
Project File Descriptions.....................................................................................................34
Default File Locations in a Project ......................................................................................35
About Project Limitations....................................................................................................36
Working with Project Manager.......................................................................................................37
Project Manager General Considerations...........................................................................37
About Initial Projects...........................................................................................................38
How to Start Project Manager.............................................................................................38
About How Projects Are Loaded ........................................................................................39
Identifying the Current Project.............................................................................................39
How to Switch Projects.......................................................................................................39
How to Start Applications....................................................................................................40
How to Create a New Project .............................................................................................41
Editing Project Settings.......................................................................................................41
Good Practice for Editing Project Settings...............................................................41
Edit Project Settings.................................................................................................41
About Changing Folder Paths..................................................................................41
Assigning and Clearing Project Defaults.............................................................................42
About Default Projects..............................................................................................42
How to Assign a Default Project ..............................................................................42
Clearing a Default Project .......................................................................................42
About Templates.......................................................................................................43

3
Table of Contents

Controls and Displays....................................................................................................................43

Main Window Access..........................................................................................................43
Main Window Description....................................................................................................43
Project Manager Menu Bar.................................................................................................45
Project Manager Toolbar.....................................................................................................46
New Project Window...........................................................................................................47
Open Folder or Project/Select Project Window...................................................................48
Project Settings Window.....................................................................................................49
Controller Settings Window.................................................................................................51
System Settings Window....................................................................................................53

Station Builder
About the Station Builder Application.............................................................................................56
About Hardware Interface Files.....................................................................................................56
About Station Configurations.........................................................................................................56
About Station Configuration Files..................................................................................................58
How to Start Station Builder...........................................................................................................58
How to Create a Station Configuration File....................................................................................59
Station Builder Controls and Displays............................................................................................59
About the Station Builder Main Window..............................................................................59
Station Builder Toolbar........................................................................................................61
System Resources Window................................................................................................61
Common Controls...............................................................................................................62
Channels Panel...................................................................................................................62
Station Panel.......................................................................................................................63
General Tab.........................................................................................................................64
Controller Resources.....................................................................................................................65
About Controller Resources................................................................................................65
About Station Resources....................................................................................................66
How to Reuse Station Input Resources Associated with Specific Channels......................68
Station Resources In DOF Systems...................................................................................69
About Creating Multibox Configurations.............................................................................70
Hardware Output Resources...............................................................................................71
Hardware Input Resources.................................................................................................71
Resource Syntax.................................................................................................................73
About the Model 494.16 VD/DUC Mezzanine Card............................................................74
How to Allocate Resources.................................................................................................75
About Display and Internal Names......................................................................................75
Naming Considerations for External Commands................................................................76
Naming Considerations for Auxiliary Inputs........................................................................76
About Station Resources...............................................................................................................77
Channels........................................................................................................................................78

4
 Table of Contents

About Channels...................................................................................................................78
About Calculated Inputs and Outputs.................................................................................81
About Power Control...........................................................................................................81
About Update Rates............................................................................................................82
About Compensators..........................................................................................................82
How to Create a Program and Control Channel.................................................................85
How to Create a Program with Feedback Channel.............................................................86
How to Create a Program-Only Channel............................................................................86
How to Create a Temperature Control Channel..................................................................87
Control Modes................................................................................................................................88
About Control Modes..........................................................................................................88
Basic PIDF Control Mode....................................................................................................89
How to Create a Basic PIDF Control Mode........................................................................89
About Dual Compensation Control Mode...........................................................................90
About Setpoint in a Dual Compensation Control Mode......................................................92
How to Create a Dual-Compensation Control Mode...........................................................93
About Cascaded PIDF Control Mode..................................................................................94
How to Create a Cascaded PIDF Control Mode.................................................................95
Channel Limited Channel Control Mode.............................................................................96
How to Create a Channel Limited Channel (CLC) Control Mode.......................................96
About Zero Clamp PIDF Control Mode...............................................................................97
How to Create a Zero Clamp PIDF Control Mode..............................................................97
About Command Plus Error Control Mode.........................................................................98
How to Create a Command Plus Error Control Mode.........................................................99
Signal Stabilization.........................................................................................................................99
About Signal Stabilization...................................................................................................99
How to Create a Control Mode Stabilization Signal..........................................................100
Channel Inputs.............................................................................................................................100
About Channel Inputs........................................................................................................100
How to Create Channel Inputs Manually..........................................................................101
External Command Inputs...........................................................................................................101
About External Command Inputs......................................................................................101
How to Enable an External Command Input.....................................................................101
Auxiliary Inputs.............................................................................................................................102
About Auxiliary Inputs.......................................................................................................102
About Reconfigurable Auxiliary Inputs..............................................................................102
How to Create an Auxiliary Input.......................................................................................102
Readouts......................................................................................................................................103
About Readouts................................................................................................................103
How to Create Readouts...................................................................................................103
Digital Inputs................................................................................................................................103
About Digital Inputs...........................................................................................................103
How to Create Digital Inputs.............................................................................................103

5
Table of Contents

Digital Outputs.............................................................................................................................104
About Digital Outputs........................................................................................................104
How to Create Digital Outputs...........................................................................................104
Calculated Resources..................................................................................................................105
About Calculated Resources.............................................................................................105
How to Create a Calculated Analog Output Resource......................................................106
How to Create a Calculated Digital Output Resource.......................................................106
How to Create a Calculated Input Resource for Control Modes.......................................106
How to Create a Calculated Input Resource for Auxiliary Inputs......................................106
How to Create a Calculated Input Resource for Digital Inputs..........................................107
Remote Setpoints........................................................................................................................107
About Remote Setpoint Adjust..........................................................................................107
How to Set Up a Remote Setpoint Adjust.........................................................................107
Station Configuration Files...........................................................................................................107
About Corrupted Station Configuration Files....................................................................107
How to Print a Station Configuration File..........................................................................108
About Using Stations Concurrently...................................................................................108
How to Create Stations That Run Concurrently................................................................109
How to Edit Stations That Run Concurrently....................................................................109
How to Preview Changes Made to a Configuration File...................................................109

Station Manager Application

Overview......................................................................................................................................112
About the Station Manager Application.............................................................................112
Station Manager Window..................................................................................................113
Station Manager Menu Bar...............................................................................................114
Station Manager Toolbar...................................................................................................114
Application Control Panels................................................................................................115
Station Manager Message Pane.......................................................................................116
About the Station Controls Panel......................................................................................117
Station Manager Basics...............................................................................................................121
How to Start the Station Manager Application..................................................................121
How to Open a Station......................................................................................................121
About Access Level Settings.............................................................................................123
About the Demonstration Mode........................................................................................124
How to Start the Demonstration Mode..............................................................................124
About Station Views..........................................................................................................124
How to Manage Station Views..........................................................................................125
Parameter Sets............................................................................................................................125
About Station Parameter Sets...........................................................................................125
About Parameter Settings.................................................................................................126
How to Determine What Parameter Set Is Being Used....................................................127

6
 Table of Contents

How to Save and Manage Parameter Sets.......................................................................127

How to Preview Changes Made to a Parameter Set........................................................129
How to Import a Parameter Set.........................................................................................130
How to Export a Parameter Set........................................................................................130
Station Manager Menus...............................................................................................................132
File Menu..........................................................................................................................132
Print Preview Window.......................................................................................................133
Display Menu....................................................................................................................133
Applications Menu.............................................................................................................134
Tools Menu........................................................................................................................134
Help Menu.........................................................................................................................135
Station Options Window...............................................................................................................135
About the Station Options Window...................................................................................135
Station Log Tab.................................................................................................................136
Unit Selection Tab.............................................................................................................136
Station View Options Tab..................................................................................................137
Handset Options Tab.........................................................................................................139
About Exclusive Control and the Handset..............................................................140
Shutdown Recorder Tab....................................................................................................141
About the Shutdown Recorder...............................................................................142
How to Configure the Shutdown Recorder.............................................................143
How to Access Post-Crash Data............................................................................144
Channel Options Window............................................................................................................144
About the Channel Options Window.................................................................................144
External Command Tab.....................................................................................................144
Master Command Tab.......................................................................................................145
Channel Lists Tab..............................................................................................................146
Command Options Tab.....................................................................................................147
About Taper and Ramp Times................................................................................147
Taper Time Settings...............................................................................................147
Ramp Time Settings...............................................................................................149
Begin/End Time Settings........................................................................................151
Setpoint/Span Time Settings..................................................................................152
Detector Lists Tab.............................................................................................................154
RSC Tab............................................................................................................................154
Rig Commands Tab...........................................................................................................155
About Rig Commands (Park/Ride).........................................................................155
How to Configure Rig Commands..........................................................................157
C-Stop Tab........................................................................................................................158
Editors..........................................................................................................................................159
Sensor File Editor..............................................................................................................159
How to Create a Sensor File..................................................................................159

7
Table of Contents

How to Set Gain/Linearization and Gain/Advanced Linearization Calibration

Settings.............................................................................................................161
How to Set Gain/Delta K Calibration Settings........................................................161
How to Set mV/V Pos Tension or mV/V Pos Comp Calibration Settings...............162
Sensor File Editor Settings.....................................................................................162
Linearization Data Window Settings......................................................................165
Event-Action Editor...........................................................................................................165
About the Event-Action Editor Window..................................................................165
Action Lists Tab......................................................................................................166
Custom Action Settings..........................................................................................167
How to Define a Custom Action.............................................................................169
About Action Groups..............................................................................................170
Task Schedule Editor........................................................................................................171
About the Task Schedule Editor.............................................................................171
How to Use the Task Schedule Editor....................................................................171
Calculation Editor..............................................................................................................171
CAN Bus Editor.................................................................................................................172
About CAN Bus......................................................................................................172
About the CAN Bus Editor......................................................................................173
CAN Bus Control Panel..........................................................................................173
CAN Bus Setup Overview......................................................................................175
About CAN Messages............................................................................................176
CAN Bus Output Message Settings.......................................................................177
CAN Bus Input Message Settings..........................................................................179
CAN Bus Message Logging...................................................................................180
About CAN Inputs and Outputs..............................................................................181
CAN Input/Output Settings.....................................................................................181
Adding CAN Devices from a CANdb File ..............................................................183
Unit Set Editor...................................................................................................................186
How to Select a Unit Assignment Set....................................................................186
About the Unit Assignment Set Editor....................................................................187

Station Setup
Overview......................................................................................................................................190
About the Station Setup Window......................................................................................190
Channel Summary Tab......................................................................................................191
Fullscale Tab.....................................................................................................................192
Channel Input Signals..................................................................................................................192
How to Access Channel Input Settings.............................................................................192
About Channel Inputs........................................................................................................193
Input Settings....................................................................................................................193
Sensor Files......................................................................................................................194

8
 Table of Contents

About Sensor Calibration Data Formats................................................................194

About Sensor Files.................................................................................................195
How to Assign a Sensor File to an Input................................................................195
<Invalid> Sensor Assignments...............................................................................196
Sensor File Save Options.......................................................................................196
How to Save Calibration Data in a Parameter Set.................................................197
Sensor Tab.............................................................................................................198
Accel Tab................................................................................................................199
A/B Compare Tab...................................................................................................200
Externally Conditioned Input and Command Signals........................................................201
About Externally Conditioned Input Signals...........................................................201
How to Configure an Externally Conditioned Input Signal.....................................201
External Readout Devices.................................................................................................201
About Monitoring Signals Using External Readout Devices..................................201
How to Configure a Signal for External Readout...................................................202
Calibration Settings...........................................................................................................202
About Sensor Calibration.......................................................................................202
About Sensor Calibration Data ..............................................................................203
Calibration Data for Replacement Sensors............................................................203
Calibration Tab.......................................................................................................203
Shunt Calibration...............................................................................................................207
About Shunt Calibration Checks............................................................................207
How to Perform a Shunt Calibration Check...........................................................208
How to Update the Shunt Reference Value............................................................208
Shunt Tab...............................................................................................................209
Offset/Zero Tab Settings...................................................................................................210
How to Access Offset Zero Settings.......................................................................210
About Feedback Signal Offset................................................................................211
Offset/Zero Tab.......................................................................................................212
About Electrical Zero Offset...................................................................................213
About Electrical Zero..............................................................................................214
About Electrical Zero..............................................................................................215
How to Shift a Conditioner’s Electrical Zero...........................................................218
Hardware Tab....................................................................................................................219
Excitation Failure Detection..............................................................................................219
About Excitation Failure Detection.........................................................................219
Excitation Failure Mode Settings............................................................................219
Excitation Failure Actions (Series 494 Hardware Only).........................................220
How to Define the Excitation Failure Mode and Actions........................................221
TEDS Sensors..................................................................................................................222
About TEDS Sensors.............................................................................................222
About Calibration Data for TEDS Sensors.............................................................223
How to Assign Calibration Data to a TEDS Sensor...............................................223

9
Table of Contents

How to Replace a TEDS Sensor with a Non-TEDS Sensor (Series 494 Hardware
Only)..................................................................................................................224
Transducer ID Modules.....................................................................................................225
About Transducer ID Modules (Series 493 Conditioners Only).............................225
How to Assign a Transducer ID Module to a Sensor Input....................................225
How to Save Sensor Calibration Data to a Transducer ID Module........................226
Sync Current Channel Button......................................................................................................226
About Sync Current Channel............................................................................................226
Channel Drive Settings................................................................................................................227
How to Access Channel Drive Settings............................................................................227
Channel Status–Drive Tab................................................................................................227
Drive Panel Settings—Two-Stage Valves.........................................................................228
Dual Valve Driver Settings................................................................................................229
Valve Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers............................................................230
Inner Loop Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers....................................................232
Conditioner Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers..................................................233
Calculated Drive Signals Not Assigned Hardware Reference..........................................234
About Program Outputs....................................................................................................234
How to Adjust Program Output Signals............................................................................234
Channel Groups...........................................................................................................................235
About Channel Groups......................................................................................................235
How to Create a Master Command Group.......................................................................236
How to Create a Master Span Group................................................................................237
Master Span Group Errors................................................................................................237
Channel Tuning Settings..............................................................................................................237
How to Access Channel Tuning Settings..........................................................................237
Adjustments Tab—PIDF Control Modes...........................................................................238
Adjustments Tab - CLC Control Modes.............................................................................240
About CLC Tuning.............................................................................................................242
Filter Tab...........................................................................................................................242
Limiting Tab.......................................................................................................................244
Advanced Tab...................................................................................................................244
Auto-Tuning Control Panel................................................................................................246
Channel Compensators...............................................................................................................247
How to Access Channel Compensator Settings...............................................................247
About Compensators........................................................................................................248
Optional Compensators....................................................................................................249
About Null Pacing Compensators.....................................................................................249
About Remote Setpoint Null Pacing..................................................................................251
Null Pacing Compensators Properties..............................................................................251
How to Set Up Null Pacing Compensators.......................................................................253
About Peak-Valley Compensators (PVC)..........................................................................254
Peak/Valley Compensators Properties..............................................................................255

10
 Table of Contents

How to Set Up PVC Compensators..................................................................................255

About Amplitude and Phase Control (APC) Compensators..............................................256
How to Set Up APC Compensators..................................................................................257
About Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC) Compensators.........................................258
How to Set Up AHC Compensators..................................................................................259
About Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC) Compensators......................................................261
AIC Setup Summary.........................................................................................................263
How to Set Up AIC Compensators....................................................................................264
About the Extended Adaptive Inverse Control (AICX) Compensator................................269
AICX Setup Summary.......................................................................................................271
How to Set Up AICX Compensators ................................................................................271
About Arbitrary End-Level Compensation (ALC) .............................................................273
How to Set Up Arbitrary End-Level Compensators (ALC)................................................275
About Peak/Valley Phase (PVP) Compensators...............................................................276
Peak/Valley Phase Compensators Properties..................................................................277
How to Set Up Peak/Valley Phase (PVP) Compensators.................................................277
Readouts......................................................................................................................................278
About Readouts................................................................................................................278
How to Configure Readouts..............................................................................................278
Auxiliary Inputs.............................................................................................................................279
About Auxiliary Inputs.......................................................................................................279
How to Configure Auxiliary Inputs.....................................................................................279
How to Change Auxiliary Input Signal Names..................................................................280
How to Monitor Auxiliary Inputs.........................................................................................280
Station Signals.............................................................................................................................281
About Station Signals........................................................................................................281
How to Define the Signals in the Station Signals List.......................................................281
How to Display Station Signals.........................................................................................281
How to Edit the Signal Lists (Channel Options)................................................................282
Digital Inputs/Outputs...................................................................................................................282
About Digital Input/Output Signals....................................................................................282
How to Monitor Digital Inputs/Outputs...............................................................................283
About Digital Input Detectors............................................................................................283
How to Configure Digital Inputs.........................................................................................283
Digital Input Actions..........................................................................................................284
How to Configure Digital Outputs......................................................................................285
How to Manually Control Digital Output Signals...............................................................285
How to Assign a Digital Output to Run/Stop Controls.......................................................286
Limit and Error Detectors.............................................................................................................286
How to Access Detector Settings......................................................................................286
About Detectors................................................................................................................287
How to Determine Detector Settings.................................................................................288
About Detector Status Indicators......................................................................................288

11
Table of Contents

How to Set Up Detectors...................................................................................................289

How to Reset Detectors....................................................................................................289
About the Reset/Override Button......................................................................................289
Detector Actions................................................................................................................290
About Limit Detectors........................................................................................................291
About Sensor Ranges and Limit Detectors.......................................................................292
How to Select Sensor Ranges..........................................................................................293
How to Set Limit Detectors................................................................................................294
How to Set Error Detectors...............................................................................................296
About Error Detectors.......................................................................................................297
How to Monitor Error Detectors.........................................................................................299
Remote Setpoint Adjustment.......................................................................................................299
About the Optional Remote Setpoint Adjust.....................................................................299
How to Configure Remote Setpoint Adjust Controls.........................................................300
UPS Options................................................................................................................................301
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Settings.................................................................301
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Actions...................................................................302

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Overview......................................................................................................................................306
About Station Manager Real-Time Control.......................................................................306
Station Control Panel Overview...................................................................................................306
About the Station Controls Panel......................................................................................306
About the Station Controls Toolbar...................................................................................311
About Remote Setpoint Adjust..........................................................................................312
Remote Setpoint Adjust Passwords..................................................................................313
How to Set Up and Run Tests......................................................................................................314
Hydraulic Controls........................................................................................................................315
About Station Hydraulics...................................................................................................315
How to Apply Hydraulics...................................................................................................316
How to Turn Off Hydraulics...............................................................................................317
About House Pressure Systems.......................................................................................317
How to Load a Station that Uses House Pressure............................................................317
How to Apply Hydraulics to a Station that Uses House Pressure.....................................318
How to Remove Hydraulic Pressure from a Station that Uses House Pressure...............318
About Read-Only HSMs....................................................................................................318
How to Apply Hydraulics to a Read-Only HSM Station.....................................................319
About Signal States...........................................................................................................319
How to Monitor Signal Status............................................................................................321
Saturated Calculated Input Signals...................................................................................322
How to Correct Invalid Active Feedback...........................................................................323
How to Apply Hydraulics When a Channel’s Feedback is Saturated................................323

12
 Table of Contents

How to Recover from Inadvertent Use of Electrical Zero..................................................324

About Gate Interlocks........................................................................................................325
How to Reset a Gate Interlock..........................................................................................326
About C-Stop Interlock......................................................................................................326
Specimen Installation...................................................................................................................327
About Manual Command..................................................................................................327
Using Channel Limited Channel Control Mode to Install Specimens................................328
How to Manually Position the Actuator to Install and Remove Specimens.......................329
How to Use Manual Command with Channel Groups......................................................329
How to Apply an Auto Offset to an Input Signal................................................................330
How to Apply a Manual Offset to an Input Signal..............................................................330
About the Signal Auto Offset Window...............................................................................331
How to Use the Rig Commands........................................................................................332
Function Generator......................................................................................................................332
About the Function Generator...........................................................................................332
How to Run the Function Generator.................................................................................335
How to Select a Master Command Group for the Function Generator.............................337
About Function Generator Wave Shapes.........................................................................337
About the Random Function Command Type...................................................................339
External Command......................................................................................................................340
About External Command Inputs......................................................................................340
External Command Settings.............................................................................................340
How to Configure External Command Inputs....................................................................341
Setpoint and Span Adjustments...................................................................................................342
About Setpoint and Span Adjustments.............................................................................342
How to Adjust Setpoint and Span During a Test...............................................................343
Message Logs..............................................................................................................................344
About Message Logs........................................................................................................344
Message Logs Window.....................................................................................................345
How to Open a Message Log............................................................................................347
How to Print a Message Log.............................................................................................347
How to Print the Message Log to File...............................................................................348
How to Add a User Entry to the Message Log..................................................................348
How to Delete a User Entry from the Message Log..........................................................348
How to Define Which Messages Get Logged...................................................................348
How to Manually Archive a Message Log.........................................................................348
Message Log Add Entry Window......................................................................................349
How to Switch I/O Carrier LEDs On and Off (Series 494 Hardware only)........................349

Calculated Signals
Calculated Input and Output Resources......................................................................................354
About Calculated Input and Output Resources.................................................................354

13
Table of Contents

About Calculated Input and Output Resources.................................................................354

How to Set Up a Virtual Channel......................................................................................355
Calculation Editor.........................................................................................................................357
About the Calculation Editor Window................................................................................357
Calculation Helpful Hints...................................................................................................359
About Protected Calculations............................................................................................360
Unnamed Calculations......................................................................................................362
Calculation Errors..............................................................................................................362
Calculation Parameters.....................................................................................................363
About Calculation Parameters...............................................................................363
Parameters Definition.............................................................................................363
Calculation Parameter Example.............................................................................364
Calculation Variables ........................................................................................................365
About Calculation Variables...................................................................................365
Calculation Variable Access...................................................................................365
Calculation Variable Example.................................................................................366
Calculated Signals Examples......................................................................................................367
Calculation Examples........................................................................................................367
How to Use Calculated Signals to Drive Two Servovalves...............................................371
About Matrix Two Channels Calculations.........................................................................371
How to Set Up Calculations for Two Matrixed Channels..................................................373
Strain Control Calculations................................................................................................375
True Strain Control............................................................................................................376
Calculation Syntax.......................................................................................................................377
Simple Expression............................................................................................................377
Comments.........................................................................................................................378
Data Types........................................................................................................................378
Literal Numbers and Dimensions......................................................................................378
Operators..........................................................................................................................379
Built-in Arithmetic Functions..............................................................................................380
Multiple Statements and Variables....................................................................................381
Arrays................................................................................................................................382
General Purpose Functions..............................................................................................383
Control Structures (if, while)..............................................................................................384
User-Defined Functions....................................................................................................385
Filter Functions..................................................................................................................386
Station Setup Calculations Panels...............................................................................................387
Values Tab.........................................................................................................................387
Fullscale Tab.....................................................................................................................388
Drive Tab...........................................................................................................................388
Calculation Tab..................................................................................................................388
Calculation Parameters Panel...........................................................................................389
Calibration Tab for a Calculated Input (Channels)............................................................389

14
 Table of Contents

Scopes and Meters

Overview......................................................................................................................................392
About Scopes and Meters.................................................................................................392
Saving and Applying Scope Setups..................................................................................392
Station Signals for Scopes and Meters.............................................................................392
Scope Setup and Operation.........................................................................................................394
About the Scope................................................................................................................394
Scope Window Controls....................................................................................................395
How to Use the Change View Scope Button.....................................................................399
How to Size the Scope Window........................................................................................399
How to Scale Traces.........................................................................................................401
How to Change the Scope’s Time Scale...........................................................................402
How to Adjust the Scope Trace Time................................................................................403
How to Synchronize the Function Generator and Scope..................................................404
Scope Offsets ...................................................................................................................404
Mouse Operations........................................................................................................................405
General Mouse Operations for Scopes.............................................................................405
Pan-Zoom Control Mouse Operations for Scopes............................................................405
Scope Setup Window...................................................................................................................406
About the Scope Setup Window.......................................................................................406
Graph Tab.........................................................................................................................407
Trace Tab..........................................................................................................................409
Plot Modes...................................................................................................................................410
Frequency Plot Mode Tab.................................................................................................410
How to Set Up a Time Plot................................................................................................411
How to Set Up a Frequency Plot.......................................................................................412
About the FRF Frequency Plot Type.................................................................................413
How to Set Up an X/Y Plot................................................................................................414
Scope Data Analysis....................................................................................................................415
How to Examine Active Scope Traces..............................................................................415
How to Examine Stored Scope Traces.............................................................................416
How to Analyze Data Points on a Scope..........................................................................416
Scope Limit Settings....................................................................................................................418
How to Set Detector Limits on a Scope............................................................................418
How to Set User-Specified Scope Limits..........................................................................418
Meters Setup................................................................................................................................418
About Meters.....................................................................................................................418
About the Meters Window.................................................................................................419
How to Add an Individual Meter........................................................................................421
How to Add a Group of Meters Based on a Signal List.....................................................421
How to Configure a Meter.................................................................................................422

15
Table of Contents

How to Save Meter Views.................................................................................................424

How to Reset a Meter View...............................................................................................424
How to Delete a Meter......................................................................................................425
How to Delete a Group of Meters......................................................................................425

Basic TestWare Application

Overview......................................................................................................................................428
Basic TestWare Application Overview...............................................................................428
About Test Files.................................................................................................................429
Default Test File Locations................................................................................................429
About Test Files in Projects...............................................................................................429
How to Start the Basic TestWare Application....................................................................429
Creating a Basic TestWare Test...................................................................................................430
About Defining the Test Command...................................................................................430
How to Define a Cyclic Command....................................................................................430
How to Define a Monotonic Command.............................................................................430
Configuring Data Acquisition........................................................................................................431
About Data Acquisition......................................................................................................431
More About Data Files and Buffers...................................................................................431
How to Configure Timed Data Acquisition........................................................................432
How to Specify Data File Options.....................................................................................432
How to Configure Peak/Valley Data Acquisition................................................................432
How to Configure Running Max/Min Data Acquisition......................................................433
How to Configure Level Crossing Data Acquisition..........................................................433
Configuring Peak Detectors.........................................................................................................433
About Peak Detectors.......................................................................................................433
Detector Indicator Colors..................................................................................................434
How to Configure Peak Detectors.....................................................................................434
Configuring Return Home............................................................................................................434
About Return Home..........................................................................................................434
How to Define the Home Position.....................................................................................435
How to Use the Home Control..........................................................................................435
Configuring Test Counters...........................................................................................................435
Test Counters....................................................................................................................435
How to Configure a Test Counter......................................................................................436
Running a Test.............................................................................................................................437
How to Start a Basic TestWare Test..................................................................................437
How to Hold a Basic TestWare Test..................................................................................437
How to Stop a Basic TestWare Test..................................................................................437
Working with Test Files................................................................................................................437
How to Open a Test File....................................................................................................437
How to Save a Test File....................................................................................................437

16
 Table of Contents

How to Preview a Test.......................................................................................................438

Print Preview Toolbar........................................................................................................438
How to Print a Test............................................................................................................439
About Message Logs........................................................................................................439
Message Log Toolbar.............................................................................................440
How to Open a Message Log.................................................................................440
How to Print a Message Log..................................................................................440
How to Print the Message Log to File....................................................................441
How to Add a User Entry to the Message Log.......................................................441
How to Delete a User Entry from the Message Log...............................................441
How to Define What Messages Are Logged..........................................................441
How to Manually Archive All of the Messages in the Message Log.......................442
How to Manually Archive Part of the Messages in the Message Log....................442
Controls and Displays..................................................................................................................442
Basic TestWare Main Display............................................................................................442
Basic TestWare Toolbar....................................................................................................444
Test Setup Window...........................................................................................................445
About the Data Acquisition Tab.........................................................................................446
Timed Data Acquisition.....................................................................................................446
How to Configure Peak/Valley Data Acquisition................................................................447
Running Max/Min Data Acquisition...................................................................................448
Level Crossing Data Acquisition.......................................................................................448
Data File Tab.....................................................................................................................449
Home Tab..........................................................................................................................450
Peak Detectors Tab...........................................................................................................450
Peak Det. Summary Tab...................................................................................................451
Test Log Tab......................................................................................................................451
Message Logs Window.....................................................................................................452

Station Desktop Organizer

How to Start the Station Desktop Organizer Manually................................................................456
How to Start the Station Desktop Organizer Automatically.........................................................456
About Positioning the Station Desktop Organizer........................................................................457
How to Move the Station Desktop Organizer Taskbar.................................................................457
About the Station Desktop Organizer Menu................................................................................457
How to Hide Station Windows......................................................................................................458
How to Display Hidden Station Windows.....................................................................................459
How to Start an Application from the Station Desktop Organizer................................................459
How to Quit the Station Desktop Organizer.................................................................................459
How to Refresh the Station Desktop Organizer Display..............................................................460
Station Buttons and Action Menus...............................................................................................460
Hide and Show Buttons...............................................................................................................460

17
Table of Contents

Stop Button..................................................................................................................................461
Status Indicators..........................................................................................................................462

Working With Units

Series 793 Software Units Overview...........................................................................................466
Unit Selection Example................................................................................................................469
Units in MPT................................................................................................................................470

Acceleration Compensation
About Acceleration Compensation...............................................................................................474
How to Configure Acceleration Compensation............................................................................474

Command Line Shortcuts

Station Manager Shortcuts..........................................................................................................478
Station Builder Shortcuts.............................................................................................................480
System Loader Shortcuts.............................................................................................................481
Basic TestWare Shortcuts............................................................................................................482
Decorator-Based Command Line Format....................................................................................483
Precedence-Based Command Line Format................................................................................484
How to Create Shortcuts..............................................................................................................486
How to Edit and Test Shortcuts....................................................................................................486

System Performance
System Performance Values........................................................................................................488
RPC Sampling Rates...................................................................................................................489

18
Technical Support

How to Get Technical Support

Start with your manuals

The manuals supplied by MTS provide most of the information you need to use and maintain your equipment.
If your equipment includes software, look for online help and README files that contain additional product
information.

Technical support methods

MTS provides a full range of support services after your system is installed. If you have any questions
about a system or product, contact Technical Support in one of the following ways.

Web site www.mts.com > Contact Us (upper-right corner) > In the Subject field, choose
To escalate a problem; Problem Submittal Form

E-mail Worldwide: [email protected]

Europe: [email protected]

Telephone Worldwide: 1 800 328 2255 - toll free in U.S.; +1 952 937 4000 - outside U.S.
Europe: +800 81002 222, International toll free in Europe

Outside the U.S.

For technical support outside the United States, contact your local sales and service office. For a list of
worldwide sales and service locations and contact information, use the Global MTS link at the MTS web
site:
www.mts.com > Global Presence > Choose a Region

Before You Contact MTS

MTS can help you more efficiently if you have the following information available when you contact us for
support.

Know your site number and system number

The site number contains your company number and identifies your equipment type (such as material
testing or simulation). The number is typically written on a label on your equipment before the system
leaves MTS. If you do not know your MTS site number, contact your sales engineer.
Example site number: 571167

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 19

Technical Support

When you have more than one MTS system, the system job number identifies your system. You can find
your job number in your order paperwork.
Example system number: US1.42460

Know information from prior technical assistance

If you have contacted MTS about this problem before, we can recall your file based on the:
• MTS case number
• Name of the person who helped you

Identify the problem

Describe the problem and know the answers to the following questions:
• How long and how often has the problem occurred?
• Can you reproduce the problem?
• Were any hardware or software changes made to the system before the problem started?
• What are the equipment model numbers?
• What is the controller model (if applicable)?
• What is the system configuration?

Know relevant computer information

For a computer problem, have the following information available:
• Manufacturer’s name and model number
• Operating software type and service patch information
• Amount of system memory
• Amount of free space on the hard drive where the application resides
• Current status of hard-drive fragmentation
• Connection status to a corporate network

Know relevant software information

For software application problems, have the following information available:
• The software application’s name, version number, build number, and (if available) software patch
number. This information can typically be found in the About selection in the Help menu.
• The names of other applications on your computer, such as:
— Anti-virus software
— Screen savers
— Keyboard enhancers
— Print spoolers

20 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Technical Support

— Messaging applications

If You Contact MTS by Phone

A Call Center agent registers your call before connecting you with a technical support specialist. The agent
asks you for your:
• Site number
• Email address
• Name
• Company name
• Company address
• Phone number where you can be reached

If your issue has a case number, please provide that number. A new issue will be assigned a unique case
number.

Identify system type

To enable the Call Center agent to connect you with the most qualified technical support specialist available,
identify your system as one of the following types:
• Electrodynamic material test system
• Electromechanical material test system
• Hydromechanical material test system
• Vehicle test system
• Vehicle component test system
• Aero test system

Be prepared to troubleshoot
Prepare to perform troubleshooting while on the phone:
• Call from a telephone close to the system so that you can implement suggestions made over the phone.
• Have the original operating and application software media available.
• If you are not familiar with all aspects of the equipment operation, have an experienced user nearby to
assist you.

Write down relevant information

In case Technical Support must call you:
• Verify the case number.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 21

Technical Support

• Record the name of the person who helped you.

• Write down any specific instructions.

After you call

MTS logs and tracks all calls to ensure that you receive assistance for your problem or request. If you
have questions about the status of your problem or have additional information to report, please contact
Technical Support again and provide your original case number.

Problem Submittal Form in MTS Manuals

Use the Problem Submittal Form to communicate problems with your software, hardware, manuals, or
service that are not resolved to your satisfaction through the technical support process. The form includes
check boxes that allow you to indicate the urgency of your problem and your expectation of an acceptable
response time. We guarantee a timely response—your feedback is important to us.
You can access the Problem Submittal Form at www.mts.com > Contact Us (upper-right corner) > In the
Subject field, choose To escalate a problem; Problem Submittal Form

22 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

Preface

Before You Begin

Safety first!
Before you use your MTS product or system, read and understand the safety information provided with
your system. Improper installation, operation, or maintenance can result in hazardous conditions that can
cause severe personal injury or death, or damage to your equipment and specimen. Again, read and
understand the safety information provided with your system before you continue. It is very important that
you remain aware of hazards that apply to your system.

Other MTS manuals

In addition to this manual, you may receive additional manuals in paper or electronic form.
You may also receive an MTS System Documentation CD. It contains an electronic copy of the manuals
that pertain to your test system.
Controller and application software manuals are typically included on the software CD distribution disc(s).

Documentation Conventions

The following paragraphs describe some of the conventions that are used in your MTS manuals.

Hazard conventions
Hazard notices may be embedded in this manual. These notices contain safety information that is specific
to the activity to be performed. Hazard notices immediately precede the step or procedure that may lead
to an associated hazard. Read all hazard notices carefully and follow all directions and recommendations.
Three different levels of hazard notices may appear in your manuals. Following are examples of all three
levels. (for general safety information, see the safety information provided with your system.)

Danger:
Danger notices indicate the presence of a hazard with a high level of risk which, if ignored,
will result in death, severe personal injury, or substantial property damage.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 23

Preface

Warning:
Warning notices indicate the presence of a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if ignored,
can result in death, severe personal injury, or substantial property damage.

Caution:
Caution notices indicate the presence of a hazard with a low level of risk which, if ignored,
could cause moderate or minor personal injury or equipment damage, or could endanger test
integrity.

Other special text conventions

Important:
Important notices provide information about your system that is essential to its proper
function. While not safety-related, if the important information is ignored, test results may
not be reliable, or your system may not operate properly.

Note:
Notes provide additional information about operating your system or highlight easily
overlooked information.

Recommended:
Recommended notes provide a suggested way to accomplish a task based on what MTS
has found to be most effective.

Tip:
Tips provide helpful information or a hint about how to most efficiently accomplish a task.

Access:
Access provides the route you should follow to a referenced item in the software.

Examples show specific scenarios relating to your product and appear with a shaded
background.

Special terms
The first occurrence of special terms is shown in italics.

Illustrations
Illustrations appear in this manual to clarify text. They are examples only and do not necessarily represent
your actual system configuration, test application, or software.

24 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Preface

Electronic manual conventions

This manual is available as an electronic document in the Portable Document File (PDF) format. It can be
viewed on any computer that has Adobe Acrobat Reader installed.

Hypertext links
The electronic document has many hypertext links displayed in a blue font. All blue words in the body text,
along with all contents entries and index page numbers, are hypertext links. When you click a hypertext
link, the application jumps to the corresponding topic.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 25

Project Manager
Topics:

• Overview............................................................................................................................................28
• Working with Project Manager...........................................................................................................37
• Controls and Displays........................................................................................................................43

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 27

Project Manager

Overview

Project Definitions
The primary purpose of the Project Manager application is to create and configure 793 Projects (or Projects
for simplicity). A Project is a folder that contains or references files that are used and generated by Series
793 applications.
A 793 Project is a collection of information related to testing. Each 793 Project is organized into predefined
subfolders which may contain information directly, or by reference from other locations.
The Project Manager application allows you to edit the Project Settings file (project.793settings). The
Project Settings file is a collection of paths which directs the flow of information within 793 Project subfolders.

Project Manager Main Window

Project Contents
Projects contain predefined subfolders, as shown in the expanded Sample Project below.

28 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Projects subfolders contain or reference information:

• Required to perform tests, such as configuration files and test design files
• Generated by testing, such as test data, scope images, and specimen files.

About the Project Settings File

The organization and flow of data within a Project is determined by the Project Settings file. Every Project
includes a Project Settings file (project.793settings). The Project Settings file includes paths that you can
change for all of the Project’s subfolders. It also includes settings associated with specific Series 793
applications, such as the default unit set used by the Station Manager application, and graphic display
options used by the Profile Editor application.

How to Configure Projects with the Project Manager

To configure a Project, you use the Project Manager application to edit the Project Settings file.
You can configure Projects in a variety of ways to suit your specific needs. For instance:
• You can set up one Project to acquire all of the test data generated by a specific operator (example:
“Ken’s Project”).
• You can set up another Project to acquire all of the test data generated by multiple operators from a
specific specimen (example, “Shock Absorber Project”).

Projects make this type of data organization easy. You can configure Projects to organize data around
specific tests, users, applications, or stations. You can think of a Project as a portal to the information flow
of your test system.

About Project Folder Icons

When viewed from the Project Manager application, Project folder and subfolder icons are annotated with
unique indicators to make working with Projects easier.

These icons help you distinguish between:

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 29

Project Manager

• Project folders (which contain a Project Settings file and predefined subfolders), versus normal folders
(which may exist within the Projects directory but do not represent Projects).
• Subfolders which are located in the Project folder, versus subfolders which are located in other locations,
but referenced from the Project folder.
• Subfolders that have intact links in the Project Setting file, versus subfolders that have broken links.

Normal Project folder icon

The Project Manager displays Projects as folder icons annotated with two red bars. This annotation means
the folder contains a Project Settings file and predefined subfolders.
If a folder exists in the top level of the tree view (of the Project Folder Pane) but does not display this
indicator, it is not a Project folder (though it may contain Projects when expanded).

Default Project folder icon

If you assign a Project to be a default Project, the Project Manager displays it as a folder icon annotated
with a red checkmark. This annotation means that Series 793 applications will automatically open this
Project when starting.
If a default Project is not assigned, you will be prompted to select a Project when you start the Station
Builder and Station Manager applications. Applications within Station Manager, such as Basic TestWare
and MultiPurpose TestWare, automatically use the same Project used by the Station Manager application.

Project subfolder indicators

Subfolder icons are annotated to show whether or not they exist directly in the Project folder or are
referenced from other locations.
In the following graphic, “Sample Project 1” is expanded in the Project Manager’s tree view showing
subfolder annotations.

Project Manager View of Sample Project 1

30 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Windows Explorer View of Sample Project 1

In the Sample Project shown above, the BTW, MPT, Profiles, Scope Images, and Shutdown Recorder
folders are located within the Sample Project folder (when viewed from Windows Explorer). The other
folders exist outside of the Projects directory, as specified in the Project Settings file.

Folders located inside the Project folder

A subfolder with this type of annotation means that it is located inside the Project folder. That is, the setting
for the subfolder in the Project Settings file specifies “Project” in its path.
For instance, in the Sample Project shown on the previous page, the Profiles subfolder appears in both
the Project Manager and Windows Explorer views.
Because the Profiles subfolder exists within the Sample Project folder, when you archive the Sample
Project, the files within the Profiles subfolder will also be archived.
Note:
The MPT folder includes this annotation because it contains subfolders that are specified in the
Project Settings file (Procedure and Specimen folders).

Folders located outside of the Projects folder

A subfolder with this type of annotation means that it is located outside of the Project folder. That is, the
setting for the subfolder in the Project Settings file does not specify “Project” in its path. The information
in the referenced subfolder is used to perform activities related to the Project, but is not stored within the
Project.
For instance, in the Sample Project shown on the previous page, the Calibration Files subfolder appears
in the Project Manager view, but not in the Windows Explorer view. This is because the Calibration Files
subfolder does not actually exist in the Projects folder.
So, when you select the Sample Project and perform tests, your system uses calibration information stored
outside of the Sample Project folder.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 31

Project Manager

Important:
By default, the Calibration Files subfolder exists outside of the Project folder, so when you archive
a Project, the files within the Calibration Files subfolder will not be archived.

Folders that cannot be located by the Project Manager

A folder with this type of annotation means the Project Manager cannot find the subfolder specified in the
Project Settings file. In short, it means the link between the Project Settings file and the folder is broken.
This annotation is a useful diagnostic feature that aids in troubleshooting broken links.
Broken links occur when you inadvertently rename or delete Project subfolders using Windows Explorer.
This can also occur if you rename a Project subfolder (or setting) using the Project Manager while editing
the Project Settings file.
In either case, you must make the folder name in the path specified in the Project Settings file match the
actual folder name, or create the folder, to fix the problem.

More about Project Information

By default, a Project’s Calibration Files, Config, and Procedure Templates folders are referenced from
locations outside of the Project folder, as shown below.

Sample Project as displayed in Project Manager

The Sample Project above shows the folders that are referenced by default. The locations of the referenced
folders are shown to the right.

32 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Sample Project in a typical 793 installation as displayed in Windows Explorer

In a typical installation, and for Projects created with the standard Projects template, the Calibration Files,
Config, and Procedure Templates folders exist outside of the Projects folder at the locations shown in the
graphic above.
Benefits of default folder locations in Projects
By default, Projects store information centered around test results (that is, test design files and resulting
test data), and access system and controller information by reference from other locations.
While you can use the Project Manager to change the paths of referenced folders, their default locations
may be beneficial to many installations, as described below.
Calibration Files folder
By default, the Calibration Files folder is installed at the system level (outside of the Projects folder). This
allows multiple Projects to access common calibration information. It also facilitates archiving and backup
functions by limiting the amount of information stored in Projects.
Config folder
By default, the Config folder is installed in a subfolder of the Controller folder. The Controller folder, like
the Calibration Files folder, is installed at the same hierarchical level as the Projects folder.
This organization separates Project information from files and settings that are specific to the controller,
such as the hardware interface file (.hwi) and controller settings files.
Procedure Template folder
By default, the Procedure Template folder is installed in the MPT folder at the system level (outside of the
Projects folder).
This allows multiple Projects to access common MPT procedure templates (default.000). This also facilitates
archiving and back-up functions by limiting the amount of information stored in Projects.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 33

Project Manager

Project File Descriptions

Folder icons within a Project are annotated to indicate where they exist in relation to the Project folder.
This relationship is configured in the Project Settings file.

Description of Folders in a 793 Project

Folder Name File Types in Folder Associated Application

BTW (abbreviation Basic TestWare Test Files (.tst) are command Basic TestWare is a simple test
for Basic TestWare) files you create to perform tests on station design application. It is standard
configurations. with Model 793.00 System Software.

Calibration Files Sensor Calibration Files (.scf) include You typically receive calibration files
information about sensors, such as model, with your test system. You can use
calibration date, calibration type, and the Station Manager application to
conditioner information. edit and create new calibration files.

Config Station Configuration files (.cfg) define the You create Station Configuration
controller resources allocated to a particular files with the Station Builder
station. application. You assign parameters
to Station Configuration files with the
Station Manager application.

Import-Export Files Text Files (.txt) You import and export parameter
files with the Station Manager
You can import selected parameter sets from
application.
an input file (.txt), or export selected
parameters to an export file (.txt).

MPT (abbreviation MultiPurpose TestWare is a

for MultiPurpose sophisticated test design application.
TestWare) It is optional with Model 793.00
System Software.

Procedures (MPT MultiPurpose TestWare Test Procedures

subfolder) (.000) are command files you create to
perform tests on station configurations.

Specimens (MPT Specimen files contain data acquired by data

subfolder) acquisition processes in the test procedure.
They also record test events and information
used to restore the test procedure to the state
it was last run.

Procedure Procedure template files (default.000) define You modify or create additional test
Templates the default settings for the controls in the procedure templates with the
Options Editor of the MultiPurpose TestWare MultiPurpose TestWare application.
application.

34 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Folder Name File Types in Folder Associated Application

Profiles Profile files (.blk), Time History files (.seq, .drv, You create profiles with the Profile
or .tim) contain specifications for custom Editor application (optional), a text
arbitrary waveforms. editor, or a spreadsheet application.
You play out profiles with the
MultiPurpose TestWare Profile
process.
You create Time History files with
MTS RPC software (optional). You
play out Time History files with the
MultiPurpose TestWare Time
History Output process (optional).

Scope Images Scope Image (.emf) You create Scope Image files with
the Station Manager application’s
on-board software Scope.

Shutdown Recorder Shutdown Recorder data files (.log) contain

data captured subsequent to unexpected
shutdowns.

Default File Locations in a Project

Default File Locations in a Project

File Type Default Location in a Typical Series 793 Installation

Basic TestWare files (.tst) C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project

1”)\BTW

Import-Export files (.txt) C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project

1”)\Import-Export files

MultiPurpose TestWare Procedure C:\MTS 793\MPT\Procedure Templates

Templates (default.000)

MultiPurpose TestWare Test Procedures C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project

(.000) 1”)\MPT\Procedures

MultiPurpose TestWare Specimen files C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project

1”)\MPT\Specimens\individual specimen (example: “spec01”)
(Specimen.dat, .log, .mpp, .mps, .prm)

Profile files (.blk) C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project

1”)\Profiles

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 35

Project Manager

File Type Default Location in a Typical Series 793 Installation

Project.793settings C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project 1”)

Scope Image files (.emf) C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project

1”)\Scope Images

Sensor calibration file (.scf) C:\MTS 793\Calibration Files

Station configuration files (.cfg) C:\MTS 793\Controllers\individual Controller folder (example:

“FlexTest GT”)\Config

Shutdown Recorder data (.log) Not associated with project:

C:\MTS 793\Controllers\individual Controller folder (example:
“FlexTest GT”)\Config
Associated with project:
Shutdown Recorder folder on navigation pane of Project
Manager.
Note:
You can purchase a PMC flash module for non-volatile
storage of shutdown data.

About Project Limitations

Station state information is not included
Projects do not include state information about the test system. Because of this, the information in Projects
cannot be used to reconstruct the state of the test system for performing previously run tests in a repeatable
manner.
As noted earlier, Projects specify default locations for the folders they contain. The Config folder (which
contains station configuration files) and the Calibration Files folder (which contains sensor calibration files)
are referenced from locations outside of the Project. While you can change the path of these referenced
folders to be included within specific Projects, the Projects still will not include information that was available
to the tests when they were originally performed. This information, which includes the station parameter
set selected at the time the test was performed on the station configuration, is needed to reconstruct the
test state for repeatability.
Test procedure state information may be included
MultiPurpose TestWare procedures (.000) that have been run do include procedure state and test recovery
information. This information is stored in the associated Specimen.mpp and Specimen.mps files.
Basic Testware procedures (.tst) do not include state or test recovery information.

36 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Working with Project Manager

Project Manager General Considerations

How you use the Project Manager application in your testing routine is up to you—it will vary according to
the needs of your facility and your personal preference. To understand this, and to decide how to use the
Project Manager for yourself, it is useful to see how the Project Manager applies to various facilities that
use Series 793 applications.

Single user, single Project environments

Imagine a facility in which you are the only user, and you use the same Project over and over. In this
environment, you may choose to minimize your interaction with Project Manager by assigning a default
Project. Series 793 applications automatically select default Projects when they start up. (Without a default
Project you are required to select a Project every time you start an application, which is not necessary in
this case.)
Further, if you rarely reconfigure your Project settings, you do not require the functionality of the Project
Manager in your day-to-day testing routine.
If this situation applies to you, you can minimize interaction with the Project Manager simply by assigning
a default Project. Even though you will not be using Project Manager frequently, you will still benefit from
the data organization offered by Projects.
Note:
If you choose to set up your system this way, most of the procedures that follow in this section do
not pertain to you.

Multiple user, multiple Project environments

Imagine a facility in which you and other users share the same test system and use and reconfigure different
Projects frequently. In this environment, the Project Manager application is very beneficial, because it
allows you to:
• Set up custom Projects for everyone.
• Keep the data from individual Projects separate from one another.
• Quickly switch between and reconfigure Projects.

In this scenario, you might begin a typical testing session by starting the Project Manager application,
accessing your Project (and if desired, reconfiguring the Project Settings), and then starting the various
Series 793 applications you need to set up and perform tests from the Project Manager toolbar. At the end
of a session, you might use standard Windows archiving tools to back up the data in your individual Project.
When used in this way, the Project Manager is a portal to individual Projects and a central location for
starting Series 793 applications.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 37

Project Manager

Existing Series 793 users

The Project Manager (and the ability to create Projects) became available in version 4.0 of Model 793.00
System Software. If you are a legacy Series 793 applications user and want to use your system as you
are accustomed, assigning a default Project will allow you to open Series 793 applications the same way
you did before the Project Manager application was available. (Though you will still benefit from the
separation of controller, system, and user information inherent to Projects.)

About Initial Projects

All installations
The installation wizard automatically creates an initial Project (with the default name of Project1), and gives
you the option of assigning it as the default Project.
Note:
If you have never used Project Manager to assign a default Project but one is assigned (you notice
that you are not prompted to select a Project when starting Series 793 applications), this option was
probably selected during installation.

Upgrade installations
For upgrade installations, you have the option of copying all of your existing test design and test data files
from their original locations to the initial Project (the files are copied, not moved, so the original files will
remain in their original locations).
If you do not choose to copy your existing files, your initial Project will not contain test data.
Also, the file structure of Series 793 applications version 4.0 (and later) is different than earlier versions.
Among other things, the default location of test design and test data file is different. If you want your new
test data stored with existing data, you need to change the path specifications during installation, or by
changing the Project Setting file.
Archiving consideration for upgrade installations
If you are using software that automatically archives your test data, change the path used to access your
files as required.
In Series 793 applications version 3.5x or earlier, the default location of test data files is:
• \\MTS software product name (for example, “ftiim”)\MPT\Specimens
• In Series 793 applications version 4.0 or later, the default location of test data files is:
• C:\MTS 793\Projects\individual Project (example:“Project 1”)\MPT\Specimens

How to Start Project Manager

Independently
To start the Project Manager application independent of other Series 793 applications:
Click the Windows Start button, and then point to All Programs. Point to MTS 793 software, and then click
Project Manager.

38 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

From Station Manager

On the Applications menu, click Project Manager.

From Station Desktop Organizer

If a station is currently loaded in the organizer taskbar, click the station button, and point to Start Application
> Project Manager.

About How Projects Are Loaded

Without a default Project assigned

If a default Project is not assigned, the Select Project window will appear when you open the Station Builder
or Station Manager applications from the Windows Start button.
If you start the Station Builder application from the Station Manager Applications menu, it will inherit the
Project used by the Station Manager application, and will not display the Select Project window.
The Basic TestWare and MultiPurpose TestWare applications also inherit the Project used by Station
Manager.

With a default Project assigned

If a default Project is assigned, the default Project will automatically open against the selected application.
The Select Project window will not appear when you start the application.

Identifying the Current Project

The currently selected Project is displayed on the status bar of the Station Manager application.

How to Switch Projects

1. Close the Series 793 application for which you wish to switch Projects (if you want to change the Project
association for MultiPurpose TestWare, Basic TestWare, or Station Desktop Organizer applications,
you must also close Station Manager).
MultiPurpose TestWare, Basic TestWare, and Station Desktop Organizer applications inherit the Project
selected when Station Manager is opened.

2. If a default Project is assigned, you must remove the default assignment before you can open a different
Project against an application. To do this:
a) Start the Project Manager.
b) Right-click the Project icon displayed with a red checkmark.
c) Click Clear Default Project.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 39

Project Manager

Note:
If you want the Project to which you wish to switch to be the new default Project, right-click
its icon and click Set as Default Project.

3. Restart the desired application. If you assigned a new default Project, it will automatically open a against
the application. If a default Project is not assigned, the Select Project window will appear when you
start the application.

How to Start Applications

Using the Applications menu

To start Series 793 applications from the Project Manager, click the Applications menu, and then click the
desired application.

Using the Toolbar

Note:
Toolbar icons will vary according to options included in your Series 793 applications installationl.

Click the desired application icon on the toolbar to launch Series 793 applications as follows

Icon Application

Basic TestWare

MultiPurpose Testware (optional)

Profile Editor (optional)

Project Manager

Station Builder

Station Desktop Organizer

Station Manager

Note:
When you launch Series 793 applications from the Project Manager, the current Project is selected,
which may not be the default Project.

Clicking a file name

In the Project file Pane of the Project Manager window:
Method 1: Double-click a 793 file name (it will open with the associated Series 793 application).

40 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Method 2: Right-click a 793 file name and then click Open or Open With from the menu.

How to Create a New Project

1. On the File menu, click New Project. The New Project wizard will appear.
2. Choose a template.
By default the Standard Project template is selected. If desired, choose other templates as available
in Templates tab.
If you wish to use an existing Project as a template, click the Existing Project tab, and browse to located
the desired Project.

3. In the Project Name box, enter a name as desired.

4. In the Location box, enter a path or browse to the desired location.
5. If you want your new Project to be the default Project, select the Set as Default Project check box. The
default Project will automatically load into Series 793 applications when you start them.
6. Click Next> to customize Project settings, or Finish to create the Project with the selected template
settings.

Editing Project Settings

Good Practice for Editing Project Settings

Do not edit Projects that are open against applications. Any changes you make to Projects that are open
against applications may not take effect until the Project is closed and reopened against the application.
This is because when a Project is initially opened against an application, the application reads the Project
Settings initially, and then again at intervals that are dependent on the application.
Because of this, it is good practice to edit Project Settings when the Project is not open against an
application.

Edit Project Settings

1. Start Project Manager.
2. Select a Project that is not open against an Series 793 application.
3. On the Tools menu, click Project Settings.
4. Evaluate the paths and settings and change as desired.

About Changing Folder Paths

If you change the path of a folder, the Project Manager application creates a new empty folder in the
specified location. The existing folder is not moved, nor are its contents moved or copied to the new folder.
If you want some or all of the contents of the existing folder placed in the new folder, you need to copy or
move the files as desired.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 41

Project Manager

Note:
To facilitate moving and copying files, right-click the new folder in the application’s Project Folder
pane, and then click Explore. Windows Explorer will open and display the same folder in the file
structure.

Assigning and Clearing Project Defaults

About Default Projects

Series 793 applications automatically open default Projects when they start up. Because of this, assigning
the default status to a Project that you intend to use frequently will streamline using Series 793 applications.
Default Project icons are annotated with checkmarks when viewed in the Project Manager application.

Normal Project folder icons have two red bars.

How to Assign a Default Project

To assign the default status to a Project:
Method 1
• Start Project Manager to display the main window.
• On the Project Folder Pane, click the desired Project Folder.
• Click the Default Project button on the toolbar (it looks like the Default Project folder icon shown above).

Method 2
• Start Project Manager to display the main window.
• On the Project Folder Pane, right-click the desired Project Folder and then click Set as Default Project.

Method 3
This method describes how to assign a default Project while opening an existing or creating a new Project.
• Start Project Manager to display the main window.
• On the menu bar, click File and then:
— - Click New Project to display the New Project window, or
— - Click Open to display the Select Folder or Project window.

• Click Set as Default Project while opening or creating a Project.

Clearing a Default Project

1. Start Project Manager.

42 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

2. On the Project Folder Pane, right-click any Project Folder and then click Clear Default Project.

About Templates
A Project template provides a quick way to create a new project with predetermined file and folder
associations.

Using the Standard Project template

The Project Manager is equipped with a Standard Project template (displayed in the New Project window).
The Standard Project template uses the default file and folder associations shown throughout this manual.
Important:
Do not delete the Standard Project template. Also, MTS recommends that you do not modify the
Standard Project template.

If you change the Standard Project template, anyone that creates a new Project created with the Standard
Project template inherits these changes—whether they know about them or not. Because of this, MTS
recommends that you create additional templates or use an existing Project as a template rather than
modifying the Standard Project template.

Creating additional templates

You can save any Project to the Project Templates folder (default location is C:\MTS 793\Project Templates)
to make a new template. Additional templates appear along with the Standard Project template in the
Template tab of the New Project window.

Using an existing Project as a template

You can use an existing Project as a “single use” template instead of the templates in the Template tab
of the New Project Window. To do this, simply select the Existing Projects tab on the New Project Window
and select the desired Project. Your new Project will inherit the selected Project’s file and folder associations.

Controls and Displays

Main Window Access

To access the main window:
• Click the Windows Start button, and then point to Programs. Point to MTS 793 Software, and then click
Project Manager, or
• On the Application menu of the Station Manager application, click Project Manager.

Main Window Description

When you start the Project Manager application from Station Manager, the Project Manager main window
opens with the current Project selected in the Project Folder Panel.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 43

Project Manager

Project Manager Main Window

Callout Item Description

1 Menu bar Contains commands for performing tasks with the Project
Manager.

2 Toolbar Provides quick access to frequently used commands on the

menu bar.

3 Project folder pane Displays Project folders. Project folder icons are annotated
to help you identify Projects folders from normal folders, and
to show the relationship between a Project’s subfolders and
the Project settings file.

4 File pane Displays the files in the folder selected in the Project folder
pane. If a Project’s subfolder is selected, the files may be

44 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Callout Item Description

stored within the Project folder or referenced from another

location.

5 Project file viewer Displays the content of the selected file in the Project file
pane. This allows you to preview Project files without opening
other Series 793 applications.
In this example, the content of the selected configuration file
(“ftse.cfg”) is displayed in the Project file viewer.
Note:
To edit files, you must open them with their associated
applications.

6 Default Project status Displays the name of the assigned Default Project, if any.

7 Content of currently
selected folder

Project Manager Menu Bar

The menu bar displays commands for managing the Project Manager application.
Note:
The Applications menu may display additional optional applications.

Project Manager Menu Bar

Item Description

File Includes controls to create new and edit existing Projects, to close and
delete the selected Project, and to quit the application.

New Project... Displays the New Project window.

Open Displays the Open Project window.

Close Closes the current Project.

Delete Project... Deletes the selected Project.

Exit Quits the Project Manager application.

Applications Includes controls to start the selected Series 793 application.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 45

Project Manager

Item Description

View Includes controls to display or hide the toolbar and status bar, and a control
to update the display with current information.

Tools Includes controls to adjust Project and System Settings.

Project Settings... Displays the Project Settings window.

Controller Settings... Displays the Controller Settings window.

System Settings... Displays the System Settings window.

Help Includes controls to display version information and to display electronic

documentation.

Project Manager Toolbar

The toolbar contains frequently used menu bar commands.
Note:
Toolbar icons vary according to options included in your Series 793 applications installation.

Callout Description

1 Set Default Project

2 Create New Project

3 Open Existing Project

4 Project Settings

46 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Callout Description

5 Start Basic TestWare

6 Start MultiPurpose TestWare

7 Start Profile Editor

8 Start Project Manager

9 Start Station Builder

10 Start Desktop Organizer

11 Start Station Manager

12 Display Electronic Documentation

New Project Window

Access
Project Manager toolbar >

or
On the File menu, click New.

Description
Use the New Project window to create new Projects. This window works like a wizard to direct you through
the various steps involved in creating a new Project.

New Project Window

Item Description

Template tab Lists the available templates for Projects. The Project Manager is
equipped with the standard Project template, which is used by default
to create new Projects.

Existing Project tab Displays existing Projects which may be used as templates to create
new Projects.

Project Name Text box in which you enter a unique name for the new Project.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 47

Project Manager

Item Description

Location Displays where the new Project will be located. By default this
location is:
C:\MTS 793\Projects

Set as Default Project Sets the new Project as the default Project. Series 793 applications
automatically open default Projects when they start up.

Back, Next, Finish Directs the creation of the new Project (wizard controls).
At a minimum, you must enter a unique Project name and click Finish
to create a new Project. This results in a Project that has identical
associations to the selected template.
If you want to customize the new Project by changing some of the
settings copied from the selected template (or from an existing
Project that you have selected as a template), click Next and adjust
the Project settings as desired, and then click Finish.

Open Folder or Project/Select Project Window

Note:
When you open a Project from the Project manager application, this window is labeled “Open Folder
or Project”. When you start a Series 793 application that requires you to select a Project, this window
is labeled “Select Project”.

Project Manager access

Project Manager toolbar >

or:
On the File menu, click Open.

Series 793 application access

Start a Series 793 application that requires a Project, in which a default Project has not been assigned.

Description
Use this window to locate and open existing Projects.

48 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Open Folder or Project/Select Project Window

Item Description

Look in Allows you to browse for Projects and folders that contain Projects.

Folder Name Provides a space for you to type the name of the Project you to want to
open. To quickly find a Project you have previously opened, click the Project
name in the drop-down list.

Open Opens the selected Project and displays its contents in the Project
Manager’s Project Folder pane.

Expand (Select Project Allows you to expand any folder that is not a Project folder (Project folders
window only) display special icons).

Project Home Returns the Projects browser to the Projects folder.

New Project Opens the New Project window.

Set as Default Project Sets the selected Project as the default Project.

Project Settings Window

Access
On the Tools menu, click Project Settings.

Description
Use this window to modify the Project Settings file of the selected Project. The Project Settings file
determines the organization and flow of data within a Project by mapping the data paths for all of the
Project’s subfolders. It also includes settings associated with specific Series 793 applications.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 49

Project Manager

Note:
To understand the “<Controller>”, “<System>”, and “<Project>” references displayed in this window,
see “Installed 739 Files” in the MTS Series 793 Controller Overview manual (part number
100-162-928).

Project Settings Window.

Callout Item Description

1 Category pane Displays the Series 793 applications for which you may
adjust Project settings.

2 Folders and values pane Displays the folders (or files) within the current Project
that pertain to the selected application, and their current
values.

3 Edit Value Control Displays the selected folder’s (or file’s) current value and
allows you to change it by browsing for another file, or
selecting from a dropdown menu.

4 Setting description pane Displays information pertaining to the selected folder (or
file).

50 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

Controller Settings Window

Access
On the Tools menu, click Controller Settings.

Description
Use this window to change the .hwi file in the Controller Settings file.
Hwi files are text files that define the hardware resources available to your controller. You use the Station
Builder application to create Station Configuration files (.cfg) based on the hardware resources in the
specified .hwi file.
Likewise, the System Loader application loads the system with the hardware resources in the specified
.hwi file.
The Controller Settings File resides in the controller directory associated with the selected Project.
Note:
To understand the “<Controller>”, “<System>”, and “<Project>” references displayed in this window,
see “Installed 739 Files” in the MTS Series 793 Controller Overview manual (part number
100-162-928).

Callout Description

1 Category Pane

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 51

Project Manager

Callout Description

2 Folders and Values Pane

3 Edit Value Control

4 Setting Description Pane

To find available .hwi files

Hwi files are located in the selected controller directory, displayed toward the top of the window (C:\MTS
793\Controller\controller name). If you want to change the .hwi file with this setting, use the dropdown
menu to find the desired .hwi file, or browse to the controller directory to review the available .hwi file
names.

About changing .hwi files

It is important to keep in mind that Station Configuration files are based on the hardware content of their
associated .hwi files. If you select an .hwi file in your controller directory that has different hardware content
(than the .hwi file used to create your existing Station Configuration files), you may not be able to open
your existing Station Configuration files.

Multiple .hwi files

Because of hardware compatibility issues, there is typically only one .hwi file per controller directory.
However, .hwi file content includes settings that affect hardware behavior without changing hardware
content. For instance, you can set system rate and choose whether a particular conditioner is an AC
conditioner or DC conditioner. Because of this, some users may create multiple .hwi files for a controller
directory, each having identical hardware content but different hardware settings. In this case, any of the
.hwi files selected will be compatible with existing Station Configuration files.

Controller Settings Window

Item Description

Category pane Displays the function for which you may adjust Controller settings.

Folders and values pane Displays the folders (or files) within the current Project that pertain to
the function, and their current values.

Edit value control Displays the selected folder’s (or file’s) current value and allows you to
change it.

Setting description pane Displays information pertaining to the selected folder (or file).

52 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Project Manager

System Settings Window

Access
On the Tools menu, click System Settings.

Description
System settings are highly technical controls and options that affect system and application behavior.
System settings are not intended to be changed frequently. Because of this, system settings are not like
other user controls included in 793 applications.

System Settings Window

Callout Item Description

1 Category pane Displays the Series 793 applications for which you may adjust
system settings.

2 Settings and values Displays the settings that pertain to the selected application and
pane their current values.

3 Edit value control Displays the selected setting’s current value and allows you to
change it.

4 Setting description pane Displays information pertaining to the selected setting.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 53

Station Builder
Topics:

• About the Station Builder Application................................................................................................56

• About Hardware Interface Files.........................................................................................................56
• About Station Configurations.............................................................................................................56
• About Station Configuration Files......................................................................................................58
• How to Start Station Builder..............................................................................................................58
• How to Create a Station Configuration File.......................................................................................59
• Station Builder Controls and Displays...............................................................................................59
• Controller Resources.........................................................................................................................65
• About Station Resources...................................................................................................................77
• Channels...........................................................................................................................................78
• Control Modes...................................................................................................................................88
• Signal Stabilization............................................................................................................................99
• Channel Inputs................................................................................................................................100
• External Command Inputs...............................................................................................................101
• Auxiliary Inputs................................................................................................................................102
• Readouts.........................................................................................................................................103
• Digital Inputs....................................................................................................................................103
• Digital Outputs.................................................................................................................................104
• Calculated Resources.....................................................................................................................105
• Remote Setpoints............................................................................................................................107
• Station Configuration Files..............................................................................................................107

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 55

Station Builder

About the Station Builder Application

You use the Station Builder application to design station configurations. With the Station Builder application,
you can allocate controller hardware resources, such as valve drivers, conditioners, and digital inputs to
station configuration files.
You define parameters (such as gain settings and polarity) for the resources in station configuration files
with the Station Manager application.
Note:
Access to the Station Builder application requires Configuration access level.

About Hardware Interface Files

The controller hardware resources that appear in the resource lists in the Station Builder application are
determined by the hardware interface file (or .hwi file) installed with your system software. Controller
hardware resources generally refer to the internal components installed in your controller’s chassis, such
as the mezzanine cards installed on the I/O Carrier boards that perform sensor conditioning, valve driving,
analog-to-digital signal conversion, and digital-to-analog signal conversion.
The .hwi file defines various attributes of each component, including the slot in the controller’s chassis in
which it is installed, and the rear-panel connector through which it can be accessed.

Initial .hwi file

The .hwi file associated with a given controller is typically created at MTS according to the hardware
resources included with the controller. It may be necessary to edit this file if hardware resources are added,
removed, or repositioned in the controller chassis.
For detailed information on the .hwi file installed in your Controller, see the Hwi File Editor section of the
MTS Series 793 Utility Software manual (part number 100-147-132).

About Station Configurations

With the Station Builder application, you can allocate all or a portion of your controller’s hardware resources
to create station configuration files.
Initial station configuration
MTS typically installs Series 793 applications for you and supplies your controller with a station configuration
file. You use the Station Builder application to modify your initial station configuration file when replacing
or adding resources, and to create additional station configuration files.

56 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Relationship of Controller Hardware Resources and Series 793 Applications and Files

Callout Description

1 Controller hardware resources are the physical components in the controller

chassis.

2 The Hardware Interface file (.hwi) represents all of the hardware resources
available to your test system

3 A Station Config file (.cfg) may represent all or only a portion of the total
hardware resources available in the Hardware Interface file.

4 Hwi File Editor application

5 Hardware Interface file

6 Station Builder application

7 Station Config file 1

8 Station Config file 2

9 Station Config file 3

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 57

Station Builder

About Station Configuration Files

Default station configuration file locations

In Series 793 applications version 4.0 or later, the default location of station configuration files is:
C:\<install folder>\Controller\<controller name>\config
Example:
C:\MTS 793\Controller\FTGT\config

Caution:
Abnormal system shutdown can corrupt .cfg files
Corrupted .cfg files cannot be used in the Station Manager or Station Builder applications.
Ensure that all .cfg files are properly backed up.

Station configurations in Projects

A Project is a folder that contains or references files that are used and generated by Series 793 applications.
When you start the Station Builder application, you select a Project. The current Project determines the
location of station configuration files.
By default, Projects do not contain station configurations directly, but reference their location in the Controller
subdirectory on disk.
You can use the Project Manager application to edit the Project Settings file to change the location of
station configuration files.

How to Start Station Builder

Use one of the following methods to start the Station Builder application:
Note:
Access to the Station Builder application requires Configuration access level.

• On the Project Manager toolbar, click the Station Builder icon, or from the Applications menu, click
Station Builder.
• On the Station Manager Applications menu, click Station Builder.
• From the Station Desktop Organizer Start Applications menu, click Station Builder.
• From the desktop, click Start > Programs > MTS controller product name (for example, “MTS FlexTest
GT”) > Station Builder.

58 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

When you start the Station Builder application, the Select Project window appears:
1. Select a Project as desired and click Open, or click New Project and perform the New Project wizard.
Note:
If the Select Project window does not appear, a default Project is assigned and opens
automatically. You assign default Projects with the Project Manager application.

2. If more than one controller is detected, the Controller Selection window appears. Select the desired
controller.
3. The Open Configuration window appears. Select the desired station configuration, or click Cancel to
open a new, untitled station configuration.

How to Create a Station Configuration File

You create station configuration files by defining station resources from the pool of system resources listed
in the hardware interface file associated with the controller in the current Project. Once you have allocated
the resources you need, you save your configuration to a station configuration file.
The complexity of the station configuration files you create depends on the type of resources that are
necessary to configure your system. For example, if you want to provide simple programming to an external
controller, you may only need to allocate a single analog output resource.
However, if you want to maintain closed-loop control on one or more channels, you probably need to
allocate resources for multiple outgoing program signals, multiple incoming feedback signals, a hydraulic
power source, auxiliary inputs, and readouts.
Note:
The Transformations station resource is specialized and pertains only to systems equipped with
optional Model 793.15 Degree of Freedom (DOF) software.

Station Builder Controls and Displays

About the Station Builder Main Window

With the Station Builder window controls you can allocate hardware resources such as valve drivers,
conditioners, analog I/O, digital I/O, and hydraulic control resources to create station resources.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 59

Station Builder

Callout Descriptions

1 Navigation Pane

2 Menu Bar

3 Toolbar

4 Resource List

5 Information pane identifies conditioner as AC or DC

6 Restrict Application Access checkbox-this control allows you to have

the application restrict the user from directly accessing the resource.

60 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Station Builder Toolbar

Callout Description

1 Open

2 Save

3 Print Station

4 Print Preview

5 Display System Resource Window

6 Help

System Resources Window

This window displays a tree view of all system resources.
Access
File > System Resources

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 61

Station Builder

Common Controls
This window assigns the resources that produce dual compensation signals.

Common Window Controls

Item Description

Display name The name used for display purposes. Names can have up to 30
characters.

Internal name The name used for internal purposes. Names can have up to 30
characters.

Resource Identifies the feedback signal going to the compensator.

Allocates a resource from the selected resource list to the current

control.

Returns the resource to the Available Signals list.

Swaps the current resource with the item highlighted in the Available
Signals list.

Moves up or down in the Compensation Modes list, allowing you to

select one of the defined compensation modes.

Available Signals Lists signals that can be selected to supply feedback to the
compensator.

Dimension Selects the physical property you wish to measure.

Display Units Selects the display units used with the Dimension selection.

Channels Panel
Access
Navigation pane > Channels
This panel assigns resources whose signals create control channels.

Channels Panel

Item Description

Type Selects the channel type.

62 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Item Description

Prefix signal names with For single-channel stations: Clearing this check box removes the channel
channel name name from the display name of all signals on the channel.
The default setting for this signal name attribute is enabled.
For multiple-channel stations: Clearing this check box removes the channel
name from the display name of all feedback and mode-specific signals.
Note:
For multiple-channel stations, the channel prefix is not removed
from channel-specific signals.

Output Resources Lists the resources you can allocate for the channel’s output.
Note:
The Station tab in the resource lists and the Transformations item
in the Navigation pane apply only to Degree of Freedom (DOF)
Transformations.

Hardware Tab Lists hardware resources available in the controller chassis that can be
allocated to channel outputs.

Station Tab List transformations for systems that are equipped with optional Model
793.15 Degree of Freedom Control software.

Input Resources This tab specifies an external command source for the channel.
Lists the input resource you can allocate for control modes and auxiliary
inputs.

Hardware Tab Lists hardware resources available in the controller chassis that can be
allocated to channel inputs, control modes, or external command.
The text box below this pane identifies selected conditioners as AC or DC.

Station Tab Lists station resources available that can be allocated to channel inputs,
control modes, or external command.

Station Panel
Access
Station Builder application Navigation Pane > Station name

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 63

Station Builder

The Station Panel allows you to define the station interlock chain and handset. Interlocks and handsets
specified in the HWI file appear in the related dropdown lists on this panel. The number of the interlock
selected here will appear in the Station Controls panel of the Station Manager application.
When handset is selected here, it is automatically selected in the Station Manager application Handset
Options window and cannot be changed.
When the handset selection is None, the handset selection can be changed in the Station Manager
application Handset Options window.
The Equipment Type field is used by MTS Echo to identify the frame (equipment) type. It is not used or
visible anywhere else in the MTS 793 software.

General Tab
This tab specifies the general characteristics of a control channel.
Access
Navigation pane > Channels > Channels panel > General tab

Item Description

Power Specifies the channel’s power source.

Update Rate Specifies the channel’s update rate.

Compensators Makes selected compensation available on the channel. This is an option

and these controls may not be available on your system.

64 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Callout Description

1 Tab for a Type selection of: • Program and Control • Program w/ Feedback •
Command Plus Error

2 Tab for a Type selection of: • Program Only

Controller Resources

About Controller Resources

Hardware resources
Hardware resources are the components in the controller that you can select for your station configuration.
For example, you may choose a valve driver resource by selecting the 494.16 VD/DUC S2-J1B resource
listed in the Hardware Output Resources list.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 65

Station Builder

Callout Description

1 Hardware Output Resources

2 Hardware Input Resources

Hardware resources include:

• Hardware Output Resources such as valve drivers and high-level digital-to-analog converters, and
• Hardware Input Resources, such as sensor conditioners and analog-to-digital converters.

Virtual output and calculated input resources

In addition to the normal input resources installed in your controller, you can also assign calculated inputs
to be used as control feedback, as auxiliary inputs, and digital inputs/outputs.
Likewise, in addition to normal output resources installed in your controller, you can also assign virtual
outputs to drive output resources.

About Station Resources

In general, all of the resources visible in the navigation pane and in the input and output resource lists are
“station resources.” That is, they may all be used to create station configuration files.

66 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

The resources in the Station tab of the Input Resources and Output Resources lists, however, are unique
types of station resources.

Callout Description

1 Station Output Resources (pertains only to systems that use

Transformations)

2 Station Input Resources

Station input resources

Station input resources are inputs that have been defined for a specific channel or auxiliary input. To create
a station input resource you must perform one of the following:
• Allocate hardware input resources to create control modes for a channel (using the Control Modes tab
on the Channels panel)
• Allocate hardware input resources to create inputs for a channel (using the Inputs tab on the Channels
panel)

Allocate hardware input resources for an auxiliary input (using the controls on the Auxiliary Inputs panel)

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 67

Station Builder

How to Reuse Station Input Resources Associated with Specific

Channels
You can reuse the station input resources associated with a specific channel to create additional control
modes for that channel.
Note:
You cannot use station input resources associated with one channel to create control modes for
other channels.

For example, suppose you have created force and displacement control modes for a channel named “Left
Front” by allocating hardware input resources to measure force and displacement (using the Control Modes
tab on the Channels panel).
Next, you want to create a Channel Limited Channel control mode in which displacement is limited by
force.
To do this, you would:
1. Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list on the Channels panel.
2. Select displacement (Left Front > Disp) as the base control mode.
3. Select Channel Limited Channel for control mode Type.
4. Select force (Left Front > Force) as the limiting control mode.
To see how these steps affect the Station Builder main display, review the station configuration example
that follows.

68 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Creating a Channel Limited Channel Control Mode with Station Input Resources

Callout Description

1 Channel-Limited-Channel in which displacement is limited by force

2 Station Input Resources: -Ch 1 > Displacement (base) -Ch 1 >

Force (limiting)

Station Resources In DOF Systems

Specific types of vehicle testing systems (MAST) use station input and output transformation resources.
These systems require optional Model 793.15 Degree of Freedom (DOF) software, and may also be
equipped with optional Model 793.16 (TVC) software.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 69

Station Builder

Note:
Transformation resources always display their internal names when used to support channels or
control modes. To aid resource mapping in the main Station Builder display, enable (check) the
Show internal names control.

About Creating Multibox Configurations

Once you have used the Controller Management Tool (CMT) application to register and configure the
multibox system and the Hwi Editor application to create .hwi files for each box, you can use the Station
Builder application to create the configurations required for your test.
Multibox configurations are created in the same manner as single-box systems with the following exceptions:
• The resources shown in the Station Builder application are grouped by the box where they are installed.
• All the hardware resources used in a control channel must reside in the same box.
Important:
Control channels that use hardware resources from one box cannot include hardware resources
from another box.

In the graphic below, resources are grouped for each box and displayed in a tree view

70 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Hardware Output Resources

You create Channels, Readouts, Digital Outputs, and Calculated Outputs (station resources in the navigation
pane) by selecting resources in the associated Output Hardware Resources lists.

Resource type Example Description

Valve Drivers 493.14 2SVD S3-J4 Valve drivers are internal electronic modules that control
servovalves.
493.15 3SVD S3-J5
You can used valve driver resources to create Channels
494.16 2SVD S5-J1B
and Calculated Outputs.
494.16 3SVD S5-J1A

D/A Outputs 494.41 D/A 1 Analog outputs are connectors located on the chassis
rear panel. Analog output resources can be used to send
493.46 D/A 1 S6-J13
commands to an external valve driver or external
494.46 D/A 1 S4-J3A controller (±10 volts output), or to make controller signals
available for monitoring by external readout devices,
Wago D/A 1-1
such as scope and meters.
Monitor 1 (Model 493.42
You can use analog output resources to create Channels,
System I/O board)
Readouts, and Calculated Outputs.
Anlg Out (Model 493.42
System I/O board)

Digital Outputs 493.72 DO T1-J4 You can use digital output resources to create Digital
Outputs.
Wago DO 1-1
Dig Out 1 (Model 493.42
and Model 494.41 and
Model 494.44 System I/O
boards)

Temperature Temp Control 1-1 Output You can use temperature control resources to create
Control Channels and Calculated Outputs.

Calculated Output <<Virtual Output>> Calculated outputs are values generated by user-defined
algebraic formulas.
You can use calculated output resources to create
Channels, Digital Outputs, and Calculated Outputs.

Hardware Input Resources

You create Channels, Readouts, Digital Inputs, and Calculated Inputs (station resources in the navigation
pane) by selecting resources in the associated Input Hardware Resources.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 71

Station Builder

Resource Type Examples Description

Digital Universal 493.21 DUC S3-J5 Digital universal conditioners are internal electronic
Conditioners modules that condition transducer output.
493.21B DUC S3-J7
(DUC)
You can use digital universal conditioner resources to
493.25 DUC S12-J-4
create inputs and control modes for Channels and inputs
494.16 DUC S4-J1A for Auxiliary Inputs.
494.21 DUC S6-J2A
494.25 DUC S6-J3A
494.26 DUC S4-J2A

A/D Inputs 494.45 A/D 1 S4-J4A Analog inputs are typically connectors located on the
chassis rear panel. Analog input resources can be used
493.45 A/D 1 S7-J11
to receive commands from external controllers (±10 volts
493.57 A/D 1 S7-J15 output).
Wago A/D 1-1 You can use analog input resources to create inputs and
control modes for Channels and inputs for Auxiliary Inputs.

Digital Inputs 493.72 DI T1-J3 You can use digital input resources to create Digital Inputs
and to support the enable switch of Remote Setpoints.
Wago DI 1-1

Encoder and 493.47 Encoder S12-J7 You can use encoder and sonic transducer conditioner
Sonic Transducer resources to create inputs and control modes for Channels,
493.59-1 U2 Absolute 1
Conditioners and inputs for Auxiliary Inputs and Remote Setpoints.
S7-J17
Note:
493.59-1 U2 Incremental
1 S7-J11 Absolute type encoder and Temposonics (sonic)
transducer conditioners are not available for Remote
493.59-1 U2 Temposonics
Setpoints.
III 1 S7-J13
494.47 Encoder S6-J2A
494.47 Encoder Velocity
S6-J2A

Temperature Temp Control 1-1 Input You can use temperature control resources to create inputs
Control and control modes for Channels and inputs for Auxiliary
Inputs.

Calculated Inputs <<Calculated Input>> Calculated inputs are values generated by user-defined
algebraic formulas.
You can use calculated inputs to create inputs and control
modes for Channels, inputs for Auxiliary Inputs, and Digital
Inputs, and the enable switch of Remote Setpoints.

72 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Resource Syntax
The syntax of the resource names in the hardware input and output resource lists reveal useful information
about the resources.
For example, a Model 494.25 Digital Universal Conditioner (DUC) mezzanine card may be displayed in
the Hardware Input Resource lists as “494.25 DUC S4-J3A”.
In this case:
• “494.25” is the MTS Model number of the associated physical resource.
• “DUC” is the type of resource, which is in this instance is a digital universal conditioner.
• “S4” is the slot number in which the resource is installed in the controller chassis.
• “J3A” is the connector label associated with the resource.

Hardware Resource Syntax Models

Hardware Type Example Syntax*/Comment

Mezzanine Card 494.25 DUC S4-J3A Syntax: <model> <type> <slot n> - <connector n>
This syntax is used for all of the mezzanine cards
available for MTS I/O carrier boards.

Models 493.42 and Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Anlg Syntax: connector label

494.41 System I/O Out (Model 493.42
Board System I/O Board only)

Transition Board 493.72 DO T1-J4 Syntax: <model> <type n> <transition n> - <connector
n>

Temperature Control Temp Control 1-4-Input Syntax: <name> <channel n> - <temperature controller
n or device n> - <type>
Signal type may be input or output.

Modbus Device Wago DI 1-1 Syntax: <name> <type> <channel n> - <device n>
“Wago” refers to the name of the manufacturer of the
Modbus Device.

*Explanation of resource types:

2SVD = Two-Stage Servovalve
3SVD = Three-Stage Servovalve
DUC = Digital Universal Conditioner
DI = Digital Input
DO = Digital Output

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 73

Station Builder

A/D = Analog-to-Digital Converter

D/A = Digital-to-Analog Converter

Other Resource Syntax Models

Resource Type Syntax Comment

Virtual Output <<Virtual Output>> Used to create a “virtual channel.” A virtual channel’s
output is not defined by an equation or assigned to
hardware, but its output is used by a calculated output
resource that may be used to drive hardware such as
a servovalve.

Calculated Input <<Calculated Input>> Used to create a calculated analog input for control
feedback or data acquisition. Calculated input values
are determined by applying a user-defined mathematical
equation to the specified signal values.

Unassigned <<Unassigned>> Used to identify unavailable resources.

About the Model 494.16 VD/DUC Mezzanine Card

The Model 494.16 VD/DUC mezzanine card includes a valve driver and a digital universal conditioner
resource on the same card. You can configure the resources in this card in different combinations with the
Hwi File Editor. These combinations are reflected in the associated resource labels in the Station Builder
and the Station Manager applications.
You can use the Hwi File Editor to configure the resources in one of two combinations:
• Use all of the resources to create a three-stage valve driver (the DUC is used to condition the LVDT of
the third stage of the servovalve),
• Split the resources into a two-stage valve driver and an independent DUC.

For example, suppose you use the Hwi File Editor to configure this type of mezzanine card type as a “DUC
and 2SVD,” with the DUC output available at S4-J1A and the two-stage valve driver output available at
S4-J1B.
In this case, the resources appear as follows in the Station Builder application:
• The two-stage valve driver appears in the Hardware Output Resources list as “494.16 2SVD S4-J1B”.
• The independent DUC appears in the Hardware Input Resources list as “494.16 DUC S4-J1A”.

Likewise, the resources appear in as follows in the Station Manager application:

• The two-stage valve driver appears in the Channel Drive window as “494.16 2 Stage Valve Driver”.
• The independent DUC appears in the Channel Inputs Signal window as “494.16 DC Conditioner”.

74 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

How to Allocate Resources

1. In the Hardware tab of the Output Resources list, select the hardware resource you want to allocate
and then click +.
Note:
The Station tab of the Output Resources list pertains only to systems that use Transformations
(DOF systems).

2. In the Display name box, change the resource name as desired.

Note:
It is good practice to keep your channel resource names short, because long names may not be
visible in all windows.

3. In the Internal name box, type or select an internal name for the channel resource.

About Display and Internal Names

The Display name is the name of the channel resource as you would like it to appear in the navigation
pane. Typically, this name is changed to describe a test channel more precisely.
For example, if you have a system with left and right front and rear channels, you may choose to assign
those names to the associated valve driver resources, as shown.

The Internal name is the channel resource name used internally by other software applications for channel
and signal mapping. In most cases, you should not change the default internal name. This allows better
portability of the station configuration to other systems, especially when assigning multilingual display
names.
Note:
If you change the internal name, the display name is not affected unless the internal and display
names are the same.

In the Station Configuration window you can select Show internal names to replace Display names with
Internal names in the navigation pane and station resource lists.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 75

Station Builder

Naming Considerations for External Commands

In Series 793 applications version 5.0 and later, external command resources are automatically distributed
to their associated channel input lists in the Station Manager application.
For example, suppose you allocate an external command resource to a channel named “Chan 1” in the
Station Builder application. The result is that the external command resource will be available in “Chan 1”
input lists in the Station Manager application.
In earlier versions, external command resources were not prefixed with their channel name. If you wanted
an external command resource to appear in the signal lists associated with a channel, you had to manually
add the channel prefix to the external command resource name.
In Series 793 applications version 5.0 and later, if you open a station configuration created with an earlier
version that contains an external command resource, its name will appear as follows:
• If it has already been prefixed with the channel name, it will remain as is, and will appear in the associated
channel lists in the Station Manager application.
• If it has not been prefixed the channel name, the application will prefix the signal name with a special
marker “<->”. External command resources with this marker will be available in the Station Manager
Station Setup window as Auxiliary Inputs, and in the Scope and Meters as “Others”.
Note:
If you change the name of an external command resource name that includes the marker (“<->”),
you will have to reassign sensor calibration information to the resource in the Station Manager
application.

Naming Considerations for Auxiliary Inputs

For all versions of Series 793 applications, any resource you allocate to an auxiliary input is labeled “Aux
Input n,” by default, and will not appear in channel lists in the Station Manager application.
When creating new station configurations, it is good practice to allocate input resources that you want to
appear with a specific channel by using the associated channel’s Inputs tab (instead of allocating them to
Auxiliary Inputs). The signals associated with any resource you allocate to a channel input in the Station
Builder application will appear in the associated signal lists in the Station Manager application.
It is possible to add a channel name prefix to an auxiliary input in Station Builder to cause it to appear in
the associated signal lists in Station Manager.
When you do this, the resource will appear as follows:
• In the Station Builder navigation pane, it will appear as an Auxiliary Input.
• In the Station Manager Station Setup window, it will appear as an input to the associated channel (and
will be absent from Auxiliary Inputs).

76 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

About Station Resources

In general, all of the resources visible in the navigation pane and in the input and output resource lists are
“station resources.” That is, they may all be used to create station configuration files.
The resources in the Station tab of the Input Resources and Output Resources lists, however, are unique
types of station resources.

Callout Description

1 Station Output Resources (pertains only to systems that use

Transformations)

2 Station Input Resources

Station input resources

Station input resources are inputs that have been defined for a specific channel or auxiliary input. To create
a station input resource you must perform one of the following:

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 77

Station Builder

• Allocate hardware input resources to create control modes for a channel (using the Control Modes tab
on the Channels panel)
• Allocate hardware input resources to create inputs for a channel (using the Inputs tab on the Channels
panel)

Allocate hardware input resources for an auxiliary input (using the controls on the Auxiliary Inputs panel)

Channels

About Channels
Note:
FlexTest SE Controllers that operate in the standalone mode support only Program and Control
type Channels.

You use channels to send commands to external servovalves and controllers. The system software supports
the following types of channels:
• Program and Control
• Program with Feedback
• Program-Only (requires an analog output resource)
Note:
To create a Program-Only channel, you must select an Analog Output resource from the Hardware
tab of the Output Resources list. Example: 494.46 D/A 7 S8-J2B.

• Three Variable Control (optional).

Program and control channels

Program and control channels are used to maintain closed-loop control of an actuator. This channel type
is selected automatically when you allocate a valve driver resource.

78 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Note:
FlexTest II CTM and TestStar IIs AP programmers do not typically use Program and Control channels.

Callout Description

1 Controller

2 Command

3 PIDF

4 Valve Driver

5 Conditioner

6 Drive

7 Feedback

8 Load Frame/Actuator

Program with feedback channels

Program with feedback channels are used to program external controllers while monitoring feedback for
command compensation or data acquisition. In this channel configuration, the external controller maintains
closed-loop control.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 79

Station Builder

Callout Description

1 Controller

2 Command

3 Feedback

4 External Controller

5 PID

6 Drive

Program only channels

Program only channels are used to send programming to an external controller. In this channel configuration,
the external controller maintains closed-loop control.

Callout Description

1 Controller

2 Command

3 External Controller

80 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Callout Description

4 Error

5 Feedback

About Calculated Inputs and Outputs

Calculated inputs
In addition to the regular input resources installed in your controller, you can also assign a calculated input
for control feedback or data acquisition. Calculated input values are determined by applying a user-defined
mathematical equation to the specified signal values.

Calculated outputs
In addition to the regular output resources installed in your controller, you can also use a calculated output
to drive a valve or other output resource. Calculated output values are determined by evaluating a
user-defined mathematical expression that uses the values of other signals.

License requirements
Calculated inputs and calculated outputs are optional features which require separate licenses. For example,
you may have a calculated inputs license and not have a calculated outputs license.

About Power Control

FlexTest IIm/CTC controllers

On FlexTest IIm/CTC controllers, up to four hydraulic service manifolds can be connected to J28A–J28D
on the rear panel of the Model 497.05 Hydraulic Control Panel.
If desired, you can allocate the same HSM resource to multiple FlexTest IIm channels.

FlexTest GT/TestStar IIm controllers

On FlexTest GT/TestStar IIm controllers, the HSM is connected to J28A ---J28B on the Model 493.74 HSM
Transition Board mounted in the rear panel chassis. Each HSM transition board controls up to two stations
and the chassis supports up to four stations.

TestStar IIs controllers

On TestStar IIs controllers, the HSM is connected to J20 (proportional) or J28 (solenoid) on the rear panel
of the TestStar IIs chassis.
If your TestStar IIs system is connected directly to an HPU, select HPU in the Power list.

FlexTest SE controllers
On FlexTest SE controllers, the HSM is connected to J28 on the Model 493.42 System I/O Board mounted
in the rear panel chassis. The system I/O board controls a single HSM.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 81

Station Builder

FlexTest 40
On FlexTest 40 controllers, the HSM is connected to J28 on the Model 494.41 System I/O Board mounted
in the rear panel chassis. The System I/O board controls a single HSM (includes proportional control).

FlexTest 60/100/200 controllers

On FlexTest 60/100/200 controllers, the HSM is connected to J28A ---J28B on the Model 494.74 Single
Slot HSM Transition Board mounted in the rear panel chassis. Each HSM transition board controls up to
two HSMs (does not include proportional control).
Note:
FlexTest 60/100/200 controllers can also use the Model 493.74 HSM Transition Board (includes
proportional control).

About Update Rates

You must specify the update rate for each program channel you define. Update rate options include System
Rate and Low Rate.

System rate
The system rate specified in the .hwi file is the normal rate used for testing. This rate varies with the type
of controller you are using.

Low rate
In some instances, it may be desirable to program an external controller at a low rate to conserve processor
resources. Typically, low-rate channels are used with devices that do not require frequent setpoint updates
such as temperature controllers.
Your system’s low rate is defined in your .hwi file as the Low System Rate. The default low rate for all
systems is 25.6 Hz.

Update rates using serial connectors

Serial connectors on the rear panel of the FlexTest and TestStar controllers support two-way communication
with Eurotherm Model 2200 and 2400 Temperature Controllers.
When programming a Eurotherm temperature controller over a serial connection, Low Rate is automatically
selected as the update rate, even though the actual update rate is 0.5 Hz input and 1 Hz output.

About Compensators

How compensators work

Compensators compare the command with the corresponding sensor feedback to ensure that the command
is fully applied to the specimen. If the sensor feedback indicates the specimen is not reaching the
commanded levels, the compensator alters that command until the desired result is achieved.
Each type of compensator uses a different technique to achieve the commanded levels. Certain
compensators work more effectively than others for specific applications.

82 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Optional compensators
The following compensators are available as purchased options:
• Model 793.05 Amplitude Phase Control (APC) Compensator
• Model 793.06 Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC) Compensator
• Model 793.07 Arbitrary End-Level Control (ALC) Compensator
• Model 793.08 Peak Valley Phase Control (PVP) Compensator
• Model 793.18 Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC) Compensator

How optional compensators get selected and used

Users need to install a compensator option in order to use it. All compensators require a special key code
during installation. The key codes are obtained from MTS when the option is purchased.
After a compensator is installed, users still need to select or enable the compensator in the software in
order to use it.

Where You Can Select and Use Optional Compensators

Station Builder Station Manager Basic and MultiPurpose

TestWare

You can enable the following You can use the following You can use the following
compensators when setting up a compensators when setting up a compensators when you enable
Channel on the General tab. This channel in the Function Generator: an “Adaptive Compensator” in a
is for a channel Type that has a MPT process that uses them:
• APC (sine wave shapes)
feedback, including, Program and
• ALC
Control, Program w/ Feedback, or • AIC and AICX (all wave
Three Variable Controls: shapes) • AIC and AICX
• APC • PVP (sine wave shapes)
• AIC

You must enable APC and AIC You can use the following
compensators in Station Builder compensators when setting up an
in order to use them in other External Command:
applications.
• AIC and AICX
• PVP

Note:
Other compensators are also available (besides the ones that are purchased as an option).

Amplitude and Phase Control (APC)

The Amplitude and Phase Control (APC) compensator monitors feedback from sine and sine-tapered
commands for amplitude roll-off and phase lag. The APC compensator:

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 83

Station Builder

• Boosts the command amplitude if roll-off is detected.

• Alters the command phase if phase lag is detected.

APC works well when you need to control the amplitude of the fundamental frequency component.
Note:
An extended capability version of AIC (AICX) is available for controllers that use Series 494 Hardware.

Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC)

The AIC compensator is a linear compensation technique that senses the frequency content of the drive
signal, automatically generates an inverse filter, and then filters the command to achieve the desired
response. The APC compensator:
• Uses an inverse model to improve tracking in linear systems.
• Compensates for amplitude and phase, and matches signal shape.
• Is most effective with random or time history signals with broad-band frequency content.

AIC is typically used in tests on linear specimens where road profiles developed on a separate system
must be accurately reproduced without having to iterate.
AIC is also used on fast sine sweeps, particularly when the sweep rate is too fast (>1Hz/s) for APC, and
on any component being tested with random or time history signals on a linear system.

Arbitrary Level Control (ALC)

The ALC compensator is an adaptive compensation technique that improves the tracking accuracy of
spectrum profiles played out with the MultiPurpose TestWare application. This technique is also known
as “from-to matrix compensation.” The ALC compensator:
• Works with linear or nonlinear specimens.
• Can be used with cyclic waveforms or random profiles.
• Provides the option to adjust the test frequency to suit mechanical system capability (optimizes frequency
and amplitudes to minimize test time).

Peak Valley Phase Control (PVP)

The Peak/Valley Phase Control (PVP) combines amplitude and phase (APC) with Peak/Valley Compensation
(PVC) algorithms to improve the amplitude and phase tracking of the command and sensor feedback.
PVP is typically used in multichannel block cyclic (>10 cycles per block) tests in which phasing and mean
levels must be compensated, in addition to amplitude. The PVP compensator:
• Corrects for phase as well as amplitude and mean.
• Is important for multichannel tests in which phase relationships must be maintained, and in which the
specimen is pre-loaded or the feedback waveform may be distorted.

Peak/Valley Compensation (PVC)

Peak/Valley Compensation monitors cyclic command feedback for any amplitude roll-off or mean-level
divergence. PVC is typically used in cyclic or block cyclic tests with >10 cycles per block. The PVC
compensator:

84 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

• Is widely used for cyclic and block cyclic durability testing.

• Corrects for peaks and mean level in cyclic waveforms.
• Works with linear and non-linear specimens.

Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC) Compensator

Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC) works with Amplitude Phase Control (APC) to minimize spurious
harmonic distortion. AHC is typically used in high-frequency MAST systems for ground vehicle testing.
The AHC compensator:
• Is typically used when programming with pure sine wave commands or sine sweeps in acceleration
control.
• Injects input harmonics into the command waveform with the phase and amplitude required to cancel
feedback harmonics.
Note:
The adaptive harmonic cancellation function is available only when Amplitude Phase Control
(APC) is on.

How to Create a Program and Control Channel

1. Allocate and name an output resource.
a) In the Station Builder navigation pane, click Channels.
b) In the Hardware tab of the Output Resources list, select the resource you want to allocate, and then
click +.
c) In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
d) Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
2. Specify the channel type.
In the Type list, select Program and Control.
Note:
If you allocate a valve driver, Program and Control is selected automatically.

3. Specify the station power source.

a) Click the General tab.
b) In the Power list, select the desired power source for this channel.
4. Specify the update rate.
On the General tab, select the desired update rate in the Update Rate list.

5. Enable optional compensators.

On the General tab, select the check boxes associated with compensators that you wish to enable for
the channel.

6. Define the feedback signal.

a) Click the Control Modes tab.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 85

Station Builder

b) Allocate an analog input resource, rename it as desired, and define the dimension and units for the
feedback signal.
Note:
The feedback signal can be used for command compensation.

7. If desired, define inputs.

8. If desired, define external command.

How to Create a Program with Feedback Channel

1. Allocate and name the output resource.
a) In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Channels.
b) In the Output Resources list, select the resource you want to allocate, and then click +.
c) In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
d) Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
Note:
It is good practice to keep your resource names short, because long names may not be visible
in all windows.

2. Specify the channel type.

In the Type list, select Program w/Feedback.

3. Specify the update rate.

On the General tab, select the desired update rate in the Update Rate list.

4. Enable optional compensators.

On the General tab, select the check boxes associated with compensators that you wish to enable for
the channel.

5. Define the feedback signal.

a) Click the Control Modes tab.
b) Allocate an analog input resource, rename it as desired, and define the dimension and units for the
feedback signal.
Note:
The feedback signal can be used for command compensation.

6. If desired, define inputs.

7. If desired, define external command.

How to Create a Program-Only Channel

1. Allocate and name the output resource.
a) In the Station Builder navigation pane, click Channels.

86 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Note:
To create a Program-Only channel, you must select an Analog Output resource from the
Hardware tab of the Output Resources list. Example: 494.46 D/A 7 S8-J2B.

b) In the Hardware tab of the Output Resources list, select the resource you want to allocate, and then
click +.
c) In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
d) Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
Note:
It is good practice to keep your resource names short because long names may not be visible
in all windows.

2. Specify the channel type.

In the Type list, select Program Only.

3. Specify the update rate.

On the General tab, select the desired update rate in the Update Rate list.

4. Specify the dimension and units of the program signal.

On the General tab, set the dimension and display units of the outgoing program signal.
Note:
This control is displayed only for Program-Only channels.

5. If desired, define external command.

How to Create a Temperature Control Channel

lFor TestStar IIs and TestStar IIs AP Controllers, the J51 connector (on the back of the controller chassis)
supports two-way communication with Eurotherm Series 2200/2400 Temperature Controllers. Special
resources must be added to the .hwi file to accommodate this configuration.
1. Set up the serial connectors.
Use the following serial connectors to create a control channel for a Series 2200/2400 Eurotherm
Temperature Controller:
• For FlexTest IIm controllers, use the J50A–J50D serial connectors on the Series 498 RS-485
Transition Module.
• For FlexTest GT and TestStar IIm controllers, use the J50A–J50D serial connectors on the Model
493.71 Transition Module.
• For FlexTest SE Controllers, use the Debug Serial Port on the Model 498.96 Processor module via
a RS232/RS485 Converter to connect to one or more Eurotherm Temperature Controllers.
• For FlexTest 40/60/100/200 Controllers, use connectors JXA and JXB (slot location in Model 494.40
I/O Carrier board determines X) on the Model 494.47 Dual UART/Encoder Conditioner mezzanine
card.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 87

Station Builder

Note:
To work with temperature controllers, the Model 494.47 Dual UART/Encoder Conditioner
resource in the .hwi file must be set to the UART mode. This is typically done during installation
with the Hwi File Editor application. For more information, see the Hwi File Editor section of
the MTS Series 793 Utility Software manual (part number 100-147-132).

2. Create the control channel:

a) Create a new or open an existing station configuration file.
b) In the Station Builder navigation pane, click Channels.
c) On the Hardware tab of the Output Resources list, select a temperature control output resource (for
example, Temp Control 1-1-Output) and then click +.
Note:
When you allocate this resource, the channel type is set to Program w/Feedback and the
update rate is set to Low Rate automatically.

d) Click the Control Modes tab.

e) On the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a temperature control input resource (for
example, Temp Control 1-1-Input) and then click +.
f) In the Internal name box, select or type the desired resource name.
g) Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired display name (example: Temperature).
h) Specify the Dimension and Display Units for the program signal (example: Temperature/deg_C).
i) Optional—If you intend to monitor thermocouple feedback for data acquisition, connect the external
thermocouple output. Open the Auxiliary Inputs panel to allocate an additional auxiliary input.
3. Save the station configuration file.

Control Modes

About Control Modes

Note:
FlexTest SE Controllers that operate in the standalone mode support only Basic PIDF, Dual
Compensation, and Channel Limited Channel type control modes.

A control mode is the currently selected sensor (or sensors) that is functioning as the closed-loop control
for the channel.
You must define at least one control mode for each Program and Control channel you create.
If desired, you can use the controls on the Control Modes panel to define multiple control modes using the
same station resources.
For example, suppose you want to test two types of specimens—one very compliant and the other very
stiff—in force control. You can reuse the channel’s force input to create unique control modes for both
types of specimens. In the Station Manager application, you can optimize the tuning controls for each
control mode to accommodate both types of specimens.

88 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

You can create the following types of control modes:

• Basic PIDF
• Dual Compensation
• Cascaded PIDF
• Channel Limited Channel
• Zero Clamp PIDF
• Command Plus Error

Basic PIDF Control Mode

The Basic PIDF control mode is the most commonly used control mode.
This control mode requires one feedback signal. The resource you allocate defines the control loop’s active
feedback (Active fdbk). For example, if you select a force transducer, the system’s load cell provides the
control loop’s primary feedback, and the system is said to be operating “in force control.”
You may select a control mode resource from:
• The Hardware Input Resources list, or
• The Station Input Resources list associated with the selected channel or Auxiliary Inputs. (You cannot
create channel inputs from station resources associated with other channels.)

Proportional, integral, derivative, and feed forward gain adjustments are available to tune the servo-loop
response in the Station Manager application.

How to Create a Basic PIDF Control Mode

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, expand the Channels list, and then select the channel to which
this mode applies.
Note:
The following steps pertain to creating this type of control mode with hardware input resources
(the most common method). If available, you can also create this type of control mode with station
input resources.

2. Click the Control Modes tab, and then click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list.
3. Select the desired input hardware resource or input calculation, and then click +.
• If the feedback signal is conditioned by your controller, allocate an AC or DC conditioner resource.
• If you are using an externally conditioned signal, allocate an analog input resource.
• If you are using calculated inputs for control feedback or data acquisition, allocate a <<Calculated
Input>> resource.
When you allocate an AC conditioner feedback resource in the Station Builder application, the
application automatically renames the resource Displacement, and sets the dimension to Length.
When you allocate a DC conditioner resource, the application automatically renames the resource
Force, and sets the dimension to Force.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 89

Station Builder

Note:
Keep your resource names short because long names may not be visible in all windows.

4. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.

5. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
6. Select Basic PIDF for Type.
7. Enter the desired display and internal names for the Active fdbk, and then select the desired Dimension
and Display Units.
8. Optional—allocate a resource for Stabilization (and if available, Stabilization 2).

About Dual Compensation Control Mode

Note:
Dual compensation is also known as “mixed-mode” compensation.

The dual compensation control mode is typically used to provide programming and control on a channel
whose sensor feedback is unsuitable for maintaining closed-loop control.
This control mode requires two feedback signals:
• Control feedback (typically displacement), which is a relatively stable signal that is used by the PIDF
controller to maintain closed-loop control. Control feedback is provided when you select a Base Control
Mode.
Control feedback may be unsuitable if it is too noisy (for example, force feedback), or if it possesses
only dynamic characteristics (for example, accelerometer feedback).
• Compensator feedback (typically acceleration), which is used for command compensation, is the
dimension you actually program in. Compensator feedback is provided when you select a resource for
the dual compensation control mode (Active fdbk).

Dual Compensation Control Mode

90 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Callout Description

1 Function Generator

2 Dual Mode Compensator

3 PID Controller

4 Actuator

5 Accel

6 LVDT

7 Control Feedback

8 Compensator Feedback

You may select a resource for compensator feedback from:

• The Hardware Input Resources list, or
• The Station Input Resources list associated with the selected channel or Auxiliary Inputs. (You cannot
select this feedback from station resources associated with other channels.)

About compensation types

When creating a dual compensation control mode, you may select a compensation type of either Mean
and Amplitude Control, or Amplitude Control Only.
To determine which compensation type is appropriate, you should consider the following aspects of your
test setup:
• Whether or not it is appropriate to have a non-zero mean on the compensator feedback
• Transducer characteristics
• Specimen characteristics
• Fixture characteristics

For instance, if you want to apply a load to a metal or plastic specimen attached to a reaction base (for
example, mounted in a load unit), Mean and Amplitude Control is appropriate. (Non-zero mean)
If you use an accelerometer or load washer to provide compensator feedback, Amplitude Only is appropriate.
(Transducer characteristic)
If you want to apply a load to a shock absorber specimen attached to a reaction base, Amplitude Only is
appropriate. (Specimen characteristic)
If you want to apply a load to any specimen not attached to a reaction base (for example, mounted to a
free-body actuator), Amplitude Control Only is appropriate. (Fixture characteristic)

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 91

Station Builder

About Setpoint in a Dual Compensation Control Mode

When you select a compensation type of Mean and Amplitude, the control mode’s setpoint (which is
controlled by the Station Manager application’s setpoint control) and the function generator have the same
dimension, as shown in the following example.

Setpoint in a Dual Comp Mode Using the Mean and Amplitude Compensator

Callout Description

1 Function Generator

2 Setpoint (Mean and Amplitude)

3 Dual Mode Compensator

4 PID Controller

5 Actuator

6 Accel

7 LVDT

However, when you select a compensation type of Amplitude Control Only, the control mode’s setpoint
moves to the output side of the dual mode compensator, so that the setpoint and the function generator
have different dimensions, as shown in the following example.

92 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Setpoint in a Dual Comp Mode Using the Amplitude Only Compensator

Callout Description

1 Function Generator

2 Dual Mode Compensator

3 Setpoint (Mean and Amplitude)

4 PID Controller

5 Actuator

6 Accel

7 LVDT

MultiPurpose TestWare considerations

The MultiPurpose TestWare application includes a control that allows you to disable the Station Manager
application’s setpoint control (MPT Options Editor > Execution tab > Setpoint).
When you choose a compensation type of Amplitude Control Only, do not disable the Station Manager
application’s setpoint with this control (that is, select Enable; do not select Disable and Reset).
The reason is because a mode switch into the control mode puts an offset into the setpoint (the offset
provides a “bumpless” mode switch). If you disable the setpoint, you cannot remove the offset.
For more information about the MultiPurpose TestWare application, see the MTS Series 793 MultiPurpose
TestWare Application Software manual (part number 100-147-131).

How to Create a Dual-Compensation Control Mode

Before you can create a Dual-Compensation Control Mode, you must create a base control mode (typically
displacement) to maintain closed-loop control.
1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select the channel for which you wish to create this mode.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 93

Station Builder

2. Click the Control Modes tab, and then select a resource for the compensated input (Active fdbk) by
performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.
Note:
Keep your resource names short because long names may not be visible in all windows.

3. Enter the desired display and internal name for the control mode.
4. Select Dual Compensation for Type.
5. Select the desired Compensation Type.
6. Select the desired Base control mode.
7. Enter the desired display and internal names for the Active fdbk, and then select the desired Dimension
and Display Units. This pertains to the dual compensation mode’s secondary feedback (typically force
or acceleration).

About Cascaded PIDF Control Mode

Note:
Cascaded PIDF control mode is a keyed option. It is available when you purchase Model 793.21
Cascade Control.

The Cascaded PIDF control mode is typically used for testing that requires a high degree of stability under
dynamic conditions.
This control mode uses two control loops. The output of the outer control loop is used as the input to the
inner control loop, as if it were the final control element.

94 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Callout Description

1 Function Generator

2 Secondary Loop PID Controller

3 Primary Loop PID Controller

4 Load Cell

5 Actuator

6 LVDT

7 Control Feedback (Displacement)

8 Control Feedback (Force)

This control mode requires two feedback signals:

• Control feedback for the primary loop, which is provided when you select a Base Control Mode.
• Control feedback for the secondary loop, which is provided when you select a resource for the Cascaded
PIDF control mode (Active fdbk).

You can select a resource for the control feedback of the secondary loop from:
• The Hardware Input Resources list, or
• The Station Input Resources list associated with the selected channel or Auxiliary Inputs. (You cannot
select this feedback from station resources associated with other channels.)

How to Create a Cascaded PIDF Control Mode

Before you can create a Cascaded PIDF control mode, you must create a base control mode (primary
control loop).
1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select the channel for which you wish to create this mode.
2. Click the Control Modes tab, and then select an input resource for the secondary control loop (Active
fdbk) by performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.
Note:
Keep your resource names short because long names may not be visible in all windows.

3. Enter the desired display and internal name for the control mode.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 95

Station Builder

4. Select Cascaded PIDF for Type.

5. Select the desired Cascaded Type.
6. Select the desired Base control mode.
7. Enter the desired display and internal names for the Active fdbk input, and then select the desired
Dimension and Display Units. This input pertains to the Cascaded PIDF control mode’s secondary
control loop.
8. Optional—allocate a resource for Stabilization (and if available, Stabilization 2).

Channel Limited Channel Control Mode

The Channel Limited Channel (CLC) control mode is typically used for specimen installation and removal.
When you command the actuator with a CLC control mode, the controller does not allow the actuator to
exceed limits specified on either the active or limiting channels.
For example, assume the limiting channel is force. When setting up for a test, you could set a force limit
to a low value to prevent damage if the grips accidentally touch each other. If the force limit is reached,
the limiting channel prevents further actuator motion regardless of the displacement command.
The CLC control mode requires two feedback signals:
• The “Active Channel” (typically displacement) is assigned when you select a resource for Active Fdbk.
• The “Limiting Channel” (typically force) is assigned when you select a resource for the Limit Input.

How to Create a Channel Limited Channel (CLC) Control Mode

1. Optional - if you want to use station input resources to create this control mode, you must create them
before proceeding.
2. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select the channel that requires a CLC mode.
3. Click the Control Modes tab, and then select a resource for the active feedback (Active fdbk) by
performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.
Note:
Keep your resource names short because long names may not be visible in all windows.

4. Enter the desired display and internal name for the control mode.
5. In the Type list, select Channel Limited Channel.
6. Enter the desired display and internal names for the Active fdbk input, then select the desired
Dimension and Display Units.
7. Select a resource for the limiting feedback input (Limit Input) by performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or

96 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.

8. Enter the desired display and internal names for the Limit Input, and then select the desired Dimension
and Display Units.

About Zero Clamp PIDF Control Mode

Note:
The Zero Clamp PIDF mode is intended only for electromechanical (non-hydraulic) test systems.

The Zero Clamp PIDF control mode is typically used in systems that use rotary actuators in which back
spin and creep at zero cannot be tolerated, such as dynamometer systems.
This control mode is similar to the Basic PIDF control mode, with the following special features:
• It includes a control that automatically clears the integrator when the actual command and feedback
amplitudes are within tolerance. This prevents back spin when zero is achieved.
• It includes a control that automatically clamps the valve driver output when the actual command and
feedback amplitudes are within tolerance. This prevents creep at zero, as well as preventing back spin.

How to Create a Zero Clamp PIDF Control Mode

Note:
The Zero Clamp PIDF mode is intended only for electromechanical (non-hydraulic) test systems.

Note:
If you intend to use station input resources to create this control mode, you must create them before
proceeding.

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select the channel for which you wish to create this mode.
2. Click the Control Modes tab, and then select a resource for the active feedback input (Active fdbk) by
performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.
Note:
Keep your resource names short because long names may not be visible in all windows.

3. Enter the desired display and internal name for the control mode.
4. Select Zero-Clamp PIDF for Type.
5. Enter the desired display and internal names for the Active Fdbk, then select the desired Dimension
and Display Units.
6. Optional—allocate a resource for Stabilization (and if available, Stabilization 2).

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 97

Station Builder

About Command Plus Error Control Mode

The Command Plus Error control mode is typically used to program external controllers. For example, this
control mode may be used for pressurizing aircraft chambers.
When providing programming to external controllers, this control mode corrects the error between the
command and feedback by adding the error into the command (while the external controller maintains
closed-loop control).

Command Plus Error Control Mode

Callout Description

1 Controller

2 Command

3 Command Plus Error

4 External Pressure Controller

5 Error

6 Pressure Chamber

7 Pressure Feedback

98 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

How to Create a Command Plus Error Control Mode

Note:
The Command Plus Error control mode is available only on Program w/Feedback type channels.

Note:
If you intend to use station input resources to create this control mode, you must create them before
proceeding.

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select the channel for which you wish to create this mode.
2. Click the Control Modes tab, and then select a resource for the active feedback (Active fdbk) by
performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.
Note:
Keep your resource names short because long names may not be visible in all windows.

3. Enter the desired display and internal name for the control mode.
4. Select Command Plus Error for Type.
5. Enter the desired display and internal names for the Active Fdbk, and then select the desired Dimension
and Display Units.

Signal Stabilization

About Signal Stabilization

Feedback signals can be integrated into the controller to act as a stabilizing factor. These stabilization
signals are primarily used in:
• High-mass systems equipped with Delta P (differential pressure) sensors
• High-speed systems equipped with accelerometers

You can create stabilization inputs from:

• Hardware input resources, or
• Station input resources associated with the selected channel or auxiliary inputs. (You cannot create
channel inputs from station resources associated with other channels.)

You can apply stabilization to:

• Three variable control channels, and to

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 99

Station Builder

• Program and control channels that use Basic PIDF, Cascade, or Zero-Clamp control modes

Stabilization 2
Channel and control modes that include stabilization may be equipped with an additional stabilization
control (Stabilization 2) to enhance performance. For information about obtaining this control, contact MTS.

How to Create a Control Mode Stabilization Signal

Note:
This procedure pertains to Stabilization and Stabilization 2 controls.

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select the control mode you want to stabilize.
2. Select a resource by performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.
For example, allocate a DC conditioner for a delta P sensor input. Allocate an analog input resource
for an externally-conditioned accelerometer input.

3. Rename the stabilization resource as desired.

Note:
If you are using stabilization feedback for more than one control mode on a channel, it is important
that you assign a unique name to each stabilization signal. Doing this avoids duplicate naming
conflicts (and the resulting error messages).

4. Set the Dimension and Display Units for the stabilization signal.

Channel Inputs

About Channel Inputs

Channel inputs are sensor and external command input signals associated with the channel.
Channel inputs can be used to provide feedback for control modes (they are available as Station Input
Resources), or to monitor sensor feedback or analog inputs for readout or data acquisition (like Auxiliary
Inputs).
With the controls on the Input panel, you can add and edit channel inputs. You may select channel input
resources from:
• The Hardware Input Resources list, or

100 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

• The Station Input Resources list associated with the selected channel. (You cannot create channel
inputs from station resources associated with other channels or Auxiliary Inputs.)

In addition to creating channel inputs with the Inputs panel, channel inputs are created automatically when
you allocate resources to define control modes.

How to Create Channel Inputs Manually

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Channels.
2. Select the channel to which you want to add inputs.
3. Select a resource by performing one of the following:
• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input from the current channel, and
click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.
For example, allocate a DC conditioner for a delta P sensor input. Allocate an analog input resource
for an externally-conditioned accelerometer input.

4. Rename the input as desired.

5. Set the Dimension and Display Units for the input signal.

External Command Inputs

About External Command Inputs

Note:
External Command Inputs, like all channel inputs, are automatically distributed to their associated
channel lists in the Station Manager application.

Your controller can process programming received from an external controller or function generator while
maintaining all other closed-loop control functions.
External command inputs are displayed in the channel inputs list.
Note:
Your controller cannot recognize mode switches in external program input signals.

How to Enable an External Command Input

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Channels.
2. Select the channel for which the external input will be associated.
3. On the External Command tab, allocate an analog input resource to accommodate the command signal
input, and then rename it.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 101

Station Builder

4. Set the Dimension and Display Units for the input signal.
Note:
If the external command signal is defined in the Station Builder application with a “normalized”
dimension (volts, ratio, unitless, or percent), the Station Manager External Command panel will
allow the selection of any mode defined for that channel.

Auxiliary Inputs

About Auxiliary Inputs

Note:
Auxiliary input resource names are not associated with channel lists in the Station Manager application
(in the Scope and Meters, they are available in the “Others” list). If you want to keep an auxiliary
input with a channel, consider adding the input using the channel’s Input tab.

Auxiliary inputs are used to monitor sensor feedback or analog inputs for readout or data acquisition.
You can monitor auxiliary input signals on the built-in Station Manager scope and meters. You can acquire
data on auxiliary input signals with the Basic TestWare and MultiPurpose TestWare applications.
Note:
On the Scope and Meters, auxiliary input signals that start with the same name as a control channel
will be displayed in the control channel's signal list (instead of in the Others signal list). To ensure
that your auxiliary input signals appear in the Others signal list, use a unique name for your auxiliary
input signals.

About Reconfigurable Auxiliary Inputs

As an option, you can define certain auxiliary inputs as reconfigurable. If you select the Reconfigurable
check box, the signal name and dimension can be changed in the Station Manager application, without
returning to the Station Builder application. You must be at the Configuration access level in the Station
Manager application to make these signal configuration changes.
The Print Preview window, in both the Station Builder and Station Manager applications, shows if an
auxiliary input has been defined as reconfigurable.
Note:
Reconfigurable Signals is a non-licensed option. If Reconfigurable Signals is not selected at
installation, this option will not appear in subsequent dialogs.

How to Create an Auxiliary Input

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Auxiliary Inputs.
2. Select a resource by performing one of the following:

102 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

• Click the Station tab of the Input Resources list, select a station input (from the current channel or
Auxiliary Inputs), and click “+”, or
• Click the Hardware tab of the Input Resources list, select a hardware resource input for the control
mode, and click “+”.

3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.

4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
5. Set the Dimension and Display Units as desired.

Readouts

About Readouts
Readout resources are used to send station signals to external readout devices, such as oscilloscopes
and meters.

How to Create Readouts

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Readouts.
2. In the Hardware Input Resources list, select the resource you want to send station signals through, and
then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.

Digital Inputs

About Digital Inputs

Digital input resources are used to monitor digital signals from external switches. Digital inputs can be
monitored from the Station Manager Digital I/Os window, or with the MPT Digital Input process.

How to Create Digital Inputs

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Digital Inputs.
2. In the Hardware Input Resources list, select the resource you want to monitor digital inputs through,
and then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 103

Station Builder

Digital Outputs

About Digital Outputs

Digital output resources are used to send digital signals to external switches and logic devices.
Digital outputs can be monitored and changed from the Station Manager Digital I/Os window, or with the
MPT Digital Output process.

How to Create Digital Outputs

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Digital Outputs.
2. In the Hardware Input Resources list, select the resource you want to send digital outputs through, and
then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. In the Source box, specify the source for the data on the signal.
The User, Action, or Application selection:
• Allows you to manually change the resource value with the Station Manager application’s DI/Os
panel.
• Allows you to configure an action for the resource with the Station Manager application’s Event-Action
Editor.
• Allows other applications (such as the Digital Output process in the MultiPurpose TestWare
application) to use the resource and control its sequence of execution in a test procedure.
The Action or Application selection:
• Allows you to configure an action for the resource with the Station Manager application’s Event-Action
Editor.
• Allows other applications (such as the Digital Output process in the MultiPurpose TestWare
application) to use the resource and control its sequence of execution in a test procedure.
The Application Only selection allows other applications (such as the Digital Output process in the
MultiPurpose TestWare application) to use the resource and control its sequence of execution in a
test procedure.
The Calculation selection causes the resource to appear in the tree view of the Station Manager
Calculation Editor. The resource is then controlled by the calculation, so that neither the Station
Manager or MultiPurpose TestWare application can assign a value to it.

5. Optional—In the Display name box, type the desired name.

104 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

Calculated Resources

About Calculated Resources

In order to use calculated inputs and outputs in your test, you must add calculated resources to your station
with the Station Builder application.

License requirements
Calculated inputs and calculated outputs are optional features which require separate licenses. For example,
you may have a calculated inputs license and not have a calculated outputs license.

Calculated analog inputs

In addition to the regular input resources installed in your controller, you can also assign a calculated
analog input for control feedback or data acquisition. Calculated input values are determined by applying
a user-defined mathematical equation to the specified signal values.
A resource labeled <<Calculated Input>> appears in the hardware list for control modes, stabilization
feedback, external command inputs, and auxiliary inputs. This resource is not removed from the list when
it is assigned, so that it can be used as many times as necessary.
When you open the station with the Station Manager application, any input resources that are mapped to
the <<Calculated Input>> resource are created as calculated input channels. Some calculated input
channels are defined relative to a control channel, while others are in the auxiliary list.

Calculated digital inputs

You can also create a calculated input resource for digital inputs. Select the resource labeled <<Calculated
Input>> in the hardware list for a digital input.

Calculated analog outputs

You can create a calculated analog output by assigning the <<Virtual Output>> resource as your
programming output resource.
Note:
Control channels mapped to the <<Virtual Output>> resource will not have an equation rather, they
will produce a signal that will be referenced in other equations.

You can also use the Station Builder Calculated Outputs panel to add calculated analog output resources
to your station.

Calculated digital outputs

Resources can also be allocated for “virtual” digital outputs not tied to hardware, but available for use in
other calculations. Select the resource labeled <<Virtual Output>> in the hardware list for a digital output.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 105

Station Builder

Defining calculation equations

Once you have defined the calculation resources needed to run your test, you must use the Station Manager
application to specify the equation used for each calculation.

How to Create a Calculated Analog Output Resource

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Calculated Outputs.
2. In the Hardware Resources list, select the resource you want to allocate, and then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
5. Set the Dimension and Display Units for the calculated output signal.
6. Use the Station Manager application to define the calculation.

How to Create a Calculated Digital Output Resource

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Digital Outputs.
2. In the Hardware Resources list, select the <<Virtual Output>>, and then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
5. In the Source box, select Calculation.
6. Use the Station Manager application to define the calculation.

How to Create a Calculated Input Resource for Control Modes

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Channels.
2. On the Control Modes tab, select the <<Calculated Input>> resource from the Input Resources list, and
then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
5. Set the Dimension and Display Units for the calculated input signal.
6. Use the Station Manager application to define the calculation.

How to Create a Calculated Input Resource for Auxiliary Inputs

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Auxiliary Inputs.
2. In the Hardware Resources list, select the <<Calculated Input>> resource, and then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
5. Set the Dimension and Display Units for the calculated input signal.
6. Use the Station Manager application to define the calculation.

106 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

How to Create a Calculated Input Resource for Digital Inputs

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Digital Inputs.
2. In the Hardware Resources list, select the <<Calculated Input>> resource, and then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name.
5. Use the Station Manager application to define the calculation.

Remote Setpoints

About Remote Setpoint Adjust

A Remote Setpoint Adjust (RSA) control is an optional, stand-alone hardware device that uses an encoder
to control actuator setpoints. Access the Remote Setpoints panel to allocate an encoder resource (and its
associated RSA control).
As an option, an Enable Switch tab allows you to assign a digital input to act as a switch to turn the RSA
control on and off.
Password control of RSA enable/disable is available as an option. If the RSA digital switch option is selected,
password control is not available. Password control is activated via the Station Manager Remote Setpoint
Adjust window.

How to Set Up a Remote Setpoint Adjust

1. In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Remote Setpoints to display the Remote Setpoints panel
and Enable Switch tab.
2. On the Encoder Resources list, select the encoder resource you want to use, and then click +.
3. In the Internal name box, select or type the desired name for the RSA control knob.
4. Optional—in the Display name box, type the desired name for the RSA control knob.
5. Optional—on the Enable Switch tab, select the Digital Switch Resource list to allocate a digital input
for an RSA control on/off switch. As required, in the Display name box, type the desired name for the
RSA switch.

Station Configuration Files

About Corrupted Station Configuration Files

Corrupted configuration files cannot be used in the Station Manager or Station Builder applications.
When a corrupt .cfg file is detected, the following dialog is displayed, and a warning message is logged.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 107

Station Builder

How to proceed
Click Yes to attempt to recover the corrupted file. A utility will scan the file and fix or recover whatever it
can.
• A .txt file will open and display details about what was recovered.
• A new, usable .cfg file is created and opened. This file has the same filename as the orignal corrupted
file.
• The corrupted file is renamed with a tag “corrupt.” You may delete this file.

If you do not want to attempt to fix the file, click No. You can try to open a different file, or create a new
one. If a backup file exists, you can replace the corrupted file with the backup version.

How to Print a Station Configuration File

Click the Print icon on the Station Builder Print Preview window toolbar or click the Print icon on the Station
Builder toolbar, to print the current station configuration.
Click Print to File on the Station Builder File menu to save the current station configuration as a separate
text file.

About Using Stations Concurrently

If you plan to run tests on multiple stations simultaneously, you must make sure each station allocates
unique controller resources.
Note:
Multistation testing is supported by FlexTest IIm, FlexTest CTM, TestStar IIm, FlexTest CTC, and
FlexTest GT hardware only.

The Station Builder application allows you to open (or create) multiple configuration files at the same time.
All open stations allocate resources from the same resource pool (.hwi file). To avoid resource conflicts,
resources already allocated in one open station are removed from the resource lists of other open stations.
When you close a station, the resources defined in that station are returned to the resource lists of the
other open stations.
If you attempt to open a configuration file that defines resources used by another open configuration file,
the Station Builder application displays a message. For example, if a station that defines the 497.15 VD-6

108 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Builder

in chassis 2 is open, and you try to open another station that defines the same valve driver, the following
message appears:
“Some of the hardware resources used by this configuration are either not in the .hwi file, or are already
being used by another configuration loaded into Station Builder. See the ‘Configuration File Open Errors’
window for more details.
You may continue to open this configuration, but the references to these unavailable resources will be
changed to <<Unassigned>>. You will need to reassign those resources to some available resource before
you can save a configuration that can be loaded into Station Manager.
Do you want to continue opening configuration name.cfg?”
If you click “Yes”, the selected configuration opens with all references to unavailable resources changed
to <<Unassigned>>, and a list of configuration file open errors is displayed. Consult this list for resources
that should be assigned to available resources.

How to Create Stations That Run Concurrently

1. Create your first station configuration file.
2. While your first station configuration file is open, select New on the File menu to create your next station.
3. A new configuration file opens.
The resources allocated to the first station are removed from the resource lists of your new station
configuration file.

How to Edit Stations That Run Concurrently

To edit a station that is running concurrently, it is recommended that all other concurrent station
configurations be opened as “read only” files. This helps prevent you from saving accidental changes that
might be made to the “read only” files during the editing process.

How to Preview Changes Made to a Configuration File

Use the toolbar at the top of the Print Preview window to locate and preview unsaved changes that have
been made to the configuration file.

Callout Description

1 Next Change

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 109

Station Builder

Callout Description

2 Previous Change

3 Refresh

4 Enable/Disable Change Highlighting

5 Print

1. Display the Print Preview window.

File menu > Print Preview
or
Station Builder window toolbar > Print Preview icon
2. Use the Print Preview window to preview unsaved changes that have been made to the configuration
file.
• Use the Next Change and Previous Change buttons to locate unsaved changes made to the
configuration file.
• Use the Enable/Disable Change Highlighting button to highlight unsaved changes made to the
configuration file.
• Asterisks (*) identify items that have been changed since the parameter set was opened.

3. If desired, use the Station Builder window’s File menu Save command to save any changes.

110 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

Station Manager Application
Topics:

• Overview..........................................................................................................................................112
• Station Manager Basics...................................................................................................................121
• Parameter Sets................................................................................................................................125
• Station Manager Menus..................................................................................................................132
• Station Options Window..................................................................................................................135
• Channel Options Window................................................................................................................144
• Editors.............................................................................................................................................159

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 111

Station Manager Application

Overview

About the Station Manager Application

The Station Manager application provides station servo control based on a command source provided by
a test application or Station Manager controls.

Parameter sets
Station settings are saved in parameter sets that are associated with a specific station configuration file
(.cfg). You can create parameter sets for specific tests or groups of tests.

Real-time control
The Station Manager window provides an interface to control and manage station hydraulics, interlocks,
and test applications.

Callout Description

1 Station Configuration

2 Command Source

3 Station Manager Controls

112 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Callout Description

4 Test Applications

5 Station Manager Application

6 Controller PC

7 Controller Hardware

Station Manager Window

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 113

Station Manager Application

Callout Description

1 Access Level

2 Menu Bar

3 Toolbar

4 Application Controls Panel

5 Message Pane

6 Station Controls Panel

Station Manager Menu Bar

The menu bar includes commands for managing the Station Manager application.

Station Manager Toolbar

The toolbar includes the more frequently used commands.

114 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Displays the Open Station window.

Saves station parameters to the currently selected parameter

file.

Prints the current parameter set.

Displays the Print Preview window.

Create Station Setup—Displays the Station Setup window.

Display Station Setup—Restores a minimized Station Setup
window.

Create Message Log—Displays a Message Logs window.

Display Message Log—Restores minimized Message Logs
windows.

Create Meters—Displays a Meters window. Click a second

time to display a second Meters window.
Display Meters—Restores minimized Meters windows.

Create Scope—Displays a Scope window. Click a second

time to display a second Scope window.
Display Scope—Restores minimized Scope windows.

Sets User Access to Operator level or restricted Tuning,

Calibration, and Configuration levels.

Displays online help.

Application Control Panels

These panels display the controls for the application that is run at the test station.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 115

Station Manager Application

callout Description

1 Function Generator

2 External Command

3 Auto Tuning

4 Acquisition Manager (Optional)

5 Basic TestWare

6 MPT (Optional)

Station Manager Message Pane

This pane, at the bottom of the Station Manager window, displays Warning, Error, and Fatal Error messages
from any application. Up to 50 messages can be displayed.

116 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Note:
The Message Logs window provides a more complete listing of station events.

About the Station Controls Panel

Use the Station Controls panel to apply hydraulics; start, stop, and hold the program command from the
selected application; adjust program span; and monitor detector and signal limits.

Example Station Controls - Your Control Panel May Appear Slightly Different

Callout Item

1 - Toolbar
Provides access to features such as
Manual Command.

2 - Control Application
Lists the application that is currently
running.

3 - Program Controls Use to control program execution.

4 - Rig Commands
Click a Rig Command button to send
the control channel(s) to predefined
command level(s). To display the Rig
Command buttons, select the Station
Option window’s Display Rig

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 117

Station Manager Application

Callout Item

Command on Main Window check

box.

5 - Program Run Starts the program. Flashing green

indicates that ramping is in progress.
Solid green indicates a running
program.

6 - Program Stop Stops the program. Red indicates a

stopped program.

7 - Program Hold Holds the program. The application

being run determines this button’s
availability. Yellow indicates a hold.

8 - Upper/Lower Limit Detectors Separate upper and lower limit

indicators show the status of all the
user-defined limit detectors. For
example, the Lower Limit indicator
turns red when any of the lower limits
set in the Station Setup window are
tripped.

9 - Upper/Lower Hardware Limits Separate upper and lower limit

(optional) indicators show the status of all the
user-defined hardware limit detectors.
For example, the Lower Limit
indicator turns red when any of the
lower hardware limits, set in the
Station Setup window, are tripped.

10 - Inner/Outer Error Detectors Separate inner and outer error

indicators show the status of all the
user-defined error detectors. For
example, the Outer Error indicator
turns red when any of the outer error
limits, set in the Station Setup window,
are tripped.

11 - Channel Feedback Signals This group of indicators show the

status of any of the signals designated
as active feedback for a control
channel. For example, if the active
feedback signal for channel 1
becomes saturated, the Saturated
[14] indicator in the Channels group
turns red. Other signal statuses
include Out of Range [13] (indicator
turns yellow), Invalid [15](indicator

118 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Callout Item

turns red), or Disabled [16] (indicator

turns black).

12 - Signals This group of indicators show the

status of any of the signals (for
example, auxiliary inputs), including
those designated as active feedback
for a control channel. For example, if
a signal becomes saturated, the
Saturated [14] indicator in the
Signals group turns red. Other signal
statuses include Out of Range [13]
(indicator turns yellow), Invalid [15]
(indicator turns red), or Disabled [16]
(indicator turns black).

17 - Interlock An interlock condition lights this

indicator. This type of interlock stops
the program and removes station
power.
The number following Interlock and
Program indicates which interlock
chain the station is using. This
assignment is made in the Station
Builder application.
The Station Manager application
saves the last used interlock chain to
the station configuration, and will
attempt to restore it if currently
available.

18 - Program A Program Interlock condition lights

this indicator. This type of interlock
stops the program without removing
station power.

19 - C-Stop A C-Stop Interlock lights this indicator.

The yellow control button is displayed
next to the indicator when C-Stop is
enabled.

20 - Gate A Gate interlock lights this indicator.

21 - Reset Resets the interlocks.

22 - Reset/Override Temporarily overrides interlocks. Each

click provides 10 seconds of override.
Use this button where station power
is required to clear interlock

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 119

Station Manager Application

Callout Item

conditions, such as saturated

channels.
Note: This button can be
disabled on a limit-by-limit
basis.

23 - Station Power The station configuration determines

the types of controls that appear in the
Station Controls Panel.
HPU - Controls hydraulic power units
(HPU), through Power Off, Power
Low, and Power High buttons.
HSM - Controls hydraulic service
manifolds through Power Off, Power
Low, and Power High buttons.
The names of station power resources
originate in the hardware interface file
(.hwi) associated with the station
configuration. You can edit the name
of these resources with the Hwi File
Editor application.

24/25 - Master Span Sets the master span for all channels
included in a master span group.
MPT procedures where the MPT
Option Editor window’s Span control
is set to Disable and Reset makes
this control unavailable.
Use the Channel Options window’s
Master Span tab to define master
span groups.
The Station Option window’s Display
Master Span on Main Window
control must be selected to display this
control. If this selection is not made,
Master Span will be displayed in the
Setpoint and Span window.

24/25 - Master Gain (Option) Sets the master gain for all station
channels. Master gain is a multiplier
of the gains for all the PID control
loops in your station.

120 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Station Manager Basics

How to Start the Station Manager Application

Note:
Before you start the Station Manager application, station hydraulic power must be off and any
ongoing test must be stopped. You may also need to shut down some applications connected to
the station before you can open the station.

From the desktop:

Start > Programs > MTS 793 Software > Station Manager

From other MTS applications:

• On the Project Manager toolbar, click the Station Manager icon, or from the Applications menu, click
Station Manager.
• From the Station Desktop Organizer toolbar, click Start Station Manager.

When you first start the Station Manager application:

• The System Loader utility starts and establishes a real-time connection with your hardware components.
If the System Loader utility does not connect to the controller, an error message appears and the Station
Manager application quits.
• When the Station Manager application starts, the Select Project window automatically appears.
If you used the Project Manager application to set a default project, the Open Station window appears.
Note:
On FlexTest IIm, FT60, FT100, and 200 Controllers, the Desktop Organizer utility starts and
displays the organizer task bar.

How to Open a Station

Before you start the Station Manager application, station hydraulic power must be off and any ongoing
test must be stopped. You may also need to shut down some applications connected to the station before
you can open the station.
1. Start the Station Manager application.
When the Station Manager application starts, the Select Project window automatically appears.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 121

Station Manager Application

Note:
If you used the Project Manager application to set a default project, the Open Station window
appears.

2. Select a Project and click Open, or click New Project and perform the New Project wizard.
Note:
If the Select Project window does not appear, a default Project is assigned and opens
automatically. You can assign default Projects with the Project Manager application.

3. In the Open Station window, select a configuration file, a parameter set, and an interlock chain.

a) Select a configuration (.cfg) file.

b) In Parameter Sets, select a parameter set if available.
Only parameter sets that were created with the selected configuration file are listed.
Note:
The Station Manager application saves the last parameter set to the station configuration file,
and will attempt to restore it if currently available.

c) Select the station Interlock Chain.

122 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Note:
The Station Manager application saves the last used interlock chain to the station configuration
file, and will attempt to restore it if currently available.

d) Optional—Click Enable Remote Station Control (RSC) on the selected interlock chain.
For FlexTest IIm systems with multiple RSCs, the selected Interlock Chain determines which RSC
will be enabled.
RSC is not available in the Demonstration mode.
e) Click Open to open the configuration file.

About Access Level Settings

The Access Level control limits user access to change tuning, calibration, and configuration settings.
Access to Tuning, Calibration, and Configuration levels requires passwords that were created during
software installation.

Note:
When you change access levels, the change is entered into the station log.

Access Level Description

Operator The default access level. This level does not need a password
and has the fewest privileges.

Tuning Enter this level to make tuning adjustments.

Calibration Enter this level to edit all Station Manager application windows
except the Event-Action Editor window, the Calculation Editor
window, and reconfigurable signals.
Note:
Calibration is the only access level that allows you to
modify calibration parameters for signals.

Configuration Enter this level to edit all Station Manager application windows
except Calibration.
Station Manager settings that require a Configuration access
level include:
• Using the Event-Action Editor and Calculation Editor
windows.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 123

Station Manager Application

Access Level Description

• Changing the name, dimension, or calibration parameters

for reconfigurable signals (if enabled in the Station Builder
application).
Note:
Some Series 793 applications may have to be closed
to enter this level.

About the Demonstration Mode

The demonstration mode simulates a connection with your hardware components, allowing you to run the
system software without using actual hardware.
Use the Demo System Loader utility to start the demonstration mode if you want to test a new station
configuration or learn to use the system software controls.
Note:
“Simulation” appears in the window status bars when in the demonstration mode.

How to Start the Demonstration Mode

1. Start the Demo System Loader utility:
Start > MTS 793 Software > Tools > Demo System Loader

2. Start the Station Manager application:

Start > MTS 793 Software > Station Manager
When the Station Manager application starts, the Select Project window appears automatically.
Note:
If you set a default project, the Select Project window does not appear, but the Open Station
window appears.

About Station Views

To avoid reopening windows, displays, and scope/meter windows each time you reopen a station
configuration, you can save the desktop layout as a station view.

Restore saved view

When you restore a saved station view, the windows reposition automatically.

124 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Default views
Each time you close the Station Manager application, it saves the current station view as the default view.
When you reopen the station, it appears with the windows repositioned as they were when the station was
last closed. This allows a user to always revert to the last saved station.

Restore default view

You can also restore a default view by selecting Restore Default View, as described below. This function
repositions the station windows to where they were the last time the station was closed.

How to Manage Station Views

How to save a view

On the Station Manager application File menu, click Save View.

How to restore a saved view

On the Station Manager application File menu, click Restore Saved View.

How to restore a default view

On the Station Manager application File menu, click Restore Default View.

Parameter Sets

About Station Parameter Sets

Each station configuration requires at least one parameter set that includes all the custom test settings for
a particular test (or group of tests). Parameter sets include settings for each hardware resource included
in the station configuration.
Each parameter set that you create for a station is saved as part of the currently loaded configuration file
and cannot be used with other configuration files.

When you open a configuration file, you can select from a list of previously created parameter sets that
you want to use for your test.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 125

Station Manager Application

Multiple parameter sets

The same station configuration may require different parameter settings to run different tests. For example,
you can create up to 127 different parameter sets that define ranges, tuning, and signal conditioning for
specific groups of tests. This allows you to run different types of tests using the same station configuration
file.

Parameter set management

When you open a station configuration, you can select the appropriate parameter set needed to run the
test. Once a station configuration is loaded, you can load a different parameter set.

Parameter settings
Most of the settings stored in a parameter set are accessed through the Station Setup window. All of the
Station Manager application settings can be saved to a station parameter set that is associated with the
current station configuration file. If you change parameter settings, you are prompted to save the changes
to the parameter set when you close the station.

About Parameter Settings

Most of the settings stored in a parameter set are accessed through the Station Setup window. Parameter
settings include:
• System calibration and tuning settings
• Limit and error detector settings
• User-defined calculated signal settings
• Signal compensation and stabilization settings

126 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

• Views (window locations, scope, and meters)

• Any changes to Unit Assignment settings
• Manual command slider settings
• Setpoint slider settings

How to Determine What Parameter Set Is Being Used

The Station Manager window title bar displays both the station configuration and parameter set being
used.

How to Save and Manage Parameter Sets

The following File menu selections are used to manage the parameter sets associated with the currently
loaded station configuration.

Item Description

Open Parameters Opens an existing parameter set that is associated with the current
station configuration file. The letters next to the parameter set name
indicate the type of parameters that were saved in the parameter set.
For example, Full = All Parameters, L = Limits Parameters, T = Tuning
Parameters, LT = Limits and Tuning, A = Accelerometer Compensation
Parameters, and so forth.
Example: when you open a partial set of parameters, for example
Tuning_Parameters, the current parameter set parameters remain
unchanged and only the tuning parameters are overridden.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 127

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Save Parameters Saves any changes to the currently loaded parameter set.

Save Parameters As When you rename an existing parameter set, you can save subsets of
the current parameter set based on check-box selections such as Limits,
Tuning, and/or Calibration parameters. You cannot change any of these
settings for an existing parameter set that has already been named.
The letters next to the parameter set name indicate the type of
parameters that were saved. For example, C = Calibration parameters
and LT = Limits and Tuning parameters.

Note:
Once saved, the parameter set will appear in the parameter set
lists in the Open Station and Open Parameter Set windows.

Delete Parameters Deletes an existing parameter set that is associated with the current
station configuration file.

Import Parameters Imports portions of other parameter sets that were previously saved
as a text file.

128 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Import and Export options must be enabled in the Project Manager

application.

Export Parameters Exports the current parameter set as a text file.

Import and Export options must be enabled in the Project Manager
application.

Print Parameters Prints a listing of all the parameter settings saved in the current
parameter set.

Print Preview Displays a listing of each setting in the current parameter set. This
allows you to locate and preview unsaved changes that have been
made to the parameter set.

Print to File Saves the current parameter set as a text file.

How to Preview Changes Made to a Parameter Set

Use the toolbar at the top of the Print Preview window to locate and preview unsaved changes that have
been made to the parameter set.

Callout Item

1 Enable/Disable Change Highlighting

2 Refresh

3 Previous Change

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 129

Station Manager Application

Callout Item

4 Next Change

5 Print

1. Display the Print Preview window.

File menu > Print Preview or
Station Manager window toolbar >

2. Use the Print Preview window to preview unsaved changes that have been made to the parameter set.
• Use the Next Change and Previous Change buttons to locate unsaved changes made to the
parameter set.
• Use the Enable/Disable Change Highlighting button to highlight unsaved changes made to the
parameter set.
• Asterisks (*) identify items that have been changed since the parameter set was opened.

3. If desired, use the Station Manager application window File > Save Parameters command to save any
changes.

How to Import a Parameter Set

The Import Parameters function is available only when the Import/Export Option is enabled. To enable this
option, use the System Settings editor in the Project Manager application.
Note:
To import parameters, you must have the same access level that is required to modify the parameters
you are importing. The exception is that you must have a Configuration access level to import any
type of calculated signal.

1. On the File menu, click Import Parameters.

2. In the Parameters File window, select a text file that contains parameter information and click Open.
By default, this window filters the selection to text file names that begin with the name of the station
that is currently open.

3. In the Import Parameters window, select the parameter settings that you want to import from the selected
text file.
To select a different parameter file, click Browse.

How to Export a Parameter Set

The Export Parameters function is available only when the Import/Export Option is enabled. To turn on
this option, use the System Settings editor in the Project Manager application.

130 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Note:
If you want to transfer specific parameter settings from one parameter set to another, you must first
export those settings to a text file and then import those settings.

1. On the File menu, click Export Parameters.

2. In the Export Parameters window, make the following selections:

a) Export type.
b) Select Items to export.
c) Select parameters to export.
Note:
The items listed in the various export lists will vary based on the Export Type selection.

3. Click Export.
4. In the Parameters File save window, define the name and location of the parameter file that you want
to save.
The default file name is the name of the station that is currently open appended with the name of the
export type.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 131

Station Manager Application

Note:
To avoid confusion and make subsequent parameter imports easier, use the default file name.
Any additional information that you want to include in the file name should be added to the end
of the default name.

Station Manager Menus

File Menu
This menu’s commands create, open, save, and print parameter sets.

Item Description

Open Station Displays the Open Station window.

Open Parameters Displays the Open Parameter Set window.

Note:
Before opening any parameter sets, station power must be off
and any ongoing test must be stopped.

Save Parameters Saves station parameters to the currently selected parameter file.

Save Parameters As Displays the Save Parameters As window.

This window saves a parameter set under a new name.

Delete Parameters Displays the Delete Parameters window.

Note:
The currently loaded parameter set cannot be deleted.

Import Parameters Allows the import of system parameter settings via text files.

Export Parameters Allows the export of system parameter settings via text files.

Save View Saves the current positions of Station Manager application windows.

Restore View Restores the Save View setting.

Restore Default View Restores windows to the positions that they had when the station
configuration was last loaded.

Print Parameters Prints the current parameter set.

132 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Print Preview Displays the Print Preview window.

Printer Setup Displays a Print Setup window specific to your printer.

Print to File Displays the Print Parameters to File window.

Exit Quits the Station Manager application.

Note:
Before exiting Station Manager, station power must be off and
any ongoing test must be stopped. You may also need to shut
down some applications connected to the station before you
can shut down the station.

Note:
All 793.00 software applications connected to the station will
shut down upon exiting Station Manager.

Print Preview Window

Access
File menu > Print Preview or Station Manager window toolbar
This window displays a print preview of the parameter set. A toolbar facilitates access and display of
parameter set changes.
Asterisks (*) identify items that have been changed since the file was opened. In addition, you can highlight
these changes by selecting the Enable Change Highlighting button on the Print Preview toolbar.

Display Menu
This menu’s commands display station setup and monitoring windows.

Item Description

Station Setup Displays the Station Setup window.

Meters Displays the Meters windows.

Scope Displays the Scope windows.

Message Logs Displays the Message Logs window.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 133

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Minimize All Minimizes, with the exception of the Station Manager window, all open Station
Manager application windows.

Show All Restores all minimized Station Manager application windows.

Applications Menu
This menu’s commands open applications that are used with the Station Manager application.
Note:
If you have an access level of Configuration, the Applications menu Basic TestWare, MultiPurpose
TestWare, and MultiPurpose TestWare (Edit Only) selections are unavailable.

Item Description

Basic TestWare Opens the Basic TestWare application and displays its controls in the Station
Manager window’s Application Controls panel.

MultiPurpose TestWare Opens the optional MultiPurpose (MPT) application and displays its controls
in the Station Manager window’s Application Controls panel.

MultiPurpose TestWare Opens an edit-only version of the MPT application, leaving the Station Manager
(Edit Only) application free to run other tests and functions.

Profile Editor Opens the optional Profile Editor application.

Station Builder Opens the Station Builder application.

Station Manager Opens another instance of the Station Manager application.

Station Desktop Organizer Opens the Station Desktop Organizer application.

Tools Menu
This menu’s commands display windows that increase the Station Manager application’s effectiveness.

Item Description

Station Options Displays the Station Options window, used to set viewing and file options.

Channel Options Displays the Channel Options window, used to set channel options.

134 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Sensor File Editor Displays the Sensor File Editor window, used to create and edit sensor files.

Event-Action Editor Displays the Event-Action Editor window, used to define custom actions that
can occur in response to system events.

Calculation Editor Displays the Calculation Editor window.

Unit Set Editor Displays the Unit Set Editor window.

Help Menu
The Help menu provides access to electronic documentation and general application information.

Item Description

Electronic Documentation Opens electronic documentation help.

Note:
The language selected in your current operating system determines
the language of the displayed documentation.

About Displays the About Station Manager window.

This window displays the Station Manager application version number and
copyright information.

Station Options Window

About the Station Options Window

The Station Options window provides access to a number of settings that allow you to customize the Station
Manager application.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 135

Station Manager Application

Station Log Tab

This tab specifies the messages written to the Message Logs window.

Access
Tools menu > Station Options > Station Options window > Station Log tab

Item Description

Message Capture Sets the severity level and sources for messages written to the Message Logs
window.

Minimum Severity Sets the minimum threshold severity level for logged messages.
Only messages with the selected severity level or a higher severity level get
logged.

Source This Application Only—Only Station Manager messages get logged.

All Applications—Station Manager and other applications’ messages get
logged.

Archive Auto Deletion Sets the date when archived files are automatically deleted.

Unit Selection Tab

This tab specifies the units of measure used as the default set for the system.

Access
Tools menu > Station Options > Station Options window > Unit Selection tab

Item Description

UAS Comment Displays a brief description of the selected unit assignment set.

136 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Unit Assignment Sets Select from the following MTS-supplied sets:

CGSSET - Centimeters-Grams-Seconds—Units are based on
centimeters, grams, and seconds.
ENGSET - U.S. Engineering Units—Units are based on Customary
U.S. engineering units with force related units in kips.
ENGSETSM - U.S. Engineering Units (small)—Units are based on
Customary U.S. engineering units with force related units in lbfs.
SISET - SI (Systeme International d’Unites)—Units are based on
Customary International (metric) units with force related in kNs.
SISETSM - SI (Systeme International d’Unites) - small—Units are
based on Customary International (metric) units with force related in
Ns.
SYSDEF - System Units Definition—Contains units used by the
hardware.
Additional user-defined sets can be selected here.

Set Default Makes the selected unit assignment the default set for the system.
Open applications such as Basic TestWare must be reopened before
they adopt the new default set.

Edit Displays the Unit Assignment Set Editor window, used to edit and
create unit assignment sets.

Station View Options Tab

Access
Tools menu > Station Options > Station Options window > Station View Options tab.

Item Description

Display Station Limits on Main This default selection displays Station Limits status indicators on
Window the Station Manager Station Controls panel.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 137

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Display Master Span on Main This default selection displays the Master Span controls on the
Window Station Manager Station Controls panel.
Note:
If the Master Span is not displayed in the Station Manager
main window, it is displayed in the Setpoint and Span
windows.

Main Window Always On Top Select to always display the Station Manager main window at the
“on top” display level.

Display Rig Command on Main Select to display the Rig Command buttons on the Station
Window Manager’s Station Controls panel. The Rig Commands are also
displayed on the Station Manager Manual Command window.
Note:
Rig Commands is an optional feature.

Hide HSMs Select to remove individual HSM controls (with the exception of
the All HSM control) from the Station Controls panel and replace
them with a Show HSMs button. When this button is pressed, an
HSM window, with individual controls for each HSM, appears.

Station Integrator Control Note:

(Parameter Set)
You must be at the Tuning access level to change this
control.

Use the Integrator Mode control to set how integration is applied

to all channels in the station:
• Manual—Displays an Integrators box on the Station Controls
panel that contains a Manual State control. The Manual State
control allows you to select one of the following:
Enabled—turns the integrator on, provided system hydraulics
are set to Low.
Disabled—turns the integrator off, which causes the integrator
to hold or delay for one second, and then to decay to zero in
the following second.
If hydraulic pressure is present at the station’s HSM when you
disable the integrator, a message will appear cautioning about
unexpected actuator movement.
Holding—maintains the current integrator value.
• Auto-High (default)—turns on the integrator when system
hydraulics are set to High.

138 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

• Auto-Low—turns on the integrator when system hydraulics

are set to Low.

From any integrator mode, the integrator will turn off when system
hydraulics are turned off.
When switching from automatic integration to manual integration,
the state the manual control assumes is a function of the HSM
state when the switch occurs:

HSM State Current Integrator Stator Manual Integrator

Mode

Low Auto-Low Enabled

Low Auto-High Holding

High Auto-Low or Auto-High Enabled

Off Auto-Low or Auto-High Enabled

System Controls (All Stations) Note:

You must be at the Configuration access level to change
this control. Also, this control will be disabled if no remote
setpoint channels exist in the current station.

Use the Setpoint Enable on RSC control to enable the setpoint

control on the Remote Station Controller.
When Manual Control is enabled on the RSC, this check box is
disabled. You must disable manual control on the RSC to select
this check box.

Handset Options Tab

This tab allows you to define and change handset properties.

Access
Tools menu > Station Options > Station Options window > Handset Options tab.

Item Description

Handset Choose the handset from the submenu.

Thumbwheel Speed Set speed with slider bar, from 0-100.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 139

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Thumbwheel Direction Select from the following options:

Normal
Invert

Allow exclusive control at any This checkbox is only accessible at the Configuration access level.
access level This will allow all users to use a handset for tuning and calibration.
Once checked, this box can be unchecked (or disabled) from any
access level.
If this box is not checked, and you set Exclusive control from the
handset, the access level changes to Operator.

System Controls (All Stations) These options are only accessible at the Configuration access level:
Do not allow manual command with Force or Torque
feedbacks-disables Force and Torque control modes for manual
command from the handset.
Do not allow manual command at high power-check this box to
enable manual command from the handset/uncheck to disable manual
command.
For Acumen systems, this box is unchecked by default.

About Exclusive Control and the Handset

The Model 494.05 Handset is a portable device that provides station control. It is typically used to facilitate
specimen installation, and because it is mobile, it is more convenient to use in close proximity to the
specimen than the PC interface.
Note:
When you open a station that includes a handset, neither the handset nor the Station Manager
application has exclusive control.

Using exclusive control at the Operator access level

Your access to Station Manager application controls is determined by your access level, which is password
protected. Access levels include Operator, Tuning, Calibration, and Configuration.
By default, you can assign exclusive control to the handset only when the access level is set to Operator.
This prevents anyone from making tuning or calibration adjustments while the handset has exclusive
control because those adjustments require Tuning and Calibration access levels.

140 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

callout Description

1 Access Level control set to Operator. By default, this is the

level required to assign exclusive control to the handset.

2 Exclusive Control selector for the Handset interface

enabled. When the handset has exclusive control, an
asterisk (*) is displayed before the display page code. In
this example, the display page is Manual Command, shown
as “*MC.”

3 Exclusive Control selector for the Station Manager

application interface is disabled when the handset is
assigned exclusive control.
It is also disabled when you open Station Manager
application, as neither the handset nor the PC interface is
assigned exclusive control by default.

This is important because it prevents anyone from changing tuning and calibration settings at the PC while
the operator is using the handset to move the actuator. While you do not use tuning and calibration controls
to move the actuator directly, they do affect actuator response.

Shutdown Recorder Tab

Access
Tools menu > Station Options > Station Options window > Shutdown Recorder Options tab

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 141

Station Manager Application

Item Description

List Filter Enter letters or full words into this field to limit the list of available
signals.

Available list Lists the signals available for data acquisition.

Included list Lists the signals selected for data acquisition.

Time Between Points Enter the amount of time between points in sec, hr, min, or mSec.
Maximum: 1 second.

Sample Rate Enter a rate between 1–1024 Hz.

Total Samples Define the total number of samples to be recorded. Maximum:

61,440
Post-trigger Samples
Maximum: 61,440

Total Duration Define the amount of time the recorder runs after shutdown.
Maximum: 60 seconds
Post-trigger Duration
Maximum: 60 seconds

About the Shutdown Recorder

With the Shutdown Recorder, you can capture and analyze data surrounding an unexpected shutdown.
Shutdown data is stored in volatile processor memory.
If a station unloads due to an application crash, data is retrieved by reloading the station, provided the
system is in a proper state. The Shutdown Recorder will not record data in the event of a power loss or a
digital supervisor application crash.

142 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Memory considerations
Your controller must have a minimum of 64 MB of physical memory to use the Shutdown Recorder. You
can purchase a PMC flash module for non-volatile storage of shutdown data.

Data file
The Shutdown Recorder creates automatically-named data files that can be imported by Microsoft Excel
for data analysis.
The maximum file number is 10. You should save the shutdown data file to a unique name to avoid being
overridden later.
If the configuration file is associated with a project, Shutdown Recorder data is accessible with Project
Manager. If the configuration file is not associated with a project, Shutdown Recorder data is saved in the
controller config directory

Configuration
When a Shutdown Recorder is enabled and valid parameters are set, the Shutdown Recorder is configured
and ready to run. When the interlock is cleared, the recorder starts running.
Parameters and recorder status are displayed in the Message Log. If an error occurs during configuration,
a message tells you what to fix before it can run again.

Running the Shutdown Recorder

While the test state is Stop, and an interlock is applied, signals can be added and removed, parameters
changed, and the enabled box can be checked and unchecked. Once the Interlock is cleared, or the test
is run, the tab is frozen. Parameters can only be changed again after stopping the test and applying an
interlock.
New Shutdown Recorder data is available for retrieval after every interlock and after the recorder has
completed recording data. The station interlock cannot be reset or unloaded until the recorder is finished
recording and retrieving data.

How to Configure the Shutdown Recorder

Your system must have a minimum of 64 MB of physical memory to use the Shutdown Recorder.
1. Select the Enabled check box.
2. Add signals to the Included list by double-clicking the name of the signal, or selecting it and clicking
the right-facing arrow between the lists. Use the List Filter to narrow the list of available signals.
3. To remove signals from the Included list: double-click the name of the signal, or select it and click the
left-facing arrow between the lists.
4. To re-order the Included list, select signal names and click the up and down arrows to the right of the
list as required.
Note:
Use Ctrl+click to select multiple list items, and use Shift+click to select a range of list items when
moving signals between the Available and Included lists.

5. Type in the desired values for sample rate, time between points, total samples, total duration, and
post-trigger sample.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 143

Station Manager Application

How to Access Post-Crash Data

To review shutdown conditions captured by the recorder:

Configuration file associated with Project

1. Open Project Manager.
2. Click the Shutdown Recorder folder on the navigation pane to view data.

Configuration file not associated with Project

1. Follow the path C:\MTS 793\Controllers\FlexTest IIm (name of controller)\Config
2. Open the desired Shutdown Recorder .log file.

You can import the data from the log file into an Excel spreadsheet for analysis.

Channel Options Window

About the Channel Options Window

The Channel Options window provides access to a number of settings that allow you to customize the
Station Manager application.

External Command Tab

This tab defines channels that are programmed as a group through an external program source.
• This tab’s controls are unavailable on single-channel systems.
• Channels must be configured in the Station Builder application to accept external program signals.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > External Command tab

144 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Available Channels/Modes Lists the channels that can be added to the External Command
Channel group.
Channels appear with the control mode dimension used by the
external program signal.

Moves the selected Available Channels/Modes item to External

Command Channels.

External Command Channels Lists the channels controlled as a group through an external program
source.
By default, new configurations place all control channels with external
inputs into External Command Channels.

Moves External Command Channels item to Available

Channels/Modes.

Master Command Tab

This tab defines channels that are programmed as a group through internal test station signals.This tab’s
controls are unavailable for single-channel systems.
The Function Generator panel, Setpoint and Span window, and Manual Command window provide the
program signals for master command groups.
Note:
Requires Tuning access level (or higher) to edit any item.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Master Command tab

Item Description

Group Name Enter a name for the master command group selected below.

Master Command Groups Lists master command groups.

Add Group Adds a new Group Name to the Master Command Groups.

Delete Group Deletes the selected master command group from the Master
Command Groups.

Channel Dimension Selects the dimension to be used by the master command group.
Only channels with the selected dimension will display in Available
Channels/Modes.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 145

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Available Channels/Modes Lists the available channels with the control modes that can be
selected as Master Command Channels.
If more than one control mode/range match exists, both are displayed,
but only one can be added to the Master Command Channels.

Moves the selected Available Channels/Modes item to Master

Command Channels.

Master Command Channels Lists the channels included in the selected master command group.
These channels must have common control modes and must have
ranges within 5% of each other.

Moves the selected Master Command Channels item to Available

Channels/Modes.

Channel Lists Tab

This tab defines channels that can be selected from the Channel List on the Channel Status Panel.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Channel Lists tab
Note:
The All Channels list cannot be edited and is only updated when the station configuration changes.

Item Description

Group Name Enter a name for the channel list selected below.

Channel Lists Displays channel lists.

Add Group Adds a new Group Name to the Channel Lists Groups.

Delete Group Deletes the selected channel list from the Channel Lists Groups.

Available Channels Lists the available channels that can be selected for Channel Lists.

Moves the selected Available Channels item to Selected Channels list.

Selected Channels Lists the channels included in the selected Channel Lists group.

Moves Selected Channels item to Available Channels.

146 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Command Options Tab

About Taper and Ramp Times

The Command Options tab’s Taper Times and Ramp Times values set the transition times between run,
hold, and stop states.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Command Options tab
Note:
The initial default setting for all times is 2.0 seconds.

Transition sources
Transitions between run, hold, and stop states can be initiated from many sources, including:
• The Station Manager window’s Program Stop, Program Hold, and Program Run buttons
• User-defined actions
• Model 494.05 Handset
• The Remote Station Control (RSC) panel
• BTW applications
• MPT applications

Transition states
When using the Station Manager Program Stop, Program Hold, and Program Run buttons, the following
applies:
• Clicking Program Run initiates the transition to the run state.
• Clicking Program Stop initiates the transition to the stop state.
• Clicking Program Hold initiates the transition to the hold state.
• Clicking Program Run after Program Hold initiates the transition to the run state.
Note:
Requires Tuning access level (or higher) to edit any item.

Taper Time Settings

Taper Times specify the time it takes command waveforms to go from zero amplitude to peak amplitude
or from peak amplitude to zero amplitude. This sets the transition time, where tapers are used, between
run, hold, and stop states.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 147

Station Manager Application

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Command Options tab

Item Function Generator Basic TestWare (BTW) Multipurpose TestWare

(MPT)

Start Not used. Not used. Sets the transition time from
stop to run states. Applies in
procedures where the MPT
application’s Option Editor
window Command Stop
Behavior selection is either
Taper to Mean or Taper to
Level.

Stop Sets the transition time Sets the transition time Sets the transition time from
for tapered wave for tapered wave run to stop states. Applies to
shapes to go from run shapes to go from run procedures where the MPT
to stop states. to stop states. application’s Option Editor
window Command Stop
Behavior selection is either
Taper to Zero or Taper to
Mean.

Hold Not used. Sets the transition time Sets the transition time from
for tapered wave run to hold states. Applies to
shapes to go from run procedures where the MPT
to hold states. application’s Option Editor
window Command Hold
Behavior selection is either
Taper to Zero or Taper to
Mean.

Resume Not used. Sets the transition time Sets the transition time from
for tapered wave hold to run states. Applies to
shapes to go from hold procedures where the MPT
to run states. application’s Option Editor
window Command Hold
Behavior selection is either
Taper to Zero or Taper to
Mean.

148 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Callout Item/Description

1 Command Amplitude

2 Target Setpoint

3 Taper Time

4 Tapered waveform starting or resuming from the mean level.

5 Tapered waveform stopping or holding from the command amplitude

to the mean level.

Ramp Time Settings

Ramp Times set the time for MPT processes to ramp to commanded levels.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Command Options tab

Item Description

Start Sets the ramp time from stop to run states. Applies in
procedures where the MPT application’s Option Editor
window Command Stop Behavior selection is either Ramp
to Zero or Ramp to Mean.

Stop Sets the ramp time from run to stop states. Applies in
procedures where the MPT application’s Option Editor

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 149

Station Manager Application

Item Description

window Command Stop Behavior selection is either Ramp

to Mean or Ramp to Zero.

Hold Sets the ramp time from run to hold states. Applies to
procedures where the MPT application’s Option Editor
window Command Hold Behavior selection is either Ramp
to Mean or Ramp to Zero.

Resume Sets the ramp time from hold to run states. Applies in
procedures where the MPT application’s Option Editor
window Command Hold Behavior selection is either Ramp
to Mean or Ramp to Zero.

Callout Item

1 Command Amplitude

2 Current Setpoint

3 Start/Resume Ramp Time

4 Waveform ramping from the current setpoint to the Target

Setpoint.

5 Target Setpoint

150 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Callout Item

1 Command Amplitude

2 Zero Setpoint

3 Stop/Hold Ramp Time

4 Waveform ramping from target setpoint to zero Setpoint.

5 Target Setpoint

Begin/End Time Settings

Sets starting and ending times for tapered wave shapes.These values also apply to the beginning and
ending times of external command signals applied to controllers with a soft start/stop feature.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Command Options tab
Tapered Waveform —The waveform tapers up to the full command amplitude and down to the Target
Setpoint

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 151

Station Manager Application

Callout - Item Description

1- Begin Times Function Generator—Sets the transition time for tapered wave shapes
to go from stop to run.
BTW/MPT—Sets the beginning taper time for tapered wave shapes.

2- End Time Function Generator—Not used.

BTW/MPT—Sets the ending taper time for tapered wave shapes as they
reach the end of their counts.

Begin/End times with a command process

For MultiPurpose TestWare blocks employing a tapered segment shape, Begin and End Times define the
time it takes to taper the command at the beginning and end of each process. The following figure shows
an MPT block using a tapered segment shape that is interrupted with a hold and subsequently restarted.
MPT Process with Interrupt and Restart.

Waveform without Soft Start/Stop—The waveform immediately begins oscillating at the full command
amplitude from the Target Setpoint.

Setpoint/Span Time Settings

The Setpoint/Span Times values set the time it takes to change to a new setpoint or span. The execution
time is proportional to full scale for Setpoint and 100% for Span. If the value has less distance to travel,
the execution time will be correspondingly less than the specified time.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Command Options tab

152 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Setpoint Sets the ramp time for commands applied with the Setpoint (Setpoint
and Span window), Target Setpoint (Function Generator or BTW), or
Manual Command (Manual Command window) controls.
The Setpoint time specifies how long it takes to change the Setpoint
from zero to full scale.

Span Sets the taper time for changes applied with the Span (Setpoint and
Span window) or Master Span (Station Controls panel) controls.
The Span time specifies how long it takes to change the Span from
0 to 100%.

Callout Description

1 Initial Command Amplitude

2 Initial Target Setpoint

3 Specified Begin Time

4 Specified Span Time

5 Specified Setpoint Time

6 New Command Amplitude

7 The Station Manager Channel Span or Master Span control reduces the
waveform span.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 153

Station Manager Application

Callout Description

9 The Station Manager Setpoint control changes the waveform setpoint.

Detector Lists Tab

This tab defines the signals displayed in the Station Setup window’s Detectors tab, in the Detectors window.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Detector Lists tab

Item Description

Name Displays the name of the selected detector list. Predefined default detector
lists are grayed out. You can name user-defined lists here.

Detector List Displays all detector lists. Select a name to edit the detectors included in its
list.
Note:
The All Detectors list cannot be edited.

Add Creates a new detector list.

Delete Deletes the selected detector list.

Predefined detector lists cannot be deleted.

Reset Restores signals to predefined detector lists.

This control does not work for user-defined detector lists.

List Filter Applies a filter to predefined detector lists, displaying only Available Detectors
that are likely to be used with the list.
Enter text that describes the signals you want to display. For example, to display
all force signals, enter force.
You can also enter part of a signal description to display a signal type. For
example, enter disp to display all displacement signals.

RSC Tab
This tab defines custom Remote Station Control (RSC) signal pages that display only specified signals.
RSC is an option.

154 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > RSC tab

Item Description

Additional Pages Displays the name of the selected signal page. Rename pages here.

Pages Lists signal pages.

Add Creates a new signal page.

Delete Deletes the selected signal page.

Hide Application Select to not display controlling application names on the signal page.

Hide Channel Information Select to not display channel information on the signal page.

Current Signal List Specifies the signal list displayed on the selected signal page.

Apply Applies the changes to the RSC immediately. The setting is saved with the
current view set.

Rig Commands Tab

About Rig Commands (Park/Ride)

User-defined rig commands are used to move actuators to predetermined command levels for specimen
installation/removal or to preload a specimen.
Note:
To use Rig Commands, you must turn on the Rig Commands option in the Project Manager
application’s System Settings window.

Rig Command Settings

Each of the four available rig commands are configured in the Channel Options window. Configuration
includes selecting the control mode and command level for each channel used in the rig command. Other
settings allow you to set the ramp time for each command and assign digital-output actions for different
command levels. Use the Name text box to change the wording that appears in each rig command button.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 155

Station Manager Application

Note: Rig command settings are saved in parameter sets.

Rig-Command Buttons
To execute a rig command, click one of the rig-command buttons to move the actuators to their specified
command levels. Indicators next to the rig command buttons turn green when the command is at the
specified value(s).

To display the rig-commands buttons on the Station Controls panel, click Tools > Station Options >
Station View Options tab > and select the Display Rig Commands on Main Window check box. The
buttons also appear in the Manual Command window.

Rig-Command Availability
The Rig-Command buttons are deactivated when:
• The Setpoint is disabled.
• The test program is in a RUN state.
• The segment generator is in use and the control mode needed to move to a command level is not the
active mode.
• When using MPT, if the Setpoint control (in the Execution tab of the MPT Options Editor) is not set
to Enable while the test is locked down. The Park and Ride functions are deactivated because they
work by ramping each channel’s setpoint between preset levels.

156 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Also, if the Command Stop and Hold Behaviors (on the same tab) are not set to taper or ramp to zero,
the command will not be zeroed on a stop or hold.

Vehicle Applications
Rig commands are often used to define Park and Ride command levels for vehicle testing.
Note:
Older station configurations may still label rig commands as Park and Ride.

• Park - typically defines a level the enabled channels can move to before hydraulic shutdown.
• Ride - typically defines a level the enabled channels can move to before running a test.

How to Configure Rig Commands

1. Display the Rig Commands tab.
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > Rig Commands tab.

2. Use one of the following methods to set the Command levels:

Method 1 - Enter the command levels manually
a) From the Control Mode lists, select the control mode for each channel.
b) Type the desired command values in each channel’s Command text box.
Method 2 - Use the current feedback levels
a) From the Control Mode list, select the control mode (or Disabled) for each channel.
b) In the Manual Command control window, select the corresponding command mode or command
group and move the actuator(s) to the desired command level.
c) In the Channel Options window, click Use Current.
The current feedback level is inserted in the command level display.
d) Repeat these steps to define the rest of the command levels for the other commands.
3. Enter a Ramp Time for each command.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 157

Station Manager Application

This sets the time required for the enabled channels to ramp to the command level.

4. Optional—To rename the text that appears in each rig-command button, type a new name in the name
text box.
5. Optional—Assign a digital-output action to indicate when the desired command level is reached.
a) Use the Event-Action Editor to define the desired action.
Before you assign a digital-output action, make sure that a digital output has been assigned to the
station in the Station Builder application.
b) Select the appropriate digital-output actions in the At Cmd Action and Not At Cmd Action drop-down
lists.

C-Stop Tab
This tab allows the user to configure C-Stop interlock parameters. Configuration access level is required
to edit settings on this tab.

Access
Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel Options window > C-Stop tab

Item Description

Number of C-Stops Select number of C-Stop interlocks. The equivalent number of C-Stop tabs will
be displayed, allowing discrete settings for each C-Stop.

C-Stop Enable Global C-Stop Enable check box. Enables defined C-Stop actions.

Name Enter a display name for the selected C-Stop. The name entered in this field
will be displayed on the Station Controls panel and in the system actions list.

Enable on Station Select this check box to display a button for the selected C-Stop on the Station
Controls Controls panel.

Channel Displays a list of available channels.

Behavior Use the drop down list to define the behavior of the C-Stop for each selected
channel. Select Hold at Level or one of the Ramp To Level options.

Control Mode Select the channel’s active control mode for the controlled stop.

Wait for Program Stop Allows Program Stop to complete before initiating C-Stop defined behavior.

Zero Output Select this check box if the channel output might be unstable when a C-Stop
is asserted.

Target The target end level. Only available for Ramp To Level behaviors.

158 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Ramp Time The amount of time to complete the ramp to the specified target end level (used
with Ramp To Level-Time).

Ramp Rate (Units/s) The rate of the ramp (in units/second) to the target end level (used with Ramp
To Level-Rate.)

Editors

Sensor File Editor

How to Create a Sensor File

You can use the Sensor File Editor window to create a sensor file from any user access level. You must
be at the Calibration access level to edit an existing sensor file.
Note:
The Model 494.21 Elastomer DUC (AC mode) excitation frequency is set to a fixed value during
manufacturing and cannot be changed by software. When creating a sensor file for the Model 494.21
AC, make sure you enter the correct excitation frequency.

1. On the Station Manager application Tools menu, click Sensor File Editor.
2. On the Sensor File Editor toolbar, click Open, and then New.
3. In the Conditioner Type list, select the conditioner that is used with the sensor you are calibrating.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 159

Station Manager Application

Callout Description

1 Select the Conditioner Type.

2 Select the Dimension.

3 Define at least one range or turn on Full Scale conditioning, and

set its Fullscale Min/Max values.

4. Enter Basic TEDS information for the sensor that will use the sensor file (Series 494 Hardware only).
a) Select the Edit check box.
b) Type “64” (the IEEE manufacturer code for MTS) in the Manufacturer text box.
c) Enter the Model Number.
5. In the Dimension list, click the dimension that you want to use with this sensor.
6. Enter optional information.
a) Enter the sensor serial number.
b) Enter the conditioner serial number.
c) Enter the last time the sensor was calibrated.
d) Enter a name to identify the hardware resource (conditioner).
e) Enter any additional information in the General Information field. For example, the sensor model
number, its full-scale capacity, or an identifier used in your lab.
7. Enter the Range Definition parameters.
Available range definition parameters vary based on the conditioner type and calibration type that you
select:
Full-range conditioners (such as a Model 493.25 conditioner or Series 494 conditioners) only allow a
single range with these calibration-type options:
• Gain/Linearization (full-range conditioner only) - select this cal type for linear transducers. The
conditioner uses the values entered in the Linearization Table to compensate for slight anomalies
in the transducer characteristics.
• Gain/Advaned Linearization (full-range conditioner only) - select this cal type for non-linear transducers
. The conditioner uses the values entered in the Linearization Table to compensate for slight
anomalies in the transducer characteristics.
• Gain/Delta-K
• mV/V Pos Tension
• mV/V Pos Comp

Multi-range conditioners allow multiple ranges (up to 10 ranges) with these calibration-type options:
• Gain/Delta-K
• mV/V Pos Tension
• mV/V Pos Comp

8. Define Calibration Parameters.

160 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

9. If necessary, change the Polarity settings.

10. Save the sensor file.

How to Set Gain/Linearization and Gain/Advanced Linearization Calibration

Settings
Selecting Gain/Linearization or Gain/Advanced Linearization for a full-range conditioner requires you to
define the conditioner range using a linearization data table recorded during calibration.
Important: MTS recommends using the newer Gain/Advanced Linearization setting for all Series
494 FlexTest Controllers.

1. Display the Sensor File Editor window.

2. In the Range Definition Name text box, type the range name.
3. In the Fullscale Min/Max text boxes, select the units for the range, and then enter the values for the
upper and lower ranges.
Note:
The system software supports non symmetrical full-scale values. This means you do not have
to center the range around zero, but the value 0.0 must be in the range. For example, you can
set the full-scale maximum to +10 cm and the full-scale minimum to -3 cm.

4. In the Cal Type list, click Gain/Linearization.

5. Enter linearization data from the sensor calibration report.
a) Click Linearization Data.
b) In the Linearization Data window, enter Standard and Conditioner data from the calibration report.
Alternatively, you can click Reset and select a linearization template from the Recommended EGU
list and click Yes. The template defines the range and distribution of calibration points. You will still
need to enter the Conditioner values (obtained during calibration) in the Linearization Data window.
6. Enter any additional Calibration Parameters using the values from the calibration report.
7. Save the sensor file.

How to Set Gain/Delta K Calibration Settings

You can select Gain/Delta K as a calibration type for both full-range and multi-range conditioners.
1. In the Cal Type list, click Gain/Delta-K.
2. Under Range Definition, define a range.
By default Range 1 is entered.
a) Optional–highlight the name Range 1 and rename it to something meaningful.
For example: when creating a ±10 cm range, you might name the full-scale range “10 cm”.
b) Specify the Fullscale Min/Max values of the range.
Select the units for the range, and then enter the values for the upper and lower ranges.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 161

Station Manager Application

Note:
The system software supports non symmetrical full scales. This means you do not have to
center the range around zero, but the value 0.0 must be in the range. For example, you can
set the full-scale maximum to +10 cm and the full-scale minimum to -3 cm.

3. Enter any additional Calibration Parameters using the values from the calibration report.
4. Define any additional ranges (if applicable).
Click Add to add another range to the calibration file. Up to ten ranges can be included in a calibration
file. Repeat the range definition procedure for each range you want to calibrate.

5. Save the sensor file.

How to Set mV/V Pos Tension or mV/V Pos Comp Calibration Settings
For both full-range and multi-range conditioners, mV/V Pos Tension or mV/V Pos Comp can be selected
for range definition.
1. In the Cal Type list, click mV/V Pos Tension.
2. Under Range Definition, define a range.
By default Range 1 is entered. Highlight the name Range 1 and change it to something meaningful.

3. Specify the Fullscale Min/Max values of the range.

Select the units for the range, and then enter the values for the upper and lower ranges.
Note:
The system software supports non symmetrical full scales. This means you do not have to center
the range around zero, but the value 0.0 must be in the range. For example, you can set the
full-scale maximum to +10 cm and the full-scale minimum to -3 cm.

4. Enter any additional Calibration Parameters using the values from the calibration report.
If necessary, click Add to add another range to the calibration file. Up to ten ranges can be included in
a calibration file.

5. Repeat this procedure for each range you want to add.

6. Save the sensor file.

Sensor File Editor Settings

Access
Tools menu > Sensor File Editor
With this window, you can create and edit sensor files.
Valid sensor files require Conditioner Type, Dimension, and at least one Range Definition.

Item Description

Toolbar Manages sensor files.

162 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Open—Displays the Open Sensor File window. Use this box to

open existing sensor files (extensions .scf and .clb).
New—Displays a Sensor File Editor window with default values
displayed. Use this window to define new sensor files.

Note:
You cannot save a sensor file while the system is running.

Save—Saves the sensor file. Displays the Save Sensor File As

window if a new sensor file is being saved.
Save As—Displays the Save Sensor File As window. Use this
window to name new sensor files and rename old sensor files.

Print—Prints out the sensor file information.

Print to File—Displays the Print to File window. Use this window to
print the sensor file to a text file (extension txt).

File Definition Defines sensor calibration information. Information entered here

also appears in the Station Setup window’s Sensor tab.

Basic TEDS (Series 494 hardware Provides information that describe a TEDS sensor (Sensor
only) Manufacturer, Model Number, and Serial Number). This allows the
Station Manager application to determine the sensor file(s) that
matches the basic TEDS information, conditioner type, and
dimension.

Sensor File Name Displays the sensor file name.

Sensor Name Names the sensor. Enter any name up to 30 characters.

Sensor Serial # Specifies the sensor serial number.

Conditioner Type Selects the compatible conditioner type for this sensor file.

Conditioner Serial # Specifies the conditioner serial number.

Dimension Selects the conditioner output’s dimension.

Last Calibration Date Enter the most recent calibration date for the sensor/conditioner
pair.

Hardware Resource Enter the hardware resource allocated in the Station Builder
application for this sensor signal.

General Information Enter additional useful information.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 163

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Sensor Polarity Select a Normal or Invert polarity for the sensor signal.

Range Definition Defines the sensor’s ranges.

Ranges Lists sensor ranges.

This list is available only when a multi-range conditioner is selected
in Conditioner Type.

Add Adds a new range to the sensor file. Each file can have up to four
ranges.
This button is available only when a multi-range conditioner is
selected in Conditioner Type.

Delete Deletes the selected range.

This button is available only when a multi-range conditioner is
selected in Conditioner Type.

Name Displays the name of the selected range (multi-range conditioners)

or a single range (full-range conditioners). Enter new range name(s)
here.

Fullscale Min/Max Specifies the selected range’s full-scale minimum and maximum
values.
Ranges can be asymmetrical as long as Min is less than zero and
Max is greater than zero.

Linearization Data This button is available only when a full-range conditioner is

selected in Conditioner Type.
Click this button to display the Linearization Data window.
Use the Linearization Data window to precisely edit range data
points.

Calibration Values The Conditioner Type selected determines these controls. Values
entered here appear in the Station Setup window’s Calibration tab.

Cal Type Sets the type of calibration used for the feedback signal.
The calibration types displayed in this list depend on the conditioner
type selected.
Gain/Delta-K—Select to use delta K for calibration of sensors.
Allows you to specify the amount of delta K applied to the sensor’s
output signal.
Equally negative and positive inputs cause asymmetry in the
sensor’s output signal. Delta K compensates for this asymmetry.

164 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Gain/Linearization—Select to use linearization data for calibration

of sensors with full-range conditioners. This type of calibration
allows use of the Linearization Data window to precisely edit range
data points.
mV/V Pos Tension—Select when a sensor has been calibrated so
that a positive output represents actuator retraction (tension).
mV/V Pos Comp—Select when a sensor has been calibrated so
that a positive output represents actuator extension (compression).

Linearization Data Window Settings

The test system uses the difference between this window’s Standard and Conditioner values to compensate
for transducer non-linearity.

Access
Tools menu > Sensor File Editor > Sensor File Editor window > Linearization Data button

Item Description

Fullscale Min/Max Displays the full scale value for the selected transducer.

Data Range Sets the operating range over which linearization data values apply. Range
is expressed as a percentage of the transducer’s Fullscale value.

Reset Resets all Standard and Conditioner values to their default values.
Note:
On full-scale changes, the data is automatically reset to default values.

Standard Displays the actual force or displacement values applied during calibration
as measured by a standard, such as a dial indicator gage or calibrated force
sensor.

Conditioner Displays the conditioner’s output feedback in response to the applied force
or displacement value as measured by the standard.

Event-Action Editor

About the Event-Action Editor Window

Use the Event-Action Editor window to create custom actions that you can assign to events (such as, Limit
Detectors, Error Detectors, and so on). Each action that you define appears in various action lists.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 165

Station Manager Application

Important:
If you are using manual command, the defined actions Ramp To and Stop At Level will not be
triggered by an event (typically a tripped limit). To trigger these actions you must be in “run” mode
when a limit is tripped and using either the function generator, MultiPurpose TestWare, Basic
TestWare, or any other test application.

Access
Tools menu > Event-Action Editor > Event-Action Editor window > Define Actions tab.
Note:
To add or edit event-actions requires Configuration access level (or higher).

Action Lists Tab

This tab’s selections determine if custom actions can be selected as Action responses to Limit Detector,
Error Detector, Null Pacing Time-out, or Digital Input events.

Access
Tools menu > Event-Action Editor > Event-Action Editor window > Action Lists tab

Item Description

Event Type Limit Detector—An Included action can be selected as the Action
triggered by a limit detection event.

166 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Error Detector—An Included action can be selected as the Action

triggered by an error detection event.
Null Pacing Timeout—An Included action can be selected as the
Action triggered by a static or dynamic null pacing time-out.
Digital Input—An Included action can be selected as the Action
triggered by a digital input.
All Actions List—An Included action can be selected as the Action
triggered by any of the above events.

Available Lists actions that can be Included as an Action in response to the

selected Event Type.

Included Lists the actions available for the selected Event Type.
By default, all new custom actions go here.

Custom Action Settings

Message
Defines messages written to the Message Logs window.

Custom Action Description

Message Type the message text that will be written to the Message Logs window.
Select a severity level associated with the message.

Ramp To
Defines a controlled ramp to a specific level. The program stops at the end of the ramp. You can have a
total of seven Ramp To and Stop At Level actions.
Note:
Your system must be in Program Run to implement this feature.

Item Description

Ramp Time Sets the ramp time.

Channel Identifies the channels where the ramp occurs.

Control Mode Sets each ramp’s control mode.

Level Sets each ramp’s ending level.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 167

Station Manager Application

Stop At Level
Defines program stop actions. You can have a total of seven Stop At Level and Ramp To actions.
Note:
Your system must be in Program Run to implement this feature.

Item Description

Channel Identifies the channels where the stop occurs.

Control Mode Sets each stop’s control mode.

Hydraulics/Powers
Defines station hydraulic and power actions.

Item Description

Power Identifies the power source affected by the action.

Options Defines what each action does. For hydraulic service manifolds (HSMs),
the choices are Disabled and Power Off.

Digital Output Panel

Defines digital output actions.
Note:
Only digital output resources in which the source type is User, Action, Application, or Action or
Application are displayed.

Item Description

Pulse Width Sets the pulse duration time for digital outputs with a pulse option.

Signal Identifies the digital output.

Options Defines the digital output signal’s behavior:

Disabled—No signal.
Set—The signal offers no electrical resistance and allows current flow.
Clear—The signal offers infinite electrical resistance and prevents current
flow.
Toggle—The signal inverts its present state (from low-to-high or
high-to-low).

168 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Pulse—The signal inverts its present state with a pulse signal, holds the
inverted state for the time specified in the Pulse Width control, and then
returns to its original state.

Delay action
Select Delay in the navigation pane to display controls to define a delaying action.
Note:
The Delay action pertains only to an action-group (see table).

Item Description

Time Sets the delay time between individual actions in an action-group.

Action-Group
Select Action-Group in the navigation pane to display controls to create a single action that combines
individual actions.
An action-group can include the standard actions (Indicate, Station Power Off, Interlock, Program Interlock,
Program Stop, and Program Hold actions), User-Defined actions, and Delay actions.

Item Description

Available Lists the user-defined and standard actions that can be combined into
an action-group.

Included Lists the actions that have been added to the action-group.

Moves the selected Included action up one place in the list.

Moves the selected Included action down one place in the list.

How to Define a Custom Action

Follow these steps to define a custom action.
1. Select an access level of Configuration.
2. On the Tools menu, click Event-Action Editor.
3. In the Event-Action Editor window’s navigation pane, select Actions by Type.
4. In the Event-Action Editor window:
a) Click Add.
b) Enter custom action Name, Message, and Severity.
c) Click Apply.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 169

Station Manager Application

The defined action is now selectable, in the Station Setup window’s Digital Inputs panel, as an Action
that occurs in response to a digital input Trigger.
This action can also be selected as a response to Limit Detector, Error Detector, and Null Pacing
Timeout events.

About Action Groups

The execution of individual actions within action-groups

The timing of the execution of individual actions within an action-group is set by the order in which they
appear in the Included list. When an action-group is triggered, it begins triggering the individual actions
within the action-group in a serial manner—from the top of the list to the bottom of the list.
You can use Delay actions to manage the sequencing of actions in an action-group.

Action-groups do not respond to triggers while executing

When an action-group is executing it will not respond to subsequent triggers until its execution is complete.
Important:
Reset does not reset the execution of an action-group, or cause the action-group to execute multiple
times concurrently.

Once an action-group has started to execute, the only way to stop its execution is to:
• Edit the action-group’s definition and click Apply.
• Load a new parameter set.
• Unload the station.

So while an action-group is executing, it is “blind” (unresponsive) to external triggers until it is complete.

You should consider the amount of unresponsive time that is acceptable to your specific test application
when designing an action-group, especially if your action group includes long delay actions.

Using multiple action-groups concurrently

You can define multiple action-groups to execute concurrently. This allows you to distribute desired individual
actions among separate action-groups, and to use an individual action in one action-group to trigger another
action-group.
For instance, suppose you create an action-group (designed to be triggered by a limit detector) that executes
the following individual actions: generate an interlock that removes station pressure, execute a delay action
of five minutes, and then generate a digital output.
In this scenario, the first time the limit detector triggers the action- group, station power is removed right
away, as designed. However, if you clear the interlock (by pressing Reset on the Station Controls panel
to re-arm the limit detector), the action-group will remain unresponsive to subsequent limit detector triggers
until the delay action is complete and the digital output fires. This period of unresponsiveness may put test
equipment and test operators at risk.
To obtain the desired behavior without the period of unresponsiveness, you could distribute the individual
actions into two action-groups. Action-group one (again triggered by a limit detector) contains an interlock
that removes station pressure, followed by an action to trigger action-group two. Action-group two contains
a delay action followed by a digital output action.

170 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

This design allows the first action-group to complete quickly so it can respond to subsequent limit detector
triggers while the second action-group is still executing.

Task Schedule Editor

About the Task Schedule Editor

The Task Schedule Editor displays a tree view of tasks that allows you to change the order that tasks are
performed. Tasks include calculations and other tasks associated with optional hybrid simulation models.
Changes to the order of tasks are saved in the configuration file.
Tasks are performed sequentially from top to bottom. Reordering tasks can help avoid delays in calculation
results. For example, if one calculation is based on the result of another calculation, you can reorder the
calculations so that the required result is calculated before the calculation that uses that result.

How to Use the Task Schedule Editor

1. Change the Station Manager access level to Configuration.
2. Make sure that station hydraulics are off and that there are no active interlocks.
3. On the Tools menu, click Task Schedule Editor.
4. Click and drag items on the lists and change the order within the list.
Click Show internal names to toggle between user-assigned names and internal names.
Note:
By default, tasks associated with optional hybrid simulation models initially apear in the Outputs
list and can be moved between the Inputs and Outputs lists, but not between boxes (if more than
one box exists).

Calculation Editor
The Calculation Editor is used to define the formulas used to produce a calculated signal. Signals resulting
from these formulas can be output as drive signals, input for use in control modes, and saved as data.
The Calculation Editor requires the Configuration access level.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 171

Station Manager Application

CAN Bus Editor

About CAN Bus

A controller area network (CAN) bus is a keyed option that allows an MTS controller to use CAN messages
to communicate with CAN devices over a CAN bus network. Depending on the testing application, you
can configure the Series 793 Controller to share information with a CAN device or have it emulate a CAN
device.
Note:
The CAN bus option is not available for FlexTest SE Controllers.

CAN network hardware

The CAN bus option requires an MTS-tested, CAN bus controller card that is installed on a processor
board. This card includes two CAN bus ports that are independently configured and assigned to stations.
Note:
A Series 793 Controller equipped with a CAN bus controller card is considered another CAN device
(node) on the CAN network, and capable of sending and receiving CAN messages.

CAN inputs and outputs

The MTS test applications that run on a Series 793 Controller use CAN input and output resources to
share signals, commands, and other information with other devices on a CAN network. Each input and
output must be assigned to a CAN message.
• CAN input and output resources are created using the Station Builder application. Use CAN input/output
resources like any other resources in your station configuration.
• Configure CAN inputs and as data fields using the CAN Bus Editor in the Station Setup window of the
Station Manager application.
• You can also define inputs and outputs in a CANdb (.dbc) file that the Station Builder application can
use to create inputs and outputs.

Important:
Most settings for inputs/outputs defined in a CANdb file are not editable in the Station Manager
application.

CAN messages
Each CAN input and output must be assigned to a CAN input or output message. Once assigned, CAN
inputs and outputs appear as fields in the CAN message. CAN messages may contain multiple input or
output fields along with other data fields.
Each message requires a unique CAN message ID that determines which CAN devices will receive and/or
transmit the message. Message IDs and other CAN information can be entered as either decimal numbers
or hexidecimal format. Incoming messages can be filtered based on message ID.
• Outputs/Actions—The CAN device will read the signal value based on the data format that you define
for the output field.

172 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

• Inputs—The MTS controller will read the incoming signal value from the CAN device based on the
data format that you define for the input field.

CAN bus message throughput

The rate at which messages can be sent (maximum messages/sec) on the CAN bus must be determined
experimentally and depends on a number of factors including:
• The CAN bus communication baud-rate HWI setting
• FlexTest controller processor usage
• The message size(s)
• The number of devices on the CAN bus

About the CAN Bus Editor

Before you can use the Station Manager CAN Bus Editor tool, you must use the Station Builder application
to create CAN inputs and outputs and assign CAN bus ports to the station. You can then use the CAN
Bus Editor to create and edit CAN messages where you can assign CAN inputs and outputs. CAN inputs
and outputs that are assigned to a CAN message appear as fields in the CAN message.

Access
Station Manager > Display menu > Station Setup > CAN Bus Editor
Note:
The CAN Bus Editor requires a Station Manager access level of Configuration.

CAN Bus Control Panel

All CAN Bus controls are accessible from a single control panel. The CAN Bus Editor is found in the Station
Setup window.

Access
Display menu > Station Setup > CAN Bus Editor

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 173

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Open/Close Indicates the current status of the port.

Read Enables reading of the selected port. If disabled, the port cannot process incoming messages.
Enable

Write Enables writing to the selected port. If disabled, the port cannot send or write messages to
Enable the bus.

Open with The default behavior is for a port to automatically open when the Reset button on the Station
System Controls panel is clicked. This toggle allows you to disable the feature and deactivate the
Reset button for a given port.

Trigger Use this control to associate a configured action (defined in the Event Action Editor) when
Action on the port is opened.
Open

Trigger Use this control to associate a configured action (defined in the Event Action Editor) when
Action on the port is closed.
Close

Edit Filter It is recommended that this box remain unchecked, and the related fields Message ID Match
Access Bits, Extended Message ID Filter, and Accepted Message IDs should be left with their
default values. Changing these entries to non-default values may result in the inability to
receive all messages.

174 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

Log All Launches the CAN Bus Logging window, and allows you to log all ports.
CAN Bus
Ports

Log This Launches the CAN Bus Logging window, and allows you to log the selected port.
CAN Bus
Port

In addition, a CAN Bus Ports control window is accessible from the Station Controls toolbar.

Station Controls toolbar >

CAN Bus Setup Overview

To set up a CAN bus network and configure CAN inputs and outputs:
1. Install an MTS-tested CAN bus mezzanine card on the processor board.
2. Use the Station Builder application to create CAN inputs and outputs.
a) Use the HWI Editor application to add the CAN bus controllers to the .hwi file.
b) Use the Station Builder application to create CAN inputs and outputs and assign them to the
appropriate CAN port.
c) Optional—Use the Station Builder application to create control channels that include CAN resources.
d) Save the station configuration file.
Note:
You can also use the Station Builder application to parse a CANdb file to add the predefined
inputs, outputs, and messages to the station configuration.

3. Use the CAN Bus Editor (Station Manager application > Display > Station Setup > CAN Bus Editor)
to assign CAN inputs and outputs to CAN input and output messages.
a) Create input, output, and action messages as required.
b) Assign each CAN input and output to the appropriate message.
c) If necessary, configure the field settings and scaling for each input/output.
d) For Action and Output messages, add static fields as required.
4. Optional—Use the Station Manager Event Action Editor to assign CAN action messages to Series 793
Controller events. You can now use the CAN resources in the Station Manager application or in your
tests.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 175

Station Manager Application

About CAN Messages

CAN messages can define multiple fields that are used to transmit information to and/or request information
from devices connected to a CAN network. The type of information defined in each message depends on
the type of message and the fields included in the message. Each message must be assigned to a CAN
bus port and must have a unique message ID that other CAN devices can recognize.
You create CAN messages using the Station Manager CAN Bus Editor or by using the Station Builder
application to parse a CANdb file to add the predefined message resources to your configuration.

Message fields
Each message includes 8 bytes that can be divided into various fields that contain data. Each field that is
assigned to a message includes settings, such as field type, size, and bit offset. Message fields include
the following types:
• Station Signal CAN Inputs and Outputs— When you assign an input or output to a message, it
appears in the Field list. Inputs and outputs are typically signals.
• Static fields— (output and action messages only) These fields define values that do not change.

Input messages
Input messages are used to receive messages from CAN devices. The Message ID setting and field
settings must match the message ID in the message sent by the CAN device. The settings for each field
in the input message define how to extract the information from the CAN device message.
Note:
To add static fields to an input message, create a separate input for each static field and assign
those inputs to an input message.

Output messages
The Series 793 Controller sends output messages to other CAN devices. The Message ID setting and
field settings in a 793 output message must match the message ID and field settings in one of the CAN
device’s input messages. Output messages can include station-signal output fields, static fields, and digital
output fields.
Remote Transmission Requests—The RTR check boxes add additional functionality to output messages.
RTR messages must not include any data fields.
• RTR Frame— Sends a request (to a CAN device) for data in the form of a message. To receive an
RTR Frame output message, a CAN device requires an input message with the same message ID to
receive the requested message.
• RTR Data— Sends the output message (signal or static fields) when an RTR Frame message (request)
from another device is received.

Action messages
Action messages contain static fields that define commands or other information associated with an event.
Each CAN Action message that you create appears as an available action in the Event Action Editor tool
(available in the Station Manager application). You can use the Event Action Editor tool to assign CAN
Action messages to Series 793 Controller events.

176 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Once assigned to an event, the CAN Action message is sent whenever that event occurs. For example,
you could configure a limit-detection event to send an action message.
Note:
Action messages cannot contain input or output fields.

CAN Bus Output Message Settings

Assign each CAN output to a CAN output message that defines CAN bus network connection settings and
a specific CAN Message ID.
Important:
When you use the Station Builder application to assign messages from a CANdb file to an output,
most message settings are not editable (although you can add static fields).

CAN Output Message Settings

Item Description

Name The name that appears in the CAN Bus Editor’s navigation tree.
Note:
Once you click Apply Name to add the message to the navigation
tree, you will not be able to edit the name or port setting.

Port Identifies the controller CAN bus port (that is connected to the CAN bus
network) where the device(s) that will receive or send the message are
connected.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 177

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Message ID The Message ID used in a Series 793 output message allows a CAN
device to identify a message and take appropriate action.
If a CAN device must read an output message, the CAN device must
have an input message with the same message ID and field definitions
as the Series 793 output message. If not, the CAN device will ignore the
output message.

Rate Set the rate (Hz) at which the output message is sent.

RTR Frame Select the RTR Frame check box in an output message to create a
remote data frame (RTR) message. This type of output message sends
a request (to a CAN device) for data in the form of a message.
Important:
Do not define any data fields for RTR Frame messages.

The Message ID setting set in the RTR Frame output message

determines which CAN device(s) respond to the request. To respond to
the RTR Frame message, the CAN device requires an input message
with the same message ID as the RTR Frame message.

RTR Data Describes an output message that responds to an incoming RTR frame
from a CAN device. When an RTR Frame message with the same
message ID is received, the RTR Data message is sent.
Note:
Typically, a message marked as RTR Data should have a rate of
0 Hz because it is not sent periodically.

Fields settings Shows all the fields that will be sent with the message. These fields can
include CAN outputs that were assigned to the message or static fields.
For more information on field settings, see CAN Input/Output Settings
(p. 181).
Important:
The total size of the fields included in a CAN message cannot
exceed 8 bytes.

Value (static fields only) When you add a static value field, you must define the static value that
is sent with the message. This static value can be read and interpreted
by a CAN device. For example, the static value may be a command that
switches a device on.

Add/Delete Used to add and delete fields and messages.

178 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

CAN Bus Input Message Settings

Each CAN input must be assigned to an input message that defines the message ID and various field
settings. To receive a message from a CAN device, the 793 input message ID must match the CAN bus
device’s output message ID and field settings.
Note:
When you use the Station Builder application to assign messages from a CANdb file to an input,
most message settings are not editable (although you can add static fields that are not associated
with a signal).

CAN Input Message Settings

Item Description

Name The name that appears in the CAN Bus Editor’s navigation tree.
Note:
Once you click Apply Name to add the message to the navigation
tree, you will not be able to edit the name or port setting.

Port Identifies the controller CAN bus port (that is connected to the CAN bus
network) where the device(s) that will receive or send the signal are
connected.

Message ID The Message ID used in a Series 793 input message allows the Series
793 Controller to read CAN messages with the same message ID.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 179

Station Manager Application

Item Description

If the controller must read an output message from another CAN device,
there must be an input message with the same message ID and field
definitions as the CAN device’s output message. If not, the controller
will ignore the CAN device’s output message.

Fields settings Shows all the fields (inputs) assigned to the message. For more
information on field settings, see CAN Input/Output Settings (p. 181).
Important:
The total size of all the fields included in a CAN message cannot
exceed 8 bytes.

Add/Delete Used to add and delete fields and messages.

CAN Bus Message Logging

Access
CAN Bus Editor > Log All Can Bus Ports OR Log This CAN Bus Port. Clicking either button launches
the following window.

CAN Bus Logging Window

The CAN Bus Logging window toolbar contains controls to start and stop logging; edit, save, and open
log files; view the entire log; and to change settings.
Clicking the Settings button opens a window that allows you to configure the format of the log file and
memory settings.

180 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

CAN Bus Message Log Settings

About CAN Inputs and Outputs

CAN inputs and outputs are station resources that are created using the Station Builder application. Signal
types include station signals and digital inputs and outputs.
Before you can use CAN inputs and outputs, you must assign them to a CAN message. This can be done
using the Station Manager CAN Bus Editor tool.
Once assigned to a message, the CAN input or output appears in the message window as a field. The
field settings define how the input or output information can be extracted from the message.

CAN Input and Output Types

Floating Point Inputs Floating Point Outputs Digital Inputs/Outputs

Auxiliary Inputs Channel Outputs Digital Inputs

Channel Inputs Readouts Digital Outputs

Calculated Outputs

CAN Input/Output Settings

Click an input or output in the navigation pane to display the settings panel. The settings panel includes
the same field settings that appear in the message window where the input/output is assigned. If you edit
the message field settings in this window, the changes also appear in the Fields portion of the message
window.
Note:
Some signal settings for signals defined by a CANdb file may not be edited. These uneditable
settings include: Message, Field Type, Bit Offset, and Field Size. If the dimension defined in the

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 181

Station Manager Application

CANdb file matches the dimension of the signal in the Station Builder application, you cannot edit
the signal or the device scaling setting.

Item Description

Message Select from a list of previously created messages. Each

input/output must be assigned to a message. The message
is used to transmit input/output data to various CAN devices.
Messages can include multiple inputs/outputs.

Field Type Defines the data type of the field.

Bit Offset Defines the offset (bits) where the value starts.

Field Size The total number of bits in the field, starting at offset, that
defines the field.

Scaling settings Station Manager software uses the signal and device scaling
values that you enter to convert between Series 793 Signal
values and CAN bus Device values.
CAN Outputs—Convert a Series 793 Signal value into a
Device value that can be interpreted by a CAN bus device.
CAN Inputs—Convert a CAN bus Device value into a Series
793 Signal value with the appropriate units.
For example, a tachometer may output a Device signal that
ranges from 0 to 2000 which must be converted to a Series

182 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Item Description

793 Controller “velocity” signal with units of mph and a range

of -30 mph to 160 mph.
If you enter 0 and 2000 for the Device scaling and -30 and
160 for the signal scaling, the Station Manager application
will convert the device signal into the equivalent Series 793
Controller “velocity” signal.

Signal scaling (Controller signal) From the drop-down list, select the signal units. Then enter
the +/- range of signal values that correspond to the +/-
range of device values.

Device scaling (CAN device) Enter the +/- range of values associated with a CAN device.

Conversion Locked Conversion Locked is available on both input and output

signals.
• When this check box is selected (conversion locked),
the signal-scaling conversion uses the signal range
defined in the CAN Bus Editor. You cannot change signal
scaling on the Station Setup Calibration tab or by a
control channel, readout, or calculated output.
• When this check box is cleared, the settings in the Station
Setup window’s Calibration tab or a control channel or
a readout can be used to change the signal scaling.

Adding CAN Devices from a CANdb File

CANdb files contain definitions of CAN messages and signals. The Station Builder application can parse
CANdb files to create station resources that can be allocated to a station configuration.
The Replace function can also be used to update an existing CAN network that is part of a station
configuration or merge a different CANdb into a station configuration that includes an existing CAN network.
1. Place your CANdb (*.dbc) files in the appropriate CANdbc directory.
The location of the CANdbc directory is defined using the Project Manager application.

2. Make sure the CAN bus card is defined in the HWI Editor.
3. In the Station Builder application, allocate one (or more) of the ports on the CAN bus card.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 183

Station Manager Application

4. Create a CAN bus network for the port that you have allocated.
Note:
You can add multiple networks to a CAN bus port to segregate devices.

a) On the left-hand tree view, select CAN Bus Networks.

b) If more than one CAN bus port is allocated, select the port that requires a CAN bus network.
c) Click the + button.
d) In the Select Template window, select the CANdb file that contains the CAN resources that you
want to add to the network and click OK. A list of the devices and associated messages appear in
the tree-view portion of the window.

184 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Note:
Only CANdb (*dbc) files found in the CANdb directory assigned in the Project Manager application
appear in the list.

For any message that you select in the tree view pane, its information (as read from the CANdb file) is
displayed on the bottom right pane for that message.

5. Configure CAN bus device signals to make them available in the Station Manager application. For
example, create an Auxiliary input, and allocate a CANNet station input resource.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 185

Station Manager Application

Important:
Check to see if the assigned Series 793 signal’s Dimension and Display Units match the units
described in the message.
• If the units match, the scaling in the message will be used when loaded into rhe Station
Manager application and the scaling will not be editable.
• If the units do not match (for example, units in CANdb file are listed as “millimeters” but the
unit set will only recognize “mm”), the scaling will default to 1:1 and you will need to enter the
correct scaling information in the Station Manager application after the configuration is first
loaded.

6. Close the Station Builder application and save the configuration.

7. Open the configuration in the Station Manager application.
8. Use the CAN Bus Editor to configure the CAN bus messages read from the CANdb file.
The CAN Bus Editor shows all of the messages defined for any devices and also any inputs/outputs
which you configured to use that information. Because most of the message information is defined in
the *.dbc file, only the scaling is editable for these signals in the Station Manager application.
For more information on using the CAN Bus Editor, see CAN Bus Input Message Settings (p. 179) and
CAN Bus Output Message Settings (p. 177).

Unit Set Editor

How to Select a Unit Assignment Set

1. Display the Unit Selection tab.
Tools menu > Station Options > Station Options window > Unit Selection tab

2. Select a Unit Assignment Set and click Set Default.

186 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Manager Application

Open applications, such as the Basic TestWare application, must all be closed and reopened before
they adopt the new default set.

About the Unit Assignment Set Editor

Use this window to create and modify unit assignment sets (UAS).
Note:
You cannot edit the currently loaded unit assignment set.

Access
Tools menu > Unit Set Editor

Item Description

toolbar Manages UAS files.

The standard CGSET, ENGSET, ENGSETSM, SISET-SI,
SISET-SM, and SYSDEF UAS files cannot be changed
or deleted.

Displays the Unit Assignment Set Open window. Use

this window to open unit assignment sets.
Select from the following MTS supplied sets:

CGSSET - Centimeters-Grams-Seconds—Units are

based on centimeters, grams, and seconds.
ENGSET - U.S. Engineering Units—Units are based on
customary U.S. engineering units with force-related units
in kips.
ENGSETSM - U.S. Engineering Units (small)—Units are
based on customary U.S. engineering units with
force-related units in lbf.
SISET - SI (Systeme International d’Unites)—Units are
based on international system of units (metric) with force
related units in kN.
SISETSM - SI (Systeme International d’Unites) -
small—Units are based on international system of units
(metric) with force-related units in N.
SYSDEF - System Units Definition—Contains units used
by the hardware.
Additional user-defined sets can be selected here.

Saves changes to custom unit assignment sets.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 187

Station Manager Application

Item Description

Displays the Unit Assignment Set Save As window. Use

this window to name and save custom unit assignment
sets.

Deletes the selected custom unit assignment set.

UAS Name Displays the name of the UAS currently selected.

UAS File Displays the file name of the UAS currently selected.

Comment Enter comments about a custom UAS.

Settings Displays UAS Dimension and Units values.

Dimension and Units For standard sets, clicking a Dimension highlights its
default Units.
For custom sets, click a Dimension and then click the
Units to be used as the default.

188 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

Station Setup
Topics:

• Overview..........................................................................................................................................190
• Channel Input Signals.....................................................................................................................192
• Sync Current Channel Button..........................................................................................................226
• Channel Drive Settings....................................................................................................................227
• Channel Groups..............................................................................................................................235
• Channel Tuning Settings.................................................................................................................237
• Channel Compensators...................................................................................................................247
• Readouts.........................................................................................................................................278
• Auxiliary Inputs................................................................................................................................279
• Station Signals.................................................................................................................................281
• Digital Inputs/Outputs......................................................................................................................282
• Limit and Error Detectors.................................................................................................................286
• Remote Setpoint Adjustment...........................................................................................................299
• UPS Options....................................................................................................................................301

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 189

Station Setup

Overview

About the Station Setup Window

The Station Setup window provides access to many of the settings that make up a parameter set. This
includes tuning, setup, monitoring, and status summary functions.

Access
Display menu > Station Setup
or
Station Manager window toolbar >

Callout Description

1 Navigation Pane
Selections within the navigation pane determine what appears in the
righthand panel.

190 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Callout Description

2 Channel Buttons:
• Channel Input Signals
• Channel Drive
• Channel Tuning
• Channel Compensators
• Sync Current Channel

3 Panel

Channel Summary Tab

This tab displays the status for each channel’s active control mode.
Use the Channel List drop-down list to select the channel(s) you want to display.

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Channels Summary tab

Channel Summary Tab

Item Description

Active Mode Displays each channel’s active control mode.

Power Displays each channel’s power source.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 191

Station Setup

Item Description

Span Displays the current Span value for each channel’s active control mode. Span
values are not editable.

Setpoint Displays the current Setpoint value for each channel’s active control mode.
Setpoint values are not editable.

Status Indicators This group of indicators shows the status of each channel's Active Control Mode
signal. For example, if one of these signals becomes saturated, the Saturated
[2] indicator turns red. Other signal status includes: Out of Range [1] (indicator
turns yellow), Invalid [3] (indicator turns red), or Disabled [4] (indicator turns
black).

Fullscale Tab
This tab displays editable minimum and maximum sensor ranges for each channel’s active control mode.
You can select a group of channels for display in the Channel List.

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Fullscale tab

Fullscale Tab

Item Description

Full scale Allows you to edit the displayed full-scale minimum and maximum range
for the sensor used in each channel’s active control mode.
This requires the Calibration access level.

Channel Input Signals

How to Access Channel Input Settings

The Station Setup window provides two methods to access input settings.

Method 1
Click a control mode and then click the Channel Input Signals button to display the settings for that control
mode input.

192 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Method 2
In the Inputs list, click the input that you want to configure.

About Channel Inputs

A channel input is typically a sensor or encoder signal associated with a specific sensor conditioner. A
channel input can be used as the active mode feedback for a control channel or for monitoring. Other types
of inputs include externally conditioned signals and external command sources.

Input Settings
Each input included in your station configuration has a number of settings that are organized into tabs that
appear on the input panel.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 193

Station Setup

Sensor Files

About Sensor Calibration Data Formats

You can store sensor calibration data in a sensor file, parameter set, or Transducer ID module (Series
493 Hardware only). Sensor files are the most common way to store calibration data. The Station Setup
window is used to assign calibration data (typically a sensor file) to a sensor input (or any analog input).

Sensor files
Each sensor delivered with your test system is usually factory-calibrated, and its calibration data saved
as a sensor file that is included with your system software. Sensor files have an .scf extension and are
stored in the C:\MTS 793\Calibration Files directory.
The Station Setup window is used to assign a sensor file to the sensor input. You can use the Sensor File
Editor window to create, view, and edit sensor files.

Parameter sets
Calibration data entered in the Station Setup window can also be saved in a parameter set. When you use
the Station Manager application to save the parameter set, the calibration data for any sensor with a
<Parameter Set> sensor-file assignment will be saved with the parameter set.
Note:
Parameter sets also include other custom test settings, such as tuning values and detector settings.

Transducer ID modules (Series 493 Conditioners only)

Transducer ID modules are optional devices that store calibration data for a specific sensor. The transducer
ID module connects between a conditioner and the sensor and must remain attached to the sensor.
To save calibration data in a transducer ID module, you must first set the sensor-file assignment in the
Station Setup window to <Transducer ID>.

194 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Invalid sensor-file assignment

You can select the <Invalid> sensor file assignment to alert others that the sensor requires calibration.
The Station Manager application will automatically append the sensor-file assignment with <Invalid> if the
assigned calibration data does not match the calibration data shown in the Station Setup window.

About Sensor Files

A sensor file includes all the conditioner settings (sensor calibration data) obtained during calibration and
optional information such as hardware serial numbers. You can use the Sensor File Editor window or the
Station Setup window to create, edit, and save sensor files.
Each sensor delivered with your test system is usually factory-calibrated, and its calibration data saved
as a unique sensor file.

Sensor-file assignments
Use the Station Setup window to assign a sensor file to a sensor. The Station Manager application limits
sensor-file assignments to sensor files that match the sensor conditioner type, dimension, and basic TEDS
information (Series 494 Hardware only) displayed in the Station Setup window.
Note:
You can also create and assign sensor files to other types of analog inputs, such as an A to D input.

Default sensor file location

Sensor files have an .scf file extension and are typically saved in the following directory: C:\MTS
793\Calibration Files.

Sensor files in projects

By default, projects do not contain sensor files directly, but reference their location in the Calibration Files
directory. If necessary, you can use the Project Manager application to edit the Project Settings file to
change the location of sensor files.

How to Assign a Sensor File to an Input

1. Use the Station Setup window to select a sensor input.
a) Start the Station Manager application and select an access level of Calibration or Tuning.
b) On the Display menu, click Station Setup.
c) In the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the sensor input that requires a sensor-file
assignment.
2. Assign a sensor file to the sensor input.
a) Click the Sensor tab.
b) In the Sensor File list, select a sensor file.
The Sensor File list only displays sensor files that match the conditioner type, dimension, and basic
TEDS information (Series 494 Hardware only) Station Setup settings.
c) Click Assign.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 195

Station Setup

Callout Description

1 Select a sensor input

2 Select a sensor file

3 Assign the file

3. For bridge-type sensors (for example, load cells), perform a shunt calibration check before running a
test.

<Invalid> Sensor Assignments

Causes
The Station Manager application changes the sensor-file assignment to <Invalid> if any of the following
occurs:
• The dimension or conditioner type settings in the sensor file do not match the settings in the Station
Setup window. This can occur if you modify the sensor file or change the station configuration.
• The Station Manager application cannot locate the assigned sensor file. This can occur if the sensor
file was renamed, deleted, or moved to another directory.

Actions
An invalid sensor-file assignment results in the following actions:
• When the station loads, the message log lists any invalid sensor-file assignments.
• The Sensor File selection in the Station Setup window is appended with <Invalid>.
• If the sensor-file assignment is set to <Invalid>, the data from that sensor is not valid.
• If the active mode sensor input is in an <Invalid> state, you will not be able to run that channel.

Sensor File Save Options

The Station Setup window provides the following sensor file save options:

196 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Save Click Save to save any changes in the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt tabs in
the currently assigned sensor file.

Save to Click Save To to save the current settings in the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt
tabs as a new sensor file or transducer ID and leave the current sensor-file
assignment unchanged.

Save as Click Save As to save the current settings in the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt
tabs as a new sensor file or transducer ID and change the sensor-file
assignment to the new file.
Note:
Save As replaces the Save option when a <Parameter Set>, <Invalid>,
or <Transducer ID> is assigned to the sensor.

Restore Click Restore to change all the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt tab settings to
those saved in the currently assigned sensor file.
Note:
Restore is disabled if the input signal does not have a sensor file
assigned, or the input signal control mode is the active feedback with
the system hydraulics on.

How to Save Calibration Data in a Parameter Set

The calibration data for any sensor with a <Parameter Set> sensor-file assignment will be saved with the
parameter set.
1. Start the Station Manager application, open a station, and select the Calibration access level.
2. Display the Station Setup window.
3. In the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the sensor input that requires a sensor-file
assignment.
4. In the Sensor File list, click <Parameter Set>.
5. Click Assign.
6. On the Calibration and Shunt tabs, enter the calibration data for the sensor.
7. Repeat this procedure for any other sensors.
8. Use the Station Manager application File menu to save the parameter set.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 197

Station Setup

Sensor Tab
Sensor Tab Settings

Item Description

Sensor File Use this list to select the sensor file that you want to use with the sensor.

Sensor File Name Displays the name of the sensor file selected in the Sensor File list.

Conditioner Type Displays the conditioner type specified in the Hwi File Editor application.

Basic TEDS Basic TEDS information for the sensors that have a TEDS chip. (Series
494 Hardware only.)

Conditioner Serial Number User defined.

Dimension Displays the dimension defined in the Station Builder application.

Last Calibration Date User defined.

Hardware Resource User defined.

LED State (Series 494 Each mezzanine card connector on a Model 494.40 I/O Carrier Board
Hardware only) includes an LED that you can switch on and off using the LED State check
box. Select the check box to switch the LED on. Click to clear the check
box to switch the LED off.

Service Port Output (Model Note:

494.16/.25/.26 only)
Available for Model FlexTest 40, 60, 100, and 200 controllers.

Makes signals from Models 494.25 DUCs, 494.26 DUCs, and the Model
494.16 VD/DUC available from the Model 494.40 I/O Carrier card’s Service
connector.
Select a signal to monitor:
• A/D Input—Conditioned feedback signal from the DUC portion of the
Model 494.16 VD/DUC.
• + Ex Voltage—The excitation sense voltage delivered to the transducer.
• Preamp Output—(transducer output) x (preamp gain)
• Sumamp Output—A slightly attenuated, inverted version of the preamp
output signal. In some custom applications, the preamp output signal
may be summed with an external signal.

198 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Note:
These selections are not saved with the parameter set.

Accel Tab
This tab appears when a Model 494.21 Elastomer DUC is used in the control channel. This card provides
acceleration compensation with on-board summing of the load cell signal and an accelerometer signal.
The accelerometer measures the load applied to the load cell due to acceleration of the load cell at high
frequency.

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels control > Accel tab.

Accel Tab Settings

Item Description

Polarity Sets the polarity of the acceleration compensation signal:

Normal—In most cases, the Normal setting sets the acceleration
compensation signal 180 degrees out of phase with the load signal.
In some applications, the accelerometer may be mounted so that its
signal is in phase with the load signal. For these applications, set the
Polarity to Invert.
Invert—Inverts the phase of the acceleration signal.

Gain (Mass) This unitless gain setting controls the gain applied to the acceleration
signal before it reaches the summing amplifier. The summing amplifier
sums the load-cell signal with the accelerometer signal (that is 180
degrees out-of-phase with the load-cell signal).
Typically, this control is set while the system runs without a specimen
attached. In this instance, any load read by the load cell is caused
by the acceleration of the load cell. While looking at the load signal
on the scope, adjust the Accel Gain setting until the load signal
reaches an acceptable minimum.

Relative Delay This control inserts a delay block into the DUC path.
Note: Delaying the load cell by a significant amount will have
an impact on control stability.

Service Port Output Available for Model FlexTest 40, 60, 100, and 200 controllers.
Makes signals from the Model 494.21 Elastomer DUC available from
the Model 494.40 I/O Carrier card’s Service connector.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 199

Station Setup

Item Description

A/D Input—Conditioned feedback signal from the DUC portion of the

Model 494.16.
+ Ex Voltage—The excitation sense voltage delivered to the
transducer.
Preamp Output—(load cell bridge output) x (preamp gain)
Sumamp Output—The sum of the load cell signal minus the Accel
Comp signal.
Buffered Accel Comp—A buffered version of the Accel comp signal.
Accel Comp—The acceleration signal (with Accel Comp gain) applied
to the input of the summing amp.
Current Accel (Acc 1)—The signal from a current-source
accelerometer before the Accel Comp gain is applied.
Bridge Accel (Acc 2)—The signal from a bridge-type accelerometer
before the Accel Comp gain is applied.
These selections are saved with the parameter set.

A/B Compare Tab

The A/B compare feature helps verify the integrity of a force transducer by comparing two (in theory,
identical) force signals that originate from a single, double-bridge force transducer. If the two signals differ
by the % full scale specified in the A/B Limit setting, the controller will perform the action that you selected
from the A/B Limit action list.
Note:
The A/B Compare tab only appears when the A/B Compare Option is enabled and your station
configuration includes force transducers with redundant bridge circuits. To enable this option, start
the Project Manager application, select System Settings, click Station Manager and set the A/B
Compare Option’s value to Yes.

Setting Description
A/B Limit
Use the A/B Limit slider to set the percent full scale difference between the A and
B signals that will trip the A/B limit. Then, from the A/B Limit list, select the action
that you want to perform if the A/B limit is tripped.
For example, if a displacement transducer has a range of +/- 1 cm, the 100%
full-scale value used by the A/B compare option is 1 cm. If the A/B limit setting is
50% (0.5 cm), and the difference between the A and B signal value equals or
exceeds 0.5 cm, the A/B limit is tripped and the A/B Limit action assigned to the
limit is performed.

Excitation Failure
From the Excitation Failure Action list, select the action to perform if the Series
494 controller hardware detects an excitation failure. For more information, see
Excitation Failure Mode Settings (p. 219) and Excitation Failure Actions (Series
494 Hardware Only) (p. 220).

200 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Setting Description
Invalid Detect
From the Invalid Action list, select the action to perform if the signal becomes
invalid due to a problem with the sensor file. For more information, see <Invalid>
Sensor Assignments (p. 196).

Externally Conditioned Input and Command Signals

About Externally Conditioned Input Signals

You can connect externally conditioned signals to a digital universal conditioner (DUC) or an A-to-D
converter card and use the Station Setup window to set the fullscale, polarity, and gain settings. You can
save these settings in a sensor file or parameter set.

How to Configure an Externally Conditioned Input Signal

1. In the Station Manager window toolbar, select an access level of Calibration.
2. Select the input signal.
a) On the Display menu, choose Station Setup.
b) In the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the externally conditioned input.
3. Configure the calibration settings of the input.
a) Click the Calibration tab.
b) On the Calibration tab, set the sensor inputs Fullscale Min/Max, Polarity, and Gain.
4. Save the conditioner settings for the externally conditioned signal:
• Click Save As to save the calibration settings in a sensor file.
• If that input sensor-file assignment is <Parameter Set>, save the parameter set.

External Readout Devices

About Monitoring Signals Using External Readout Devices

Station signals can be monitored using external scopes and meters connected to TestStar and FlexTest
Controller outputs.
• On TestStar IIs and TestStar IIs AP controllers, monitor signals from connectors J71 and J72.
• On all FlexTest and TestStar IIm controllers, monitor signals from the Analog Output board’s BNC
connectors.
• On automated FlexTest SE controllers, monitor signals from the Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 connectors
on the front panel.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 201

Station Setup

Note:
To externally monitor a signal, you must first use the Station Builder application to assign a
resource to output signals.

How to Configure a Signal for External Readout

1. In the Station Manager window’s Display menu, select Station Setup.
2. In the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, locate and select the Readouts resource to be used to
output the signal.
Selecting a Readouts resource displays the Station Setup window’s Readout panel.

3. In the Readout panel, configure a signal for readout.

a) For Signal, select the signal.
b) Set the Gain and Offset as needed.
With Gain = 1 and Offset = 0 V (default values), a positive full-scale signal = +10 volts and a negative
full-scale signal = -10 volts.

4. To save signal values, in the Station Manager window’s File menu, select Save Parameters.

Calibration Settings

About Sensor Calibration

All sensors require calibration to ensure that their outputs accurately measure the physical condition they
are sensing. Calibration is performed using the Station Manager application.

Sensor calibration data

The calibration process results in sensor calibration data that contains all the conditioner settings for a
specific sensor. You can save this calibration data in a sensor file, parameter set, or Transducer ID module
(Series 493 Hardware only). In the Station Setup window, you can assign calibration data (typically a
sensor file) to each sensor input.

Calibration process
Calibration requires a laboratory standard sensor/conditioner. The laboratory standard sensor is installed
with the sensor you are calibrating so that both are exposed to the same conditions.
During calibration, you command the system to specific values and compare the conditioner’s output to
the output of a laboratory standard sensor/conditioner. You can then use the Station Setup window to
adjust the conditioner settings so that its output matches the output of the laboratory standard.

Calibration schedules
The amount of time between sensor calibrations depends on the sensor type, test requirements, and the
results of periodic shunt-calibration checks.

Shunt calibration verification

The shunt calibration function provides a convenient way to check sensor calibration for sensors that use
a DC conditioner with a bridge circuit.

202 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

About Sensor Calibration Data

When you recalibrate a sensor, you can use the Station Setup window to update the calibration settings
and resave the calibration data in the format assigned to the sensor. You can also use the Sensor File
Editor window to open and update a sensor file with the new calibration settings and save the sensor file.

Access levels
The access level set in the Station Manager application determines what calibration tasks you can perform.
• The Calibration access level allows you to edit and assign calibration data.
• The Tuning access level allows you to assign calibration data but you cannot edit calibration data.

Calibration data
Sensor calibration data includes:
• Sensor serial number and calibration date.
• Conditioner type, serial number, and dimension.
• Calibration type, range definitions, excitation voltage, gain, polarity, and other conditioner settings.
• Basic TEDS sensor information (Series 494 hardware only): sensor manufacturer, model, and serial
number.

Calibration Data for Replacement Sensors

If you replace or add a sensor, you must perform one of the following procedures before using the system:
• If you have a sensor file that contains the sensor calibration data for the new sensor, use the Station
Setup window to assign that sensor file to that sensor input.
• If you have a calibration report from a lab-standard calibration, use the Sensor File Editor to create a
sensor file that contains the calibration data. You can then use the Station Setup window to assign the
sensor file to the sensor input. You could also enter the data and save it in a parameter set.
• If calibration data is not available, you must calibrate the new sensor against a lab standard. You can
then use the Sensor File Editor to enter calibration data and create a sensor file. You can then use the
Station Setup window to assign the sensor file to the sensor input.

Calibration Tab
This tab defines the calibration values that a conditioner applies to its sensor. This tab’s controls vary with
the type of conditioner used.

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels control mode > > Calibration tab.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 203

Station Setup

Calibration Tab

Item Description

Fullscale Min/Max Sets the Current Range minimum and maximum values and the feedback
signal’s display units.
Ranges can be asymmetrical if the Max is greater than or equal to zero and
the Min is less than or equal to zero.

Polarity Sets the polarity of the feedback signal to change how the actuator responds
to commands:
Normal - A positive command can extend or retract the actuator, depending
on system conventions.
Invert - Reverses the actuator’s Normal response.

Resolution Sets the encoder resolution value, typically the value specified in
documentation supplied with the sensor.
(Encoders only)
For Series 793 applications, an encoder yields four times its count rating
per revolution. For example, if you use an encoder that is rated at 120 counts
per revolution, the actual count per revolution would be 480. In this case,
a resolution of 0.5 would yield 240 counts.
If you want to use units different than those supplied in the sensor
documentation, enter the full scale and resolution in the supplied units first,
and then switch to the desired full-scale units. The unit conversion will be
calculated automatically.

Cal Type Sets the type of calibration used for the feedback signal.
The calibration types displayed in this list depend on the conditioner type
selected.
Important: When ordering replacement transducers from MTS,
make sure to use the sensor calibration file supplied with the
transducer.

Gain/Delta-K - Select to use delta K for calibration of sensors. Allows you

to specify the amount of delta K applied to the sensor’s output signal.
Equally negative and positive inputs cause asymmetry in the sensor’s output
signal. Delta K compensates for this asymmetry.
Gain/Linearization (full-range conditioners only) - select this cal type
when you desire to use the legacy linearization algorithm.
Gain/Advanced Linearization (full-range conditioners only) – this cal
type uses an advanced linearization algorithm.

204 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Important: MTS recommends using the newer Gain/Advanced

Linearization setting for all full-range conditioner calibration
applications for Series 494 FlexTest Controllers.

mV/V Pos Tension - Select when a sensor has been calibrated so that a
positive output represents actuator retraction (tension).
mV/V Pos Comp - Select when a sensor has been calibrated so that a
positive output represents actuator extension (compression).

Percent Over Range The amount (expressed as a percent of full scale input) you can over drive
the input of the conditioner without saturating any of the electronics.

Zero Capability The amount (expressed in % of full scale input) of zero suppression you
can apply without saturating the conditioner. Zero suppression is an electrical
(494.21 only)
offset that is applied to the transducer signal before it is summed with the
acceleration signal.

Gain Sets the gain applied to the sensor’s output signal.

Pre-Amp and Total gain cannot be adjusted with hydraulics on.
For mV/V Pos Tension and mV/V Pos Comp calibration types, Gain is a
read-only display.

Pre-Amp Set the coarse gain applied.

Post-Amp Sets the fine gain applied. This control’s range is user adjustable.

Total Displays the total gain applied. This value is a function of Pre-Amp and
Post-Amp values.
Entering a total gain value here causes the Station Manager application to
enter the Pre-Amp and Post-Amp values required to achieve this value.
The displayed value may vary slightly from the actual applied value (not
available for display).

Neg. Compression (mV/V Adjust for the required -mV/V compression sensitivity value.
Pos Tension only)

Pos. Tension (mV/V Pos Adjust for the required +mV/V tension sensitivity value.
Tension only)

Neg. Tension (mV/V Pos Adjust for the required -mV/V tension sensitivity value.
Compression only)

Pos. Compression (mV/V Adjust for the required +mV/V compression value.
Pos Compression only)

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 205

Station Setup

Item Description

Discrete Excitation (Model 494.16/.25/.26 DUCs only) Sets the frequency of the excitation
voltage applied to the sensor.

Excitation (peak) for AC Sets the excitation applied to the sensor. The proper excitation is usually
Conditioners specified by the sensor manufacturer.
Excitation (p-p) for DC Typically AC sensors require a 10 V AC excitation signal and DC sensors
Conditioners require a 10 V DC signal.

Phase (AC only) Adjusts the phase of the feedback signal based on the excitation signal.
Optimal phase adjustments produce the maximum output signal from the
sensor. Phase values are usually between 30º–45º.

Delta K Specifies the amount of delta K applied to the sensor’s output signal.
Equally negative and positive inputs cause asymmetry in the sensor’s output
signal. Delta K compensates for this asymmetry.
For mV/V Pos Tension and mV/V Pos Comp calibration types, Delta K is a
read-only display.

Zero Adjusts the offset applied by the conditioner to the sensor’s output signal
to set this signal’s zero point.
Zero controls vary by conditioner type.

Auto Zero (DC only) Zeroes the sensor signal to make the current output the new zero point.

Fine Zero (if available) Applies a fine zero offset to the sensor’s output signal.

Zero/Balance (DC only) For Model 497.22 DC Conditioners—Provides either pre-amp offset (coarse
zero) or bridge balance control, depending on Model 497.22 DC jumpering.
See the Model 497.22 Dual DC Conditioner manual for more information
about the required jumpering.

Save You cannot save a sensor file while the system is running.
Saves settings from the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt tabs to the current
sensor file.
Displays the Save Sensor File As window if no file has been created.

Restore Restores the values on the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt tabs from the
sensor file or Transducer ID.
Restore is disabled if the input signal does not have a sensor file assigned
or the input signal control mode is the active feedback with the system
hydraulics on.

206 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Shunt Calibration

About Shunt Calibration Checks

A shunt check verifies the calibration accuracy of a sensor/conditioner pair. Only DC conditioners with
bridge circuits require shunt checks.

When to perform shunt calibration

Whenever you start a new test or exchange a DC conditioner module, you may want to perform a shunt
check and compare the Current Shunt Value to the saved Shunt Reference Value. Recalibrate the sensor
if the two values differ by more than 20 mV.

How it works
When you perform a shunt check, a precision shunt-calibration resistor is placed across the transducer
bridge producing a known offset. This offset is used to determine a “shunt voltage” that appears in the
Current Shunt Value box.

Shunt calibration resistors

You must always use the same shunt-calibration resistor that was initially used to determine the shunt
reference value for a particular sensor. If you use a different resistor, the shunt-calibration results for that
sensor are invalid.

Callout Item

1 Shunt Cal Circuit

2 Sensor Bridge

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 207

Station Setup

Callout Item

3 Feedback

4 Excitation

5 Shunt Calibration Circuit

Series 494 DUCs include an HWI Editor setting that allows you to select the leg of the bridge where the
shunt resistor is applied.

Shunt reference values

Only update the Shunt Reference Value after you perform an official calibration using a laboratory standard
reference sensor. You can then apply the shunt-calibration resistor and update the reference value with
the current shunt value. The reference value should not be changed until the next official calibration.

How to Perform a Shunt Calibration Check

1. In the Station Manager window’s Display menu, click Station Setup.
2. In the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, click the sensor input that requires shunt calibration.
3. Click the Shunt tab.
The Shunt Reference values are also available on the Calibration tab of the Station Signals summary
page.

4. Perform the shunt check.

a) As required, select the Current Range that you want to check.
b) In Select Shunt Type, select either (+) Shunt or (-) Shunt (FlexTest IIm systems only).
c)
Click to apply the shunt.
5. Compare the Current Shunt Value to the Shunt Reference Value.
a) In the Shunt Reference Value list, click mV.
b) Recalibrate the sensor if the Reference and Current values differ by more than 20 mV.
6. Click to remove the shunt.
Leaving the Shunt tab or choosing another item in the navigation panel will automatically remove the
shunt.

How to Update the Shunt Reference Value

Only update the Shunt Reference Value after you perform an official calibration using a laboratory standard
reference sensor.
1. In the Station Manager toolbar, select an access level of Calibration.
2. Perform the shunt-calibration procedure.
To make the Current Shunt Value the new Shunt Reference Value, click Update.

208 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Shunt Tab
Use this tab to perform shunt calibration checks of DC conditioner/sensor pairs. Shunt calibration verifies
the operation of the sensor/conditioner pair circuit.
This tab’s controls vary slightly depending on the type of DC conditioner used.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels force control mode > > Shunt tab.

Shunt Tab

Item Description

Gain Sets the gain applied to the sensor’s output signal.

Total and Pre-amp Gain cannot be adjusted with hydraulics on.

Pre-Amp Set the coarse gain applied.

Post-Amp Sets the fine gain applied. This control’s range is user adjustable.

Total Displays the total gain applied. This value is a function of Pre-Amp and
Post-Amp values.
Entering a Total value causes the Station Manager application to enter
the Pre-Amp and Post-Amp values required to achieve this value.

Excitation (p-p) Sets the excitation applied to the sensor. The proper excitation is usually
specified by the sensor manufacturer.
Typically DC sensors require a 10 V DC excitation signal.

Select Shunt Type (+) Shunt—Connects the shunt resistor to a positive arm of the sensor’s
resistive bridge circuit.
(Available for FlexTest IIm only)
(–) Shunt—Connects the shunt resistor to a negative arm of the sensor’s
resistive bridge circuit.

Shunt Reference Value Displays the saved shunt reference value.

Update Makes the Current Shunt Value the new Shunt Reference Value.

Current Shunt Value Displays the current shunt value.

On/Off These buttons apply and remove the shunt.

Save Saves settings from the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt tabs to the
current sensor file.
Displays the Save Sensor File As window if no file has been created.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 209

Station Setup

Item Description

Restore Restores the values on the Sensor, Calibration, and Shunt tabs from
the sensor file or Transducer ID.
Restore is disabled if the input signal does not have a sensor file
assigned or the input signal control mode is the active feedback with
the system hydraulics on.

Offset/Zero Tab Settings

How to Access Offset Zero Settings

Method 1
Click a control mode and then click the Channel Input Signals button to display the settings for that control
mode input.

Method 2
Under the Inputs list, click the input that you want to configure and then click the Offset/Zero tab.

Method 3
On the Station Controls toolbar, click the Auto Offset button to display the Signal Auto Offset window.

210 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

About Feedback Signal Offset

The Auto Offset control in the Station Manager application zeros the output of the conditioner without
shifting the electrical zero reference of the conditioner. An auto offset can be applied to the current control
feedback with station pressure applied.
For example, suppose your LVDT output is 1 cm when the actuator is at its null, midstroke position. You
can compensate for this positive LVDT output by offsetting the feedback signal –1 cm. The actual
displacement value (Current Value) is now zero.

Usable range
Because the range centers around the calibrated electrical zero of the sensor, an offset limits the usable
range in the direction you shift it. For example, in a ±2 cm range, offsetting the signal -1 cm from its zero
position results in control ranges of +1 cm on the positive side and –3 cm on the negative side.

Callout Item

1 Sensor Voltage

2 Conditioner

3 Gain

4 Electrical Zero
Electrical zero is only available on certain types of conditioners.

5 Conditioner Voltage

6 Controller/Application

7 Digital Signal

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 211

Station Setup

Callout Item

8 Offset
The offset applies to the feedback signal. You specify the offset
in engineering units.

Offset considerations
Consider these items before offsetting a feedback signal:
• Offset alters the feedback signal used by the digital (PIDF) controller and is included in the closed-loop
control calculations.
• Offset cannot be used to clear interlocks tripped by signal saturation.
• Offset is limited to ±½ the current full-scale range.
• The usable range is limited in the direction that zero is offset.

Offset/Zero Tab
The Offset/Zero tab provides controls that allow you to apply offsets to an input signal. Any settings made
in the Offset/Zero tab are saved with the parameter set (not in the calibration file).
Note:
You can also use the Signal Auto Offset window, available in the Station Controls toolbar in the
main Station Manager window, to apply an Auto Offset to any input signal.

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels control mode > >Offset/Zero tab (Calibration access
level required).

Item Description

Auto Offset Automatically applies a zeroing offset to the selected conditioner

feedback signal.
Optional—Select the Auto Offset Lock checkbox to disable auto offset
for the Tuning, Operator, and Configuration access levels.

Manual Offset A slider control allows you to manually apply an offset to the selected
conditioner feedback signal.
Note:
If station power is on, this control cannot be used to offset active
control modes.

Electrical Zero The Offset/Zero tab includes settings that allow you to apply offsets to
the conditioner’s sensor signal. Electrical zero settings are only available

212 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

for certain conditioners (such as the Model 493.21B, 494.21, 497.22,

494.47/494.49 used with non-incremental encoders, and Model 497.13).
Note:
If station power is on, Auto Zero and Manual Zero cannot be used
on active control modes.

Auto Zero Automatically applies an offset to zero the selected conditioner’s sensor
signal and zeros the manual offset settin
Optional—Select the Electrical Zero Lock checkbox to disable Auto Zero
for the Tuning and Operator access levels.

Manual Zero Click Manual Zero to apply an offset to make the selected conditioner’s
sensor signal zero.

Current Value Displays the current value (in engineering units) of the selected signal
including the offset.

About Electrical Zero Offset

If you want to shift a small, calibrated sensor range away from the sensor’s calibrated electrical zero, you
can offset the sensor’s electrical output in the conditioner.
A traditional offset shifts the feedback signal and an electrical zero offset shifts the conditioner signal.
An electrical zero offset cannot be applied to a conditioner used in an active control mode with hydraulic
pressure applied.

Callout Item

1 Sensor Voltage

2 Conditioner

3 Gain

4 Electrical Zero

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 213

Station Setup

Callout Item

Electrical zero is only available on certain types of conditioners.

5 Conditioner Voltage

6 Controller/Application

7 Digital Signal

8 Offset
The offset applies to the feedback signal. You specify the offset
in engineering units.

Electrical zero considerations

Consider the following before shifting the electrical zero:
• Unlike the Calibration tab’s conditioner Zero controls, electrical zero values are not used in the delta K
calculation.
• The shifted electrical zero position is not a calibrated zero position.
• You can shift the conditioner’s electrical zero to any position within the sensor’s full-scale capacity, but
your usable range is limited by the sensor’s calibrated full-scale capacity.

Linearization data
Using linearization data requires specific conditioner zeroing practices. Ensure that the Electrical Zero
control on the Offset/Zero tab of the Inputs panel is set to zero. Also, ensure that the Electrical Zero Lock
box is selected. Leaving electrical zero unlocked will invalidate data collected during linearization routines.

About Electrical Zero

Use of Electrical Zero with Gain/Linearization type calibrations

When you perform a Gain/Linearization type calibration on a Model 493.25 DUC in the linearization mode,
you must ensure that the controls pertaining to electrical zero are set properly.
Specifically, you must set:
• The Electrical Zero control on the Offset/Zero tab of the Inputs panel to zero, and
• The Electrical Zero Lock box to enabled.

The state of the Electrical Zero control and the Electrical Zero Lock box is saved in the station parameter
set.

Electrical zero messages

If these conditions are not present when you attempt to load or save a parameter set, the application will
display one of the following messages.

214 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Message Location Message

Message Log Clearing the Electrical Zero Lock box on a Model 493.25 conditioner that
is using full-range calibration is not supported.

Message Log Modifying Electrical Zero on a Model 493.25 conditioner that is using
full-range calibration is not supported.

Dialog Box There are one or more Model 493.25 conditioners in which Electrical
Zero has been modified, and a full-range calibration is defined. This has
the potential to affect calibrations.

About Electrical Zero

Displacement sensors and their corresponding conditioners are typically calibrated so that the conditioner’s
feedback is zero volts at the middle of the actuator’s operating range.
Sensors are typically calibrated with the conditioner’s electrical zero at the midstroke position.

Conditioner Electrical Zero

Callout Description

1 0 volts at midstroke

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 215

Station Setup

Callout Description

2 + 10 volts at full tension

3 – 10 volts at full compression

Calibrated sensor ranges center around the conditioner’s electrical zeroAssume you have an LVDT with
the following calibrated ranges:
• Range 1 = ±4 cm (full scale)
• Range 2 = ±1 cm

Callout Description

1 Range 1

2 Range 2

Zero shift
In some situations, you may want to shift the conditioner’s electrical zero. For example, suppose after
installing your specimen, the resulting feedback saturates in Range 2, the smaller sensor range. Normally,
you could regain control of the saturated channel by switching to Range 1, the larger range, or by switching
from a displacement to a force control mode.
However, if you wanted to use Range 2 for optimal signal resolution, you could shift the electrical zero to
bring the feedback out of saturation.

216 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Callout Description

1 After installing our specimen, the feedback is saturated for Range 2,

the smaller range.

2 You can shift the electrical zero to bring the Range 2 feedback out
of saturation.

3 Range 2 (±1 cm)

4 Sensor Feedback = + 1.3 cm saturated feedback for Range 2 (±1

cm)

5 Shift the electrical zero

6 Sensor Feedback = 0 cm at installed position after shifting zero

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 217

Station Setup

How to Shift a Conditioner’s Electrical Zero

Before shifting the conditioner’s electrical zero, you must first position the actuator at the desired location
and disable the station power or switch to another control mode.
Note:
If it is not possible to switch to a different control mode or you cannot disable station power, use
offset instead of electrical zero.

You can apply an auto zero or a manual zero to shift a conditioner’s electrical zero.
1. In the Station Manager window toolbar, select an access level of Calibration.
2. Apply station power.
3. Use the Manual Command window to position the actuator at the desired electrical zero position:
a) On the Station Controls panel toolbar, click to display the Manual Command window.

b) In this window, select the desired Channel and a Control Mode of displacement.
c) Select the Enable Manual Command check box.
d) Use the Manual Cmd slider to move the actuator to the new zero position.
4. With the actuator in the new zero position, either switch to a different control mode or shut off station
power.
Leave the Enable Manual Command check box enabled and make sure that the actuator does not
move.

5. Select the displacement signal that needs the electrical offset:

a) On the Station Manager window Display menu, select Station Setup.
b) On the Station Setup window navigation pane, locate and select the Channels or Auxiliary Inputs
resource whose sensor signal needs the offset.
6. On the Inputs panel, click the Offset/Zero tab.
7. On the Offset/Zero tab, apply the electrical offset:
a) Clear the Electrical Zero Lock if it is selected.
b) Click Auto Zero to apply the electrical offset.
Manual Zero shows the offset applied to produce the Current Value.
c) Select Electrical Zero Lock to make these controls unavailable at access levels of Tuning and
Operator.
8. Clear the Enable Manual Command check box.

218 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Hardware Tab

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels PIDF control mode > Channel Input Settings Icon >
Hardware Tab
The hardware tabdisplays the following information about hardware resources:
• Resource
• Connector
• Serial Number
• Normalization Date
• Board Revision
• Firmware Revision
• Programmable Logic Device Revision

Excitation Failure Detection

About Excitation Failure Detection

The Limits tab for each channel input allows you to set upper/lower limits and actions, and Excitation
Failure Mode and action settings.
Note:
You can also use the Station Setup Limit Detectors panel (listed under Detectors) to set limits and
actions for all inputs.

Series 493 and 494 Conditioners include circuits that can detect an excitation failure. The most common
cause of an excitation failure occurs when you unplug a sensor. Other causes include damaged cables,
sensors, or conditioner hardware.

Settings
You can use the Station Manager application to configure excitation failure detection for each sensor input.
These settings allow you to turn on/turn off excitation failure detection and define the action taken (Series
494 Hardware only) if the hardware detects an excitation failure.

Message log
Each time an excitation failure is detected, a message is written to the message log. This occurs even
when excitation failure detection is disabled.

Excitation Failure Mode Settings

You can use the Limits tab on the Station Setup window to set the Excitation Failure Mode for each sensor
input.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 219

Station Setup

Setting Description

Enabled Series 493 Hardware—An interlock occurs if an excitation failure

is detected.
Series 494 Hardware—The action selected in the Action list occurs
if an excitation failure is detected. If an excitation failure is detected
on an active mode input, the controller application will force an
interlock.

Disabled No action occurs if the hardware detects an excitation failure.

Note:
Do not disable excitation failure checking unless you are
using sensors with either : 1) An external excitation source,
or 2) High-impedance sensors that do not draw enough
current for the excitation failure circuit to function properly.

Enable when Active (default) If the sensor input signal is the active mode input, the “Interlock”
action occurs if an excitation failure is detected.
If this signal is not used as an active mode input, no actions are
taken if an excitation failure is detected.

Excitation Failure Actions (Series 494 Hardware Only)

When the excitation failure mode is set to “Enabled,” you can choose a specific excitation failure from the
Action list. The action selected from the Action list occurs if an excitation failure for that sensor input is
detected.

Active mode excitation failure

If an excitation failure is detected on an active mode input, the controller application will force an interlock.

Excitation Failure Action Settings

Setting Description

Disabled No action occurs.

Station Power Off Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log,
turns off pressure at the hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and switches
the indicator from green to red.
Note:
A Station Power Off condition must be reset to resume testing.

For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the
.hwi file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is

220 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Setting Description

turned off. If the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain
on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the
.hwi file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will
be turned off only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If
the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

Interlock Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log,
clamps the servovalve (if enabled in the .hwi file), turns off pressure
at the hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and switches the indicator
from green to red.
Note:
An Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the
.hwi file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is
turned off. If the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain
on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the
.hwi file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will
be turned off only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If
the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

Program Stop Interlock Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log,
and switches the indicator from green to red. Produces the same action
as clicking the Program Stop button on the Station Controls panel.
Note:
A Program Stop Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Program Hold Interlock Places a hold on any program command, writes a message to the
Message Log, and switches the indicator from green to red. Produces
the same action as clicking the Program Hold button on the Station
Controls panel.
Note:
A Program Hold Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Note:
The Function Generator does not recognize Program Hold or
Program Hold Interlock, but instead goes to Stop.

How to Define the Excitation Failure Mode and Actions

If necessary, perform this procedure for each sensor input.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 221

Station Setup

1. Change the user access level to Configuration.

2. In the Station Setup window navigation pane, select a sensor input signal and click the Limits tab.

3. From the Excitation Failure Mode list, choose one of the following excitation failure modes:
• Enabled
• Disabled
• Enable when Active (default)

4. If the Excitation Failure Mode is set to Enabled from the Action list, select the action that will occur if
an excitation failure is detected (Series 494 Hardware only).
Excitation Failure Actions include:
• Station Power Off
• Interlock
• Program Stop Interlock
• Program Hold Interlock

TEDS Sensors

About TEDS Sensors

Note:
Only controllers that use Series 494 Hardware support the use of MTS TEDS (transducer electronic
data sheet) sensors.

TEDS sensors have built-in memory chips that store basic TEDS information (manufacturer, model, number,
and serial number).
When you connect an initialized TEDS device to a conditioner, the Station Manager application reads the
basic TEDS information from the device, and a sensor assignment window appears.

222 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

The sensor file list in this window only lists sensor files that match the basic TEDS information, conditioner
type, and dimension. The sensor assignment window contains the same sensor assignment list found in
the Station Setup window.

TEDS devices
Available TEDS devices include:
• MTS sensors that include basic TEDS information saved in an integral TEDS chip that is built into the
sensor.
• MTS TEDS Transducer ID modules that include a chip that stores basic TEDS information for a specific
sensor. The TEDS module connects to the sensor.

About Calibration Data for TEDS Sensors

There are two methods that you can use to assign calibration data to a TEDS Sensor:

Station Setup
If the sensor is already connected to the system, you can use the Station Setup window to assign calibration
data to the TEDS sensor.

Plug and play

When you plug a TEDS sensor into a controller that is powered up and running the Station Manager
application, a window appears that provides a list of sensor files that you can assign to the sensor input.
This list only includes sensor files that match the sensor’s conditioner type, dimension, and basic TEDS
information.
Note:
Only controllers that use Series 494 Hardware support the use of MTS TEDS (transducer electronic
data sheet) sensors.

How to Assign Calibration Data to a TEDS Sensor

Only controllers that use Series 494 Hardware support the use of MTS TEDS (transducer electronic data
sheet) sensors.
1. Plug a TEDS sensor into a Series 494 Conditioner (DUC). The Station Manager application:
• Reads the basic TEDS information from the chip.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 223

Station Setup

• Creates a list of sensor files that match the sensor’s conditioner type, dimension, and basic TEDS
information.
• Displays a sensor assignment window.
Note:
This window performs the same function as the Sensor File list in the Station Setup window.

2. From the list, choose the sensor calibration source that you want to assign to the sensor input and click
OK.

How to Replace a TEDS Sensor with a Non-TEDS Sensor (Series 494

Hardware Only)
If you disconnect a TEDS sensor and plug in a non-TEDS sensor into the same conditioner, the new sensor
will use the calibration data previously assigned to the TEDS sensor. To avoid this situation, click Reset
in the Station Control panel after you replace the sensor.

Warning:
Running a test after replacing a TEDS sensor with a non-TEDS sensor can result in unexpected
actuator movement and invalid test data.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path. Running a test with an uncalibrated sensor
can damage test specimens and invalidate test data.
On the Station Control panel, click Reset after you unplug a TEDS sensor and plug a different
non-TEDS sensor into the same connector.

To turn on plug-and-play functionality when replacing a TEDS sensor with a non-TEDS sensor, make sure
that the following requirements are met:
• The TEDS sensor that you are replacing must have a non-zero excitation setting.
• Excitation failure detection for the TEDS sensor must be enabled.

To replace a TEDS sensor with a non-TEDS sensor:

1. Disconnect the TEDS sensor from the conditioner.
2. Connect the non-TEDS sensor to the same connector on the conditioner.
The excitation setting for the non-TEDS sensor must be set to a nonzero value.

224 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

3. On the Station Control panel, click Reset to display the sensor assignment window.
This list includes sensor files that match the sensor’s conditioner type, dimension, and whose basic
TEDS information is set to zero (non-TEDS).

4. Assign the correct calibration data to the non-TEDS sensor.

Transducer ID Modules

About Transducer ID Modules (Series 493 Conditioners Only)

Optional Transducer ID modules are attached to a sensor and can store sensor calibration data for that
sensor. Transducer ID modules make it easier to change sensors since the calibration information stays
with the sensor.
Note:
Transducer ID modules are not available for FlexTest IIm/CTC/CTM, FlexTest 40, FlexTest 60,
FlexTest 100, or FlexTest 200 controllers.

A transducer ID module includes:

• A transducer ID circuit with calibration information
• A shunt-calibration resistor
• Up to three bridge-completion resistors

How to Assign a Transducer ID Module to a Sensor Input

Transducer ID modules can only be used with Series 493 Conditioners.
1. Connect a transducer ID module to the sensor.
2. Display the Station Setup window.
a) On the Station Manager window toolbar, select an access level of Tuning.
b) On the Station Manager window Display menu, click Station Setup.
3. In the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the sensor input where the Transducer ID module
is connected.
4. Change the sensor input sensor-file assignment to <Transducer ID>.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 225

Station Setup

a) In the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the sensor input where the Transducer ID
module is connected.
b) Click the Sensor tab.
c) In the Sensor File list, click <Transducer ID>.
d) Click Show Trans ID to display the Transducer ID contents. Verify that the sensor assignment is
correct.
e) Click Assign.

How to Save Sensor Calibration Data to a Transducer ID Module

Perform this procedure when you install a new transducer ID module or when you update sensor calibration
data.
1. Make sure that a transducer ID module is connected to the sensor.
2. Update the calibration data.
a) Select a Station Manager access level of Calibration and display the Station Setup window.
b) In the Station Setup window, select the sensor input that includes the Transducer ID module that
requires updated sensor calibration data.
c) On the Calibration tab, update the calibration settings.
3. Click Save As to save the sensor calibration data to the sensor input’s transducer ID module.

Sync Current Channel Button

About Sync Current Channel

Clicking the Station Setup Sync Current Channel button applies the current channel and control mode
selections on the Station Setup to the function generator. The Function Generator slider settings will be
updated to reflect this selection.
If the function generator is running or is in group mode, clicking the Sync Current Channel button will not
make any changes to the function generator.
The Station Setup Sync Current Channel button can also apply the current Station Setup channel selection
to both Channel selections on a scope display. First, click the two-state Sync Station Channel button
on the Scope Toolbar to set the “sync” state, and then click on the Station Setup window. The control
mode setting will remain the same.
The Sync Current Channel feature effectively “synchronizes” channel selection for the function generator
and scope. This feature facilitates the setup and tuning of systems with a large number of channels.

226 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Channel Drive Settings

How to Access Channel Drive Settings

Method 1
Click a control mode and then click the Channel Input Signals button to display the settings for that control
mode input.

Method 2
In the Station Setup list, click Channels and then click the Drive tab to display a limited number of channel
drive settings.

Channel Status–Drive Tab

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Drive tab

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 227

Station Setup

This tab displays editable servovalve drive signal parameters for each control channel based on the type
of valve driver used by a channel.
Note:
To edit any item requires Tuning access level (or higher).

Drive Panel Settings—Two-Stage Valves

This panel configures control channel drive signals for two-stage valve drivers. The panel controls vary
with the type of valve driver used.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Control Channel n >
Note:
Editing requires Tuning access level (or higher).

Drive Panel Settings for Two-Stage Valve Drivers

Item Description

Fullscale Min/Max Displays the valve driver’s full minimum and maximum output values.

Polarity Sets the polarity of the valve drive signal to Normal or Invert.
The Polarity cannot be changed when station pressure is on.

Valve Balance Compensates for minor mechanical imbalances in the servovalve.

A second Valve Balance displays if you have dual valves. For more
information, see “How to Balance Dual Valves” in the MTS Series
793 Tuning and Calibration manual.

Dither Amplitude Adjusts the amplitude of the dither signal.

Dither Frequency For Model 493.14 Valve Drivers—Adjusts the dither signal frequency.

Output Delta-K Specifies the ratio between the two unequal surface areas of a
single-ended actuator piston (double-ended actuators have
(also known as Piston Area Ratio)
equal-area piston surfaces). This ratio is used to scale the valve
drive signal so it is the same for positive and negative commands
of the same magnitude.
The actuator piston parameter is set as a direct ratio. For example,
if you know that the area ratio between the two piston ends in 1:1,
set the parameter to 1. If you know the area ratio is 2:1, set the
parameter to 2, and so on.

Output Limit Enable Select to turn on and set the output limits.

228 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

LED State (Series 494 Hardware Each mezzanine card connector on a Model 494.40 I/O Carrier
only) Board includes an LED that you can switch on and off using the LED
State check box. Select the check box to switch the LED on. Click
to clear the check box to switch the LED off.

Service Port Output (Model 494.16 On FlexTest 40, 60, 100, and 200 controllers, monitors signals from
only) the Model 494.16 VD/DUC through the Model 494.40 I/O Carrier
card’s Service connector.
Select a signal to monitor:
A/D Input—Conditioned feedback signal from the DUC portion of
the Model 494.16.
+Ex Voltage—The excitation sense voltage delivered to the
transducer.
Preamp Output—(transducer output) x (preamp gain).
Sumamp Output—A slightly attenuated, inverted version of the
preamp output signal. In some custom applications, the preamp
output signal may be summed with an external signal.
Valve Current 1—Final output current to the servovalve expressed
in voltage. The current-to-voltage relationship is 5 V DC = 50 mA,
The maximum valve current depends on the .hwi Range setting for
the valve driver.
Valve Current 2—Final output current to the servovalve expressed
in voltage. The current-to-voltage relationship is 5 V DC = 50 mA,
The maximum valve current depends on the .hwi Range setting for
the valve driver.
The service port selections are not saved with the parameter set.

Dual Valve Driver Settings

For each channel that uses a dual valve driver, the following editable parameters are displayed. These
parameters can also be set on the Station Setup Drive panel.

Drive Panel (Dual Valve)

Item Description

Polarity Sets the polarity for each dual valve control channel drive signal.

Valve Balance 1/2 Sets the valve balance setting for each dual valve control channel.

Dither Amplitude Sets the amplitude of the dither signal for each dual valve control channel.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 229

Station Setup

Valve Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers

Use this tab to configure the drive signal output of three-stage valve drivers.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Control Channel n > > Valve tab
Note:
To edit any item requires Tuning access level (or higher).

Valve Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers

Item Description

Fullscale Min/Max Displays the valve driver’s fullscale minimum and maximum output
values.

Polarity Sets the polarity of the valve drive signal to Normal or Invert.
Polarity cannot be changed with station pressure on.

Valve Balance Compensates for minor mechanical imbalances in the servovalve.

Dither Amplitude Adjusts the amplitude of the dither signal.

Dither Frequency Adjusts the dither signal frequency for Model 493.15 Three-Stage
Valve Drivers.

Output Delta-K Specifies the ratio between the two unequal surface areas of a
single-ended actuator piston (double-ended actuators have
(also known as piston area ratio)
equal-area piston surfaces). This ratio is used to scale the valve
drive signal so it is the same for positive and negative commands
of the same magnitude.
The actuator piston parameter is set as a direct ratio. For example,
if the area ratio between the two piston ends in 1:1, set the parameter
to 1. If the area ratio is 2:1, set the parameter to 2, and so on.

Output Limit Enable Allows you to define maximum and minimum limits of the output
hardware resource, typically to prevent applying voltages to external
devices that exceed their specifications.

Output Min/Max Specifies independent maximum and minimum output limits.

Service Port Output (TestStar IIs, On TestStar IIs controllers, monitors signals through the J48 Service
TestStar IIm, FlexTest GT connector.
Controllers)
On TestStar IIm and FlexTest GT controllers, monitors signals
through the Model 493.40 I/O Carrier Card’s J3 Service Connector.

230 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Select an inner loop signal to monitor:

Valve Current—Final output to the servovalve expressed in voltage.
The current-to-voltage relationship is 10 V DC = 50 mA (or 25 mA),
depending on the .hwi file setting.
Inner Loop Command—Input signal to the three-stage valve driver.
Demod Filter Output—The analog output of the demodulator prior
to gain.
Spool Offset—Signal is summed with spool position to remove any
DC offset. ±10 V represents ±4 V of zero summing.
Spool Position—The Conditioner Out signal summed with the Spool
Zero signal.
Preamp Output—The raw AC input from the spool LVDT.
Conditioner Out—Conditioned feedback signal from the servovalve’s
inner loop displacement sensor.
Voltage Reference (5V) —Internal board reference test only.

Service Port Output (Model 494.16 On FlexTest 40, 60, 100, and 200 controllers, monitors signals from
VD/DUC only) the Model 494.16 VD/DUC through the Model 494.40 I/O Carrier
card’s Service connector.
Select a signal to monitor:
Valve Current 1—Final output current to the servovalve expressed
in voltage. The current-to-voltage relationship is 5 V DC = 50 mA,
The maximum valve current depends on the .hwi Range setting for
the valve driver.
Valve Current 2—Final output current to the servovalve expressed
in voltage. The current-to-voltage relationship is 5 V DC = 50 mA,
The maximum valve current depends on the .hwi Range setting for
the valve driver.
Inner Loop Command (firmware generated)—Input signal to the
three-stage valve driver which is used by the inner-loop controller.
Spool Position (firmware generated)—The spool position signal used
by the inner-loop controller.
Inner Loop Error (firmware generated)—Error signal of the inner-loop
controller.
Sumamp Output—A slightly attenuated, inverted version of the
preamp output signal. In some custom applications, the preamp
output signal may be summed with an external signal.
Preamp Output—(transducer output) x (preamp gain).
A/D Input—Conditioned feedback signal from the DUC portion of
the Model 494.16.
+Ex Voltage—The + excitation voltage delivered to the transducer.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 231

Station Setup

Item Description

These service port selections are saved with the parameter set.

LED State (Series 494 Hardware Each mezzanine card connector on a Model 494.40 I/O Carrier board
only) includes an LED that you can switch on and off. Select the check
box to switch the LED on. Click to clear the check box to switch the
LED off.

Monitor Mux Output (FlexTest IIm On FlexTest IIm controllers, monitors signals through the Model
and FlexTest CTC controllers) 497.15’s front panel tip jacks.
Select an inner loop signal to monitor:
Valve Current—Final output to the servovalve expressed in voltage.
The relationship of current-to-voltage is 10 V DC = 50 mA.
Valve Balance—Amount of valve balance command applied by the
Valve tab’s Valve Balance control.
Inner Loop Command—Input signal to the three-stage valve driver.
Inner Loop Error—Inner Loop Command summed with the
Conditioner Out signal.
Spool Position—Conditioner Out signal summed with the Spool Zero
signal.
Conditioner Out—Conditioned feedback signal from the servovalve’s
inner loop displacement sensor.
Spool Zero—Amount of offset introduced by the Conditioner tab’s
Offset control.
Ground—Signal common.

Inner Loop Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers

Use this tab to define the inner loop tuning values.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Control Channel n > > Inner Loop tab
Note:
To edit any item requires Tuning access level (or higher.)

Inner Loop Tab for Three-Stage Valve Drivers

Item Description

Inner Loop Gain Sets the inner loop’s proportional gain, which affects the inner loop
response of the pilot valve.

232 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Inner Loop Rate Sets the inner loop’s derivative gain, which affects the servovalve’s
stability at higher inner loop gain settings.

Rate Input Selection Spool Position—Sets the feedback from the servovalve’s spool as
the rate input. Most systems use this setting.
Inner Loop Error—Sets the inner loop error as the rate input. This
is the difference between spool position feedback and spool position
command.

Conditioner Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers

Use this tab to define the inner loop conditioner values.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Control Channel n > > Conditioner tab
Note:
To edit any item requires Tuning access level (or higher.)

Conditioner Tab Settings for Three-Stage Valve Drivers

Item Description

Excitation Frequency (Model 494.16 VD/DUC only) Sets AC excitation frequency that the
conditioner applies to the servovalve’s sensor spool.

Excitation (peak) Sets the amount of peak AC excitation that the conditioner applies
to the servovalve’s sensor spool.

Phase Sets the phase for the demodulation circuitry that receives the
sensor’s output.
The sensor’s output rides on the conditioner’s excitation signal,
which is an AC signal. An optimal phase shift yields the maximum
DC output from the conditioner.

Offset Sets the offset applied by the conditioner to the sensor’s output
signal.

Gain Sets the amount of gain applied by the conditioner to the sensor’s
output signal.
Gain values affect tuning settings and the noise sensitivity of the
valve command.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 233

Station Setup

Item Description

Polarity Sets the polarity of the spool output or inner loop output signal to
Normal or Invert.
Polarity cannot be changed when the station pressure is on.

Calculated Drive Signals Not Assigned Hardware Reference

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels > Control Channel n (with calculated output) > >
Calculated

Calculated Drive Signals Not Assigned Hardware

Item Description

Calculated Specifies the calculated resource(s) that use the drive signal output
of the selected channel.

About Program Outputs

Program output channels send analog program commands to external controllers such as the Series 407
Controller and temperature controllers.
External programmers can:
• Use the Station Manager application’s advanced programming resources.
• Accommodate sensors that require special conditioning.

You must use the Station Builder application to create a Program Only, Program with Feedback, Program
and Control, or Command Plus Error program output channel using an analog output before the Station
Manager application can output a program to an external programmer.

How to Adjust Program Output Signals

1. On the Station Manager window toolbar, select an access level of Tuning.
2. On the Station Manager window Display menu, select Station Setup.
3. On the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the channel you want to adjust.
4. On the Station Setup window, click (channel drive).

234 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Warning:
Changes in drive values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected actuator
movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing drive values.

5. On the Drive panel, make the following settings:

Program Output Settings

Channel Type Settings

Program and Control Set the Polarity, Valve Balance, Dither Amplitude, and Dither
Frequency.

Program w/Feedback Set Polarity, Gain, and Offset.

Program Only Set the Polarity, Gain, and Offset and program output Fullscale
Min/Max values.
Note:
Fullscale Min/Max units and values may vary, depending
on the device being driven.

Channel Groups

About Channel Groups

You can create Master Command and Master Span channel groups that allow the Station Manager
application to control individual actuators in a multichannel station as a unit.
A channel group allows these four actuators to be controlled as a single unit.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 235

Station Setup

Master Command groups

A Master Command channel group receives a common command signal. Use the Channel Options window
Master Command tab to define Master Command groups.
Commands are applied to a Master Command group through:
• The Station Manager Function Generator panel.
• The Manual Command window.
• The Setpoint and Span window.

Master Span groups

A Master Span channel group has a common span. Use the Channel Options window’s Master Span tab
to define Master Span groups.
The span for a Master Span group is adjusted through the Station Manager window’s Station Controls
panel’s Master Span.

How to Create a Master Command Group

1. Select a Station Manager access level of Tuning or Calibration.
2. If required, clear the Exclusive Control check box.
3. On the Tools menu, click Channel Options.
4. In the Channel Options window, click the Master Command tab.
5. On the Master Command tab, define a Master Command group:
a) Click Add Group and enter the new Group Name.
b) Select the Channel Dimension to be used by the group. This selection determines the Available
Channels/Modes.
c) Select an Available Channel Mode and click the > button to add it to the Master Command Group.

236 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

To remove a Channel Mode from the Master Command Group, select the Channel Mode and click
the < button.

How to Create a Master Span Group

1. Select a Station Manager access level of Tuning or Calibration.
2. On the Tools menu, click Channel Options.
3. In the Channel Options window, click the Master Span tab.
4. On the Master Span tab, define a Master Span group:
a) Click in Available Channels to select channels.
b) Use the < > buttons to move highlighted selections between Available Channels and Master Span
Channels.
By default, all channels start off as Master Span Channels.
The Station Controls panel’s Master Span becomes unavailable if no Master Span Channels are
selected.

Master Span Group Errors

If the Master Span Channels list does not include all channels, deleting or renaming a channel that appears
in the Master Span Channels list will disable the Master Span control when the station is opened. A log
message states that Master Span is disabled and that you must edit the Master Span Channels list to
enable the Master Span control.
If all channels appear in the Master Span Channels list, any configuration changes (such as name changes)
appear in the list and the Master Span Control remains enabled.

Channel Tuning Settings

How to Access Channel Tuning Settings

Method 1
Click a control mode and then click the Channel Tuning button to display the settings for that control mode
input.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 237

Station Setup

Method 2
In the Station Setup list, click Channels and then click the Tuning tab.

Adjustments Tab—PIDF Control Modes

This tab’s controls tune selected PIDF control modes for stability and accurate response to commands.
The controls vary with the type of control mode being tuned.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels PIDF control mode > > Adjustments tab

238 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Adjustments Tab—PIDF Control Modes

Item Description

Enabled Click the Enabled checkbox to allow the selected control mode to be
active with hydraulics running. You must acknowledge the tuning
settings in order to enable a control mode for use in a new configuration.

P Gain Adjusts the proportional gain applied to the selected control mode.

I Gain Adjusts the integral gain applied to the selected control mode.

D Gain Adjusts the derivative gain applied to the selected control mode.

F Gain Adjusts the feed forward gain applied to the selected control mode
before the forward loop filter.

F2 Gain Adjusts the feed forward gain applied to the selected control mode after
the forward loop filter.

S Gain Adjusts the stabilization gain applied to the selected control mode.
S2 Gain (system option) Stabilization is typically used to enhance stability in systems that move
large masses at high speeds.
For S Gain to be available, the configuration file must include a
stabilization resource in the channel.
Stabilization 2 (S2) is a system option. For information about obtaining
this control, contact MTS.

FL Filter Adjusts the forward loop filter applied to the selected control mode.

Show References Select to display the Refs column.

Base Control Mode (Cascaded Identifies the base control mode of Cascaded PIDF and Dual
PIDF and Dual Compensation Compensation control modes. The base control mode contains
modes only) independent tuning controls. The performance of composite control
modes are affected by the tuning state of their base control modes.

Refs Displays tuning reference values.

Refs values are saved in the parameter set. To save current PIDF
values for reference, copy them to Refs, and then save the parameter
set.
> Copies all PIDF values to Refs.
< Copies all Refs values to the current PIDF values.
< > Swaps all PIDF values with a Refs values.
— Replaces the current PIDF values with saved parameter set values.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 239

Station Setup

Adjustments Tab - CLC Control Modes

Use this tab to set up and tune channel limited channel (CLC) control modes. CLC control mode can be
selected when using Manual Command to install a specimen. The CLC control mode is typically set up as
displacement control with a force signal as the limiting input. CLC limits (typically force) limit the amount
of force that can be applied during specimen installation.
Note:
The Station Builder application is used to create CLC control modes.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels CLC control mode > > Adjustments tab

For more information

For more information on how to create and tune a CLC control mode, see How to Create a Channel Limited
Channel (CLC) Control Mode (p. 96) and About CLC Tuning (p. 242).
Important:
The performance of a CLC control mode is affected by the servo valve’s mechanical balance
adjustment. An unbalanced servo valve can cause a CLC channel to exceed the CLC limit settings.
Before attempting to tune a CLC channel, make sure that the servo valve is properly balanced.

Adjustments Tab - CLC Control Modes

Item Description

Enabled Click the Enabled checkbox to allow the selected control mode to be active
with hydraulics running. You must acknowledge the tuning settings in order
to enable a control mode for use in a new configuration.

Active P Gain Adjusts the gain applied to the active control mode (typically displacement).
The gain settings for the active control mode are usually set to normal
Active I Gain
values and the limiting gain settings are used to optimize the system
response within the CLC bands.

Limiting P Gain Adjusts the proportional gain applied to the limiting control mode (typically
force). Limiting P Gain is applied only when the force signal is within the
Limiting I Gain
upper and lower limit bands set by the Bandwidth control.
Important:
Use the “Limiting P Gain” setting to optimize the CLC system
response. If the actuator responds too slowly, leave the Active gain
settings at normal levels and increase the limiting P Gain to increase
the response.

Upper Limit/ Lower Limit Sets the CLC control mode’s upper and lower limits (typically force). These
limits define where the CLC bandwidths end. When using Manual Command

240 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

set to CLC, as the force signal value enters the user-defined CLC band,
channel limiting starts to slow the actuator response. If a force limit is
reached, the limiting channel prevents further actuator movement,
regardless of the displacement command.
To provide a greater range of actuator movement without CLC limiting the
response, only set the limits that will apply to specimen installation. For
example, if you are testing in compression only, set the tension limit to a
high value. For tension testing, set the compression limit to a high value.

Bandwidth Sets the bands in which Limiting P Gain is applied.

• Anytime the limiting signal is within the band, channel limiting is applied.
• The amount of channel limiting applied increases as the limiting signal
goes further into the band and will stop actuator movement when it
reaches one of the limits.

Important:
Decreasing the bandwidth or moving the limits further apart will
increase the range of control that is not affected by channel limiting.

The limit settings define where the CLC bandwidths end.

1. Bandwidth - Anytime the limiting signal is within the upper or lower band,
channel limiting is applied to slow the system response.
2. Upper Limit - channel limiting will stop actuator movement when the
upper limit is reached.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 241

Station Setup

Item Description

3. Lower Limit - channel limiting will stop actuator movement when the
lower limit is reached.

About CLC Tuning

When you initially set up and tune a CLC control mode, start by setting all the gain settings to the values
used in the channel’s regular control modes (usually displacement and force). If the CLC control is not
responsive enough, increase the Limiting P Gain in small increments until the system responds properly.
Other factors that may affect the CLC control-mode response include the limit and bandwidth settings:
• Anytime the limiting signal is within the bandwidth, channel limiting is applied.
• The amount of channel limiting applied increases as the limiting signal goes further into the bandwidth
and will stop actuator movement when it reaches one of the limits.
• Decreasing the bandwidth or moving the limits further apart will increase the range of control that is
not affected by channel limiting.

Important:
The performance of a CLC control mode is affected by the servo valve’s mechanical balance
adjustment. An unbalanced servo valve can cause a CLC channel to exceed the CLC limit settings.
Before attempting to tune a CLC channel, make sure that the servo valve is properly balanced.

Filter Tab
This tab applies filtering to the selected control mode. Filtering reduces the system’s resonance responses,
allowing increased gain settings for better system response.
The default setting allows you to select and configure a second-order filter. If additional filtering is required,
click the + button to add additional filters. This allows you to cascade filters of the same type to create
higher-order filtering or add different types of filters that address different issues.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels PIDF control mode > > Filter tab

Filter Tab

Item Description

Forward Loop Selects filter types:

Filter No Filter - Applies no filtering.
Low-pass - Attenuates signals above a specified Low-pass frequency.
Band-stop - Attenuates signals within a Bandwidth at a specified Notch
frequency.

242 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Break-Recover - Attenuates signals above the Break frequency. Phase

lag of the filter is reduced at higher frequencies by limiting the filter
attenuation at frequencies above the Recover frequency.
Lead-Lag - Applies a lead-lag compensator with a maximum of 2 poles
(lag) and 2 zeros (lead). Signals will be attenuated above the Pole 1
and Pole 2 frequencies. Phase lag of the filter can be reduced at higher
frequencies by limiting the filter attenuation at frequencies above the
Zero 1 and Zero 2 frequencies.

+/- buttons
Add or remove filters.

Display Name
Edit the name of the filter.

Frequency For a Low-pass filter, attenuation occurs above this value.

Notch For a Band-stop filter, attenuation occurs in a Bandwidth around this

frequency value.

Bandwidth For Band-stop filters only - Sets the band around the Notch frequency
in which attenuation occurs.
For example, setting the Notch frequency to 400 Hz and the Bandwidth
to 100 Hz attenuates signals that have frequencies between 350-450
Hz.

Stabilization Filter The Stabilization control is available only for control modes that are
equipped with stabilization.
Stabilization 2 Filter (system
option) The Stabilization 2 control is a system option. For information about
obtaining this control, contact MTS.
Selects filter types:
1 Hz High-pass - Attenuates signals below 1 Hz. This filter is the default
Stabilization filter selection. It is compatible with configurations created
prior to Version 3.1 of Series 793 applications.
Band-pass - Attenuates signals outside of the band defined by the
Frequency Limits control. This selection provides additional tuning
capability for systems with complex tuning characteristics.

Frequency Limits For Band-pass filters only - Sets the upper and lower frequency limits
of the band outside of which signal attenuation occurs.
For example, setting the lower frequency to 10 Hz and the upper
frequency to 200 Hz creates a 190 Hz band in which signals can pass
without attenuation.

Limit Sets the maximum integrator value as a percentage of full-scale output.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 243

Station Setup

Limiting Tab
Configuration access level is required to modify clamping settings on this tab.

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels PIDF control mode > Channel Tuning Icon > Limiting
Tab

Limiting Tab

Item Description

Upper Clamp Limit/Lower Use the slider to define the upper and lower limits.
Clamp Limit
If the control mode is a cascaded control mode, then the clamp limit
dimensions will be the dimension of the inner control mode. If the control
mode is not a cascaded control mode, then the dimension will be in Volts.

Clamp Polarity This value applies to the entire selection and indicates if clamping is turned
on or off based on the value of the I/Os and their trigger value.
Normal-Clamping is active if signals and their trigger values match.
Inverted-Clamping is inactive if signals and their trigger values match.

Available/Included list Displays all signals available for clamping event. Move signals between
the Available to Included lists with the arrow buttons or by double-clicking
signal names.
The digital I/Os in the Included list are used to determine the clamping
state. Any number of I/Os can be selected here.

Signal Dropdown list displays all signals added to Included list.

Trigger Select High or Low for each signal selected above.

Advanced Tab

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels PIDF/CLC control mode > > Advanced tab

Advanced Tab

Item Description

Integrator Limit Sets the maximum integrator value as a percentage of full-scale output.

244 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Controller Output Limit Sets the maximum controller output as a percentage of full-scale output
(up to a maximum of 500% full-scale output). This control is independent
of the Output Limit Enable control associated with the output resource).

Remote Setpoint Null Pace Band These settings determine the remote setpoint null pace tolerance band
(in absolute engineering units) for a displacement control mode. Each
displacement control mode has its own setpoint null pace band setting.
Remote setpoint null pace settings are saved in parameter sets.
When you use a setpoint device (such as a handset) to position the
actuator, any time the error exceeds the null pace band setting, the
setpoint command will stop. The setpoint will not resume until the
feedback catches up with the command and the error is within the
setpoint null pace band.
Remote setpoint null pacing does not affect Manual command, the
Setpoint slider control, or Park and Ride controls.

Local Integrator Control You must be at the Tuning access level to change this control.
Station Select (default)—Sets the local integrator mode to the integrator
mode set with the Station Integrator Control (Tools > Station Options
> Station View Options). The station integrator is associated with all of
the channels (and associated control modes) in the station. The local
integrator is associated with the selected control mode.
The Auto-High and Auto-Low settings override the integrator mode set
with the Station Integrator Control.
From any integrator mode, the local integrator will turn off when system
hydraulics are turned off.
Auto-High—Turns on the local integrator when hydraulics are set to
High.
Auto-Low—Turns on the local integrator when hydraulics are set to
Low.

Integrator Inhibit You must have Tuning access level to modify this control.
This control displays all digital inputs in a dropdown list. You can select
any digital input in order to determine when a control mode's integrator
turns on.
When a digital input is selected, it determines when the integrator for
that control mode can operate.

Show F Gain Select or deselect these checkboxes to display the related controls on
the Adjustments tab.
Show F2 Gain
Show S Gain
Show S2 Gain

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 245

Station Setup

Item Description

Show PF Gain

Auto-Tuning Control Panel

This control panel automatically calculates tuning values for PIDF control modes.

Access

Panel Buttons >

Auto-Tuning Control Panel

Item Description

Control Channel Selects the control channel to auto-tune.

Control Mode Selects the control mode to be in when auto-tuning. This mode setting
can be different than the “Mode to Tune” setting.

Mode to Tune Selects the mode that is to be tuned.

Active Mode Displays the active control mode.

Auto-Tuning Type Selects an auto-tuning type.

Basic—When you run Basic auto-tuning, the auto-tuner disregards your
current PIDF gain settings and exercises the actuator to within 80% of
the Upper Limit and the Lower Limit.
Advanced—When you run Advanced auto-tuning, the auto-tuner first
does basic auto-tuning. It then runs a sine sweep to exercise the
actuator to within 20% of the Upper Limit and the Lower Limit. This
selection enables Tracking and Sweep Freq.
Advanced Only—When you run Advanced Only auto-tuning, the
auto-tuner skips basic auto-tuning and immediately runs a sine sweep
to exercise the actuator to within 20% of the Upper Limit and the Lower
Limit. This selection enables Tracking and Sweep Freq.

Actuator Type Normal—Uses tuning algorithms for non-hydrostatic actuators.

Hydrostatic—Uses tuning algorithms for hydrostatic actuators.

Upper Limit/ Lower Limit Sets the limits within which the actuator moves.
The Station Manager application stops auto-tuning and trips an interlock
if the actuator exceeds these limits.

246 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Tracking Enabled by an Auto-Tuning Type selection of Advanced or Advanced

Only.
Sets how aggressively Advanced and Advanced Only tuning tunes the
actuator.
The default setting is 50%. Set the Tracking higher to tune the system
“hotter” and lower to tune the system “cooler.”
Tracking values that are too high may produce tuning values that result
in system instability.

Sweep Freq Enabled by an Auto-Tuning Type selection of Advanced or Advanced

Only.
Sets the upper frequency limit of the Advanced and Advanced Only
sweep function. The default setting is 20 Hz.
For successful Advanced and Advanced Only auto-tuning, set the sweep
frequency to create a phase shift greater than 90º for 0% tracking and
135º for 100% tracking between the command and compensated
command.

Results Displays tuning results.

New Values Displays the new calculated auto-tuning values.

Current Displays the current tuning values used for this control mode.
The Station Setup window’s Adjustments tab also displays these values.

Accept Transfers New Values to Current values and enters these values in the
Station Setup window’s Adjustments tab.

Channel Compensators

How to Access Channel Compensator Settings

Method 1
Click a control mode and then click the Channel Compensators button to display the settings for that control
mode input.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 247

Station Setup

Method 2
In the Station Setup list, click Channels and then click the Compensators tab.

About Compensators
Compensators compare the command with the corresponding sensor feedback to ensure that the command
is fully applied to the specimen. If the sensor feedback indicates the specimen is not reaching the
commanded levels, the compensator alters the command until the desired result is achieved.
For example, suppose the program source is a sine wave that calls for a ±10 cm displacement, and the
LVDT feedback only achieves ±9 cm. A peak/valley compensator monitors the feedback and automatically
boosts the initial command to ensure that the LVDT feedback reaches the ±10 cm command. You can
view the compensated command with the Station Manager application’s scope and meters.
Note:
You must use the Station Builder application to turn on compensators before they can be used.

Compensator types
Each type of compensator uses a different technique to achieve the command levels. Certain compensators
work more effectively than others for specific applications.

Applying compensation
You configure compensators using the Station Setup window’s Compensators panel. When using the
Function Generator, External Command, Basic TestWare, and MultiPurpose TestWare applications, you
use these applications’ Compensator controls to apply a compensation method.

248 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Warning:
Clicking Reset (or Reset All) in this tab with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before clicking Reset.

Optional Compensators
In addition to the compensators included with Model 793.00 System Software, the following compensators
are available as keyed options:
• Model 793.05 Amplitude Phase Control (APC) Compensator
• Model 793.06 Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC) Compensator (includes AICX when used with Series 494
Electronics)
• Model 793.07 Arbitrary End-Level Control (ALC) Compensator
• Model 793.08 Peak Valley Phase Control (PVP) Compensator
• Model 793.18 Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC)

About Null Pacing Compensators

The Station Manager application provides two types of null pacing—static null pacing (SNP) and dynamic
null pacing.
Note:
If only static null or dynamic null pacing is required, set the Error Tolerance for the unused
compensation method to 100%.

Static null pacing

If the error is too large, static null pacing holds the command at its segment boundaries, allowing the sensor
feedback more time to reach its target peak. As the error comes within the user-specified Error Tolerance,
static null pacing resumes the command.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 249

Station Setup

Static Null Pacing (SNP)

Callout Item

1 Amplitude

2 Command

3 Feedback

4 Time

5 Segment #1

6 SNP Hold

7 Segment #2

8 Tolerance

9 Error

10 SNP starts at end of Segment #1

11 SNP Starts

12 SNP Ends

Dynamic null pacing

If the error is too large, dynamic null pacing reduces the command frequency, allowing the sensor feedback
more time to track the command.
The frequency decreases until either of the following occurs:
• The error comes within the user-specified Error Tolerance, at which time the frequency starts increasing
towards the command frequency.

250 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

• The frequency decreases to the minimum frequency value (20% of the original frequency). The command
is then held at this frequency as long as the error remains out of tolerance. This condition is also known
as low cycle.

About Remote Setpoint Null Pacing

Remote setpoint null pacing is a control technique that is always active when using an encoder setpoint
device (such as a handset, RSC, or RSA) to position an actuator in any displacement control mode where
dimension = length or angle.
Note:
Remote setpoint null pacing does not affect Manual command, Setpoint slider control, and Park and
Ride.

Each displacement control mode has its own remote setpoint null pace band setting. These settings appear
in Station Setup in the Tuning pane Advanced tab. You can save these settings in a parameter set.
When you use a setpoint device to position an actuator, whenever the error exceeds the null pace band
setting, the setpoint command will stop. The command will not resume until the feedback catches up with
the command and the error is within the setpoint null pace band.

Null Pacing Compensators Properties

Null Pacing Tab Settings

Item Description

Static Null Pacing

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 251

Station Setup

Item Description

Error Tolerance Sets the maximum error, as a percentage of the command signal, allowed
before Static Null Pacing holds the command.

Timeout Sets the time allowed for feedback to come within tolerance.

Timeout Action Sets the test station’s action when the Timeout is exceeded.
Timeout Actions for Static Null Pacing include:
Disabled—No action occurs. The function generator holds indefinitely at
end-level until feedback comes into tolerance, regardless of timeout value.
Continue—Writes a message to the Message Log. Allows the function
generator to continue after time-out.

Station Power Off—Stops any program command, writes a message to

the Message Log, turns off pressure at the hydraulic service manifold
(HSM), and:
For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off.
If the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned
off only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off”
function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

Interlock—Stops any program command, writes a message to the

Message Log, clamps the servovalve (if enabled in the .hwi file), turns off
pressure at the hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and:
For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off.
If the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned
off only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off”
function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
An Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Program Stop Interlock—Stops any program command, writes a message

to the Message Log, but does not turn off station hydraulic pressure.
A Program Stop Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Program Hold Interlock—Places a hold on any program command and

writes a message to the Message Log. Produces the same action as
clicking the Program Hold button on the Station Controls panel.
A Program Hold Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

252 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

The Function Generator does not recognize Program Hold or Program

Hold Interlock, but instead goes to Stop.

Custom Action—Executes a user-defined action created in the

Event-Action Editor window.

Dynamic Null Pacing

Error Tolerance Sets the maximum error, as a percentage of the command signal, allowed
before Dynamic Null Pacing slows the command.

Timeout Sets the time allowed for feedback to come within tolerance.

Persistence Set a time value for how long the error must stay consistently above the
dynamic null pace error level.

Timeout Action Sets the test station’s action when the Timeout is exceeded. The actions
available are identical to those available for Static Null Pacing.

How to Set Up Null Pacing Compensators

If only static null or dynamic null pacing is required, set the Error Tolerance for the unused compensation
method to 100%.
1. Select an access level of Tuning.
2. On the Station Setup window navigation pane, locate and select the Channels control mode needing
compensation.
3. In the Station Setup window, click .
4. On the Compensators panel, click the Null Pacing tab.

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

5. On the Null Pacing tab, define Static Null Pacing values:

a) Set the Error Tolerance.
b) Set the Timeout values.
c) Select a Timeout Action.
6. On the Null Pacing tab, define Dynamic Null Pacing values:
a) Set the Error Tolerance.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 253

Station Setup

b) Set the Timeout values.

c) Select a Timeout Action.
7. On the File menu, select Save Parameters to save the values.

About Peak-Valley Compensators (PVC)

Peak/Valley Compensation (PVC) monitors cyclic command feedback for any amplitude roll-off or mean-level
divergence.
• PVC increases the command amplitude if it detects amplitude roll-off in the feedback signal.
• PVC adjusts the mean command level if it detects mean-level divergence in the feedback signal.
Note:
For best results when using PVC, set the I Gain as low as possible on the control mode being
compensated. Setting I Gain too high may result in system instability.

Peak-Valley Compensators (PVC)

Callout Item

1 Initial Feedback

2 Test Command

3 Mean level Error

4 Amplitude Error

254 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Peak/Valley Compensators Properties

PVC Tab Settings

Item Description

Convergence Rate Sets how quickly compensation values are applied to converge the
feedback and command signals.

Sensitivity Determines how much the feedback signal must change, as a

percentage of its peak-to-peak value, before a peak or valley is detected.

Adaptation State Hold—Continues to use current values but stops adapting new values.
Resume—Adapts and continuously updates compensation values.

Reset Clears acquired compensation values and restarts the adaptation

process.
Clicking Reset with compensation applied may produce a spike in the
feedback signal. Read the Warning that follows this table.

Warning:
Clicking Reset (or Reset All) in this tab with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before clicking Reset.

How to Set Up PVC Compensators

1. Select an access level of Tuning.
2. In the Station Setup window navigation pane, locate and select the Channels control mode that requires
compensation.
3. In the Station Setup window, click .
4. In the Compensators panel, click the PVC tab.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 255

Station Setup

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

5. In the PVC tab, define PVC values:

a) Set the Convergence Rate.
b) Set the Sensitivity.
c) For Adaptation State, select Resume.
6. To save the values, go to the Station Manager window’s File menu and select Save Parameters.

About Amplitude and Phase Control (APC) Compensators

The Amplitude and Phase Control (APC) compensator monitors feedback from sine and sine tapered
commands for amplitude roll-off and phase lag.
• APC increases the command amplitude if it detects roll-off in the feedback signal.
• APC alters the command phase if it detects phase lag in the feedback signal.

APC guidelines
APC is a good choice when you need to control the amplitude of the fundamental frequency component.
• If you want to achieve peaks, particularly if the feedback is distorted, using APC is not a good choice.
• APC’s computational requirements may limit the sampling rate on some older multichannel systems.
• For best results when using APC, you may have to adjust the I Gain for the control mode being
compensated.

APC Tab Settings

Item Description

Convergence Rate Sets how quickly compensation values are applied to converge the
feedback and command signals.

Adaptation State Hold—Continues to use current values but stops adapting new values.
Resume—Adapts and continuously updates compensation values.

Reset Clears acquired compensation values and restarts the adaptation

process.

256 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Clicking Reset with compensation applied may produce a spike in the

feedback signal. Read the Warning that follows this table.

Warning:
Clicking Reset (or Reset All) in this tab with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before clicking Reset.

How to Set Up APC Compensators

1. Select an access level of Tuning.
2. In the Station Setup window navigation pane, locate and select the Channels control mode that requires
compensation.
3. In the Station Setup window, click .
4. On the Compensators panel, click the APC tab.

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

5. In the APC tab, define APC values:

a) Set the Convergence Rate.
b) For Adaptation State, select Resume.

Warning:
Changes in function generator frequency made with APC selected and hydraulic pressure
on can result in unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Avoid changing frequency values while running APC. If you must change the frequency,
always clear the actuator area first.

6. To save the values, go to the Station Manager window’s File menu and select Save Parameters.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 257

Station Setup

About Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC) Compensators

Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC) works with Amplitude Phase Control (APC) to minimize spurious
harmonic distortion.
Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation allows you to set up adaptive harmonic cancellers to reduce or cancel
spurious harmonics in the feedback when programming sine waves. This approach injects input harmonics
into the controller command waveform with just the right phase and amplitude to cancel the feedback
harmonics.
Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation is:
• Typically used when programming with pure sinewave commands or sine sweeps in acceleration
control.
• Typically used in high-frequency MAST systems for ground vehicle testing.
Note:
The adaptive harmonic cancellation function is available only when Amplitude Phase Control
(APC) is on.

AHC theory
Because cancellation occurs at the system output by means of a signal at the system input, the phase
response of the system must be known.
• The Estimated Feedback (Fdbk) Model, or “model” for short, is an adaptive finite-impulse-response
(FIR) filter, and provides the phase response.
• Before you turn cancellation on, you must train the system phase response by commanding the system
with a sine sweep or a random signal over the frequency range of operation.
• Once the AHC model is trained for a test, you can save the AHC model settings to a reference set that
can be saved as part of a parameter set. When you run subsequent tests, you can copy these settings
into the current model and run the test. When running subsequent tests, the effect of the AHC
compensator will not immediately be apparent because the system must restart the tracking process
to optimize system coefficents.

AHC Tab Settings

Item Description

Model Filter Count Displays the frequency of the control system model FIR filter.

Train Convergence Rate Sets and displays the rate at which the Least-Mean-Square algorithm
converges to the optimum coefficients in the model.

Track Convergence Rate Sets and displays the rate at which the Least-Mean-Square algorithm
converges to the optimum coefficients in the system. Typically this
should be set to 1 or less.

258 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Warning:
Setting the convergence rate too high will cause system
instability.
Instability can result in uncontrolled actuator movement
that can cause both equipment and vehicle damage.
If instability occurs, immediately lower the convergence
rate to 0.1 or less.

Adaptation State controls

Hold Continues to use current values, but stops adapting new values.

Resume Adapts and continuously updates compensation values.

Tracking indicator Lights when the adaptive harmonic cancellation is tracking.

Reset In the tracking mode: clears acquired compensation values and

restarts the adaptation process.
In the training mode: resets the model.

Harmonics Click one or more boxes to select harmonics to be cancelled. (1

selects the fundamental harmonic, 2 selects the second harmonic,
and so on.) Choose harmonics with significant energy content.

Copy Current Set To Reference Set Copies the trained AHC model settings to the reference set. The
reference set can be saved as part of the parameter set.

Copy Reference Set To Current Set Copies the trained AHC model settings in the reference set (part of
the current parameter set) to the current model.

How to Set Up AHC Compensators

1. Access the compensator.
a) Select an access level of Tuning.
b) In the Station Setup window navigation pane, locate and select the Channels control mode that is
to receive AHC compensation.
c) In the Station Setup window, click .
d) On the Compensators panel, click the APC tab. AHC controls are located on the APC page.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 259

Station Setup

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in
unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

2. Set initial AHC values.

a) Set Train Convergence Rate and Track Convergence Rate to zero.
b) Set Adaptation State to Hold, and click Reset.
c) Select the harmonic frequencies you wish to cancel by selecting the appropriate boxes in the
Harmonics control.
d) If desired, set the Model Filter Count. When you select a new value, you must retrain the system
before the new value takes effect.
3. Set up the scope to monitor command and feedback.
4. Set up and turn on limits to protect yourself and your equipment.
5. Install a dummy specimen.
6. Set up a random noise program.
a) In the Station Manager window navigation pane, click .
b) In the Function Generator panel:
• Select the desired Channel.
• Select the Control Mode in which AHC compensation is to be tuned.
• For Command Type, select Random.
• For Target Setpoint, set a value appropriate for your specimen.
• For RMS Amplitude (±), set a value appropriate for the test using the AHC compensator.
• For Frequency Min/Max, set values appropriate for the test using the AHC compensator.
• For Wave Shape, select the desired Random function with the correct spectral pre-emphasis
function.
• In the Compensator list, select AHC Training.

7. Train the model.

a) Start the Function Generator.
b) Observe Command, AHC Estimated Fdbk, and other signals as desired on the scope.
c) Increase Train Convergence Rate and observe the scope.
d) If the training shows a marked improvement in response, increase the Train Convergence Rate (but
keep the setting under 100%) until the system response is optimized. When this occurs, the model
has been adequately trained.
e) Decrease the Convergence Rate to zero (or a value less than 10%).
f) Stop the Function Generator.
8. Track and compensate.

260 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

When the model has been trained, you may stop the system and put it into the track state by selecting
APC from the Compensator list.

9. Once the AHC model is trained for a test, click Copy Current Set to Reference Set to save the AHC
model settings to a reference set that can be saved as part of a parameter set.

About Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC) Compensators

Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC) is a linear compensation technique that automatically adjusts a compensation
filter that filters the command signal to achieve the desired response signal. AIC is an effective digital
control technique for improving tracking accuracy in mainly linear servohydraulic test systems.
• AIC works well on signals that have a wide frequency content.
• AIC adapts quickly and automatically to changes in system dynamics.
• AIC works directly from test data created by the test.
Note:
An extended capability version of AIC (AICX) is available for controllers that use Series 494
Controller Hardware.

AIC theory
The presence of dynamics in a test system can result in large tracking errors, especially at higher
frequencies. The AIC compensator identifies these dynamics and actively adjusts an inverse-dynamics
compensation filter between the function generator and the test system. This active adjustment precorrects
the command signal for system dynamics, resulting in optimal tracking.
While testing, compensation filter adaptation can be switched off once the optimum filter has been
determined, or left on to continue to compensate and track changes in the specimen response.
AIC consists of a Compensation Filter and an Inverse Test System identifier.

Callout Item

1 Function Generator (or Drive File)

2 Desired

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 261

Station Setup

Callout Item

3 Compensation Filter

4 Drive

5 Test System

6 PID Controller

7 Actuator

8 LVDT

9 Position Feedback

10 Inverse System Identifier

11 Response

AIC Tab Settings

Item Description

Convergence Rate Sets how quickly compensation values are applied to converge the feedback
and command signals.

Anticipation Sets a time delay between the desired and response signals.

Impulse Response Sets the length of the adaptive filter, which influences how completely the
dynamics of the controller/actuator/specimen combination are cancelled.

Crossover Freq Sets the crossover frequency.

When applying AIC to a dual compensation mode configured in the Station
Builder application for Amplitude Control Only, set this control to 0.

Pre-emphasis Filter Allows the selection of a required type of pre-emphasis filter.

A pre-emphasis filter is used to make the convergence rate constant over all
frequencies, by boosting high frequencies and suppressing low frequencies.

Operating Band Sets the range in which the AIC operates. Frequencies outside this range are
considered noise.

Adaptation State Hold—Continues to use current values but stops adapting new values.
Resume—Adapts and continuously updates compensation values.

262 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Reset Clears acquired compensation values and restarts the adaptation process.
Changing Anticipation or Impulse Response when the filter is adapting
automatically resets all filter coefficients.
Clicking Reset with compensation applied may produce a spike in the feedback
signal.

AIC Coefficients Manages coefficients used in the compensation filter and saved in the
Reference parameter set.
Coefficients do not display and do not change AIC tab values.

Restore Restores the saved AIC filter coefficients for the selected channel.

Restore All Channels Restores the saved AIC filter coefficients for all channels.

Update Updates the coefficient references for the active channel.

To save the coefficient references, click Update and then save the parameter
set.

Reset All Channels Clears acquired compensation values and restarts the adaptation process on
all channels.
Clicking Reset All Channels with compensation applied may produce a spike
in the feedback signals.

Auto-Restore Enabled—Automatically downloads filter coefficients when the current

parameter set is saved and restored.
Disabled—Does not automatically download filter coefficients. To restore filter
coefficients, you must click the Restore button.

AIC Setup Summary

1. Access the AIC compensator.
2. Set initial AIC values.
3. Determine Anticipation.
4. Determine Impulse Response.
5. Set up and turn on limits to protect yourself and your equipment.
6. Install a dummy specimen.
7. Set up a random noise program.
8. Run the random noise program and optimize system response.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 263

Station Setup

How to Set Up AIC Compensators

1. Access the AIC compensator.
a) Select an access level of Tuning.
b) In the Station Setup window navigation pane, locate and select the control mode that is to receive
AIC compensation.
c) In the Station Setup window, click .
d) In the Compensators panel, click the AIC tab.

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in
unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

2. Set initial AIC values.

a) Set Convergence Rate, Anticipation, and Impulse Response settings to zero.
b) Keep Crossover Freq., Pre-emphasis Filter, and Operating Band control settings at their default
values. The default values are: Crossover Freq., 0.00 Hz; Pre-emphasis Filter, flat; Operating Band,
0.00 - 100.00 Hz.
c) For Adaptation State, select Hold, and then click Reset. This ensures that adaptation will not occur
while you determine anticipation and impulse response.
Stroke (displacement) control systems may require selection of an F or F2 pre-emphasis filter to
allow the compensator to adapt to a wide range of frequencies.
The operating band specification does not prevent the compensator from adapting outside of the
band. It only reduces the adaptation gain outside the band.

3. Determine Anticipation.
a) Set up the Function Generator to produce a square wave program:
• In the Station Manager window, click .
• For Channel, select the channel using AIC.
• For Control Mode, select displacement.
• For Command Type, select Cyclic.
• For Target Setpoint, set 0 cm.
• For Amplitude (±), select a value appropriate for the test using the AIC compensation method.
• For Frequency, set 1 Hz.
• For Wave Shape, select Square.
• For Compensator, select AIC.

264 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

b) If necessary, remove the specimen.

c) Apply station hydraulic pressure.
d)
On the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel, click to start the square wave program.
e) Set up the Scope window to display the command and displacement feedback signals from the
channel using AIC.
• On the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click .
• For Channel, select the channel whose command and displacement signals are to be monitored.
• For Signal, select the channel’s command and displacement signals.
• For Plot Mode, select Time.
• For Trace Time, enter 1.0 Sec.

f) Adjust PIDF tuning controls as required to produce a suitable feedback response.

g) Stop the scope to freeze the trace.
h) On the trace, mark the point on the feedback where command begins, and then mark another point
where feedback is about 70% of its maximum amplitude. The x-axis delta of these two points is
Anticipation.

Callout Description

1 The Anticipation value (dX) in this example is 0.05859. Enter

this value for the Anticipation control on the AIC page as
0.06.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 265

Station Setup

Callout Description

2 Points to mark on the feedback to determine Anticipation

(dX).

i) Enter this value on the Anticipation slider in the AIC page of the Compensators window.
j) To save the tuning values, go to the Station Manager window’s File menu and select Save
Parameters.
4. Determine Impulse Response.
a) On the same scope trace, mark the point in feedback in which feedback begins gaining amplitude,
and then mark another point as the feedback has reached it max amplitude and is beyond any
ringing (is totally flat). The x-axis delta of these two points is the Impulse Response.

Callout Description

1 The Impulse Response value (dX) in this example is 0.209.

Enter this value for the Impulse Response control on the
AIC page as 0.21.

266 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Callout Description

2 Points to mark on the feedback to determine Impulse

Response (dX).

b) Enter this value on the Impulse Response slider.

c) To save the tuning values, go to the Station Manager window’s File menu and select Save
Parameters.
5. Set up and turn on limits to protect yourself and your equipment.
6. Install a dummy specimen.
7. Set up a random noise program.
a) In the Station Manager window, click .
b) On the Function Generator panel:
• Select the desired Channel.
• Select the Control Mode in which AIC compensation is to be tuned.
• For Command Type, select Random.
• For Target Setpoint, set a value appropriate for your specimen.
• For RMS Amplitude (±), set a value appropriate for the test using the AIC compensator.
• For Frequency Min/Max, set values appropriate for the test using the AIC compensator.
• For Wave Shape, select the desired Random function with the correct spectral pre-emphasis
function.
Note:
For displacement control modes, select Random - 1/F.

c) For Compensator, select AIC.

This is an example of how tracking may appear before you adjust the Convergence Rate control.
Note the separation between command and feedback.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 267

Station Setup

8. Run the random noise program and optimize system response.

a) In the Station Setup window, display the AIC page for the selected channel’s control mode.
b) For Adaptation State, select Resume.

Warning:
Clicking the Run button will put actuators in motion.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the test area before pressing the run button.

c)
In the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel, click to start the random waveform
program.
d) On the AIC page, adjust Convergence Rate while observing system response on the scope.
This is an example of how tracking may appear after you adjust the Convergence Rate control. Note
the convergence between command and feedback.

268 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

• The signals should converge as the compensator builds coefficients. When optimum convergence
is reached while in the adaptation state, select Hold.
• The controller will continue to compensate with the current coefficients, but it will not continue
adapting them.

e) Select Update to update the coefficient references.

f) On the File menu, select Save Parameters to save the values.

About the Extended Adaptive Inverse Control (AICX) Compensator

In addition to the AIC compensator, MTS also offers the AICX compensator.
The AICX compensator offers greater processor efficiency than AIC, which makes it a better choice for
some applications, such as systems with higher channel counts. Also, the AICX compensator is typically
used with systems that are equipped with Series 494 Hardware.
However, for systems that currently achieve adequate compensation with AIC, there may no advantage
to switching to AICX.
When you turn on AIC in the Station Builder application, both the AIC and AICX compensators will be
available when you open the station configuration file with the Station Manager application.

AICX Tab Settings

Item Description

Forward/Inverse Convergence Rate Sets how quickly compensation values are applied
to converge the feedback and command signals.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 269

Station Setup

Item Description

Anticipation Sets a time delay between the desired and response

signals.

Impulse Response Sets the length of the adaptive filter, which affects
the lowest frequency dynamics of the
controller/actuator/specimen combination being
compensated. Longer times compensate lower
frequencies, but slows adaptation.
Important:
The use of the AICX compensator can
introduce large delays between generated
command and command to the actuator. The
delay is dependant on the tuning of AICX and
is two times the value of the Impulse
Response.

Operating Band Sets the range in which AICX operates. Frequencies

outside this range are not compensated.

Adaptation State Hold—Continues to use current values but stops

adapting new values.
Resume—Adapts and continuously updates
compensation values.

Reset Fwd Clears acquired compensation values and restarts

the adaptation process.
Reset Inv

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made
with hydraulic pressure on can result in
unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in
its path.
Always clear the actuator area before
changing compensation values.

Changing Anticipation or Impulse Response when

the filter is adapting automatically resets all filter
coefficients.
Clicking either Reset control (Fwd/Inv) with
compensation applied may produce an impulse to
the system. If this is undesirable, stop the function
generator before resetting.

270 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

AICX Coefficients Reference Manages coefficients used in the compensation filter

and saved in the parameter set.
Coefficients do not display and do not change AICX
tab values.

Restore Restores the saved AICX filter coefficients for the

selected channel.

Update Updates the coefficient references for the active

channel.
To save the coefficient references, click Update and
then save the parameter set.

Auto-Restore Enabled—Automatically downloads filter coefficients

when the current parameter set is saved and
restored.
Disabled—Does not automatically download filter
coefficients. To restore filter coefficients, you must
click the Restore button.

AICX Setup Summary

1. Access the compensator.
2. Define AICX values.
3. Set up and enable limits to protect yourself and your equipment.
4. Install a dummy specimen.
5. Set up a random noise program.
6. Find the initial impulse response.
7. Set Anticipation.
8. Train the forward model.
9. Compensate the system with the inverse model.

How to Set Up AICX Compensators

1. Select the Function Generator, and in the Compensator list, select AICX.
2. Access the compensator.
a) Select an access level of Tuning.
b) In the Station Setup window navigation pane, locate and select the Channels control mode that is
to receive AIC compensation.
c) In the Station Setup window, click
d) On the Compensators panel, click the AICX tab.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 271

Station Setup

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in
unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

3. Set initial AICX values.

a) Set Forward Convergence Rate, Inverse Convergence Rate, and Anticipation to zero.
b) Set Impulse Response to 0.5.
c) Keep Operating Band control settings at their default values. The default value is 0.00 - 100.00 Hz.
d) Set Adaptation State to Hold.
e) Reset the forward and inverse models by selecting Reset Fwd and Reset Inv.
4. Set up and enable limits to protect yourself and your equipment.
5. Install a dummy specimen.
6. Set up a random noise tuning program.
7. Determine Anticipation.
Note:
The Anticipation value for AICX compensation may not be the same as the Anticipation value
for AIC compensation.

8. Determine Impulse Response.

9. Train the forward model.
a) Ensure that the Adaptation State is set to Hold.
b) Ensure that the Forward Convergence Rate is set to zero.
c) Ensure that the Inverse Convergence Rate is set to zero.
d) Click the Reset Fwd and Reset Inv buttons.
e) Start the Function Generator.
f) Observe the feedback’s AICX Fbk Ref and AICX Est. Fbk signals on the scope.
g) Increase the Forward Convergence Rate to a value less than 50% and observe the scope.
h) If the training shows a marked improvement in response, you may increase the Forward Convergence
Rate (but keep the setting under 100%). Repeat until the Feedback Ref signal matches or is very
close to the actual feedback response. When this occurs, the forward model has been adequately
trained.
i) Decrease the Forward Convergence Rate to zero (or a value less than 10%).
j) Slowly increase the Inverse Convergence Rate to approximately 10% - 20%.
k) Observe the feedback signal (for instance, displacement or acceleration) and the associated AICX
Cmd Ref signal on the scope, and note that the feedback signal tracks into AICX Cmd Ref signal.
l) Stop the Function Generator.

272 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

About Arbitrary End-Level Compensation (ALC)

Arbitrary End-Level Compensation (ALC) is available only in MultiPurpose TestWare application command
processes. In addition, frequency compensation can be enabled on single-channel configurations only.
ALC is an adaptive compensation technique that improves the tracking accuracy of spectrum profiles
played out with the MultiPurpose TestWare application. This technique is also known as “from-to matrix
compensation.”
Important:
This technique only works if each point in the profile is a peak or valley. Points in between peaks
and valleys are not compensated.

The advantages of this technique are:

• ALC works well on both linear and nonlinear specimens.
• ALC adapts quickly and automatically to changes in system dynamics.

ALC theory
ALC compensates for peak and valley errors by building and continually updating a matrix of amplitude
compensation factors.
The matrix is two-dimensional, with axes mapped to either plus or minus full scale or a subrange of full
scale. Each axis is divided into 16, 32, or 64 equal parts, with each part representing a fraction of the
defined range. The horizontal axis is labeled “To Level” and the vertical axis is labeled “From Level.”
With each pass of the spectrum, the peak/valley errors are calculated, and an estimated compensation
factor is stored in the matrix. Before the command generator generates a new segment, it notes the required
“From” and “To” levels, and refers to the matrix to determine how much to over-program the segment.
The following 5×5 sample matrix is for illustration only. The MultiPurpose TestWare process defines actual
matrixes as either 16×16, 32×32, or 64×64. An additional diagonal row (not shown here) is added to the
matrix to handle situations where the “From” and “To” levels map to the same cell.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 273

Station Setup

Note:
No compensation is applied if the level remains in the same cell.

Callout Description

1 When going from 0 to + FS, ALC uses this compensation factor.

2 Calculated Amplitude Compensation Factors

In order to run the test as fast as possible, ALC builds a second matrix to store frequency compensation
factors. The command generator uses these factors to maintain the optimum spectrum play-out speed.
Frequency compensation can only be enabled on single-channel tests.
The matrix compensation factors are updated during each pass of the spectrum. Depending on the
convergence rate, it may take a number of cycles before the feedback amplitude tracks the command to
within tolerance. To stop updating the compensation factors when the signals converge, select Hold on
the Station Setup window’s ALC tab. The compensator will continue compensating with the current factors.

ALC Tab Settings

Item Description

Ampl. Convergence Sets how quickly compensation values get applied to converge the
feedback and command signal amplitudes.

Amplitude MIN/MAX Min—Fixed at 0.

Max—Sets the factor by which the compensated command’s amplitude
can exceed the original command’s amplitude.

274 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Item Description

Freq Convergence Sets how quickly compensation values get applied to converge the
feedback and command signal frequencies.

Frequency MIN/MAX Min—Sets the minimum factor by which the compensated command’s
frequency can exceed the original command’s frequency.
Max—Sets the maximum factor by which the compensated command’s
frequency can exceed the original command’s frequency.

Adaptive State Hold All—Continues to use current values but stops adapting new
values.
Resume All—Adapts and continuously updates compensation values.

Reset All Clears acquired compensation values and restarts the adaptation
process.
Clicking Reset All with compensation applied may produce a spike in
the feedback signal.

How to Set Up Arbitrary End-Level Compensators (ALC)

1. Select an access level of Tuning.
2. In the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, locate and select the Channels control mode to receive
ALC.
3. In the Station Setup window, click .
4. On the Compensators panel, click the ALC tab.

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

5. In the ALC tab, define ALC values:

a) Set the Ampl. Convergence.
b) Set the Amplitude Min/Max.
c) Set the Freq Convergence.
d) Set the Frequency Min/Max.
e) For Adaptive State, select Resume All.
6. On the File menu, select Save Parameters to save the values.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 275

Station Setup

About Peak/Valley Phase (PVP) Compensators

The Peak/Valley Phase (PVP) compensator combines amplitude and phase (APC) with Peak/Valley
Compensation (PVC) algorithms to improve the amplitude and phase tracking of the command and sensor
feedback.
The advantages of this technique are:
• PVP compensates for phase error, unlike PVC.
• PVP provides good amplitude tracking on nonlinear specimens, unlike APC.
• PVP adjusts the mean command level if it detects mean-level divergence in the feedback signal.

The PVP compensator’s computational requirements may limit the sampling rate on multichannel systems.
Note:
The PVP compensator may have difficulty compensating command waveforms below 0.5 Hz.

The PVP is a phase compensator cascading into a peak/valley compensator. The phase algorithm is
similar to the one used by APC. The peak/valley algorithm is identical to the one used by PVC.

Peak-Valley Phase (PVP) Compensators

Callout Item

1 Segment Generator

2 Phase Compensator

3 Peak/Valley Compensator

4 PVP Compensator

5 Actuator

276 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Peak/Valley Phase Compensators Properties

PVP Tab Settings

Item Description

Convergence Rate Sets how quickly compensation values get applied to converge the
feedback and command signal amplitudes.

Sensitivity Sets how much the feedback signal must change, as a percentage of
its peak-to-peak value, before a peak or valley is detected.

Adaptation State Hold—Continues to use current values but stops adapting new values.
Resume—Adapts and continuously updates compensation values.

Reset Clears acquired compensation values and restarts the adaptation

process.
Clicking Reset with compensation applied may produce a spike in the
feedback signal. Read the Warning that follows this table.

Warning:
Clicking Reset (or Reset All) in this tab with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before clicking Reset.

How to Set Up Peak/Valley Phase (PVP) Compensators

1. Select an access level of Tuning.
2. On the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, locate and select the Channels control mode to receive
PVP.
3. In the Station Setup window, click
4. On the Compensators panel, click the PVP tab.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 277

Station Setup

Warning:
Changes in compensation values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing compensation values.

5. In the PVP tab, define PVP values:

a) Set the Convergence Rate.
b) Set the Sensitivity.
c) For Adaptation State, select Resume.
6. On the File menu, select Save Parameters to save values.

Readouts

About Readouts
Readout resources (typically, D to A converters) are used to send user-defined station signals to external
readout devices such as oscilloscopes and meters.

Readouts Summary Panel

This Station Setup window displays the real-time values of readout signals.

How to Configure Readouts

Use the Readouts Summary panel to select the signal that you want to monitor with external devices, such
as oscilloscopes and meters.
1. In the Station Setup window, select the readout that you want to configure.
2. Select a signal from the Signal list.
3. If necessary, adjust the Gain and Offset to scale the output signal.

278 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Note:
With Gain = 1 and Offset = 0 V (default values): a positive full-scale signal = +10 volts and a
negative full-scale signal = -10 volts.

Auxiliary Inputs

About Auxiliary Inputs

Auxiliary inputs are input signals that are typically used for data acquisition. Auxiliary inputs are configured
in the Station Setup window using the same setup tabs as control mode inputs.
Before auxiliary inputs appear in the Station Manager application, you must use the Station Builder
application to assign input resources to each auxiliary input that you create.

How to Configure Auxiliary Inputs

Although not used in control modes, auxiliary inputs require the same setup as control mode inputs.
1. Select the Station Manager access level of Calibration.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 279

Station Setup

2. In the Station Setup window, select the auxiliary input that you want to configure.

3. Use the various tabs to configure the auxiliary input.

The setup procedures for auxiliary inputs are the same as those for control mode inputs.

How to Change Auxiliary Input Signal Names

If you select the Reconfigurable check box for an auxiliary input in Station Builder, the signal name and
dimension can be changed in the Station Manager application, without returning to Station Builder.
Note:
Reconfigurable Signals is a non-licensed option. If Reconfigurable Signals is not selected at
installation, this option will not appear in subsequent dialogs.

1. You must be at the Configuration access level in Station Manager to make these signal configuration
changes.
2. Use the Calibration tab to make signal name and dimension changes for a reconfigurable signal.

How to Monitor Auxiliary Inputs

The Auxiliary Inputs panel displays the current values of auxiliary input signals.
To display the Auxiliary Inputs panel:
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Auxiliary Inputs

280 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Station Signals

About Station Signals

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Station Signals > Values tab.
The Station Manager application’s Channel Options window’s Signal Lists tab edits the signals included
in a Signal list.

Values tab
This tab displays current values for signals in the selected Signal List.

Hardware tab
This tab displays Resource and Connector information for the signals in the selected Signal List.

Fullscale tab
This tab displays the Fullscale Min and Max ranges for each signal in the selected Signal List.
Note:
The values and dimensions on this tab are editable at the Calibration access level.

Calibration tab
This tab displays conditioner values for each selected Conditioner Type in the Signal list.
Note:
The values and dimensions on this tab are editable at the Calibration access level.

How to Define the Signals in the Station Signals List

1. Select the Station Manager access level of Calibration.
2. Use the Station Manager application’s Channel Options window’s Signal Lists tab to define the signals
that are included in a Signal list.

How to Display Station Signals

Use the Channel Option window’s Signal Lists tab to change the default signals that appear in the Station
Signals panel.
1. In the Station Manager window’s Display menu, click Station Setup.
2. In the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, click Station Signals.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 281

Station Setup

3. In the drop-down list, select a signal list.

4. Click a tab to display the following information:
• Click the Values tab to display current signal values.
• Click the Hardware tab to display the controller Resource and Connector for each signal.
• Click the Fullscale tab to display the signals’ full scale minimum and maximum values. Values can
be edited at the Calibration access level.
• Click the Calibration tab to display the signals’ calibration values.Values can be edited at the
Calibration access level.

How to Edit the Signal Lists (Channel Options)

Use the Signal Lists tab to define the signals displayed in the Station Setup window’s Station Signals tab,
in the Auto Offset window, and in the optional Remote Station Control (RSC) panel.
1. In the Station Manager window’s Tools menu, select Channel Options.
2. In the Channel Options window, click the Signal Lists tab.
3. In the Signal Lists tab, create a new signal list or edit an existing signal list:
• To create a new signals list, click Add and enter a Name.
• To edit an existing list, select its name.

4. Use the Left and Right buttons to move signals between Available Signals and Included.
List Filters–use this feature to display only Available Signals that you want to use with the list. For
example, enter force to display all force signals. You can also enter part of a signal description to display
a signal type. For example, enter disp to display all displacement signals.

5. Use the Up and Down buttons to change the order of signals displayed in the Included list.

Digital Inputs/Outputs

About Digital Input/Output Signals

Digital inputs are signals sent into the station controller from external sources. Digital outputs are signals
sent out from the station controller to external devices. Input and output signals can be high, low, or pulsed.

282 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Note:
You must use the Station Builder application to assign digital input and output resources before the
Station Manager application can use them.

How to Monitor Digital Inputs/Outputs

You can use the Station Setup window or the DI/Os Station Controls panel to monitor the status of digital
inputs and outputs.
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Digital Inputs/Outputs
or

Station Controls panel toolbar > > DI/Os window

About Digital Input Detectors

Use the Station Setup window’s Digital Inputs panel to define the incoming signal’s trigger and its resulting
action. Each digital input detector can be assigned two different trigger/action sets (Trigger 1/2 and Action
1/2). When a detector trips, its indicator turns red.

How to Configure Digital Inputs

1. On the Station Manager window’s Display menu, select Station Setup.
2. On the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, double-click Digital Inputs/Outputs and then click
Inputs.
3. Select the appropriate trigger(s) for each input.
Channel Low and Channel High trigger modes do not support the following digital input actions: Program
Stop, Program Hold, and Custom Actions.

Input Trigger Types

Trigger Type Description

High/Low Triggers when the input goes from a high state to a low state.

Low/High Triggers when the input goes from a low state to a high state.

Either Triggers when the input either goes from a high state to a low state or
from a high state to a low state.

Channel Low Triggers when the channel goes low and stays triggered as long as the
channel remains low.

Channel High Triggers when the channel goes high and stays triggered as long as the
channel remains high.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 283

Station Setup

4. Select the appropriate resulting actions for each input.

Digital Input Actions

Digital Input Actions

Setting Action

Disabled No action occurs. This setting dims the indicator.

Indicate Writes a message to the Message Log and the indicator switches from white
to red.

Station Power Off Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log, turns
off pressure at the hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and switches the
indicator from green to red.
For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off. If
the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi file
or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned off
only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off” function
is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

Interlock Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log,
clamps the servovalve (if enabled in the .hwi file), turns off pressure at the
hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and switches the indicator from green to
red.
An Interlock must be reset to resume testing.
For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off. If
the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi file
or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned off
only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off” function
is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

Program Stop Interlock Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log, and
forces a program interlock. Produces the same action as clicking the
Program Stop button on the Station Controls panel.
A Program Stop Interlock must be reset to resume testing.
Channel Low and Channel High trigger modes do not support this action.

Program Hold Interlock Places a hold on any program command, writes a message to the Message
Log, and forces a program interlock. Produces the same action as clicking
the Program Hold button on the Station Controls panel.

284 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Setting Action

A Program Hold Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

The Function Generator does not recognize Program Hold or Program Hold
Interlock, but instead goes to Stop.
Channel Low and Channel High trigger modes do not support this action.

Program Stop Stops any program command and writes a message to the Message Log.
Produces the same action as clicking the Program Stop button on the Station
Controls panel.
Channel Low and Channel High trigger modes do not support this action.

Program Hold Places a hold on any program command and writes a message to the
Message Log. Produces the same action as clicking the Program Hold
button on the Station Controls panel.
The Function Generator does not recognize Program Hold or Program Hold
Interlock, but instead goes to Stop.
Channel Low and Channel High trigger modes do not support this action.

Custom Action Executes a user-defined action created in the Event-Action Editor window
and switches the indicator from green to red.
Channel Low and Channel High trigger modes do not support this action.

How to Configure Digital Outputs

1. Access the panel.
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Digital Inputs/Outputs > Outputs.

2. From the drop-down list, select an Assignment for the output.

This list is only available if the digital output resource uses a source type of User, Action, or Application.

3. Set the Polarity for the digital output signal.

Normal is active high. Invert is active low.

How to Manually Control Digital Output Signals

Only digital outputs that were set up (using the Station Builder application) with User, Action, or Application
as a source, can be manually turned on and off.
1. In the Station Setup window navigation pane, double-click Digital Inputs/Outputs and then click Outputs.
2. In the Digital Outputs panel, select Undefined from the Assignment list for the digital output that you
want to control.
Only outputs with an “Undefined” assignment can be manually turned on and off.

3. Click the On and Off buttons to turn the digital output on and off.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 285

Station Setup

• The On button turns green when that output is on.

• The Off button turns red when that output is off.

4. You can also use the Station Manager Digital I/Os control panel to turn digital outputs on and off: Station
Controls panel toolbar > > DI/Os window > Outputs tab

How to Assign a Digital Output to Run/Stop Controls

1. Ensure that digital outputs have been added using the Station Builder application.
2. In the Station Manager window, click Display > Station Setup.
3. In the Station Setup navigation pane, click Digital Inputs/Outputs > Outputs.
4. In the Digital Outputs window, set the Assignment for the digital output to Run/Stop.
5. Select the required polarity (Invert or Normal) in the Polarity drowdown menu.

Limit and Error Detectors

How to Access Detector Settings

The Station Manager application provides multiple locations where you can monitor and define detector
limits and actions.

Station setup access

The Station Setup window includes Limit Detectors and Error Detectors panels with tabs where you can
define detector limits and actions.

Each channel input includes a Limits tab where you can define detector limits and actions.

286 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Station Controls access

You can use the Detectors window to monitor and define detector limits and actions.

Click on the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel toolbar to display the Detectors window.

About Detectors
Detectors monitor various input signals and can perform specific actions when user-defined limits are
exceeded. Detector settings (limits and actions) for a particular test are typically saved in a parameter set.
For example, you might set up a limit detector to shut down a test if the displacement signal exceeds your
test limits.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 287

Station Setup

Note:
In addition to the Detector Settings, there are Test Limits set in Basic TestWare or other test
applications.

Detector types
Limit detectors–monitor sensor feedback signals. If the sensor signal exceeds user-defined limit settings,
the controller can trigger a detector action.
Error detectors–monitor the difference between the command signal and the corresponding feedback
signal. If the error exceeds user-defined limits, the controller can trigger a detector action.
Hardware limit detectors (FlexTest IIm systems only)–monitor the difference between an associated
transducer output value and user-defined upper/lower limit values.

Detector actions
You can assign a detector action to any limit/error detector that appears in your configuration. Standard
detector actions include: Indicate, Station Power Off, Interlock, Program Stop, Program Hold, or C-Stop.

Uses for detectors

In general, you may wish to establish limits on at least one input signal to help prevent damage if the
specimen breaks or a cable gets disconnected. Typical uses for detectors include:
• To reduce the risk of personal injury and equipment damage when installing specimens.
• To indicate when signal limits or errors are detected.
• To automatically stop tests (or perform other actions) when signal limits or errors are detected.

How to Determine Detector Settings

To determine detector settings for a specific test:
1. Run your test and monitor the sensor signal with a Peak/Valley or a Running Max/Min meter.
2. While running the test, note the upper and lower sensor values.
3. Set the detector limits to slightly more than the maximum and minimum values.
In addition to the Station Limits saved in a parameter set, there are Test Limits set in Basic TestWare
and other test applications.

About Detector Status Indicators

Each detector window includes detector indicators that change color to indicate detector status.
Detector indicator status:
• Gray - The detector action is set to Disabled.
• White - The detector is enabled, and the action is set to Indicate.
If the detector limits are exceeded, the indicator color changes from white to red.

288 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

• Green - The detector is enabled when the action is set to one of the following actions: (Station Power
Off, Interlock, Program Interlock, Program Stop, Program Hold, C-Stop, or Custom Actions).
If the detector limits are exceeded, the indicator color changes from green to red.
• Red - The detector has tripped.

How to Set Up Detectors

1. Use Station Setup or one of the methods to access the detector settings.
2. Set up each detector.
Error Detectors—set the Inner and Outer error values and their associated Actions.
Limit Detectors—set the Upper and Lower limit values and their associated Actions.
Detector settings (limits and actions) for a particular test can be saved in a parameter set.

How to Reset Detectors

To reset a detector that has tripped:
1. Determine the event that caused the detector to trip and fix the problem.
2. Click Reset on the Station Controls Panel.
• If the event that caused the detector to trip is within the detector limits, the detector indicators and
any action assigned to that detector will be reset and returned to the normal (untripped) state.
• If the event that caused the detector to trip is still true, the detector will trip and any action assigned
to that detector will occur again.

About the Reset/Override Button

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Control Channel > Limits tab
Or:
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Detectors > Limits
Or:
Station Controls panel > Detectors button
The Reset/Override button can be used to temporarily override limits. For new configurations, this button
is disabled by default. To enable override functionality on a limit-by-limit basis, you must check the Allow
Override checkbox for each desired limit.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 289

Station Setup

Detector Actions
You can assign the following actions to limit and error detectors. If the limit or error detector setting is
exceeded during a test, the selected action occurs and the indicator changes state.

Detector Action Settings

Setting Action

Disabled No action occurs. This setting dims the indicator.

Indicate Writes a message to the Message Log and the indicator switches from white
to red.

Station Power Off Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log, turns
off pressure at the hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and switches the
indicator from green to red.
For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off. If
the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi file
or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned off
only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off” function
is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

290 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Setting Action

Interlock Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log, clamps
the servovalve (if enabled in the .hwi file), turns off pressure at the hydraulic
service manifold (HSM), and switches the indicator from green to red.
Note:
An Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off. If
the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multistation systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi file
or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned off
only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off” function
is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

Program Stop Interlock Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log, and
switches the indicator from green to red. Produces the same action as clicking
the Program Stop button on the Station Controls panel.
Note:
A Program Stop Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Program Hold Interlock Places a hold on any program command, writes a message to the Message
Log, and switches the indicator from green to red. Produces the same action
as clicking the Program Hold button on the Station Controls panel.
Note:
A Program Hold Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Note:
The Function Generator does not recognize Program Hold or Program
Hold Interlock, but instead goes to Stop.

Custom Actions Executes a user-defined action created in the Event-Action Editor window
and switches the indicator from green to red.

C-Stop Excecutes a controlled stop regardless of the state of the Function generator.

About Limit Detectors

Limit detectors monitor sensor feedback signals. If the sensor signal exceeds user-defined limits, the
controller can trigger a detector action. The adjustment range equals 130% of the selected range’s full
scale.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 291

Station Setup

Actions
Standard detector actions include: Station Power Off, Interlock, Program Interlock, Program Stop, Program
Hold, or Custom Actions.

Example
The following figure shows how a limit detector can automatically stop a test. Here the limits have been
set to remove station power when the displacement feedback reaches either +1.1 cm or -1.1 cm. When
the specimen breaks, the +1.1 cm upper limit is reached. The limit detector then trips, stops the test, and
removes station power.

Callout Item

1 Upper Limit Detected

2 Specimen Breaks

3 Upper Limit

4 Lower Limit

About Sensor Ranges and Limit Detectors

Sensor description
Your system’s sensors convert measured mechanical values, such as force, displacement, and pressure,
into electrical signals that after conditioning, are suitable for feedback for closed-loop control. Sensors and
sensor conditioners are calibrated together in pairs against a standard to ensure that their outputs accurately
represent the physical properties they are measuring.

Sensor ranges
Every sensor has a full-scale capacity that defines its maximum operating range. For example, an actuator
that can extend its piston 6 cm from its fully retracted position is referred to as an actuator with a “6-cm
stroke.” The displacement sensor used with the actuator has a full-scale capacity of 6 cm.

292 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Full-range conditioners
Some sensor conditioners, such as Model 493.25 Digital Universal Conditioners, are full-range conditioners.
They have only one range that spans the sensor’s full-scale capacity.

Ranged conditioners
Other sensor conditioners, such as Model 497.13 AC Conditioners and Model 497.22 Dual DC Conditioners,
may use two or more ranges. Each range defines the electronic amplitude of the sensor’s feedback signal
for the purpose of providing better signal resolution. In other words, it redefines the input channel to
represent a portion of the sensor's physical capacity.
With this type of sensor conditioner, you may create a range for any portion of the sensor’s capacity.
Typical ranges are: Range 1, 100%; Range 2, 50%; Range 3, 20%; and Range 4, 10%.

How to Select Sensor Ranges

Ensure that you select a range large enough to accommodate the maximum sensor output expected during
a test.
When setting up a test, it is good practice to select a range slightly larger than the largest value expected
for the test. The smaller the range, the better the resolution of the sensor’s signal.
Select a full-scale range to optimize the maximum sensor output for a test.

For example, suppose your test requires a ±2.0 cm displacement. A ±6 cm or ±3 cm range functions
properly, but a ±2 cm range provides the best resolution.

Range example
Suppose a displacement sensor has a full-scale capacity of 10 mm. A ±5 mm range can operate across
the full-scale range of the sensor (±5 mm). A ±2.5 mm range of the same sensor can operate across half
the capacity of the sensor (this redefines full scale to be ±2.5 mm).
Ranges represent a portion of the sensor’s full-scale capacity

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 293

Station Setup

How to Set Limit Detectors

Initial limit settings

When you select a range, the initial setting of the associated limit detectors are ±130% of the range value.
For example, suppose you select Range 1 of your system’s force sensor, and that Range 1 is ±10 kN. In
this case, the initial placement of the limit detectors will be ±13 kN.
The application places the initial limit detectors at ±130% of the selected range (as shown).

294 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

How to enable limit detectors

By default, limit detectors are initially disabled. So even if you enable a limit detector at its initial setting
(±130% of its range value), it still will not work because the sensor conditioner’s hardware will saturate
before attaining ±130% of the current range.
To allow a limit detector to work in a given range, you must:
• Change its limit value so that it falls within ±100% of its range, and
• Enable it (change its selected action from “Disable” to the desired action)

To make a limit detector work, you must change its initial setting so that it is within ±100% of the selected
range (as shown).

Be aware of detector settings when changing ranges

When you go from a larger range to a smaller range, limit detector do not automatically change, so they
may not apply to your new range.
When this occurs, the controller will display the following message:
The range selected for signal -signal name- has left one or more of the signal's detectors outside of the
new range.
Please verify that the detectors (limit and error) associated with this signal are adjusted as necessary.
For example, suppose you have a configuration in which Range 1 spans ±10 kN, with limits set at 9 kN
and -5 kN, as shown below in the figure to the left. Both limits are viable for Range 1.
Next, suppose you select Range 2, which spans ±6 kN, as shown below in the figure to the right. In this
case, the 9 kN limit would not be applicable to Range 2, and the application would display the message.
However, the -5 kN limit still falls within the span of Range 2.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 295

Station Setup

Callout Item

1 Limit

2 Range

When you select a new range, review the limits you have defined for the selected signal to ensure that
they are appropriate for your new range.

How to Set Error Detectors

Method 1
1. On the Station Manager window’s Display menu, select Station Setup.
2. On the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, click Detectors and then Errors.
3. On the Error Detectors panel:
a. Click the Outer Error tab and set the Outer Error and Outer Action as required for each signal.
b. Click the Inner Error tab and set the Inner Error and Inner Action as required for each signal.

Method 2
1. On the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel toolbar, click

2. In the Detectors window, click the Error Detectors tab.

296 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

About Error Detectors

Error detectors monitor the difference between the command signal and the corresponding feedback
signal. If the error exceeds the user-defined limits, the controller can trigger a detector action.

Error signals
Error detection uses Absolute Error signals. These signal values are in engineering units and are all
positive.
Outer Error—Sets the error signal’s outer limit. If the error exceeds user-defined limits, the controller can
trigger a detector action.
Inner Error—Sets the error signal’s inner limit. If the error exceeds user-defined limits, the controller can
trigger a detector action.

Actions
Standard detector actions include: Station Power Off, Interlock, Program Interlock, Program Stop, Program
Hold, or Custom Actions.
Note:
Each defined control mode has an error detector, but only the error detector for the active control
mode of a channel is active.

Error detectors can:

• Warn when a specimen is beginning to fail.
• Shut down the test before the specimen breaks.

When using error detectors, remember that:

• Effective error detection requires a properly tuned servoloop.
• Error limits should be set low on low-frequency and static tests.
• Error limits should be set high on high-frequency tests.

At lower frequencies the error level is usually smaller since the feedback can track the command more
closely.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 297

Station Setup

Callout Item

1 Error

2 Feedback

3 Test Command

At higher frequencies the error level is usually larger since the phase lag creates a larger error.

Callout Item

1 Error

298 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Callout Item

2 Feedback

3 Test Command

The Error Detectors tab has two limits:

• Inner Limit—Typically set to indicate the beginning of failure.
• Outer Limit—Typically set to stop the test.

How to Monitor Error Detectors

Method 1
1. On the Station Manager window’s Display menu, select Station Setup.
2. In the Station Setup window navigation pane, click Detectors and then Errors.
3. On the Errors Detectors panel, click Error Summary tab.

Method 2
1. On the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel toolbar, click

2. In the Detectors window, click the Error Detectors tab.

Remote Setpoint Adjustment

About the Optional Remote Setpoint Adjust

The optional Remote Setpoint Adjust (RSA) control box allows actuator setpoints to be remotely adjusted,
away from the test station’s computer screen.
Note:
Before the remote setpoint adjust (RSA) controls appear in the Station Manager application, you
must enable the RSA in the Project Manager system settings list.

Station Setup settings

The Station Setup window includes settings for RSA polarity and resolution.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 299

Station Setup

Station Controls settings

Use the Station Manager application’s Remote Setpoint Adjust station controls window to assign channel
and control modes to each knob, and to set up password access to RSA disable.

Velocity limiter
A 10 mm/sec. velocity limit, required for CE compliance, can be enabled in the .hwi file. Removing the
comment symbols (/* and */) from the VELOCITY LIMITER statement in the .hwi file enables the feature.
When enabled, CE velocity limitation is performed on manual command adjustments, setpoint adjustments
made from the Model 494.05 Handset (or RSC) and setpoint adjustments made with the Remote Setpoint
Adjust control (optional).

How to Configure Remote Setpoint Adjust Controls

Before the remote setpoint adjust (RSA) controls appear in the Station Manager application, you must
enable the RSA in the Project Manager system settings list.
1. On the Station Manager window’s toolbar, select an access level of Calibration.
2. On the Station Manager window’s Display menu, select Station Setup.
3. On the Station Setup window’s navigation pane’s Remote Setpoints, locate the knob to be configured.
4. On the Remote Setpoint panel, configure the knob:

Remote Setpoint Knob Settings

Item Description

Resolution Fine—Knob movements produce small actuator movements.

Medium—Knob movements produce moderate actuator movements.
Coarse—Knob movements produce large actuator movements.

Polarity Normal—A clockwise knob movement typically extends the actuator.

Invert—A clockwise knob movement typically extends the actuator.

5. In addition to the Remote Setpoint Knob settings listed above, there is a Remote Setpoint Adjust station
control that you can use to assign channel, and control modes to each knob, and to set up password
access to RSA disable.

300 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

UPS Options

Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Settings

This window allows you to select actions related to an uninterruptable power supply (UPS). If line power
fails and the UPS supplies power to the system, a message is written to the Message Log. When line
power is resumed, another message is written to the Message Log.
Note:
The Station UPS Options window is available only if the UPS option is enabled in the associated
hardware interface file (hwi). For more information, see the Hwi File Editor section of the MTS Series
793 Utility Software manual (part number 100-147-132).

Note:
Requires Configuration access level to adjust

Access
Station Setup window > navigation pane > Station UPS.

Reset
Click Reset on the Station Controls Panel.
• If the UPS event that caused the action returns to normal, any action assigned to that event is reset
and returned to the normal (untripped) state.
• If the UPS event that caused the action is still true, any action assigned to that event will occur again.

Station UPS Options window

Item Description

On UPS Actions Select an action to occur if line power fails and the UPS supplies power to the
system.

On UPS Delay Select the amount of time (in seconds) that the UPS can supply power to the system
before the action selected for the On UPS Delay Actions control is executed.

On UPS Delay Select an action to occur in the event the UPS supplies power to the system and
Actions the On UPS Delay time has expired.

On UPS Low Battery Select an action in the event the UPS battery becomes low while the UPS supplies
Actions power to the system.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 301

Station Setup

Item Description

UPS On-line Low Select an action in the event the UPS battery becomes low while line voltage
Battery Actions supplies power to the system.

UPS External Event Select an action in the event the external event associated with the UPS is detected.
Actions

Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Actions

UPS Action Settings

Setting Action

Disabled No action occurs. This setting dims the indicator.

Indicate Writes a message to the Message Log and the indicator switches from
white to red.

Station Power Off Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log,
turns off pressure at the hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and switches
the indicator from green to red.
For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off.
If the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multi station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned
off only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off”
function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

Interlock Stops any program command, writes a message to the Message Log,
clamps the servovalve (if enabled in the .hwi file), turns off pressure at
the hydraulic service manifold (HSM), and switches the indicator from
green to red.
Note:
To resume testing, fix the condition that caused the interlock and
then reset the Interlock.

For single station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) is turned off.
If the “Last Off” function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.
For multi station systems: If the “Last Off” function is enabled in the .hwi
file or equivalent jumpering, the hydraulic power unit (HPU) will be turned
off only if the interlock occurs on the last station running. If the “Last Off”
function is disabled, the HPU will remain on.

302 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Setup

Setting Action

Program Stop Interlock Stops any program command, and writes a message to the Message Log
and switches the indicator from green to red. Produces the same action
as clicking the Program Stop button on the Station Controls panel.
Note:
A Program Stop Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Program Hold Interlock Places a hold on any program command and writes a message to the
Message Log and switches the indicator from green to red. Produces the
same action as clicking the Program Hold button on the Station Controls
panel.
Note:
A Program Hold Interlock must be reset to resume testing.

Note:
The Function Generator does not recognize Program Hold or
Program Hold Interlock, but instead goes to Stop.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 303

Using Station Manager to Run
Tests
Topics:

• Overview..........................................................................................................................................306
• Station Control Panel Overview.......................................................................................................306
• How to Set Up and Run Tests.........................................................................................................314
• Hydraulic Controls...........................................................................................................................315
• Specimen Installation......................................................................................................................327
• Function Generator..........................................................................................................................332
• External Command..........................................................................................................................340
• Setpoint and Span Adjustments......................................................................................................342
• Message Logs.................................................................................................................................344

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 305

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Overview

About Station Manager Real-Time Control

Station Manager provides real-time control of controller hardware based on custom settings saved in a
parameter set.

Station power control

The Station Control Panel provides the following station power controls:
• Control hydraulics or electromechanical station power.
• Manual control of the actuator to install the specimen.

Test control
To run a test, Station Manager requires a test application (such as Basic TestWare or MPT) that provides
the command source for the test.
• Run simple programs using the built-in function generator.
• Control and manage test applications (such as Basic TestWare and MultiPurpose TestWare) with run,
hold, and stop controls.

Test monitoring
The Station Manager application provides various windows that display signal lists or other real-time
monitoring of tests:
• Monitor signals using the built-in scopes and meters.
• Monitor and/or set limits for various analog and digital signals sent to and from the controller.
• Monitor station interlocks.

Station Control Panel Overview

About the Station Controls Panel

Use the Station Controls panel to apply hydraulics; start, stop, and hold the program command from the
selected application; adjust program span; and monitor detector and signal limits.

306 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Example Station Controls - Your Control Panel May Appear Slightly Different

Callout Item

1 - Toolbar
Provides access to features such as
Manual Command.

2 - Control Application
Lists the application that is currently
running.

3 - Program Controls Use to control program execution.

4 - Rig Commands
Click a Rig Command button to send
the control channel(s) to predefined
command level(s). To display the Rig
Command buttons, select the Station
Option window’s Display Rig
Command on Main Window check
box.

5 - Program Run Starts the program. Flashing green

indicates that ramping is in progress.
Solid green indicates a running
program.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 307

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Callout Item

6 - Program Stop Stops the program. Red indicates a

stopped program.

7 - Program Hold Holds the program. The application

being run determines this button’s
availability. Yellow indicates a hold.

8 - Upper/Lower Limit Detectors Separate upper and lower limit

indicators show the status of all the
user-defined limit detectors. For
example, the Lower Limit indicator
turns red when any of the lower limits
set in the Station Setup window are
tripped.

9 - Upper/Lower Hardware Limits Separate upper and lower limit

(optional) indicators show the status of all the
user-defined hardware limit detectors.
For example, the Lower Limit
indicator turns red when any of the
lower hardware limits, set in the
Station Setup window, are tripped.

10 - Inner/Outer Error Detectors Separate inner and outer error

indicators show the status of all the
user-defined error detectors. For
example, the Outer Error indicator
turns red when any of the outer error
limits, set in the Station Setup window,
are tripped.

11 - Channel Feedback Signals This group of indicators show the

status of any of the signals designated
as active feedback for a control
channel. For example, if the active
feedback signal for channel 1
becomes saturated, the Saturated
[14] indicator in the Channels group
turns red. Other signal statuses
include Out of Range [13] (indicator
turns yellow), Invalid [15](indicator
turns red), or Disabled [16] (indicator
turns black).

12 - Signals This group of indicators show the

status of any of the signals (for
example, auxiliary inputs), including
those designated as active feedback
for a control channel. For example, if

308 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Callout Item

a signal becomes saturated, the

Saturated [14] indicator in the
Signals group turns red. Other signal
statuses include Out of Range [13]
(indicator turns yellow), Invalid [15]
(indicator turns red), or Disabled [16]
(indicator turns black).

17 - Interlock An interlock condition lights this

indicator. This type of interlock stops
the program and removes station
power.
The number following Interlock and
Program indicates which interlock
chain the station is using. This
assignment is made in the Station
Builder application.
The Station Manager application
saves the last used interlock chain to
the station configuration, and will
attempt to restore it if currently
available.

18 - Program A Program Interlock condition lights

this indicator. This type of interlock
stops the program without removing
station power.

19 - C-Stop A C-Stop Interlock lights this indicator.

The yellow control button is displayed
next to the indicator when C-Stop is
enabled.

20 - Gate A Gate interlock lights this indicator.

21 - Reset Resets the interlocks.

22 - Reset/Override Temporarily overrides interlocks. Each

click provides 10 seconds of override.
Use this button where station power
is required to clear interlock
conditions, such as saturated
channels.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 309

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Callout Item

Note: This button can be

disabled on a limit-by-limit
basis.

23 - Station Power The station configuration determines

the types of controls that appear in the
Station Controls Panel.
HPU - Controls hydraulic power units
(HPU), through Power Off, Power
Low, and Power High buttons.
HSM - Controls hydraulic service
manifolds through Power Off, Power
Low, and Power High buttons.
The names of station power resources
originate in the hardware interface file
(.hwi) associated with the station
configuration. You can edit the name
of these resources with the Hwi File
Editor application.

24/25 - Master Span Sets the master span for all channels
included in a master span group.
MPT procedures where the MPT
Option Editor window’s Span control
is set to Disable and Reset makes
this control unavailable.
Use the Channel Options window’s
Master Span tab to define master
span groups.
The Station Option window’s Display
Master Span on Main Window
control must be selected to display this
control. If this selection is not made,
Master Span will be displayed in the
Setpoint and Span window.

24/25 - Master Gain (Option) Sets the master gain for all station
channels. Master gain is a multiplier
of the gains for all the PID control
loops in your station.

310 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

About the Station Controls Toolbar

The Station Controls toolbar provides access to additional controls that allow you to apply offsets, set
detectors, set digital inputs and outputs, and manually position the actuator to install and remove the
specimen.

Station Controls Panel Toolbar

Item Description

Auto Offset
Use the Signal Auto Offset window to monitor station signals and apply
auto-offsets as required.

Detectors
Use the Detectors window to view Limit status and change Limit values.

CAN Bus Ports

Use the CAN Bus Ports window to access all CAN Bus controls.

Digital I/Os
Use the Digital I/Os window to test digital outputs and view digital input
and output status.

Manual Command
Use the Manual Command window to manually position the actuator
during specimen installation.

Span Setpoint
Use the Setpoint and Span window to adjust channels’ setpoints and
span.

Remote Setpoint Adjust

Use the Remote Setpoint Adjust (RSA) window to make channel and
control mode assignments to RSA knobs.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 311

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Item Description

Note:
The RSA option must be selected at installation and the knobs
must be added using the Station Builder application.

Note:
Changes made to the Manual Command and Setpoint and Span settings (for example, slider-bar
range settings) can be saved with the parameter set.

About Remote Setpoint Adjust

The Remote Setpoint Adjust window assigns channels and control modes to the Remote Setpoint Adjust
(RSA) box’s control knobs. RSA allows you to remotely adjust actuators’ setpoints, away from the computer
screen.
Note:
The RSA option must be selected at installation and the knobs must be added in Station Builder.

Access
Station Controls panel toolbar >

312 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Remote Setpoint Adjust Window

Item Description

Channel/Group Assigns a control channel to a knob.

Click the Channel button to toggle between individual channels and a
Master Command Group.
When a Master Command Group is selected, the RSA knob changes the
setpoints of channels selected in the Channel Options window’s Master
Command tab.
Selecting a Master Command Group blanks out the Control Mode and
Active Mode boxes.

Control Mode Selects the control mode.

Active Mode Displays the current control mode.

Enable using switch “RSA This check box indicates the status and name (“RSA Enable”) of the Enable
Enable” Switch you have configured in Station Builder.
This check box indicator will appear only if you have allocated a digital
input for an RSA control on/off switch in Station Builder.

Enable Remote Setpoint Select this check box to enable RSA.

Adjust
If the password option has been configured, a password dialog will appear
when this check box is selected.
This check box will appear only if you have not allocated a digital input for
an RSA control on/off switch in Station Builder.

Remote Setpoint Adjust Passwords

Password control of RSA enable/disable is an option configurable using the Systems Options Editor.
Note:
If the RSA digital switch option is selected, password control is not available.

When the Enable Remote Setpoint Adjust check box is selected, a password dialog is displayed.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 313

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

If the Use as default RSA password check box is selected, the password is stored and the password dialog
will not be displayed when enabling RSA until the password is cleared.
When you try to disable RSA by clicking Enable Remote Setpoint Adjust, a password validation dialog is
displayed. Enter the password and click OK.

If you try to close the Remote Setpoint Adjust window, the same password validation dialog will be displayed.

Clearing the default password

You must clear a saved default password before entering a new password. Clear a saved password before
RSA is enabled by clicking Clear RSA Password on the Password menu in the RSA window.

How to Set Up and Run Tests

The following procedure provides a basic outline of the steps required to run a test. Because of the flexibility
of MTS controllers, your test setup may be different.
1. Start the Station Manager application.
2. Load a test station.
3. If necessary, load a parameter set.
4. Make sure all test setup prerequisites are complete:
• All tuning, calibration, etc. is complete.
• Set up error and limit detectors
• If required, perform a shunt calibration check.
• Configure the outgoing program signal.
• Configure any digital inputs and outputs.

5. Apply Hydraulics
If necessary, override interlocks

314 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

6. Install the specimen

• Manual Control
• Auto-Offset
• Manual Offset

7. Load a test (select a program command) from the following sources:

• The Function Generator
• The Basic TestWare application
• The MultiPurpose TestWare application
• External programming

8. Start the Test.

Run/Stop/Pause Control

9. Adjust the setpoint and span during a test.

Hydraulic Controls

About Station Hydraulics

A hydraulic power unit (HPU) provides hydraulic pressure while a hydraulic service manifold (HSM) controls
the application of HPU pressure to the test station.

Station controls
Typically, the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel has both HPU and HSM controls.
• On test systems that use house hydraulic power, the Station Controls panel may have just HSM controls.
• On some small test systems without an HSM, the Station Controls panel may have just HPU controls.

Interlocks
A station interlock prevents an HSM start but permits an HPU start. The HSM is a station resource and
cannot start when a station interlock is active. An HPU is considered an external device and can be started
with an active station interlock (even if it has caused the interlock).

Systems without hydraulic power

On test systems that do not control hydraulic power, the Station Controls panel displays “No power
configured” and has an Interlock button to apply interlocks. A station with no HPU or HSM assigned must
be interlocked before a new parameter set can be loaded. The Interlock button can be used to generate
this required interlock.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 315

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

System with calculated outputs

Systems that use calculated outputs to drive servovalves connected to multiple independent HSMs may
experience control problems. For example, a road simulator with the lateral and longitudinal drive actuators
connected to two different HSMs may experience unexpected motion on one corner when only one HSM
is turned on.

Warning:
For systems with calculated outputs and multiple independent HSMs, turning on only one
HSM can result in unexpected or exaggerated actuator motion.
Unexpected or exaggerated actuator motion can injure anyone in its path.
For these systems, always use the All Off, All Low, and All High buttons on the Station Controls
panel for hydraulic control.

How to Apply Hydraulics

On the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel:
1. Click Reset to clear interlocks.
If the interlock remains on, use the Message Logs window to identify and correct the cause of the
interlock

Warning:
Hydraulic pressure application can cause high force actuator motion and hardware position
changes.
High force actuator motion can cause personal injury or damage to your equipment or
specimen.
Ensure that all equipment and personnel are clear of all system fixtures before you apply
hydraulic pressure to the system.

2. Start the HPU.

a) Click HPU Power Low.
b) Click HPU Power High.
The buttons stop flashing when pressure is reached.
Note:
A station interlock prevents an HSM start but permits an HPU start. The HSM is a station
resource and cannot start when a station interlock is active. An HPU is considered an external
device and can be started with an active station interlock (even if it has caused the interlock).

3. Turn on the HSM.

a) Click HSM Power Low.
b) Click HSM Power High.

316 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

When possible, use low pressure to install specimens.

How to Turn Off Hydraulics

On the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel:
• To turn off the HSM, click HSM Power Low and then HSM Power Off.
• To turn off the HPU, click HPU Power Low and then HPU Power Off.
• To simultaneously turn off both the HSM and HPU, click All Off.

About House Pressure Systems

A house pressure system uses a hydraulic pressure source that is not controlled or monitored by an MTS
controller. Because the controller does not control or monitor the pressure, you must manually control the
integrator to minimize actuator movement when you apply hydraulic pressure to the system.

How to Load a Station that Uses House Pressure

Use this procedure to load a station that does not control or monitor the hydraulic pressure source.
1. Ensure that hydraulic pressure is off.

Warning:
Unexpected actuator movement can occur when hydraulic pressure is applied to a station
that does not control or monitor hydraulic pressure.
Unexpected actuator movement can result in injury to personnel or damage to the
equipment.
Follow these guidelines to minimize actuator movement when you apply hydraulic pressure
to a system that does not control or monitor hydraulic pressure: Ensure that the hydraulic
pressure is off before loading a station. Make sure that the mechanical and electrical valve
balance is set correctly. Before you apply hydraulic pressure to the system, use the Station
Manager Manual Command control to manually zero (or minimize) the error signal, disable
the integrator, and ensure that all program sources are off.

2. Load a station.
3. Set the Integrator to manual mode.
a) In the Station Options window, click the Station View Options tab and set the Integrator Mode to
Manual.
b) The Integrators control appears in the Station Manager Station Controls panel.
4. Save the parameter set to display the Integrators control panel each time the station is loaded.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 317

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

How to Apply Hydraulics to a Station that Uses House Pressure

Use this procedure to apply hydraulic pressure to a station that does not control or monitor the hydraulic
pressure source.

Warning:
Unexpected actuator movement can occur when hydraulic pressure is applied to a station that
does not control or monitor hydraulic pressure.
Unexpected actuator movement can result in injury to personnel or damage to the equipment.
Follow these guidelines to minimize actuator movement when you apply hydraulic pressure
to a system that does not control or monitor hydraulic pressure: Ensure that the hydraulic
pressure is off before loading a station. Make sure that the mechanical and electrical valve
balance is set correctly. Before you apply hydraulic pressure to the system, use the Station
Manager Manual Command control to manually zero (or minimize) the error signal, disable
the integrator, and ensure that all program sources are off.

1. Set the Integrators Manual State setting to Disabled.

2. Use Manual Command to zero (or minimize) each error signal:
a) Use the Station Manager application to create a meter for the error signal for each channel.
b) In the Station Controls toolbar, click Manual Command.
c) Enable manual command and use the slider to zero (or minimize) the error signal for each channel.
d) Make sure that the output signal is stable.
3. Ensure that all program sources are off and click Reset/Override.
4. Apply hydraulic pressure to the system.
5. Set the Integrators Manual State setting to Enabled.

How to Remove Hydraulic Pressure from a Station that Uses

House Pressure
Use this procedure to remove hydraulic pressure to a station that does not control or monitor the hydraulic
pressure source.
1. Ensure that all program sources are off.
2. Set the Integrators Manual State setting to Hold.
3. Shut off hydraulic pressure.
4. Press the Interlock button.
5. Set the Integrators Manual State setting to Disable.

About Read-Only HSMs

A read-only HSM refers to a hydraulic pressure source that is controlled by an external system (or manually)
and monitored by the MTS controller. The read-only HSM state (pressure) is monitored using one or two
dedicated digital inputs. The Hwi Editor application assigns these inputs to the read-only HSM.

318 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

How to Apply Hydraulics to a Read-Only HSM Station

1. Ensure that read-only HSM pressure is off (no hydraulic pressure).

Warning:
Any time lag between the time that read-only HSM pressure is applied to a valve and when
the pressure signal is read by the Station Manager application can result in unexpected
actuator movement.
Unexpected actuator movement can result in injury to personnel or damage to the
equipment.
Use the Station Manager Manual Command control to zero (or minimize) the error signal
(make sure the error signal is stable) and ensure that all program sources are off before
you start a read-only HSM.

Follow these guidelines to minimize actuator movement when you apply hydraulics to a read-only HSM
station that includes a time lag between the time that read-only HSM pressure is applied to a valve and
when the pressure signal is read by the Station Manager application:
• Clear the actuator area before applying hydraulics.
• Ensure that the read-only HSM pressure is off before loading a station.

2. Move all equipment and personnel out of the actuator area.

3. Load a station.
4. Ensure that all program sources are off and click Reset/Override.
5. Switch the HSM outlet pressure to low pressure and then to high pressure.

About Signal States

The Stations Controls panel includes indicators that show the state of groups of signals. The status of
individual signals can be viewed in the Station Setup window by clicking Channels (for active feedback
signals) or Station Signals (for all signals).

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 319

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Status Indicators
The Station Controls panel includes signal status indicators.
Channel Feedback Signals - this group of indicators shows the status of any of the signals designated
as active feedback for a control channel.
Signals - this group of indicators shows the status of all the signals (for example, auxiliary inputs), including
those designated as active feedback for a control channel.
If a signal becomes saturated, the Saturated [2] indicator in the Signals group turns red. Other signal
statuses include Out of Range [1] (indicator turns yellow), Invalid [3] (indicator turns red), or Disabled
[4] (indicator turns black).

Out-of-Range Feedback
A feedback signal is out of range when it exceeds its calibrated range but is not saturated. Data taken
from out-of-range signals may not be accurate.

Saturated Feedback
A signal is saturated when it exceeds the full scale of the controller electronics making the signal value
unknown. A saturated active feedback signal lights a red station Limits indicator and sets an interlock in
the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel.
When a saturated active feedback signal sets an interlock, station power is removed from the station. You
must then adjust the saturated signal within its operating range before you can apply and maintain power
to the station. Clicking Reset/Override overrides the interlock to allow you to apply power and use manual
command to move the actuator(s) to bring the sensor signals back into range.

320 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Note:
A saturated signal that is not used by an active mode will not turn station power off.

Invalid Signals
Invalid signals are indicated by the status indicators. If you have an invalid active feedback, the following
message appears when you apply station power by overriding the interlock:“Cannot turn on hydraulic
power because one or more of the control channels has an INVALID active feedback.”
A signal is invalid when:
• The expression for a calculated signal becomes invalid. For example, if a calculation results in a value
that is undefined as a real number (such as the square root of a negative number).
• The floating point format is invalid. This can occur when you are defining signals in the CAN bus editor
or a Hybrid Simulation model.
• The Manual Offset value for an active feedback signal exceeds +/- ½ of its current range. A Manual
Offset active feedback error typically occurs when you switch from a large control range with a large
Manual Offset to a small control range without first reducing the Manual Offset. For example: Suppose
you apply a Manual Offset of +5 mm to your Range 1 displacement signal of ±60 mm. You disable
hydraulics. You switch to Range 2 with a displacement signal of ±6 mm. You forget to change the
Manual Offset of +5 mm. The Manual Offset of +5 exceeds ½ of Range 2 (3 mm), generating an invalid
active feedback interlock.

Disabled Signals
A signal is disabled when:
• The sensor calibration file (scf) is not available or if a different TEDS device is connected to the controller.
• Changes are made to the hwi file (such as changing a DUC setting from AC to DC).
• Improper linearization data was entered in the Advance Linearization calibration tab.

For more information

For more information on signal states, see:
How to Monitor Signal Status (p. 321).
How to Correct Invalid Active Feedback (p. 323).
Saturated Calculated Input Signals (p. 322).

How to Monitor Signal Status

1. During a test, use the Station Controls panel to monitor signal status indicators.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 321

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Channel Signals - this group of indicators shows the status of any of the signals designated as active
feedback for a control channel.
Signals - this group of indicators shows the status of all the signals (for example, auxiliary inputs)
including active feedback for a control channel.
If a signal becomes saturated, the Saturated [2] indicator in the Signals group turns red. Other signal
statuses include Out of Range [1] (indicator turns yellow), Invalid [3] (indicator turns red), or Disabled
[4] (indicator turns black).

2. If an indicator lights, use the Station Setup window to determine which signal caused the indicator to
light.
a) Channels indicators - display the Station Setup window, click Channels, and then click the Channel
Summary tab to display the status of each channel feedback signal.
b) Signals indicators - display the Station Setup window, and click Station Signals to display the
status of each signal.
3. If necessary, fix the condition.

Saturated Calculated Input Signals

When a calculated input used as active feedback becomes saturated, it is because one or more of the
sensor signals used to create it has become saturated.
Note:
A calculated input is derived from sensor feedback that is modified by a mathematical function.

Troubleshooting
If your system has a saturated feedback interlock check to see if the active feedback signal is a calculated
input. If it is, you must identify and resolve the saturated sensor component of the calculated input to bring
the calculated input within range.

322 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Note:
The mathematical function assigned to the saturated sensor signal may make the calculated input
signal appear to be operating within its normal range when viewed with the scope or meters.

Message log
When an active feedback signal has becomes saturated, the application writes a message to the log,
noting that an interlock has tripped. However, the message will not identify the saturated signal as a
calculated input, nor will it identify the specific sensor signal component of the calculated input that is
saturated.

How to Correct Invalid Active Feedback

This section describes how to correct an invalid feedback caused by a Manual Offset that is too large.
If an incorrect calculation causes an invalid active feedback, correct the calculation.
1. In the Station Manager window’s Display menu, select Station Setup.
2. In the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, locate and select the signal producing the invalid active
feedback.
3. In the Station Setup window, click .
4. In the Inputs panel’s Offset/Zero tab, reduce the Manual Offset to less than half the current range. The
signal may still be saturated after reducing Manual Offset.

How to Apply Hydraulics When a Channel’s Feedback is Saturated

Method 1
Use this method if the feedback is saturated because the current Control Range is too small.
1. Change the Current Range:
a. On the Station Manager window’s Display menu, select Station Setup.
b. In the Station Setup window’s navigation pane, locate and select the saturated feedback signal.
c. In the Station Setup window, click .

2. In the Inputs panel, select a larger Current Range.

Warning:
Applying hydraulics can result in sudden actuator motion.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before applying hydraulics.

3. In the Station Manager window’s Station Controls, reset the interlock and apply station power:
a. Click Reset to remove the interlock.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 323

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

b. Apply hydraulic pressure to the station.

Method 2
Use this method if the feedback remains saturated after using Method 1 to change the Current Range.
1. In the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel:
a. Click Reset/Override to provide enough time to override the interlock.
• Each click provides 10 seconds of override time.

b. Apply low hydraulic pressure.

• Applying low station power displays the Control Channel Saturation Warning message:
• “One or more of the control channel(s) is saturated. Actuator movement may occur when hydraulics
are turned on. Press ‘Allow’ to turn hydraulics ON.”

Warning:
Applying hydraulics can result in sudden actuator motion.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before applying hydraulics.

2. Allow hydraulic pressure to be turned on.

In the Control Channel Saturation Warning window, click Allow.
The software turns on low pressure hydraulics and moves the actuator to the limit of its current range.

How to Recover from Inadvertent Use of Electrical Zero

To modify the parameters and sensor data to recover from the inadvertent use of the Electrical Zero control
associated with Gain/Linearization type calibrations, you need to know when the control was set.

When set before calibration

If the Electrical Zero value was set before the calibration was performed, there are two methods you may
use to recover the calibration:
1. Method 1
This method adds the value of the Electrical Zero control to the Fine Zero control. This results in
calibration data that may be moved (via sensor file or transducer ID module) to other conditioners.
a. Note the value of the Electrical Zero control on the Offset/Zero tab of the Inputs panel.
b. Add the value of the Electrical Zero control to the Fine Zero control on the Calibration tab of the
Inputs panel.
c. If necessary, clear the Electrical Zero Lock box.
d. Set Electrical Zero to zero, then set the Electrical Zero Lock box.

324 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

2. Method 2
You can use the calibration data as is provided it is used on the same conditioner. However, if you
move the calibration data to a different conditioner, you must manually duplicate the Electrical Zero
value in the current parameter set to the parameter set associated with the new input.
a. Note the value of the Electrical Zero control on the Offset/Zero tab of the current Inputs page.
b. Set the Electrical Zero control on the Inputs page associated with the new input to the same value,
then set the Electrical Zero Lock box.
Note:
The amount of potential error introduced when Electrical Zero is modified after a linearization
calibration is a function of the amount of linearization correction applied.

When set after calibration

If the Electrical Zero value was set after the calibration was performed, you must add the value of the
Electrical Zero control to the Manual Offset control, as follows:
1. Note the value of the Electrical Zero control on the Offset/Zero tab of the Inputs panel. The value is
expressed in volts.
2. Convert volts to engineering units, where 10 volts corresponds to 110% of the calibrated full-scale
range of the conditioner, making one volt equal to 11% of the full-scale range.
3. Add the converted value to the Manual Offset control on the same panel.
4. If necessary, clear the Electrical Zero Lock box.
5. Set Electrical Zero to zero, then set the Electrical Zero Lock box.

When set before and after calibration

If the Electrical Zero value was set to an unknown value before the calibration was performed, and then
modified after the calibration, there is no way to recover and the sensor must be recalibrated with Electrical
Zero set at zero and the Electrical Zero Lock box set.

About Gate Interlocks

A gate interlock is a station interlock usually associated with specimen installation on newer load frames
with actuator speed settings.
In this instance, when the load frame is switched to the Slow (low flow) actuator speed setting, the load
frame opens a set of contacts connected to J29 on the HSM board to force a gate interlock.
Note:
Unlike other interlocks, there are no user-defined actions that will cause a gate interlock. Also, a
gate interlock cannot be overridden.

If the hwi file does not enable gate interlocks, the J29 input is used for the program stop interlock.

Gate interlock actions

A gate interlock results in the following actions:

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 325

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

• A Program Stop interlock occurs.

• The controller holds the integrator on all active control modes and during mode switching.
• The Station Manager application logs a message.
• The Station Manager Gate interlock indicator turns on.

How to Reset a Gate Interlock

A gate interlock cannot be overridden.
1. Clear the gate interlock input on J29.
Depending on your system, this could involve switching the load frame actuator speed from Slow to
Fast mode, or closing a test area enclosure door.
The controller continues to hold the integrator.

2. Press Reset to clear the interlock and resume integrator operation.

The Gate indicator turns off.

About C-Stop Interlock

This option is available to users with Configuration access level only. The C-Stop (Controlled stop) interlock
allows an operator to perform a controlled stop regardless of the state of the Function Generator.
You can define multiple discrete C-Stop interlocks, which enable the corresponding control buttons to
function on the Station Controls panel in the Station Manager application.

A C-Stop interlock results in the following actions:

• A Program Stop interlock occurs.
• The Station Manager C-Stop indicator turns on.
• The Station Manager application logs a message.

326 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

• The control channel executes the defined C-Stop action.

The C-Stop parameters are defined on the Channel Options window > C-Stop tab
Note:
C-Stop differs from Ramp To and Hold At Level actions because it does not require the Function
Generator to be running.

Specimen Installation

About Manual Command

This window provides manual control of channels. Use this control to position the actuator during specimen
installation.
Important:
To help protect specimens and fixturing, you may want to use the Station Builder application to
create a Channel Limited Channel (CLC) control mode that you can use as the Manual Command
control mode. The CLC control mode is typically set up as displacement control with a load signal
input with limit settings that can limit the amount of force that can be applied during specimen
installation.

Access
Station Controls panel toolbar >

Manual Command Window

Item Description

Channel Selects the control channel.

Click the Channel button to toggle between individual channels
and a Master Command Group.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 327

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Item Description

Control Mode Selects a control mode.

Select Enable Manual Command to make a selected Control
Mode the Active Mode.

Active Mode Displays the current control mode.

Manual Cmd Applies the manual command to the actuator.

If necessary, click the Manual Cmd text to display a window where
you can change the slider-bar range.
Selecting a Master Command Group that has individual channels
at different Manual Cmd values changes this control. It displays
the highest and lowest Manual Cmd values for the Group. It also
displays pointers that indicate the highest and lowest Manual Cmd
values. Pointers lock together once they have been used to move
the Group to a common Manual Cmd value.

Enable Manual Command Enables the manual command. Closing the Manual Command
window disables this command.

Rig Commands (Option) Click a Rig Command button to move that channel to its specified
command level.
Note:
Rig Commands are configured in the Channel Options
window.

Using Channel Limited Channel Control Mode to Install Specimens

To help protect specimens and fixtures, you may want to use the Station Builder application to create a
Channel Limited Channel (CLC) control mode that you can use as the Manual Command control mode.
The CLC control mode is typically set up as displacement control with a force signal as the limit input.
Once created, you can use the Station Setup tool to set limits (typically force) to control the amount of
force that can be applied during specimen installation.
When using Manual Command set to CLC, as the force signal value enters the user-defined CLC bandwidth,
channel limiting starts to slow the actuator response. If a force limit is reached, the limiting channel prevents
further actuator movement, regardless of the displacement command.

For more information

For more information about CLC setup and tuning, see Adjustments Tab - CLC Control Modes (p. 240)
and About CLC Tuning (p. 242).

328 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

How to Manually Position the Actuator to Install and Remove

Specimens
This procedure is used for installing and removing specimens.
1. If desired, set up the Scope window to display the actuator’s displacement and force signals.
2. On the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel toolbar, click .
3. Set up the Manual Command window:
a) Select the channel or channel group to be manually commanded.
b) Select the desired Control Mode.
c) Select Enable Manual Command.

Warning:
Applying hydraulics can result in sudden actuator motion.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before applying hydraulics.

4. In the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel:

a) Click Reset to clear any interlocks.
b) As needed, click Reset/Override to override interlocks.
Each Reset/Override click adds 10 seconds of override time.
c) Apply station hydraulic power.
When possible, use low pressure. As soon as power is applied, the Manual Command window’s
Manual Cmd shows the actual actuator position.

5. In the Manual Command window, select the Enable Manual Command check box.
6. If you are using a handset, select the Exculsive Control check box.
7. Use the Manual Cmd slider bar to position the actuator.
Note:
If necessary, click the Manual Cmd text to display a window where you can change the slider-bar
range.

How to Use Manual Command with Channel Groups

1. In the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel toolbar, click to open the Manual Command
window.
2. Click the Channel button to toggle to Group.
3. Select the desired channel group for park or ride positioning.
4. Set the Park/Ride position for all actuators in the group.
a) Select the Enable Manual Command check box to activate manual command.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 329

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

b) Move the low value slider and/or the high value slider so that they meet to form a “group value”
slider.
c) Set the group value slider to the required Park or Ride position for all actuators in the group.
Note:
If necessary, click the Manual Cmd text to display a window where you can change the
slider-bar range.

How to Apply an Auto Offset to an Input Signal

1. Select an access level of Operator or above.
2. On the Station Manager window, click Display > Station Setup.
3. On the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the input signal that you want to offset.
Note:
Auto Offset controls are also available on the Values/Offset tab of the Station Signals summary
page.

4. On the Inputs panel, click the Offset/Zero tab.

5. On the Offset/Zero tab:
a) Clear the Auto Offset Lock box.
b) Click Auto Offset.
Manual Offset shows the offset applied to produce the Current Value.
If the Manual Offset value exceeds half of the full-scale range of the signal, the system interlocks
and removes station power.

6. Optional—Select the Auto Offset Lock check box to make the Auto Offset controls unavailable at the
access levels of Tuning, Operator, and Configuration.

How to Apply a Manual Offset to an Input Signal

If the desired amount of offset is known, select it with the Manual Offset slider.
1. Select an access level of Operator or above.
2. On the Station Manager application Display menu, select Station Setup.
3. On the Station Setup window navigation pane, select the input signal that you want to offset.
4. On the Inputs panel, click the Offset/Zero tab.
5. On the Offset/Zero tab, move the Manual Offset slider to apply an offset.

330 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Note:
If necessary, click the Manual Offset text to display a window where you can change the slider-bar
range.

Warning:
Immediate and unexpected actuator response is possible when you apply a manual offset
to your system. If the Current Value displayed on the Offset/Zero tab is zero, a manual
offset will cause the actuator to move to the new zero position.
Sudden actuator movement can cause injury and equipment damage.
Never apply a manual offset to a sensor being used by the active control mode while station
power is on.

About the Signal Auto Offset Window

Access
Station Controls panel toolbar >
Use this window to monitor station signals and apply a software-based offset to zero signals input by
conditioners.

Signal Auto Offset Window

Item Description

Signal List Select to display lists of signals. The Channel Option window’s Signal List tab
defines the content of each list.

Signal Value Displays each current signal value and offset value.

Auto Offset Performs auto offset for all signals currently displayed in the window.
If a signal has Auto Offset Lock checked on its Offset/Zero tab on the Station
Setup window Inputs panel it will not be auto offset.

Clear Offset Sets the value to zero for all signals currently displayed in the window.

Displays only next to conditioner input signals that can be auto offset.
Click to apply a zeroing offset to the signal.
If a signal is the active feedback and the channel is running, the auto offset
icon will not be available.

Sets the value of the signal next to the button to zero.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 331

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

How to Use the Rig Commands

Click one of the Rig Command buttons on the Manual Command and Station Manager window to move
enabled channels to a predefined command level. Indicators next to each command button turns green
when the channel is at the specified level.
Note:
Use the Rig Commands tab on the Channel Options window to define the Rig Command control
modes and command levels for each of the four rig commands.

Rig Command buttons on the Manual Command window.

Function Generator

About the Function Generator

The function generator generates commands that can be used to warm up a system or tune actuators.

332 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Note:
The Function Generator does not recognize Program Hold or Program Hold Interlock, but instead
goes to Stop.

Warning:
Changes in Function Generator values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in
unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing values.

Function Generator Control Panel

Item Description

Channel Selects the control channel.

Click the Channel button to toggle between individual channels
and a Master Command Group.
Selecting a Master Command Group blanks out the Control Mode
and Active Mode entries.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 333

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Item Description

Control Mode Sets the control mode used when the Function Generator starts.

Active Mode Displays the current control mode.

Command Type Selects the type of command:

Cyclic—The function cycles at the specified amplitude and
frequency.
Sweep—The function sweeps the command signal between the
specified frequency limits at the rate specified.
Random—The function sweeps randomly according to the RMS
amplitude and frequency limits you specify.
Descriptions of each command type follow this table.

Target Setpoint Specifies the setpoint that the signal’s amplitude centers on.
The initial ramp time to the Target Setpoint is specified as a
command option (Tools menu > Channel Options > Channel
Options window > Command Options tab > Setpoint/Span Times
> Setpoint).
Target Setpoint ramp times are proportional to the full scale. If the
value has less distance to travel, the execution time will be
correspondingly less than the specified time.

Amplitude (±) Displays for a Command Type of Cyclic and Sweep.

Specifies the signal’s amplitude. The specified amplitude applies
equally to both sides of the Target Setpoint.

RMS Amplitude (±) Displays for a Command Type of Random.

Specifies the signal’s RMS amplitude.
RMS (Root Mean Square) amplitude is always smaller than peak
amplitude. The maximum display range of the RMS amplitude is
set to 20% full-scale.

Frequency Displays for a Command Type of Cyclic and Sweep.

Specifies the signal’s frequency.
The maximum frequency is limited to 20% of the high system clock
rate.
During a Sweep, this control’s pointer tracks the sweep frequency.

Frequency Min/Max Displays for a Command Type of Random.

Sets the minimum and maximum frequencies of the random signal.
Click on the label to view the allowable minimum and maximum
limits.

334 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Item Description

Sweep These controls display for a Command Type of Sweep.

Defines the signal’s sweep.

Type Defines the sweep type:

Linear—Steps the sweep linearly by the Rate between Frequency
Limits.
Logarithmic—Steps the sweep logarithmically by the Rate between
Frequency Limits.
Running the Function Generator makes this control unavailable.

Mode Defines the duration of the sweep.

Single—Sweeps until it reaches a frequency limit and then dwells
at that limit.
Continuous—Sweeps continuously between frequency limits until
stopped.
Running the Function Generator makes this control unavailable.

Rate Sets the change per step and how often the change occurs.

Frequency Limits Sets the sweep command’s upper and lower frequency limits.
Click on the label to view the Frequency Limits range.

Sweep Control Starts an upward sweep.

Holds the sweep at its current frequency.

Starts a downward sweep.

Wave Shape Specifies the signal’s wave shape of Square, Ramp, Sine, Square
Tapered, Ramp Tapered, or Sine Tapered. See the discussion
that follows this table.

Compensator Specifies the compensator used by the Function Generator.

The Station Builder application must have enabled adaptive inverse
control (AIC) and amplitude and phase control (APC) in the station
configuration for these compensation methods to be available.

How to Run the Function Generator

The Station Manager window’s Function Generator can provide simple programming for use when tuning
the system and warming up hydraulics.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 335

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Note:
Be sure to configure the compensator before starting your program.

The following steps give typical settings for setting up the Function Generator to warm up a single-channel
system that does not have an installed specimen.
1. In the Station Manager window’s Application Controls panel, click

Warning:
Changes in Function Generator values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in
unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing values.

2. In the Function Generator panel:

a) Select the Channel to be programmed.
b) Select a Control Mode of displacement.
c) Select a Command Type of Cyclic.
d) Set a Target Setpoint of midstroke.
Typically, the actuator should cycle around midpoint.
e) Set an Amplitude (±) that will move the actuator through about 70% of its full displacement.
f) Set a Frequency of 0.25–0.5 Hz.
Displayed ranges for Target Setpoint, Amplitude, and Frequency are saved and are restored when
returning to a previously programmed channel.
g) Select a Wave Shape of Sine.
h) As needed, select a Compensator.

Warning:
Clicking the Run button will put actuators in motion.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the test area before pressing the run button.

3. In the Station Manager window’s Station Controls panel:

a) Click Reset to clear interlocks.
b) Apply station power.
c) Click to start the program.

336 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

How to Select a Master Command Group for the Function

Generator
1. In the Station Manager application Controls panel, click .
2. In the Function Generator panel, select a Master Command group.
a) Click Channel to change this button to Group.
The Group button will be unavailable if no Master Command group has been defined.
b) In the Group list, select a Master Command group.

c) The Control Mode switches to the mode(s) associated with the Master Command group when the
Station Controls panel is clicked or when the Manual Command window’s Enable Manual Command
is selected.

About Function Generator Wave Shapes

The Function Generator provides the following wave shapes.

Square

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 337

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Ramp

Sine

Square Tapered
Tapered square waves taper from 0% to 100% amplitude at the beginning of execution, and from 100%
to 0% at the end of execution.

Ramp tapered
Tapered triangle waves taper from 0% to 100% amplitude at the beginning of execution and from 100%
to 0% at the end of execution.

338 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Sine tapered
Sine waves taper from 0% to 100% amplitude at the beginning of execution, and from 100% to 0% at the
end of execution.

About the Random Function Command Type

The function generator’s Command Type selection of Random provides random functions with various
pre-emphasis filters. Typically, these random wave shapes are used to train adaptive compensators such
as AIC and APC.
The convergence rate is typically slower at high frequencies. The random function pre-emphasis filter is
used to make the convergence rate constant over all frequencies, by boosting high frequencies and
suppressing low frequencies. When training an adaptive compensator, choose a shape that is roughly an
inverse of the shape of the signal spectrum.
The options are:
• Random - 1/F2
• Random - 1/F
• Random - Flat (no pre-emphasis filter)
• Random - F
• Random - F2

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 339

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

External Command

About External Command Inputs

Your controller can process programming received from an external controller or function generator while
maintaining all other closed-loop control functions.
Note:
Your controller cannot recognize mode switches in external program input signals.

External Command Settings

Use this control panel to select and adjust external program commands.
You must use the Station Builder application to assign an external input to a channel in the station
configuration for this panel to display.

Access

Panel buttons >

Note:
The external programmer should be supplying commands before adjustments are made in this
panel.

External Command Control Panel

Item Description

Channel Selects the control channel that receives the external command.
Click the Channel button to toggle between individual channels and
an External Command Group.
Selecting an External Command Group blanks out the Control Mode
and Active Mode boxes and disables Target Setpoint.

Control Mode Displays the external command control mode, assigned in the Station
Builder application.
If the external command signal is defined in the Station Builder
application with a “normalized” dimension (volts, ratio, unitless, or
percent), the Station Manager External Command panel will allow
the selection of any mode defined for that channel.

340 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Item Description

Active Mode Displays the current active control mode of the channel, assigned
in the Station Builder application.

Target Setpoint Specifies the setpoint on which the amplitude of the external
command centers (only for “Channel” type, not “Group” type).

Compensator Specifies a compensator for your command signal.

Segment Generator Options Select Soft Start/Stop Enable to taper the start and stop of the
external command.
Use the Command Options tab on the Channel Option window to
define beginning and ending taper times.

How to Configure External Command Inputs

Before you can configure external command inputs, you must use the Station Builder application to configure
controller channels to accept external program commands.
1. Connect your controller to the external command source.
2. Display the Station Setup window.
a) Open your station configuration file in the Station Manager application.
b) Select the Calibration access level.
c) On the Station Manager Display menu, select Station Setup.
3. Configure the external command signal.
a) In the navigation pane, select the channel associated with the external input.
b) Click the Calibration tab, and set the external command Full-Scale Min/Max values, Signal Polarity,
and Gain.
c) On the Limits tab, set limits and detector actions.
d) On the Offset/Zero tab, apply offset as needed.
4. Start the external command.
a) On the Station Manager controls panel, click the External Command icon to open the External
Command control panel.
Note:
Ensure that the external programmer is connected before pressing Run.

b) On the control panel Channel list, click the channel that requires the external command.
c) On the Control Mode list, click the control mode.
Note:
If the external command signal is defined in the Station Builder application with a “normalized”
dimension (volts, ratio, unitless, or percent), the Station Manager External Command panel
will allow the selection of any mode defined for that channel.

d) Set the external command Target Setpoint.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 341

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

e) Optional—Select Soft Start/Stop. This option ramps the external command from 0 to 100% when
you click Start and tapers the command from 100 to 0% when you click Stop.
f) On the Station Controls panel, click the Program Run button.

Setpoint and Span Adjustments

About Setpoint and Span Adjustments

This window adjusts channels’ setpoints and spans. Changes made to the Setpoint and Span settings (for
example, slider-bar range settings) can be saved in a parameter set.

Access
Station Controls panel toolbar >

Setpoint and Span Window

Item Description

Channel Selects the control channel.

Click the Channel button to toggle between individual channels and a
Master Command Group.

Active Mode Displays the control mode that is being adjusted.

Setpoint Adjusts the program’s signal’s mean (setpoint).

When a Master Command Group is selected, this control changes the
setpoints of channels selected in the Channel Options window’s Master
Command tab.
Selecting a Master Command Group that has individual channels at
different Setpoint values changes this control. It displays the highest and
lowest Setpoint values for the Group. It also displays pointers that indicate
the highest and lowest Setpoint values. Pointers lock together once they
have been used to move the Group to a common Setpoint value.

Span Adjusts the program signal’s span.

When a Master Command Group is selected, this control changes the
spans of channels selected in the Channel Options window’s Master Span
tab.
Selecting a Master Command Group that has individual channels at
different Span values changes this control. It displays the highest and
lowest Span values for the Group. It also displays pointers that indicate
the highest and lowest Span values. Pointers lock together once they have
been used to move the Group to a common Span value.

342 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Item Description

Master Span Adjusts the span for all channels included in a master span group.
This item is not displayed if Master Span is selected for display on the
Station Manager main window.

Note:
If necessary, click the Setpoint or Span text to display a window where you can change the slider-bar
ranges.

How to Adjust Setpoint and Span During a Test

The Setpoint controls can adjust the setpoint of both single channels and multiple channels.
Setpoint and Span controls in a Master Command Group are available only on a single channel.
Reducing the Station Controls panel’s Master Span setting further reduces an individual channel’s Span
setting. For example: a Master Span of 50% halves an individual channel’s Span of 50%, giving the channel
an effective 25% span.

Warning:
Changes in Set Point and Span values made with hydraulic pressure on can result in
unexpected actuator movement.
A moving actuator can injure anyone in its path.
Always clear the actuator area before changing values.

1. In the Station Manager window Station Controls panel toolbar, click .

2. In the Setpoint and Span window:
a) If the Channel button is available, click it to choose an individual channel or a Master Command
Group.
b) Set the Setpoint.
c) Set the Span.
If necessary, click the Setpoint or Span text to display a window where you can change the slider-bar
range. These settings can be saved in a parameter set.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 343

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Message Logs

About Message Logs

Logged events
Message Logs record station and test events as they occur, including:
• File events
• Resource mismatches
• Hydraulic and station state changes
• Detector activity
• Over-temperature conditions
• Full-scale changes
Note:
Right-click in the message log pane to display a pop-up menu with copy and clear functions.
Copy copies selected entries (or all entries if none are selected) to the clipboard.Clear removes
all messages from the panel.

Log files
When you open a new station configuration file, the Station Manager application automatically creates a
Message Log file to record events that occur with the specific configuration.
The Station Manager application saves the Message Log file in your config folder. The Station Manager
application names the Message Log file, using the station configuration name with a log extension.
When the station configuration closes, the Station Manager application saves the Message Log file. When
the configuration reopens and station activity resumes, new messages get appended to the old.

Auto-archiving
When the Message Logs window accumulates 1000 messages, it automatically saves these messages
to an archive file and then clears them from its display.
The first archived file is named configuration file name000.log, the second is named configuration file
name001.log, and so on. This continues until the last file is named configuration file name499.log. The
system then starts again with the oldest file, which is typically configuration file name000.log

344 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Caution:
Too many messages combined with the auto-archive feature can use up all disk space.
Running out of disk space can stop your test and result in data loss.
If you think your test may generate an excessive number of message log entries, you should
filter the messages written to the Basic TestWare message log with the Test Log tab in the
Test Setup window.

Message Logs Window

Access
Display menu > Message Logs

Station Manager window > toolbar >

Right-click in the message log pane to display a pop-up menu with copy and clear functions.
Copy copies selected entries (or all entries if none are selected) to the clipboard.
Clear removes all messages from the panel.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 345

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Toolbar

This window records station and test events as they occur, including:
• Power status changes
• Station state changes
• Detector activity
• Over-temperature conditions
• Full-scale changes

The default location for station log files is C:\ftiim\config, C:\tsiis\config, or C:\ftgt\config.
For quick reference during testing, the Station Manager window’s Message Pane displays Warning, Error,
and Fatal Error messages from all applications.

Message Logs Window

Item Description

toolbar Controls Message Log operation.

Displays the Open Message Log File window. Use this window to
open archived message log files (extension log).

Saves all messages to a new message log file and clears all
messages from the Message Log window.
To clear only some messages, highlight a message before saving.
Messages that follow the highlighted message will remain in the
window.
The first message log saved is named
configuration_file_name001.log, the second is named
configuration_file_name002.log, and so on.

346 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Item Description

Closes the current archived message log and displays the Station
Log for the active station configuration.

Displays the Message Log Print window, which specifies what

messages get printed.

Displays the Message Log Print To File window, which is used to

save message logs as text files (extension txt).

Displays the Add Entry window, which is used to insert

user-defined entries into the message log.

Deletes the highlighted user entry from the log. Only user-defined
entries can be deleted.

Copies the highlighted entries to the clipboard.

Enables all message log display options. Control the message

log’s detail level by unchecking display options that are not
needed
Date/Time—Allows date and time information display when
checked.
Severity—Allows severity information display when checked.
Source—Allows source information display when checked.

Log Selects the message log displayed.

Select Station Log to display the log for the station configuration.
Select MPT Specimen Log or Basic TestWare Log to view logs
for MultiPurpose TestWare and Basic TestWare tests. Opened
archive may also be displayed.

Scroll to New Entry Keeps the window scrolling to the last logged entry.

How to Open a Message Log

In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click
to display the Message Logs window. Up to three Message Logs windows can be opened.

How to Print a Message Log

1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click .
2. In the Message Logs window’s toolbar, click .
3. In the Message Log Print window:

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 347

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

a) As needed, click Print Range selections to define what is printed.

b) As needed, click Print Filters to apply Severity and Source filters to what prints.
c) Click OK to print the log.

How to Print the Message Log to File

1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click .
2. In the Message Logs window’s toolbar, click .
3. In the Message Log Print to File window, specify the File Name and its location. By default, the file is
saved as a text (.txt) file.

How to Add a User Entry to the Message Log

1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click .
2. In the Message Logs window’s toolbar, click .
3. In the Message Log-Add Entry window:
a) Select a Message Severity level.
b) Select a Message Log source.
c) Enter a Message Text.
d) Click Add to enter the message.

How to Delete a User Entry from the Message Log

Only user entries can be deleted.
1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click .
2. In the Message Logs window, highlight the user entry to be deleted.
3. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click .
4. In the Delete Confirmation window, click OK to delete the selected entry.

How to Define Which Messages Get Logged

1. In the Station Manager window’s Tools menu, select Station Options.
2. In the Station Options window, click the Station Log tab.
3. In the Station Log tab’s Message Capture:
a) Select a Minimum Severity to set the least severe message level to be logged.
b) Select a Source to log messages from This Application Only or All Applications.
4. As needed, click Delete Older Than to enable automatic deletion and then enter the number of Days.

How to Manually Archive a Message Log

1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click .

348 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

2. Select a message in the Message Logs window, The highlighted message and all earlier messages
will be saved and cleared from the log.
3. In the Message Logs window’s toolbar, click to archive the file. The following message will appear:
“Messages older than and including the last selected message will be saved and cleared from the log.
If none are selected, all messages will be saved. Do you want to save and clear at this time?”

4. In the Archive Confirmation window, click Yes.

The Message Logs window displays a message showing when the file was archived, and its name and
location.

Message Log Add Entry Window

Access

Message Log window > toolbar >

This window adds user-defined messages to the message log.

Message Log Add Entry Window

Item Description

Message Severity Sets a message level of Diagnostic, Information, Warning, or Error.

Message Log Identifies the source of the log message.

Stmgr—Sets a message source of Stgmr User.
MPT—Sets a message source of MPT User.
Basic TestWare—Sets a message source of Basic TestWare User.

Message Text Type the message that you want to add.

Add Adds the message to the log.

Clear Clears the Message Text.

Close Closes the window.

How to Switch I/O Carrier LEDs On and Off (Series 494 Hardware
only)
To help identify input and output connections, each mezzanine card connector on a Model 494.40 I/O
Carrier board includes an LED that you can switch on and off using the LED State check box.
1. In the Station Manager application, open a station and display the Station Setup window.
2. Display the LED State check box for the input or output connection that you want to locate (see below).

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 349

Using Station Manager to Run Tests

Input LEDs
1. Select a sensor input.
2. Click the Input panel’s Sensor tab.

Output LEDs
1. Select a channel.
2. Click (Channel Drive panel)

350 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Using Station Manager to Run Tests

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 351

Calculated Signals
Topics:

• Calculated Input and Output Resources.........................................................................................354

• Calculation Editor............................................................................................................................357
• Calculated Signals Examples..........................................................................................................367
• Calculation Syntax...........................................................................................................................377
• Station Setup Calculations Panels..................................................................................................387

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 353

Calculated Signals

Calculated Input and Output Resources

About Calculated Input and Output Resources

Use this chapter as a reference when creating calculated inputs and outputs for your system. It provides
information on the following:
• Creating calculated input and output channels
• Defining calculated input and output formulas with the Calculation Editor
• Examples of typical calculated input/output applications

License requirements
Calculated inputs outputs are optional features, each requiring a separate license.

To create calculated inputs and outputs

See information about the Station Builder application for information about creating calculated input and
outputs.

Warning:
Loss of system control and unexpected actuator movement can result from editing calculated
channel equations.
Unexpected high-force actuator motion and loss of system control can cause injury to personnel
and damage to equipment and specimens.
Do not attempt to edit calculated equations unless you fully understand calculated channel
concepts, the channel relationships in your system, and the result that making changes will
have to your system. Extreme caution is necessary and severe risks are involved. For final
testing of calculated equation changes, use a dummy specimen that is of no value to you.

About Calculated Input and Output Resources

Use this chapter as a reference when creating calculated inputs and outputs for your system. It provides
information on the following:
• Creating calculated input and output channels
• Defining calculated input and output formulas with the Calculation Editor
• Examples of typical calculated input/output applications

354 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

License requirements
Calculated inputs outputs are optional features, each requiring a separate license.

To create calculated inputs and outputs

See information about the Station Builder application for information about creating calculated input and
outputs.

Warning:
Loss of system control and unexpected actuator movement can result from editing calculated
channel equations.
Unexpected high-force actuator motion and loss of system control can cause injury to personnel
and damage to equipment and specimens.
Do not attempt to edit calculated equations unless you fully understand calculated channel
concepts, the channel relationships in your system, and the result that making changes will
have to your system. Extreme caution is necessary and severe risks are involved. For final
testing of calculated equation changes, use a dummy specimen that is of no value to you.

How to Set Up a Virtual Channel

Use the following procedure as a guideline when setting up and using virtual channels:
1. Start the Station Builder application.
2. Select output hardware resources for each virtual channel.
For each virtual channel, select << Virtual Output>> for your output hardware resource.

3. Select input hardware resources for each virtual channel.

For your virtual channel, select an input hardware resource for each channel control mode.

4. Select required calculated outputs.

5. Select required auxiliary inputs (if any).
6. Start the Station Manager application.
The Station Manager application will display the Open Station window.

7. In the Open Station window:

a) Select the name of the desired station configuration file.
b) Click Open to open the desired configuration file.
8. Set Fullscale Min/Max values for each calculated input signal.
a) In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, select the Calibration access level.
b) Select Station Setup on the Station Manager Display menu.
c) Select a calculated input signal on the Station Setup navigation pane.
d) Select the Calibration tab on the Inputs panel.
e) Enter the required Fullscale Min/Max values.
9. Set Fullscale Min/Max values for each calculated output signal.
a) Select Calculated Outputs on the Station Setup navigation pane.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 355

Calculated Signals

b) Select a calculated output signal.

c) Select the Calculation tab.
d) Enter the required Fullscale Min/Max values.
10. Set Fullscale Min/Max values for each calculated auxiliary input signal.
a) Select Auxiliary Inputs on the Station Setup navigation pane.
b) Select a calculated auxiliary input signal.
c) Select the Calculation tab.
d) Enter the required Fullscale Min/Max values.
11. Edit calculation parameters.
a) In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, select the Configuration access level.
b) On the Station Manager window Tools menu, select Calculations Editor.
c) Select Calculation Parameters on the Calculation Editor navigation pane.
The displayed list includes all parameters that can be used as constants in equations for calculated
input or calculated output channels.
d) Select the appropriate constant from the Calculation Parameters list. Edit the constant as required.
12. Define equations for calculated input signals.
a) Select Calculated Analog Inputs on the Calculation Editor navigation pane. The expanded list displays
all inputs for which calculations must be provided and represents the inputs used by the PIDF control
or other user-defined purposes.
b) Select the desired calculated input signal from the list.
c) Enter required equation in the expression window.
Type text, select Insert function buttons, or click on selections from the Functions or Signals list.
Use the Apply button to enter each definition. Errors are displayed in the results panel. If there are
no errors, the results panel displays the word Success.
d) Repeat calculation editing until all calculated inputs are defined.
13. Define equations for calculated output signals.
a) Select Calculated Analog Outputs on the Calculation Editor navigation pane. The expanded list
displays all outputs for which calculations must be provided and represents the outputs that may
be used as commands for servovalves or other user-defined purposes.
b) Select the desired calculated output signal from the list.
c) Enter required equation in expression window.
Type text, select Insert function buttons, or click on selections from the Functions or Signals list.
Use the Apply button to enter each definition. Errors are displayed in the results panel. If there are
no errors, the results panel displays the word Success.
d) Repeat calculation editing until all calculated outputs are defined.

356 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

Calculation Editor

About the Calculation Editor Window

This window defines the formulas used to produce a calculated signal. Signals resulting from these formulas
can be output as drive signals, input for use in control modes, and saved as data.
Note:
The Calculation Editor requires the Configuration access level.

You must use the Station Builder application to assign resources for actual station signals and to create
calculated resources. The formulas defined in this window tie together actual signals with calculated
resources to produce usable inputs and outputs. Use care when applying the results of an expression.

Access
Tools menu > Calculation Editor > Calculation Editor window > navigation pane > Calculated Analog Inputs
or Calculated Analog Outputs.

Callout Description
1 Expression
2 Results (“success” or “error”)

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 357

Calculated Signals

Note:
If your software has the calculation protection feature enabled, this window will include additional
elements.

Warning:
Small calculation parameter changes can produce large control-loop changes, resulting in
violent actuator movement.
Violent actuator movement can result in injury and equipment damage.
Use care when changing calculation parameters.

Warning:
Expressions use SI (Systeme International d’Unites) units, such as millimeters and Newtons.
The Station Manager application can be calibrated and programmed using U.S. Customary
units, such as inches and pounds. Applying the results of an SI based expression in a control
loop using U.S. Customary Units can produce violent actuator movement.
Violent actuator movement can result in injury and equipment damage.
Use care when applying the results of an expression.

Calculation Definition Panels

Item Description

Expression Create and edit formulas here for Calculated Analog Inputs,
Calculated Analog Outputs, Calculated Digital Inputs, and Calculated
Digital Outputs selected in the navigation pane.
Create and edit expressions using the Expression toolbar and
Arithmetic Operator buttons, as well as by direct typing.

Results Displays the results of clicking Apply to compile the formula.

Success indicates a successful compilation.
Error messages identify errors by row and column, which may not
always be accurate. Undefined variable errors produce messages
that point to the end of the formula.

Insert Use to insert common Operators, Functions, and Signals into the
Expression box’s formula.

Arithmetic Operators toolbar Use this toolbar’s buttons to insert common operators into the
Expression box’s formula.

358 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

Item Description

Functions Select and then double-click to insert these common functions into
the Expression box’s formula.

Signals Displays a tree view of signals that can be used in formulas.

Signals designated as “reconfigurable” are removed from this list of
available signals.
Double-click to insert signals into the Expression box’s formula.
The following signal types are available:
Real Signals—These are actual station signals, such as Command.
Integer Signals—These signals use an integer representation, such
as Count.
Calculation Parameters—Parameters defined using the Calculation
Editor window’s Parameter Definition panel.

Apply Compiles and saves the formula.

The Results box shows the success or failure of a compilation.
You must Apply or Cancel edits before switching to a different
calculation.

Cancel Cancels any changes made in the formula and returns formula values
to where they were when Apply was last clicked or the calculation
initially loaded.

Clear Removes the formula from the Expression box.

Calculation Helpful Hints

All calculations are performed in system units.
The compiler does not perform optimization. All operations that are specified are executed. This includes
implicit conversions. For example, in the following code, the second assignment is more efficient than the
first, because the first one needs to convert the integer zero into floating-point. The following code is
generated to do this:
real x; x = 0; x = 0.0;
If implicit type conversion is used in a calculation, a warning is posted indicating the line and ending column
of the offending part of the calculation. However, the calculation will still compile and run as long as no
errors are present. To prevent these warnings, explicit type conversion may be performed using the function
style syntax of int(expression) or real(expression).
If you have several calculated signals that need the same expression, except that they operate on different
input signals, then declare a variable at the beginning that is assigned to the input signal. Use this variable
within the rest of the code. Then you can copy the expression to the other calculation signals, and just
change the one line to point to the different signal.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 359

Calculated Signals

Use variable names that help document their use. By convention, use quotes around signal and parameter
names, but define internal variables so they do not need quotes.
Put comments, white space, and line terminators in the code to make it more readable for the next person.
These have no impact on performance.
Make sure you initialize any variables defined in user-defined functions. The compiler will not find this error
for you.

About Protected Calculations

Note:
By default, the calculation protection feature is disabled. To enable this feature, contact your MTS
representative.

Model 793.00 System Software includes a custom calculation protection feature. This feature allows you
to protect selected calculations with a password so you can control their access and protect the intellectual
property they represent.

User interface changes to the Calculation Editor

Once this feature is enabled, the Calculation Editor is equipped with an additional toolbar button (displaying
a lock icon) and a “Protect this expression” check box.

Using the “lock” button

The lock button has two states: “Hide Protected Expressions” (showing the lock in the locked position),
and “Show Protected Expressions” (showing the lock in the unlocked position).

360 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

When you select the “Show Protected Expressions” state, you will be prompted for your password.
Note:
To create or change a password, select the “Change Passwords...” selection from the drop-down
menu to the right of the “lock” button.

Note:
If you lose or forget your password, you may send your configuration file or export a copy of your
calculations to MTS, and MTS will retrieve your password.

Using the “Protect this expression” check box

When you enter your password and it is accepted, you may use the “Protect this expression” check box
to protect the selected expression. Likewise, you may select any other calculation available to the Calculation
Editor (in the tree-view on the left pane of the window) and perform the same operation.

About protected calculations

Your protected calculations are encrypted, and can be displayed and edited only in the Calculation Editor
window, and only with the use of your password. Protected calculations will not appear in clear text in any
other display or file generated by the System Software.
For instance, protected calculations are labeled as “<<Protected>>” in the Station Manager’s Setup window,
Print Preview window, and Print to File display, regardless of whether or not the calculation can currently
be edited with the Calculation Editor.
Note:
The only way to generate hard copies of protected calculations is to use the Calculation Editor’s
Print and Print All functions.

All protected calculations in a given configuration use the same password.

Using protected calculations on stations without this feature

If you load a configuration containing protected calculations on a system that has this feature disabled,
the configuration will still load and run correctly. The Calculation Editor will display the expressions as
“<<Protected>>”, but the toolbar button and the “Protect this expression” check box will not be displayed.
In this situation, you will be able to run the station, but will not be able to see or edit the calculations.

Importing and exporting protected calculations

Protected calculations can be exported and imported between configurations provided the calculation
password in both configurations is identical. Also, when you import and export protected calculations, you
do not need access to the password.
The export feature will write an encrypted string including the current password for protected calculations.
The encryption occurs regardless of whether the calculation editor is currently allowing protected calculations
to be edited. The export feature writes non-protected calculations in clear text.
The import feature can import protected calculations that have been encrypted provided that the current
password in the Calculation Editor is identical to the password used when the calculation was exported.
If the password does not match, an error message is displayed. To import the calculation in this situation,
you must find out the password with which the calculation was exported, then change the current password
to match.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 361

Calculated Signals

When protected expression text joins with unprotected expression text, the resulting calculation automatically
becomes protected. For instance, when protected expression text is imported into an unprotected calculation,
the resulting calculation becomes protected.

Unnamed Calculations
The outputs of all calculations automatically include formal aliases such as “output0”, “output1”, and so
on.
You can add additional informal aliases to any input or output. This allows you to use signals without names
in calculations.
If your script includes a formal call to add a defined list of inputs, you must ensure that the inputs have
formal aliases (“output0”, “output1”, and so on).

Calculation Errors
The following describes the handling of compiler, mathematical, and unrecoverable errors.

Compiler errors
The system will not load a calculation that contains compilation errors (for example, syntax errors, undefined
variables, or mismatched types). The compiler lists the errors it finds, and includes a (line, column) indication
where the error is detected.
However, currently, some errors are not detected until after the code is parsed, and the (line, column) will
point at the end of the code or the function.

Mathematical errors
Arithmetic errors like divide-by-zero, or the square-root of a negative number set the resulting value to
infinity, or “Not-a-Number.” These values continue to propagate through the calculations, and will probably
result in a limit detector tripping.

Unrecoverable errors
Certain errors cannot allow the evaluation of the calculation to continue.
These errors include:
• Watch-dog time-out caused by overloading the processor
• Array index out of bounds
• Stack overflow
• Invalid number generated (NAN—not-a-number)

When one of these happens, execution of the calculation is terminated, and the signal is set to an “invalid”
state. A message is sent to the log.
If the calculated signal is used by a control mode, then this will cause an interlock. The watch-dog time-out
will cause an interlock anyway.
The result of a calculation will get clipped to the Fullscale Min/Max value.
If not-a-number occurs, the signal is set to invalid.

362 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

The user can try to recover by pressing Interlock Reset. However, if the error is not intermittent, it will just
trip again.

Calculation Parameters

About Calculation Parameters

A calculation parameter is a value used in a calculation that is not affected by the result of the calculation.
You can think of a calculation parameter as a “constant.” You define the calculation parameter value once
and that value is used wherever the parameter is used in your calculations.

Calculation parameters window

This panel defines parameters that can be used in calculated signals’ formulas. Calculation parameter
values appear in the Station Setup window’s Calculation Parameters panel.

Access
Tools menu > Calculation Editor > Calculation Editor window > navigation pane > Calculation Parameters
Note:
The Calculation Parameters panel requires the Configuration access level.

Warning:
Small calculation parameter changes can produce large control-loop changes, resulting in
violent actuator movement.
Violent actuator movement can result in injury and equipment damage.
Use care when changing calculation parameters.

Parameters Definition
Parameters Definition Panel

Item Description

Display name This name entered here appears in formulas, in the Station Setup window’s
Calculation Parameters panel, and in the Channel Option window’s Signal
Lists.

Internal name Identifies the calculation parameter for internal purposes. Typically, this
name is not changed.

Dimension Selects the calculation parameter’s dimension. This selection affects

available Current Value selections.

Range Sets a range in which the calculation parameter value can be changed.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 363

Calculated Signals

Item Description

Access Level Sets the access level required to change the Current Value.

Current Value Sets the current calculation parameter value. Calculation parameter values
are changed here and in the Station Setup window’s Calculation
Parameters tab.

Add Adds a new parameter to the list.

Delete Removes the selected parameter from the list.

Calculation Parameter Example

In this example, suppose you want to create several calculations that require the radius of the test fixture.
To do this, you could create a new calculation parameter, label it “Radius,” and enter the value of the test
fixture radius. The application writes that value wherever you use the “Radius” calculation parameter.
If you need to change the radius of the test fixture, you simply make an equivalent change to the value of
the calculation parameter. This simultaneously updates all calculations that include the “Radius” parameter.
1. Create a Calculation Parameter by pressing the Add button. In this example, the Calculation Parameter
is named “Radius.”

2. Define the dimension, range, and value of the calculation parameter here, in addition to the user access
level required for someone to change the value.
3. Once defined, you can use the calculation parameter in equations, as shown.

364 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

Calculation Variables

About Calculation Variables

A calculation variable is a variable that you can use within other calculations. You define the value of the
calculation in terms of a another calculation that the application performs. The application writes the results
of the calculation wherever the variable is used.
For example, suppose you need to create several calculations that include velocity—which is itself a
calculation. To do this, you could create a calculation variable, label it “velocity,” define its equation, and
use it wherever you need velocity in your equations. This is more efficient than entering identical velocity
equations over-and-over.
Calculation variables are real time signals. Calculation variables are available in:
• The Station Setup window’s Calculation Variables panel
• The Values tab of Station Setup window’s Station Signals panel
• The Scope and Meters signal list when the you select Others for the channel

Calculation Variable Access

Tools menu > Calculation Editor > Calculation Editor window > navigation pane > Calculation Variables
Note:
The Calculation Parameters panel requires the Configuration access level.

Note:
Changes to calculation variables do not cross to other associated controllers. Changes to calculation
variables on a particular controller are seen only by the calculations that are running on that controller.

This panel defines global calculation variables that can be used in calculated signals’ formulas.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 365

Calculated Signals

Calculation Variables Settings

Item Description

Display name Identifies the calculation variable.

Internal name Identifies the calculation variable name for internal purposes. Typically,
this name is not changed.

Dimension Selects the variable’s dimension, which determines the unit selection of
the variable’s range and current value.
This selection affects available Current Value selections.

Range Sets a range in which the variable’s value can be changed.

Current Value Displays the current variable value.

Add Adds a new variable to the navigation pane’s list of Calculation Variables.

Delete Removes the selected variable from the navigation pane’s list of Calculation
Variables.

Calculation Variable Example

1. Create a Calculation Variable by pressing the Add button. In this example, the Calculation Variable is
named “Velocity.”

2. Define the dimension and range of the calculation variable here. Unlike calculation parameters, you do
not define the user access level or the value (the value is determined by the results of the equation,
and is read only).
3. Once defined, you can use the calculation variable in equations, as shown.

366 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

Calculated Signals Examples

Calculation Examples
This section contains some common uses for calculations.

Calculating Engineering Stress from Force and Area

It is common for materials researchers to calculate "Engineering Stress" from "Force" and initial specimen
cross-sectional area. This calculation simply divides force by a calculation parameter called "Area." Area
is typically a calculation parameter and is constant during the test.
It is possible to constantly recalculate area, either from constants or instantaneously measured values
such as those provided by a diametrical extensometer. Stress calculated from an instantaneously calculated
value of area is called "True Stress."
// calculate "Stress" by dividing "Force" by a calculation parameter "Area"
// or by a calculated signal "Area"

"Stress" = "Force" / "Area";

The following plot shows Force and Engineering Stress for a cyclic command with amplitude of 10kN and
mean of 0kN and a constant cross-sectional area of 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) round specimen.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 367

Calculated Signals

Force and Engineering Stress

Average of Two Strain Transducers

Some testers use multiple transducers to measure the same value. Some examples include multiple
extensometers to measure strain, or two clip gages transducers or deflectometer's to measure length. This
calculation simply averages two different input signals.
// calculate Average Strain from two different extensometers

"Ave Strain" = ("Strain1" + "Strain2")/2;

Pulse Digital Output when Segment Changes

Often it is important to send a digital pulse when a 1) segment is finished, or 2) a peak is found, or 3) a
some other event is detected. The calculation shown below monitors the segment counter and when it
changes, it pulses the digital output for "pulsetime" seconds from an OFF state to an ON state.
//
// This is a calculated Digital output
// It determines when the segment generator increments the segment count
// and pulses the digital output for "pulsetime" Seconds

int oldSegmentCount;
int currentSegmentCount;
real startTime;
int output;
real now;

currentSegmentCount = "Channel 1 Integer Count";

now = "Time";

368 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

// turn pulse on when we see a change in the segment count

if (currentSegmentCount != oldSegmentCount) {
output = 1;
startTime = now ;
oldSegmentCount = currentSegmentCount ;
}

// turn pulse off after startTime seconds

if (((now - startTime) > "pulseTime" ) && output)
output = 0;
"Digital Output 2" = output;

Simple Outlier Estimate

Sometimes a signal has so much noise, that you really don't want to "average" in bad points, you just want
to toss them out. One simple method is to collect three points, and compare the three points to each other.
If two of the points are "similar", but the third differs by some significant mount, then maybe it is an outlier
and can be ignored. This calculation either returns the middle of the three points (if the difference between
the first and second or the second and third is large) or returns the average of the first and third point (if
the second point is far from both the first and third).
// This calculation looks at three values at a time.
// If the rate of change between the first two points and the last two points
is large,
// then the middle point is probably an "outlier"
//
// If the middle point is an outlier, ignore it and use an average of the left
and right point.
// If the middle point is NOT an outlier, use it as result of equation.
//
// "maxChange" is a Calculation Parameter and should be set to the maximum
// allowable change in one "clock tick" i.e. in a test with 200lb amplitude,
// and 500 points in sine wave, the maxchange should be around 5 lbs. (more
than 2 lbs)

// Declare variables
real savedValues[3];
real output;
real newValue;
real leftDiff, rightDiff;

// do calculations
newValue = "Aux Input B" ; // noisy signal
shift(savedValues, newValue);
leftDiff = fabs(savedValues[1] - savedValues[2]);
rightDiff = fabs(savedValues[0] - savedValues[1]);

// if the rate of change on the left and right of the center point is larger,
// then don't use the center point
if ((leftDiff > "maxChange") && (rightDiff > "maxChange"))
output = (savedValues[0] +savedValues[2])/2;
else
output = savedValues[1];

"Aux Input B" = output;

Five-Point Running Average of a Noisy Signal

Creating a running average in time can "clean up" noisy signals. Some testers use multiple transducers
to measure the same value. Some examples include multiple extensometers to measure Strain, or two

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 369

Calculated Signals

clip gages transducers to measure length. This calculation simply averages two different input signals. A
simple example is shown below.
// This is a simple average of 5 points.
// Assuming 2048 Hz update, this is about 0.0025 sec of data.

real savedValues[5];
shift(savedValues, "Aux Input A");
"Aux Input B" = avg(savedValues, 5);

Peak/Valley Reversal Counter

Sometimes a "cycle" consists of multiple small segments. If a cycle contains many segments, and especially
if a cycle contains a variable number of segments, it might be easier to count peaks and valleys rather
than count segments to determine a "cycle count." The calculation below looks for reversals and increments
a counter. The calculation returns the counter value. It can be "zeroed" by changing the "Counteroffset."
// calculated signal that increments a counter
// when a peak or valley is detected
// Uses a calculation parameter called "sensitivity"
// subtracts a offset called "Counteroffset"

real newPoint;
real candidatePeak;
real candidateValley;
real outputPeak;
real outputValley;
real output;
real sensitivity;
int peakFlag; // 1 = false
newPoint = "Channel 1 externalcommand";
sensitivity = "sensitivity" ;

if (peakFlag == 0) {
if (newPoint < candidateValley)
candidateValley = newPoint;
if ((newPoint - candidateValley) > sensitivity ) {
// outputValley = candidateValley;
candidatePeak = candidateValley;
output = output + 1 - "Counteroffset";
peakFlag = 1;
}
}

}if (peakFlag == 1) {
if (newPoint > candidatePeak)
candidatePeak = newPoint;
if ((candidatePeak- newPoint) > sensitivity) {
// outputPeak = candidatePeak ;
candidateValley = candidatePeak;
output = output + 1 - "Counteroffset";
peakFlag = 0;
}
}

"CalcPVForceCommand" = output;

370 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

How to Use Calculated Signals to Drive Two Servovalves

Problem: To drive two servovalves from a single signal.
Solution: First, create a virtual channel whose output will drive the selected servovalves. Then, assign this
virtual channel output to the calculated outputs that provide drive signals to the two servovalves.
To set up this application use the following procedural guidelines:
1. In Station Builder, create a virtual channel.
a) Select Channels on the Station Builder navigation pane.
b) Select <<Virtual Output>> for your virtual channel’s output hardware resource.
c) In the Internal Name box, select or type a desired name.
d) For your virtual channel, select an input hardware resource for the channel control mode.
2. In Station Builder, create calculated outputs to drive the two servovalves.
a) In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Calculated Outputs.
b) On the Hardware Resources list, select the resource you want to allocate for the servovalve, and
then click +.
c) In the Internal Name box, select or type the desired name. (for example, Valve 1)
d) Set Volts for Dimension and V for Display Units for the valve’s calculated output signal.
e) Repeat for the second servovalve.
3. In Station Manager, complete the following in the desired station configuration file:
a) In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, select the Calibration access level.
b) Set Fullscale Min/Max values for each calculated input signal.
c) Set Fullscale Min/Max values for each calculated output signal.
4. In Station Manager, define the required calculation for each valve’s calculated output signal.
a) In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, select the Configuration access level.
b) On the Station Manager window Tools menu, select Calculations Editor.
c) Select Calculated Analog Outputs, then select the first valve.
5. Define equations for the calculated output signal for each servovalve.
a) Select Calculated Analog Inputs on the Calculation Editor window navigation pane.
b) The expanded list displays all outputs for which calculations must be provided and represents the
outputs that may be used as commands for servovalves or other user-defined purposes.
c) Select the calculated output signal from the list for the first servovalve (for example, Valve 1).
d) Enter required equation in expression window.
Type text, select Insert function buttons, or click on selections from the Functions or Signals list.
Use the Apply button to enter each definition. Errors are displayed in the results panel. If there are
no errors, the results panel displays the word Success.
e) Repeat calculation editing to define the calculated output for the second servovalve.

About Matrix Two Channels Calculations

Problem
You need to create matrix control for translation and compression of two actuator channels during a test.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 371

Calculated Signals

Solution
• Create a translation channel and a compression channel. The translation channel requires one control
mode (displacement), which is a calculated input. The compression channel requires two control modes
(displacement and load), which are both calculated inputs.
• Create calculated outputs to drive each actuator servovalve. Also, create auxiliary inputs (left/right load
and left/right stroke).
• Define the calculated inputs for translation displacement, compression displacement, and compression
load. Define calculated outputs to drive servovalves.

Callout Item
1 Left Stroke
2 Right Stroke
3 Translation Displacement
4 “Left Stroke” - “Right Stroke” / 2.0
5 Compression Displacement
6 “Left Stroke” - “Right Stroke” / 2.0
7 Compression Load
8 “Left Load” + “Right Load” / 2.0
9 Compression Displacement

372 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

How to Set Up Calculations for Two Matrixed Channels

To set up these two matrixed channels, use the following procedure:
1. Use Station Builder to create a translation channel.
a) Select Channels on the Station Builder navigation pane.
b) Select <<Virtual Output>> for your calculated channel’s output hardware resource.
c) Enter a desired channel name (for example, Translation)
d) Set up a displacement control mode, selecting <<Calculated Input>> for an input hardware resource.
2. Use Station Builder to create a compression channel.
a) Select Channels on the Station Builder navigation pane.
b) Select <<Virtual Output>> for your calculated channel’s output hardware resource.
c) Enter a desired channel name (for example, Compression)
d) Set up a displacement control mode, selecting <<Calculated Input>> for an input hardware resource.
e) Set up a load control mode, selecting <<Calculated Input>> for an input hardware resource.
3. Use Station Builder to create required auxiliary inputs: right/left load and right/left stroke.
a) Select Auxiliary Input on the Station Builder navigation pane.
b) Select a hardware resource for the right actuator load signal (for example, 493.25 DC-Slot 3-1).
c) Enter a desired signal name (Right Load)
d) Select signal Dimension and Display Units.
e) Repeat steps B-D for Left Load, Right Stroke, and Left Stroke.
4. Use the Station Builder to create calculated outputs to drive each actuator servovalve.
a) In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Calculated Outputs.
b) On the Hardware Resources list, select the resource you want to allocate for the servovalve, and
then click +.
c) Enter the desired name signal name (Right Out)
d) Set Volts for Dimension and V for Display Units for the valve’s calculated output signal.
e) Repeat for the second servovalve (Left Out).
5. In Station Manager, complete the following in the desired station configuration file:
a) In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, select the Calibration access level.
b) Set Fullscale Min/Max values for each calculated input signal.
c) Set Fullscale Min/Max values for each calculated output signal.
6. In Station Manager, define the required calculation for each calculated input signal.
a) In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, select the Configuration access level.
b) On the Station Manager window Tools menu, select Calculations Editor.
c) Select Calculated Analog Inputs on the Calculation Editor window navigation pane. The expanded
list displays all inputs for which calculations must be provided.
d) Select the first analog input (Translation Displacement), then enter the required equation in expression
window:
“Translation Displacement” = (“Left Stroke” - “Right Stroke”)/2.0

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 373

Calculated Signals

e) Select the second analog input (Compression Displacement), then enter the required equation in
expression window:
“Compression Displacement” = (“Left Stroke” + “Right Stroke”)/2.0
f) Select the third analog input (Compression Load), then enter the required equation in expression
window:
“Compression Load” = (“Left Load” + “Right Load”)/2.0

7. In Station Manager, define the required calculation for each valve’s calculated output signal.
a) Select Calculated Analog Outputs on the Calculation Editor window navigation pane. The expanded
list displays all outputs for which calculations must be provided and represents the outputs that may
be used as commands for servovalves or other user-defined purposes.

374 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

b) Select the calculated output signal from the list for the first servovalve (Left Output), then enter the
required equation in expression window:
“Left Out” = “Translation Output” + “Compression Output”
c) Select the calculated output signal from the list for the second servovalve (Right Output), then enter
the required equation in expression window:
“Right Out” = “Compression Output” - “Translation Output”

Strain Control Calculations

Problem
While testing a metallic specimen in compression, you need to keep deformation constant by keeping the
true strain rate constant.

Solution
Create a true strain control mode by using a calculated true strain feedback signal. This calculated feedback
signal, used by the controller’s summing junction to close the control loop, is a “virtual” signal calculated
from other signals and constants.
Assuming a clip gage is measuring crack opening displacement (COD), create a second calculated signal
called engineering strain (εe). The clip gage measures the change in gage length, then engineering strain
is calculated using the following equation:

Where:

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 375

Calculated Signals

• DL = change in specimen gage length

• L0 = initial gage length

True strain (εt) is the instantaneous change in specimen gage length (DL) divided by instantaneous gage
length (L) as shown in the following equation:

Use the Station Manager’s Calculation Editor to edit the calculation equations for both the strain and true
strain calculated input signals.

True Strain Control

1. Use the Station Builder application to configure the system to include calculated true strain and strain
control modes.
a) In the Station Builder navigation pane, select Channels.
b) On the Control Modes tab, select the <<Calculated Input>> resource from the Input Hardware
Resources list, and then click +.
c) In the Internal Name and Display Name boxes, type signal name (True Strain or Strain).
d) Set the Dimension (Strain) and Display Units (in/in or cm/cm) for the calculated input signal.
e) Repeat the above steps to create a calculated input signal for strain.
2. Use the Station Manager application to edit the equations for the strain and true strain calculated input
signals.
a) Open Station Manager, then set the user access level to Configuration.
b) From the Tools menu, select Calculation Editor.
c) Click Calculated Analog Inputs on the navigation pane.
d) Click the strain signal (Axial Strain).
e) Edit the Axial Strain equation by inserting Axial COD/Gage Length (to right of the = sign).

f) Click the true strain signal (Axial True Strain).

376 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

g) Edit the Axial True Strain equation by inserting ln (1 + Axial Strain).

3. Set Fullscale Min/Max values for the Axial COD, Axial Strain, and Axial True Strain signals.
a) Click Station Signals on the Station Setup window navigation pane.
b) Click the Fullscale tab on the Station Signals window.
c) Edit the Fullscale Min/Max values and dimensions for each signal.
Note:
You must be at the Calibration access level to edit values and dimensions on the Fullscale
tab.

Calculation Syntax

Simple Expression
The simplest expression of a calculated signal is an equation that uses other signals and calculation
parameters in the calculation.
For example:
• “Axial Stress” = “Axial Force” / “Area”;

If the names contain spaces or other special characters, they must be enclosed in quotation marks. In the
preceding example, the quotation marks could have been left off of Area. However, it is typical to always
put them in.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 377

Calculated Signals

Note:
Signal labels have display names and internal names. If the display name does not require quotes,
but the internal name does, the application will automatically put quotes around the signal name
when the calculation is saved and restored.

Names are case sensitive in the Calculation Editor window.

The expression can span multiple lines, and spaces or tabs can be inserted to improve readability. However,
the names in quotation marks must not contain extra spaces or line terminators.

Comments
C-style comment delimiters can be used to insert comments in the expression, or temporarily comment
out portions of the code. There are two types of comments—bracketing comments and end-of-line
comments.
Bracketing comments are delimited by character sequences /* and */ that can span multiple lines. For
example:
• /* … ...my comment... ...*/

End of line comments start with a double-slash, and end at the end of the line. For example:
• “Axial Stress” = “Axial Force” / “Area”; //my comment

Data Types
In simple situations, you can think of all the data in calculations as being numbers. However, the calculation
engine actually handles different kinds of data. A value is an IEEE 32-bit floating point, an IEEE 64-bit
floating point, or a 32-bit integer.
• All calculation parameters are stored in IEEE 32-bit floating-point format.
• All floating point signals are 32-bit floating points.
• All integer signals are 32-bit integers.
• Floating point data within the calculation engine are 64-bit floating points.
• Integer data within the calculation engine are 32-bit integers.

Data values are converted as necessary, so you generally do not need to be concerned with them.

Literal Numbers and Dimensions

Expressions are evaluated in system units. System units are based on millimeters, kilo newtons, and
seconds. The Calculation Editor window displays the system units used by all selected signals. Look in
the file SYSDEF.UAS for a full list of the system units. The values that the expression reads from signals
and calculation parameters will be in these units. The value assigned to the result signal must be in the
appropriate signal unit.
If literal values are put into the expression, they must be interpreted in system units.
The calculation engine does not perform unit conversion or dimensional analysis.

378 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

Operators
The language understands the normal plus, minus, multiply, and divide operators. The default precedence
of these operators matches most programming and mathematical languages. The language evaluates all
multiplication and division (left to right) and then all addition and subtraction (left to right). To change the
order of evaluation, you use parenthesis operators.
For example:
• “Axial Force” = (“Axial Force 1” + “Axial Force 2”) / 2;

The following table shows all the recognized operators organized by group and listed in order of precedence.
Within a group, all operators have the same precedence.

Calculation Editor Window Operators

Precedence Operator Function Operand type Result type Direction

1 [] Array index Int Int or real Left-to-right

() Function call Int or real (same as

operand)

2 ! Logical NOT Int or real (same as Right-to-left

operand)

3 – Unary minus Int or real (same as Right-to-left

operand)

4 * Multiply Int or real (same as Left-to-right

operands)

/ Divide

5 + Addition Int or real (same as Left-to-right

operands)

– Subtraction

Precedence Operator Function Operand type Result type Direction

6 < Less than Int or real Int Left-to-right

<= Less than or

equal

> Greater than

>= Greater than or

equal

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 379

Calculated Signals

== Is equal

!= Not equal

7 || Logical OR Int Int Left-to-right

&& Logical AND Left-to-right

The compiler will automatically provide conversions to get to the proper types. For example, if you add a
real number and an integer number, the code will convert the integer number to a real number before
doing the addition.

Built-in Arithmetic Functions

The language understands the following built-in arithmetic functions:
• int abs(int x)
• real acos(real x)
• real asin(real x)
• real atan(real x)
• real atan2(real x, real y)
• real cos(real x)
• real cosh(real x)
• real exp(real x)
• real fabs(real x)
• real in(real x)
• real log10(real x)
• real pow(real x, real y)
• real sin(real x)
• real sinh(real x)
• real sqrt(real x)
• real tan(real x)
• real tanh(real x)
• int size(real x[])
• int isize(int x[])
• real shift(real x[],real y)
• int ishift(intx[],int y)
• real avg(real x[], int y)

380 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

• real rate()
• real pi()
• real mod(real x, real y)
• real clip(real x, realMin, realMax)
• int iclip(int x, int iclipMin, int iclipMax)
• int interlock(int b)
• int programInterlock(int b)
• int error(int id)
• real myFIR(real input, real coef[], real state[])
• real myIIR(real input, real num[], real den[], real state1[])
• real FIR(real input, int fir[])
• real IIR(real input, int iir[])

Multiple Statements and Variables

There is a limit to what any single equation can accomplish. It may be convenient or necessary to break
the calculation equation into multiple statements. This requires variables to store intermediate results.
Variables can also be used to remember data from one clock tick to the next.

Using variables for intermediate results

You can declare variables by specifying the data type followed by a comma-separated list of variable
names. For example, the following defines three floating-point variables (x, y, and z) and an integer variable
(count):
real x, y, z;
int count;
The names of variables follow the same rules as other names. If they contain spaces or other special
characters, you must put them in quotes.
By using variables, intermediate results can be evaluated and used in the main equation. For example:
real x;
x = “Axial Force 1” * Area;
“Axial Stress” = p0 + (p1 + (p2 + p3 * x)* x) * x;
The variables p0, p1, p2, p3 and Area are calculated parameters.
While this could have been done in a single expression, it would have required that the multiplication x to
be done three times and that would have been much less readable.
Variables are local to a particular signal’s expression. Multiple signals can use the same name in their
expressions without any conflict.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 381

Calculated Signals

Using variables to remember history

Variables that are defined as shown in the preceding example remember their value from one pass to the
next. The following expression does a two-point running average:
real oldValue;
“My Average Signal” = (“My Signal” + oldValue)/2;
oldValue = “My Signal”; //Remember the previous value.
When an expression is loaded into the machine (either when the configuration is loaded, or when a new
expression is applied), the values of all variables are set to zero. Thereafter, they keep the last value that
was set into them.

Arrays
An array is a variable that holds multiple values of the same data type. Arrays are declared in much the
same way as normal variables. The only difference is that a size is specified.
For example, the following declares an array “A” of 10 elements:
real A[10];
The elements of an array are indexed from zero.
The array in the preceding example contains elements:
A[0], A[1], A[2], A[3], A[4], A[5], A[6], A[7], A[8], and A[9]
One declaration statement can declare multiple array and non-array variables. For example:
real A[100], a, B[20], x;
int counts[10], i;
The elements of an array can be individually referenced or assigned. Arrays can be used to conveniently
store more history.
For example, here is a four-point running average:
real old[4];
old[3] = old[2];
old[2] = old[1];
old[1] = old[0];
old[0] = “My Signal”; //Remember the previous value.
“My Average Signal” = (old[0] + old[1] + old[2] + old[3])/4;
The language supports the following built-in array functions:

int size(real x[ ]) int ishift(int x[ ], int y)

int isize(int x[ ]) real avg(real x[ ], int y)

real shift(real x[ ], real y)

The function shift (Array, value) performs the same operation as shown in the preceding example (the
function ishift(iarray, value) works the same for integer arrays). The shift function shifts every element up
to the next higher index and puts the specified value into element zero. It returns the value that shifted out
of the last element in the array.

382 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

With this function, the preceding four-point running average can be written as:
real old[4];
shift(old, “My Signal”); //just discard oldest value.
“My Average Signal” = avg (old, 4);
The shift function does not really have to move all the values. It is as efficient on large arrays as it is on
small ones.
The other useful function is size (array). It returns the allocated size of a real array (isize(array) works with
integer arrays). This is useful when writing loops, which is the next topic. Here is a more general
implementation of the running average expression:
real oldValues[50]; //keeps the last 50 values.
real currentSum; //assume all values start out 0.
real discardedValue; //temporary
discardedValue = shift(oldValues, “My Signal”);
current Sum = currentSum + “My Signal” – discardedValue;
“My Average Signal” = currentSum/size(oldValues);
Indexing outside the bounds of an array is an error. The signal will be set to invalid.
Note:
Using large arrays can significantly deplete the available heap memory in the controller. Even if the
calculation succeeds in allocating the memory it needs, this can cause other parts of the Controller
to subsequently run out of memory. Extreme care should be taken when allocating large arrays.

General Purpose Functions

mod(x,y)
Returns the floating point remainder of x/y.
If y is zero, a NaN is generated. If used as a signal, it is marked “Invalid”, which may cause an interlock if
used for compensation, feedback, command, or other critical use.

clip(x, clipMin, clipMax)

Clips the value by the specified minimum and maximum values.

iclip(x, iclipMin, iclipMax)

Works the same as clip, but uses integer arguments.

interlock(b)
Asserts the specified interlock on the station and writes a message to the station log which identifies the
calculation signal that caused the interlock.

programInterlock(b)
Works the same as interlock(b), but acts on the program interlock chain.

error(errorId)
Aborts the calculation, which invalidates the output signal of the calculation (which will also trip the interlock
if used as a critical system signal, such as a control feedback).

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 383

Calculated Signals

Once this command is performed:

• No further calculation commands are evaluated in the calculation until it is reset
• A message is written to the station log stating that the calculation was aborted due to a user generated
error condition
• The error condition is written to the station log

Control Structures (if, while)

Expressions support two control structures—the if statement, and the while statement.

if
if statements work similar to their equivalents in the C language:

if (expression) if (expression) if (expression)

trueStatement; trueStatement; else
{ statements;
falseStatement;
}

The expression is something that evaluates to an integer. Zero means false, and non-zero means true.
Most often, this expression will involve relational operators, and logical operators.
For example, the following code, where Maximum and Minimum are calculation parameters, clips the data
on “My Signal” and puts the result on “My clipped signal.”
if (“My Signal” > Maximum)
“My clipped signal” = Maximum;
else if (“My Signal” < Minimum)
“My clipped signal” = Minimum;
else
“My clipped signal” = “My Signal”
To put more than one statement into the true or false conditional, you can use a compound statement. A
compound statement is a series of statements enclosed with { } (called curly brackets or braces).

while
The while loop has a similar form:

while (expression) while (expression)

statement: {
statements;
}

The following example implements a 50-tick delay. It also contains logic that will initialize the array the first
time it is called. After the first time, the variable “i” will contain 50, so the logic will not be repeated.
real oldValues[50];
int i;
while (i < 50)
{

384 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

oldValues[i] = “My Signal”;

i = i + 1;
}
“Delayed Signal” = shift(oldValues, “My Signal”);
When using while loops, it is very easy to implement a loop that will run forever. If this happens, the system
will start missing interrupts. This will cause a watchdog timer to fire, causing an interlock. The expression
evaluator will detect this, and stop executing the expression. The signal will be set to invalid, and will remain
that way until Interlock Reset is pressed.

User-Defined Functions
Within the expression of a calculated signal, the user can define new functions. These are only available
in that particular expression.
The syntax is:
function returnType fcnName (arguments)
{
variable declarations;
statements;
}
This is best shown with the following examples:
function int factorial(int value)
{
if (value > 1)
return factorial(value –1) * value;
else
return 1;
}
function real PI()
{return 3.14159;}
function real sum(real A[])
{
int index;
real temp;

temp = 0;
index = 0;
while (index < size(A))
{
temp = temp + A[index];
index = index + 1;
}
return temp;
}
Functions must always have a return type. If the body of the function does not execute a return statement,
it will return a zero.
User-defined functions are called just like other functions.
Some examples:
real myArray[50];
shift(myArray, “My Signal”);
“My Average Signal” = sum(myArray)/size(myArray);

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 385

Calculated Signals

Arrays that are passed to functions are passed by reference, that means that the function can modify the
contents of the array.
Variables declared at the start of the function are created when the function is invoked, and destroyed
when the function exits. This is different than variables declared in the main body of the code. The value
of variables and arrays declared in a function is unpredictable when the function is called. The function
body must initialize them before they are used.
Functions can access variables declared in the main routine. However, if a variable or parameter is declared
within the function by the same name, then the function can only see this local variable.

Filter Functions
Support is provided for designing low-pass, high-pass, band-pass, and band-stop infinite impulse response
(IIR) filters, and for low-pass finite impulse response (FIR) filters.
Note:
Use MyFIR and MyIIR calculations to create filters with custom coefficients.

The following enumerations can be used for the filter type argument:
0 = BUTTERWORTH
1 = CHEBYSHEV1
2 = CHEBYSHEV2
3 = ELLIPTIC

Example script for IIR filters

int iir[6];

real fLPass, fUPass, fLStop, fUStop;

real fPass, fStop, dPass, dStop;
int rsp;
int type;
function int OnInitialize() {
fPass = 20.0;
fStop = 90.0;
dPass = 0.001;
dStop = 0.01;
type = 0;
//rsp = IIRLP(iir, fPass, fStop, dPass, dStop, type);

fPass = 90.0;
fStop = 20.0;
dPass = 0.001;
dStop = 0.01;
type = 0;
//rsp = IIRHP(iir, fPass, fStop, dPass, dStop, type);

fLPass = 20;
fUPass = 40;
fLStop = 24;
fUStop = 26;
dPass = 0.001;
dStop = 0.1;

386 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

//rsp = IIRBS(iir, fLPass, fUPass, fLStop, fUStop, dPass, dStop, type);

fLPass = 23.5;
fLStop = 20.0;
fUStop = 30.0;
fUPass = 26.5;
dPass = 0.01;
dStop = 0.01;
//rsp = IIRBP(iir, fLPass, fUPass, fLStop, fUStop, dPass, dStop, type);
}
//output0 = rsp/100.0;
//output0 = IIR("Left Front Command" , iir);

Example script for FIR filters

int fir[6];
real fPass, fStop, dPass, dStop;
int rsp;
int type;
function int OnInitialize() {
fPass = 20.0;
fStop = 90.0;
dPass = 0.001;
dStop = 0.01;
type = 0;
rsp = FIRLP(fir, 120, fPass, fStop, dPass, dStop);
}
//output0 = rsp/100.0;
output0 = FIR("Left Front Command" , fir);

Station Setup Calculations Panels

Values Tab
This panel displays the current values of all calculated output signals.

Access
Display menu > Station Setup > Station Setup window > navigation pane > Calculations > Calculated
Outputs > Values tab

Warning:
For systems with calculated outputs and multiple independent HSMs, turning on only one
HSM can result in unexpected or exaggerated actuator motion.
Unexpected or exaggerated actuator motion can injure anyone in its path.
For these systems, always use the All Off, All Low, and All High buttons on the Station Controls
panel for hydraulic control.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 387

Calculated Signals

Fullscale Tab
This tab displays the Fullscale Min and Max ranges for each calculated output signal.

Access
Display menu > Station Setup > Station Setup window > navigation pane > Calculations > Calculated
Outputs > Fullscale tab
Note:
The Fullscale Min/Max values on this tab are only editable at the Calibration and Configuration
access level.

Drive Tab
This tab configures the drive signals of a calculated output channel. This tab’s contents vary with the type
of hardware used.

Access
Display menu > Station Setup > Station Setup window > navigation pane > Calculations > Calculated
Outputs > Calculated Output n > Drive tab

Drive Tab

Item Description

Fullscale Min/Max Displays the valve driver’s full minimum and maximum output values.

Polarity Sets the polarity of the valve drive signal to Normal or Invert.
Polarity cannot be changed with station pressure on.

Valve Balance Compensates for minor mechanical imbalances in the servovalve.

Dither Amplitude Adjusts the amplitude of the dither signal, a small high frequency signal
that keeps the servovalve from sticking.

Calculation Tab
This tab displays the expression used to produce the selected calculated output’s drive signal.

Access
Display menu > Station Setup > Station Setup window > navigation pane > Calculations >Calculated
Outputs > Calculated Output n > Calculation tab

388 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Calculated Signals

Note:
Requires Tuning access level (or higher) to edit any item.

Calculation Tab

Item Description

Fullscale Min/Max Specifies the selected output’s full-scale minimum and maximum values.
The result of this calculation gets clipped to these values.

Expression Displays the formula used to produce the output.

Use the Calculation Editor window to define the formula.

Uses Displays a list of the parameters and signals that are used in this expression.

Calculation Parameters Panel

This panel summarizes the current values used in calculated parameters.

Access
Display menu > Station Setup > Station Setup window > navigation pane > Calculations > Calculation
Parameters
The window’s access level setting determines a user’s ability to change these values.

Warning:
Small calculation parameter changes can produce large control-loop changes, resulting in
violent actuator movement.
Violent actuator movement can result in injury and equipment damage.
Use care when changing calculation parameters.

Calibration Tab for a Calculated Input (Channels)

This tab displays the expression used in the selected control mode that uses a calculated input.

Access

Station Setup window > navigation pane > Channels control mode using calculated input > > Calibration
tab

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 389

Calculated Signals

Note:
Requires Calibration access level (or higher) to edit any item.

Calculation Tab for a Calculated Input

Item Description

Fullscale Min/Max Specifies the selected inputs full-scale minimum and maximum
values. The result of this calculation gets clipped to these values.

Expression Displays the formula used to produce the input.

Use the Calculation Editor window to define the formula.

Uses Displays a list of the parameters and signals that are used within
this expression.

390 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

Scopes and Meters
Topics:

• Overview..........................................................................................................................................392
• Scope Setup and Operation............................................................................................................394
• Mouse Operations...........................................................................................................................405
• Scope Setup Window......................................................................................................................406
• Plot Modes.......................................................................................................................................410
• Scope Data Analysis.......................................................................................................................415
• Scope Limit Settings........................................................................................................................418
• Meters Setup...................................................................................................................................418

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 391

Scopes and Meters

Overview

About Scopes and Meters

The Station Manager application provides Scope and Meters windows and a Signals panel for monitoring
signals.
• The Scope window works like an oscilloscope.
• The Meters window works like a DVM.

The Station Signals panel can display the values of all incoming and outgoing signals.
The Signal Auto Offset window can display the values of all incoming and outgoing signals.
You can also send signals to an external readout device.

Saving and Applying Scope Setups

A scope Setup defines the entire set of scope parameters such as sweep type, autoscale state, plot mode,
channel settings (scale, color), and so forth. You can use the scope’s Setup drop-down menu to save
(create), apply, rename, and delete Scope Setups.
Note:
These settings are not available in the Scope Setup window, only from the drop-down menu.

Station Signals for Scopes and Meters

The following table lists station signals that are typically available to Station Manager Scopes and Meters.
The type of signals available changes depending on the scope trace’s Channel setting. These signals are
also available to the MultiPurpose TestWare and Basic TestWare data acquisition processes, with the
exception of Command and Comp. Command.
Note:
Time, Rollover Time, Running Time, Count, and unitless Integer Signals are not available for the
Peak/Valley, Mean/Amplitude, or Max/Min meters.

Station Signals

Item Description

Time Displays the time reference signal derived from the internal clock that
increments continually. This signal exists to support data acquisition
by test applications.

392 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Rollover Time Displays the time reference signal derived from the internal clock that
resets every hour. Like the Time signal, this signal exists to support
data acquisition by test applications, and is not practical to monitor the
Hourly Rollover Time.

Running Time Displays the accumulated time in which the test program is running.
The Rewind control resets this value, the Stop and Hold controls do
not. Pressing Run after pressing Stop or Hold causes this value to
resume incrementing.

Rollover Running Time Similar to Rollover Time except it increments only while the station
test state is not in the stopped state.

Integer Signals Displays integer signals such as, interlocks, HSM states, hold and
run/stop states, and digital inputs and outputs. Most Integer signals
are available when the scope traces’s Channel setting is set to Others.
Some integer signals appear in channel lists.
Note:
Unitless integer signals, such as HSM ON and Hold are not
available for meters.

Output Displays the signal that goes into the valve driver in volts.

Sensor signals Displays various types of sensor feedback signals in engineering units.
Force and Displacement are typically sensor signals.

Count Displays the number of segments played out so far in the selected
channel. When monitoring signals with a meter, this signal is only
available for Timed meters.

Command Displays the command signal in engineering units. This signal can be
internally generated by the Controller or externally generated by an
analog input.

Comp. Command Displays the command signal after going through a compensator (that
is, an Adaptive Compensator) in engineering units. This does not apply
to null pacing. If null pacing is used, this signal is the same as the
command signal.

Error Displays the control mode error signal in engineering units. This signal
shows the difference between the Channel Name Command and the
Channel Name Control Mode Name signals.

Active Fdbk Displays the sensor feedback of the active control mode.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 393

Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Abs. Error Displays the absolute value of the Error signal in engineering units.
Absolute means negative becomes positive and positive remains
positive. This signal is always positive.

Command Frequency Displays command frequency.

Scope Setup and Operation

About the Scope

The Station Manager application’s Scope window is an oscilloscope. You can use it to plot signals against
time, frequency, and against each other.
You can create up to four scopes per station, and add up to four signal pairs per scope.

Callout Description
1 Trace toolbar

394 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Callout Description
2 Y1 Axis
3 Plot
4 X Axis
5 Y2 Axis

Default settings
By default, the time plot mode is selected, one signal pair consisting of Command and Active Feedback
signals is displayed, and the Continuous sweep mode is selected.
Note:
When you move the cursor over the Run button the sweep mode is displayed.

Switching plot modes

When the scope is in the stop state and the scope buffer contains data, you can switch scope plot modes
between Time and X/Y or between Frequency Plot modes to see different views of the same data.
Note:
If you switch plot modes from Time or X/Y to Frequency, the data in the scope buffer will be deleted
and you will be unable to view it in any plot mode.

Scope data acquisition

Scope data acquisition stops when you close the scope window. Even though the acquisition stops, the
scope Run/Stop state is not affected. If the scope is in the run state when you close the scope window,
acquisition will start again automatically when you reopen the scope window.

Scope settings
Scope settings are automatically saved with other views when you exit Station Manager. The settings are
not saved if the scope is closed before exiting Station Manager.

Scope Window Controls

Access
Display menu > Scope

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 395

Scopes and Meters

Callout Description
1 Scope toolbar
2 Trace toolbar
3 Plot window

Scope Toobar

Scope Window Controls

Item Description

Scope toolbar controls Controls scope operation.

396 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Run button–the run button starts the scope trace. It turns green when the
scope is running and white when the scope is stopped.
The pulldown menu attached to the run button lists the sweep modes.
Continuous Sweep—The scope traces the signals continuously while in
the run state. This is the scope’s default setting. If you change to the
Continuous Sweep mode from the Program Control or Single Sweep
modes, the scope immediately goes to the run state.
Program Control—Station Manager Run and Stop buttons start and stop
the scope. The scope’s run state will synchronize with the Station
Manager’s test state. When changing to Program Control (from Continuous
Sweep or Single Sweep), the scope will immediately match the current
program mode.
Single Sweep—The scope traces signals for a single pass and stops. The
Run button must be pressed to acquire another sweep. When changing
to Single Sweep (from Continuos Sweep or Program Control) the scope
will immediately switch to run.
Holding the cursor over the Run button displays the current sweep mode.

Stop button–the stop button stops the scope trace. It turns white when the
scope is running and red when the scope is stopped.

Setup button–displays the Scope Setup window.

Add/Remove Signal Pair button–this button adds up to four signal pairs to

the plot. Signal pairs are used for Time (Y1, Y2), X/Y, and Frequency plot
types.

Auto-Scale button–the Auto-scale button turns auto-scaling on and off.

When enabled, auto-scaling continuously adjusts the scope to
accommodate increasing signal amplitudes.

Rescale button–rescaling scales the axes to display all traces.

Same Scale button–the Same Scale button turns same scaling on and off.
Same scaling sets all axis scales to the greatest Units/Div value. Only
signals having the same dimension are adjusted. When the icon displays
a balanced scale the same scale function is applied.

Synch Station Channel button–the Synch Station Channel button turns

“syncing” on and off. Setting this button to “sync” (when the icon displays
loops joined) allows you to assign the control channel currently selected
on Station Setup to both scope Channel selections. To assign this channel,
you must click the Sync Current Channel button on the Station Setup
window
The control mode Signal selections will remain as currently selected.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 397

Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Print button–stopping the scope makes the print options available.

Print—Prints a copy of the scope trace.
Printer Setup—Displays a Print Setup window specific to your printer.
Print to File—Prints the scope trace to a Windows Enhanced Metafile file
(extension emf) which can be imported into word processing and
spreadsheet applications (typically Word or Excel) by selecting
Insert-Picture-From File from the application.
The default location of scope image files is: C:\MTS 793\Projects\Project
name (for example, “Project 1”)\Scope Images.

Change View button–progressively removes controls from the Scope

window before restoring a full view with complete controls.

Channel Selects channels with signals that can be displayed.

Signal Selects the signals to be displayed.

Unit Specifies the display units.

Plot Mode Specifies the type of plot displayed:

Time—Plots the specified signals against time. Each signal pair may have
two traces, which corresponds to Y1 and Y2 axes. The trace color selector
is available for both traces.
The Channel/Signal/Unit is used for the axis labels.
Frequency—Plots specific attributes of the selected signals against
frequency. The Frequency plot mode includes Amplitude, ASD (Auto
Spectral Density), FRF (Frequency Response Function), and Coherence
type plots.
For Amplitude and ASD type plots, each signal in the signal pair is plotted
against frequency, creating up to two traces per signal pair.
For FRF and Coherence type plots, the signal pair is used to create a
calculation that is plotted against frequency, creating one trace per signal
pair. The trace corresponds to the Y-axis.
The |--> (output Y) and -->| (input X) labels do not refer to axis labels, they
refer to the relationship of the selected signals in the transfer function.
The FRF mode displays two plots on the scope window: a plot showing
signal amplitude ratio as a function of frequency on the top, and a plot
showing signal phase as a function of frequency on the bottom.
X/Y Plot—Plots the specified signals against each other. Each signal pair
creates one trace. The trace color selector is available for only for the Y
axis. The signal labels are X and Y.

398 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Trace toolbar controls

available for the Time and X/Y
plot modes

Units/div Specifies the grid line values.

Offset Specifies how much the grid’s zero reference on the Y axis shifts from the
center of the display.

Trace Time Specifies the length of time for a signal trace to cross the scope (also sets
the grid’s X axis scale). You can jog the values up and down with the
up-down control.

Trace toolbar controls

available for the Frequency
Plot Mode

Y Maximum/Y Minimum Specifies the Y-axis maximum and minimum.

For FRF (Frequency Response Function) and Coherence modes, the Y
Maximum and Y Minimum controls pertain to the single trace that is
calculated from both signals in the signal pair.

Sampling Rate Specifies how frequently the scope acquires data.

This value is set to the system rate and cannot be changed.

How to Use the Change View Scope Button

Each time you press the Change View button, the scope window progressively removes controls and plot
labels to simplify the display. Pressing the button the fifth time restores the original display.

How to Size the Scope Window

If you make the scope smaller by sizing the window, you should consider enabling the Auto-Sizing control
on the Graph tab of the Scope Setup window.
• When Auto-Sizing is disabled (default), the scope retains all the controls when you size it, which creates
a crowded display when you make the window smaller.
• When Auto-Sizing is enabled, the scope window progressively removes controls when you make the
window smaller.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 399

Scopes and Meters

Original scope display

Scope display sized smaller with Auto-Sizing disabled

400 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Scope display sized smaller with Auto-Sizing enabled

How to Scale Traces

The Scope window’s toolbar has Auto-Scale, Rescale, and Same Scale buttons to deal with changing
signal amplitudes.

Callout Description
1 Rescale
2 Auto-Scale
3 Same Scale

If the scope trace is off-scale (out-of-view) or too compressed, you can use the rescale feature to quickly
adjust the units/division and offset values to optimize the trace within the plot. The rescale feature scales
the trace to the minimum and maximum values of the data being acquired.
Once the trace is scaled to fit the plot, you can apply the auto-scale feature to automatically adjust the
units/division and offset of the plot to optimize the trace view.

Rescale control
Click the Rescale icon to immediately increase or decrease the scope’s Units/Div to accommodate the
signal’s amplitude.
• Once rescaled, Unit/Div changes to accommodate increasing signal amplitudes when Auto-Scale is
on.
• Any manual adjustment that changes Unit/Div or Offset turns Auto-Scale off.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 401

Scopes and Meters

Note:
Pressing Rescale turns Auto-Scale on.

Auto-Scale control
Click the Auto-Scale icon to turn the feature on and off. When Auto-Scale is on, the scope increases the
Units/Div to accommodate increasing signal amplitudes.
• Auto-Scale accommodates increasing signal amplitudes but does not rescale the scope for decreasing
signal amplitudes.
• Use Rescale to accommodate decreasing amplitudes.
• To preserve Offset, click the Scope Setup icon. In the Scope Setup window, select Sensitivity in the
Auto-Scale Mode control.

Same Scale control

Click to turn on or off the same Unit, Units/Div, and Offset to all channels that have the same dimension.
The channel with the maximum Units/Div is used as the reference channel.

How to Change the Scope’s Time Scale

Method 1
1. Double-click the Pan-Zoom control.
2. In the Time Range Select window, enter new Time scale values.

Method 2
Adjust the Min and Max Zoom-Thumbs on the Pan-Zoom control.

402 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Description
Callout

1 Min Zoom-Thumb
2 Pan-ThumbResize the Pan-Thumb with the Min and Max Zoom-Thumbs
to change the time scale.
3 Max Zoom-Thumb

Note:
When the Scope restarts, the Time scale resizes itself to the Trace Time value and the circular
buffer gets erased.

How to Adjust the Scope Trace Time

When the Scope window displays a Plot Mode of Time, type in a Trace Time value to change the X-axis
Time scale.
The trace time can be changed with the Scope running or stopped.
• When stopped, changing the trace time does not affect the X Axis. To adjust the X-Axis, use the X-Axis
Pan-Zoom control.
• When running, the X-Axis maximum value is set to the trace time and the X-Axis Pan-Zoom control is
disabled.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 403

Scopes and Meters

How to Synchronize the Function Generator and Scope

The Sync Current Channel feature effectively “synchronizes” channel selection for the function generator
and scope. This feature facilitates the set up and tuning of systems with a large number of channels.
To “synchronize” channel selections for the scope and function generator:
1. Enable the Sync Station Channel button on the scope toolbar.
2. Click the Sync Current Channel button on the Inputs panel of the Station Manager window (Display >
Station Setup).
This applies the current channel selections on the Station Setup to both Channel selections on a scope
display and to the function generator.
If the function generator is running or is in group mode, clicking the Sync Current Channel button will
not make any changes to the function generator.

Scope Offsets
The Offset setting defines the plot grid’s midpoints. Applying an Offset shifts the grid’s zero reference
points up and down in the plot.

Callout Description
1 Zero reference at midpoint
2 No Offset
3 5mm now at midpoint
4 5mm Offset

404 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Mouse Operations

General Mouse Operations for Scopes

General Mouse Operations

Mouse Operation Effect

Single-click right mouse button Displays a popup menu containing Setup and Print options.
in plot

Single-click left mouse button Displays a crosshairs and a coordinate display at the position of the
on trace when the scope is click.
running.

Single-click left mouse button Displays a data marker (+) at the position of the click.
on trace when the scope is
stopped.

Single-click left mouse button If the scope includes multiple traces, this changes the viewed data set
on Y1 or Y2 axis. of the selected axis.

Single-click left mouse button If the scope includes multiple traces, this changes the data sets of both
on the X axis. Y axes simultaneously.

Single the left mouse button on Moves the trace toolbar away from the scope window. You can redock
the trace toolbar, hold and drag. the bar to the top of the scope window by double-clicking or dragging
the title bar.

Pan-Zoom Control Mouse Operations for Scopes

Y axes Pan-Zoom controls are disabled when logarithmic scaling is selected for frequency plots.

Pan-Zoom Control on Time Axis (Also Applies to Vertical Axis)

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 405

Scopes and Meters

Pan-Zoom Control Mouse Operations

Callout
Description Mouse Operation Effect

1 Arrow Region A single click pans one-tenth of the range. For example,
if the trace time equals 2 seconds, a single click pans the
range 0.2 seconds

2 Page Region Single-click left Clicking on either side of the Thumb within a Pan-Zoom
mouse button in control pans (shifts) the trace image horizontally on X axis,
the Page Region and scrolls the image vertically on the Y axes.
to pan the trace.

3,5 Min/Max Zoom Single-click left The size of the Pan-Thumb within the Pan-Zoom control
mouse button on defines the visible portion of the axis’ range.
the Min or Max
Increasing the size of the Pan-Thumb increases the visible
Zoom-Thumb,
portion of the range, or “zooms out.” Decreasing the size
hold and drag.
the of the Pan-Thumb decreases the visible portion of the
range, or “zooms in.”

4 Pan-Thumb Single-click left The position of Pan-Thumb within the Pan-Zoom control
mouse button on defines the visible portion of the range of the axis.
the Pan-Thumb,
Shifting the position of the Pan-Thumb within the Pan-Zoom
hold and drag.
control changes the visible portion of the axis’ range.

4 Double-click left Displays the axis’ Range Select window. This window
mouse button in allows you to enter specific values to define the visible
the Pan-Thumb. portion of the range of the axis.
Increasing the size of the range increases the visible
portion of the range, or “zooms out.” Decreasing the size
the of the range decreases the visible portion of the range,
or “zooms in.”
The values you enter in this window define the size of the
Pan-Thumb.

Scope Setup Window

About the Scope Setup Window

When you create a scope its appearance reflects default settings in the Scope Setup window. You can
change things such as the grid and plot background colors, whether or not a grid is displayed, the trace
line style and color, whether or not limit lines are displayed, a variety of features for frequency plots, and
many others.

406 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Access

Scope window toolbar > > Graph tab

Graph Tab
This tab sets up the Scope window’s graph. The window title Scope Setup 1 identifies the setup window
for Scope 1. Scope Setup 2 identifies the setup window for Scope 2.

Access

Scope window toolbar > > Graph tab

Graph Tab

Item Description

Auto-Scale Mode Specifies how Auto-Scale and Rescale affect Units/Div and Offset.
Sensitivity & Offset—Pressing Rescale will calculate optimal sensitivity
and offset values.
Sensitivity—Pressing Rescale will calculate optimal sensitivity values
but will not change offset values.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 407

Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Display Mode Engineering Units or Volts.

Note:
Volts apply only to time and X/Y plot modes.

Point Picking The X-Y value method allows you to mark individual data points on
the trace by clicking points of interest.
The Y values at X method allows you to see the Y coordinate value
of two traces simultaneously at the point they intersect a vertical
reference line. You can drag the vertical reference line across the X
axis.

Grid Color Specifies the color of the grid lines.

Background Color Specifies the grid’s background color.

Show Grid Select to display grid lines. The grid lines are shown at Units/Division
increments.
For Time Plots:
• The Y-Axis has eight divisions
• the X-Axis (time for time plots) has ten divisions

For X/Y Plots:

• The X and Y Axes have eight divisions each

For Frequency Plots:

• The Log Y-Axis has a grid line at each decade
• Linear Y-Axis has eight divisions
• The Linear X-Axis has eight divisions

Auto-Sizing When enabled, various scope window elements other than the plot
(for example, Pan-Zoom control, axis titles, and axis value labels)
will be shown or hidden as the window is sized horizontally and/or
vertically.
This happens automatically as you size the scope window. In contrast,
window elements will be shown or hidden without sizing the scope
when you press the Change View icon (upper right hand of the scope
window).

Use Station Manager signal lists When selected, the signal lists selected in the Channel Options >
Signal Lists tab will be available on the scope.

408 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Trace Tab
This tab defines the display of grid Trace and Limit Lines.

Access

Scope window toolbar > > Trace tab

Trace Settings Tab

Item Description

Trace Select the trace (for which you wish to assign attributes) according
to the trace number and specific axis.
For traces that require two signals, such as those used to create X/Y
plots and Frequency FRF plots, the Y-Axis trace selection controls
the trace attributes of the plot.

Line Color Displays the Color window used to set Trace and grid label colors.

Line Style Select to make the Trace and Limit Lines solid or dotted.

Limit Lines Sets the display of limit lines for the selected Trace:
None—The grid displays no limit lines.
Detector Limits—The grid displays detector limits.
User Specified—The grid displays Upper Limit and the Lower Limit
values that you set.

Upper Limits/ Lower Limits None—The grid displays no limit lines.

Detector Limits—The grid displays read-only detector limit values set
on the Limits tab of the Station Setup window (Display > Station Setup
> Limits).
When upper/lower limit values are not displayed, the detector is not
available for the current signal.
User Specified—The grid displays Upper Limit and the Lower Limit
values that you enter in the text boxes.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 409

Scopes and Meters

Plot Modes

Frequency Plot Mode Tab

This tab defines the display of data when the Scope window’s Plot Mode selection is Frequency.

Access

Scope window toolbar > > Frequency Mode tab

Frequency Mode Tab

Item Description

Sampling Rate Specifies how frequently the scope acquires data.

This value is set to the system rate and cannot be changed.

Buffer Size Specifies the number of points acquired per update. The frequency
resolution is equal to Sampling Rate/Buffer Size.

Calculations Determines the calculation and display methods applied to data.

Averaging Sets the averaging method applied after the calculation of ASD (Auto
Spectral Density) values:
None—No averaging is applied to the ASD values.
Peak Hold—Selects the largest value between the current and new
buffer of data for each of the ASD values.
Linear—Takes previous data into account.
Averages—The number of averages use by Exponential.
Unwrap Phase—Unwraps FRF Phase.
Exponential—Takes previous data into account. The factor used in
calculating exponential averaging is specified by the Averages value.

Windowing Specifies the way data displays. The selections are None or Hanning.
The Hanning selection can reduce aliasing associated with
calculations.

Y-Axis Defines the display of data on the vertical axis.

Show DC Value Select this if your waveform has an offset or some other bias.

410 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Scaling Specifies vertical scaling:

Logarithmic—Plots the log of ASD, Amplitude, FRF, and Coherence
values.
Linear—Plots ASD, Amplitude, FRF, and Coherence values on a
linear scale.

Decades Sets the vertical divisions when Scaling is set to Logarithmic. The
range is 1 to 20.

How to Set Up a Time Plot

1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click the scope icon to display a scope window.
2. In the scope window:
a) For Channel, select the channels whose signals you wish to monitor. For Signal, select the signals
you wish to monitor.
b) For Plot Mode, select Time.
3. Customize the plot as required:
• In the toolbar, click the Setup Scope icon to set up the scope display as desired using the Graph
and Trace tab controls.
• Units/div–specifies the grid line values.
• Offset–specifies how much the grid’s zero reference on the Y axis shifts from the center of the
display.
• Trace Time–Specifies the length of time for a signal trace to cross the scope (also sets the grid’s X
axis scale). You can jog the values up and down with the up-down control.
When the scope is running and displays time plots, the time Pan-Zoom control is disabled, but the
Y1 and Y2 axis’ Pan-Zoom controls are enabled.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 411

Scopes and Meters

How to Set Up a Frequency Plot

1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click the scope icon to display the scope window.
2. In the Scope window:
a) For Channel, select the channels whose signals you wish to monitor.
b) For Signal, select the signals you wish to monitor.
c) For Plot Mode, select Frequency.
d) Select the desired frequency plot type as ASD (Auto spectral Density), Amplitude, FRF (Frequency
Response Function), or Coherence.
For frequency plots, the frequency Pan-Zoom control is enabled when the scope is running. The
Y1 and Y2 Pan-Zoom controls are disabled for logarithmic scaling, and enabled for linear scaling.

412 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

3. Customize the plot as required:

• In the toolbar, click the Setup Scope icon to set up the scope display as desired using the Graph
and Trace and Frequency Plot Mode tab controls.
• Y Maximum/Y Minimum–Specifies the Y-axis maximum and minimum.
For FRF (Frequency Response Function) and Coherence modes, the Y Maximum and Y Minimum
controls pertain to the single trace that is calculated from both signals in the signal pair.
• Sampling Rate–Specifies how frequently the scope acquires data.
This value is set to the system rate and cannot be changed.
• For Coherence plot types: the Coherence is always 1 when Averaging is set to None (This is
mathematically correct for a single frame of data). If “near’ instantaneous” Coherence is desired,
set Averaging to Exponential and Averages to 2.

About the FRF Frequency Plot Type

Unlike the ASD, Amplitude, and Coherence frequency plot types, selecting the FRF (Frequency Response
Function) type causes two plots to appear on the scope window.
• The top plot displays the ratio of amplitude between output (|->) and input (->|) as a function of frequency.
• The bottom plot displays the phase difference between output (|->) and input (->|) as a function of
frequency.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 413

Scopes and Meters

How to Set Up an X/Y Plot

An X/Y plot displays the first signal on the vertical axis and the second signal on the horizontal axis. A
typical use for an X/Y plot is to display hysteresis by plotting a force signal against a displacement signal.
1. In the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click the Scope icon.
2. In the Scope window:
a) For Channel, select the channels whose signals are to be monitored. The first Channel selection
plots on the vertical axis; the second Channel selection plots on the horizontal axis.
b) For Signal, select the signals you want to monitor.
c) For Plot Mode, select X/Y Plot.
3. Customize the plot as required:
• In the toolbar, click the Setup Scope icon to set up the scope display as desired using the Graph
and Trace tab controls.
• Units/div–specifies the grid line values.
• Offset–specifies how much the grid’s zero reference on the Y axis shifts from the center of the
display.

414 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

• Trace Time–Specifies the length of time for a signal trace to cross the scope (also sets the grid’s X
axis scale). You can jog the values up and down with the up-down control.

Scope Data Analysis

How to Examine Active Scope Traces

For all plot modes, when the scope is running, crosshairs will appear on the trace when you place the
cursor on the plot and hold the left mouse button down.

Data point display box

With the crosshairs, you can select individual data points on the trace and see their precise coordinates
on the axes in the associated display box. Display values depend on the point picking method selected.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 415

Scopes and Meters

Note:
To mark individual data points on the trace, you must stop the scope first

How to Examine Stored Scope Traces

For time and X-Y plots, the scope stores trace time history data in a temporary buffer. When the scope is
stopped, the time Pan-Zoom Control becomes active and you can move the Pan-Thumb to examine stored
signal data.
To examine stored Time Plot signal data:
1. Click the stop icon to stop the scope. This makes the Pan-Zoom control available.
2. Move the Pan-Thumb to the left to examine stored data.
The history buffer contains 10 times the trace data for trace times greater than or equal to 1.0 sec. The
history buffer contains more than 10 times the trace data for trace times less than 1.0 sec.

How to Analyze Data Points on a Scope

The Point Picking control (accessed from the Setup icon pull-down menu on the tool bar, or from the Graph
tab of the Scope Setup window) allows you to select a method for identifying (picking) individual data points
in trace history.
• The X-Y value method allows you to mark individual data points on the trace by clicking points of interest.
• The Y values at X method displays the Y coordinate value of two traces simultaneously at the point
they intersect a vertical reference line. The vertical reference line is created when you click and drag
the cursor across the X axis.

X-Y Value method

The X-Y value point-picking method turns the cursor into a set of crosshairs that you can use to select
data points on the scope trace.
Note:
If the scope is running you must press and hold the left mouse button to cause crosshairs to appear
on the plot.

Data Point Crosshairs/Display Box

When you stop the scope to review stored scope data, marker crosshairs (with a data point display box
that contains corresponding coordinate and instantaneous slope values) will appear whenever you place
the cursor over the plot.

416 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Callout Description
1 Marker Pair Left/Right Delta
2 Marker Coordinate/Slope: [Left: x,y,slope] [Right: x,y,slope]
3 Data Point Display box [x,y,slope,dx,dy]
4 Marker crosshairs

Marker Coordinate/Slope display

Click the crosshairs to create a data point marker on the scope trace. The marker’s coordinate and
instantaneous slope values are displayed in the upper left-hand portion of the plot.
Note:
The instantaneous slope calculation includes five data points–the point at the cursor and two points
on each side. The instantaneous slope value only appears on time and X/Y plots.

Marker Pair Delta display

When you mark a second data point, the scope automatically displays the difference in coordinate values
between the two markers in black text above the marker coordinate display.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 417

Scopes and Meters

Note:
Markers will clear only when you do something to cause the stored trace to clear, such as restarting
the scope or selecting a different plot mode.

Scope Limit Settings

How to Set Detector Limits on a Scope

1. In the Station Manager window, set detector limits.
2. In the scope window, press the scope setup icon to display the Scope Setup window.
3. In the Scope Setup window, select the Trace tab.
4. In the Trace box, choose the signal in which you set detector limits in Step 1.
5. In the Limit Lines box select Detector Limits. The limit values entered in Step 1 will appear as read-only
limit lines on the plot. The values are set on the Limits tab of the Station Setup window (Display > Station
Setup > desired channel and control mode > Limits).

How to Set User-Specified Scope Limits

1. In the scope window, press the scope setup icon to display the Scope Setup window.
2. In the Scope Setup window, select the Trace tab.
3. In the Trace box, choose the signal for which you wish to establish limit lines on the plot.
4. In the Limit Lines box select User Specified.
5. Enter Upper Limit and Lower Limit values as desired, noting their appearance on the plot.

Meters Setup

About Meters
The Meters window displays a group of individual meters based on the selected signal list. By default,
each individual meter maps to a signal in the signal list.
You can modify the default meter display associated with any signal list by adding additional meters,
changing the meter type, changing the signal selection.
The application can display a maximum of sixteen meters depending on the system installed. Meters
displaying command signals use the dimension and units of the channel’s active control mode.

Meter types
You may choose from four types of meters to monitor signal values.

418 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

• Timed meters—Display signal values at timed intervals.

• Peak/Valley meters—Display the peak and valley values for the most recent cycle monitored.
• Mean/Amplitude—Display the midpoint value and the difference between the peak and valley values
for the most recent cycle monitored.
• Running Max/Min—Display the highest and lowest values reached while the meter is running.

Meter controls

Callout Description
1 Meter Toolbar
2 Individual meters display the name of the signal being monitored
3 Signal list boxDisplays the selected signal list (default shown) and allows
you to select new signal lists.
4 View menuDisplays a menu that allows you to save and reset meter views.

About the Meters Window

This window provides digital voltmeter displays of station signals. You can create up to 16 meters by
successively clicking the Add button on the Meters window toolbar. If a second Meters window is displayed,
the total number of meters added between the two Meters windows is limited to 16.

Access
Display menu > Meters

Station Manager window toolbar >

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 419

Scopes and Meters

Meters Toolbar

Meters Window Controls

Item Description

Meter toolbar Controls the operation of all displayed meters.

Run Run—Starts all meters.

Program Control—The Station Manager window’s Station Controls
panel Run and Stop buttons start and stop the meters. Starting a
program resets all meters.

Stop Stops updating all meters.

Reset Resets all meters.

Align Switches meter alignment in the Meters window between various

formats.

Add Adds a meter to the Meters window. Up to 16 meters can be

displayed in a Meters window. Very large individual meters will limit
the total meters that can be displayed.

Check Selects or clears all meters for setup. Use this control and the Meter
Setup control to make global changes to all meters.

Setup Displays the Meter Setup window for the selected meter.

Signal list Displays the meters associated with the selected signal list. You
create and edit signal lists in the Signal List page (Tools > Channel
Options > Signal Lists).

420 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Meter Setup button Displays the Meter Setup window. The button’s legend identifies
the signal being monitored.

Callout Description
1 Selected Meter
2 Meter Type
3 Timed meter
4 Peak/Valley meter
5 Mean/Amplitude meter
6 Running Maximum/Minimum meter

How to Add an Individual Meter

1.
On the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click the meters icon or select Create Meters on the
Meters icon pull-down menu.
2. In the Meters window Signal Lists box, select Default*.
The Default setting allows you to select and build your own signal list from scratch by adding meters
and selecting signals as desired.

3. Click the Add Meter button.

When a meter is added to the active Meters window it is a copy of the currently active meter, with
identical setup parameters.

4. You can create up to 16 meters by successively clicking the Add Meter button.

How to Add a Group of Meters Based on a Signal List

1.
On the Station Manager window’s toolbar, click the meters icon or select Create Meters on the
Meters icon pull-down menu.
2. In the Meters window Signal Lists box, select one of the predefined signal lists.
The window displays one meter per signal for the selected signal list (up to a maximum of sixteen
meters).

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 421

Scopes and Meters

Note:
You define signal lists on the Signal Lists page (Tools menu > Channel Options > Signal Lists).
Check the Included for Scope/Meters box to define which signal lists are displayed in the Meter
Setup window. This box is checked by default for all signal lists.

In the Meter Setup window, you can select to display channels or the signal lists configured on the
Channel Options > Signal Lists page

How to Configure a Meter

You can use the Meter Setup window to configure an individual meter or a group of meters.

422 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

To set up an individual meter:

1. Click on the meter’s signal name to display the Meter Setup window
2. Select the desired Meter Type, Signal Selection, Display Mode, and Display Resolution.
3. For Peak/Valley and Mean/Amplitude meters, set the Sensitivity.

To set up two or more meters with shared attributes:

1. Select two or more meters by clicking (checking) in the desired meters’ check boxes, or select all meters
by clicking the Check/Uncheck All button.
2. Click the Set up checked meters button to display the Multi Meter Setup window.
3. Select the desired Meter Type, Display Mode, and Display Resolution.
4. For Peak/Valley and Mean/Amplitude meters, set the Sensitivity.

Meters Setup Window

Item Description

Meter Type Specifies the type of meter: Timed, Peak/Valley, Mean/Amplitude, or Running
Max/Min.

Delete Deletes the current meter. This button is disabled when only one meter is
left.

Channel Specifies the channel whose signals can be selected for monitoring.

Signal Specifies the channel signal selected for monitoring.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 423

Scopes and Meters

Item Description

Use Station Manager signal Displays only the signal lists that have been selected in the Channel Options
lists > Signal Lists tab.

Signal List Displays available signal lists.

Signal Specifies the channel signal selected for monitoring.

Display Mode Selects a meter readout in Engineering Units or Volts.

When Engineering Units is selected, the meter’s display units changes to
match the type of signal selected.

Display Resolution Sets the number of digits the meter displays, from one to fifteen.

Sensitivity Peak/Valley and Mean/Amplitude meters only—Sets the amount that the
signal must change before the meter updates.

How to Save Meter Views

You can save the meter view by performing one of the following:
• Select a different signal list.
• Click the view drop-down arrow and select Save.

When you save a custom meter view of a signal list, an asterisk ( * ) is added to the signal list name. The
custom meter view of a signal list that includes an asterisk is saved with station views and may be restored
(File menu > Restore Saved View).

How to Reset a Meter View

The Reset control in the View drop-down menu deletes the custom meter view from the selected signal
list (in contrast to the reset icon on the toolbar, which resets the meter value to zero).
To access the Reset control, click the view drop-down arrow. When you click the Reset control, one of the
following occur:
• If the signal list exists in the Signal Lists tab of the Channel Options page, the custom meter view is
deleted and the meter view associated with the original signal list is displayed.
• If the original signal list no longer exists in the Signal Lists tab, the meter view is deleted completely
(with confirmation).

The Reset All control deletes all custom meter views from the all the signal lists.

424 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Scopes and Meters

Note:
When you select Reset All, the default signal list (Default *) will retain its asterisk ( * ).

How to Delete a Meter

The last meter in the Meter window cannot be deleted.
1. In the meter to be deleted, click the meter setup button.
2. In the Meter Setup window, click Delete.

How to Delete a Group of Meters

1.
In the meter group to be deleted, click the Check Meters button on the toolbar to select all the
meters in the group.
2. Click the Set Up Checked Meters button on the toolbar.
3. In the Multi-Meter Setup window, click Delete.
The last meter in the Meter window cannot be deleted.

Amplitude plot example

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 425

Basic TestWare Application
Topics:

• Overview..........................................................................................................................................428
• Creating a Basic TestWare Test......................................................................................................430
• Configuring Data Acquisition...........................................................................................................431
• Configuring Peak Detectors.............................................................................................................433
• Configuring Return Home................................................................................................................434
• Configuring Test Counters...............................................................................................................435
• Running a Test.................................................................................................................................437
• Working with Test Files....................................................................................................................437
• Controls and Displays......................................................................................................................442

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 427

Basic TestWare Application

Overview

Basic TestWare Application Overview

The Basic TestWare application allows you to create simple test programs that do not require complex
signal management or mode switches for station configuration files. This application is included with the
Model 793.00 System Software bundle.
To create more sophisticated test programs use the optional Model 793.10 MultiPurpose TestWare
application.

Basic TestWare Main Window

Callout Description
1 Toolbar
2 Test Command
3 Test Counters
4 Peak Detectors
5 Return Home

With the Basic TestWare window controls, you can:

428 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

• Define a basic test command

• Configure data acquisition
• Configure peak detectors
• Configure home control
• Configure test counters.

After you configure your test, you can save it to a Basic TestWare test file (or ..tst file).

About Test Files

A Basic TestWare test file (or ..tst file) is a test design file that typically includes the following:
• Test command (command type, test channel definition)
• Data acquisition definition (type, signals, buffer size/type)
• Data file definition (file name, data header, file format)

Default Test File Locations

In Series 793 applications version 3.5x or earlier, the default location of test files is:
• C:\MTS software product name (for example, “FTGT”)\btw

In Series 793 applications version 4.0 or later, the default location of test files is:
• C:\MTS 793\Projects\Project name (for example, “Project 1”)\BTW

About Test Files in Projects

A Project is a folder that contains or references files that are used and generated by Series 793 applications.
When you start Station Manager, you select a Project. Basic TestWare inherits the Project selected for
Station Manager. The current Project determines the location of Basic TestWare test files.
By default, Projects contain test files in the BTW subfolder. You can use the Project Manager application
to edit the Project Settings file to change the location of Basic TestWare test files.

How to Start the Basic TestWare Application

From Station Manager

In order to start the Basic TestWare application, you must first start the Station Manager application and
open a station configuration
Once the configuration file is open, on the Station Manager Applications menu, click Basic TestWare.

From other MTS applications

• From the Station Desktop Organizer Start Applications menu, click Basic TestWare.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 429

Basic TestWare Application

• On the Project Manager tool bar, click the Basic TestWare icon, or from the Applications menu, click
Basic TestWare.

Creating a Basic TestWare Test

About Defining the Test Command

The Basic TestWare application can generate both cyclic and monotonic commands.
Cyclic commands include wave shapes such as sine, square, and ramp. Monotonic commands start at a
level and end at a different level. Basically, a monotonic command is a ramp command from one level to
another.

How to Define a Cyclic Command

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click to open the Test Setup window.
2. In the Test Setup window, click the Command tab.
3. In the Type list, click Cyclic.
4. In the Channel list, click the desired channel.
5. In the Control Mode list, click the desired control mode.
6. Set the remaining command attributes.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for all other channels.
After the initial command definition is set you can change the setpoint, amplitude, and frequency controls
on the main Basic TestWare panel while the test is running.
The maximum frequency for a cyclic command is 20% of the system rate.

How to Define a Monotonic Command

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click to open the Test Setup window.
2. In the Test Setup window, click the Command tab.
3. In the Type list, click Monotonic.
4. Select the End Level Type.
5. In the Channel list, click the desired channel.
6. In the Control Mode list, click the desired control mode.
7. Set the remaining ramp attributes.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for all other channels.
After the initial command definition is set you can change the end level and test time/rate controls on
the main Basic TestWare panel while the test is running.

430 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Configuring Data Acquisition

About Data Acquisition

With the Basic TestWare data acquisition controls, you can collect the following types of test data:
• Timed data acquisition—records the output of all selected signals at a specified time interval.
• Peak/Valley data acquisition—records the output of all selected signals when the software detects a
peak or valley in the master signal that you specify.
• Running Max/Min data acquisition—records the highest peak and lowest valley for all selected signals
during a test.
• Level Crossing data acquisition—records the output of all selected signals each time the defined master
signal changes by a specified amount.

Data collected during your test is written to a buffer. When the buffer gets full, the data is saved to your
specified data file.

More About Data Files and Buffers

When you set up data acquisition, you specify the signals for which data is acquired and the method of
buffering data before it is recorded in a file.

Buffers
Each type of buffer offers different operational characteristics:
• The buffer size specifies the maximum number of data elements that the buffer will store before data
is written to disk. (A data element includes the data from each selected signal.) You can set the buffer
size between 1 and 16,000 data elements (the default is 2048).
• Acquiring and saving data at fast rates can cause the computer to become sluggish (slow to respond
to selections). If the acquisition rates are too fast, data over-run can occur. If this happens, a message
will be displayed.

Linear buffer
A linear buffer records data until it is full, and then saves the data to disk. The size of the buffer determines
how much data is acquired before it is written to disk. Data is continuously saved to disk until the test ends
or is stopped. When the test ends, any data in the buffer is sent to disk. The only limit is the amount of
space available on your hard drive.

Circular buffer
A circular buffer records data continuously. When the buffer is full, new data overwrites the oldest data.
This type of buffering saves data to disk when the test is stopped, when the test reaches its preset count,
or when the test ends. The circular buffer is useful for acquiring data just before some crucial event (such
as specimen failure), while data is not required for the whole test.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 431

Basic TestWare Application

Data File Header

The first line of a data file includes information like the decimal separator, column separator, time formats,
and date formats. The format of this header line is as follows:
MTS793|progName|sLanguage|version|iDelim|sDecimal|sDate|sTime|iCountry|iDate|iTime|sCode
Where:
progName= MPT or BTW sLanguage= Natural language (standard three-character abbreviation) version=
Version of this format string iDelim= Data delimiter: 0 for space (plain), 1 for comma (Lotus), 2 for tab
(Excel) sDecimal= International decimal separator sDate= International date separator sTime= International
time separator iCountry= International country value iDate= International date format iTime= International
time format sCode= Character Set Code: A for ANSI, O for OEM (currently always A)
A typical header looks like this:
• MTS793|BTW|ENU|1|0|.|/|:|1|0|0|A

How to Configure Timed Data Acquisition

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click to open the Test Setup window.
2. In the Test Setup window, click the Data Acquisition tab.
3. In the Type list, click Timed.
4. Double-click on each signal name that you want to collect data on. The selected signal name will move
to the Signals Included list. You can also click on the signal name, and then click the > button.
5. Set the timed data acquisition interval and units using Time Between Points or enter a Sample Rate
frequency.
6. Set Buffer Size parameters and select the Buffer Type used.

How to Specify Data File Options

To specify data file options for the acquired data:
1. Click the Data File tab.
2. Select the data Destination File. If you select User Specified, enter a name for the data file in the File
Name box.
3. In the Data Header box, type a brief description of your test.
4. Select the Data File Mode and the Data File Format.

How to Configure Peak/Valley Data Acquisition

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click to open the Test Setup window.
2. In the Test Setup window, click the Data Acquisition tab.
3. In the Type list, click Peak/Valley.
4. Double-click on each signal name that you want to collect data on. The selected signal name will move
to the Signals Included list. You can also click on the signal name, and then click the > button.
5. In the Master Signal list, click the signal name that will be monitored for peaks and valleys.
6. Set the Sensitivity and Buffer Size parameters.

432 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Sensitivity specifies how much the signal must increase or decrease before a peak or valley is recorded.
Sensitivity settings should be used to prevent signal noise from being misinterpreted as peaks or valleys.

7. Select the Buffer Type used.

How to Configure Running Max/Min Data Acquisition

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click
2. to open the Test Setup window.
3. In the Test Setup window, click the Data Acquisition tab.
4. In the Type list, click Running Max/Min.
5. Double-click on each signal name that you want to collect data on. The selected signal name will move
to the Signals Included list. You can also click on the signal name, and then click the > button.

How to Configure Level Crossing Data Acquisition

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click
2. to open the Test Setup window.
3. In the Test Setup window, click the Data Acquisition tab.
4. In the Type list, click Level Crossing.
5. Double-click on each signal name that you want to collect data on. The selected signal name will move
to the Signals Included list. You can also click on the signal name, and then click the > button.
6. Select the Master Signal that will be monitored for level crossing.
7. Set the Level Increment and Buffer Size parameters.
8. Select the Buffer Type used.

Configuring Peak Detectors

About Peak Detectors

You can use peak detectors to ensure that your feedback signal reaches the programmed peaks and
valleys within a specified tolerance range. If your feedback falls outside the tolerance range, the detector
will trigger a specific detector action.
When you configure a peak detector, you must specify the reference values that the detector will use to
establish the tolerance range. If you select the Default reference type, the detector will use the first peak
and first valley as its initial reference values. Reference values will change during a test. If you select the
User-specified reference type, the detector will use the reference values that you enter.
If a peak or valley occurs outside of the specified tolerance range, Basic TestWare will trigger the detector
action. Only the first peak or valley outside tolerance will be reported. To clear the detector action, click
the Peak Detectors reset button on the main Basic TestWare panel.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 433

Basic TestWare Application

Detector Indicator Colors

The main Basic TestWare panel provides a Peak Detectors indicator to monitor the detector actions that
you have set for a channel.
The indicator colors are as follows:
• Grey indicates that all detectors are set to Disabled.
• Green indicates that all enabled detectors are set to Station Power Off, Interlock, Program Interlock,
Program Stop, Program Hold, or Custom Actions.
• White indicates that one or more detectors are set to Indicate.
• Red indicates that a detector has been tripped.

How to Configure Peak Detectors

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click to open the Test Setup window.
2. In the Test Setup window, click the Peak Detectors tab.
3. In the Channel and Signal lists, select the channel and signal that you want to monitor with a peak
detector.
4. Under Detector Parameters, specify the detector settings.
5. Set Action to specify the action that occurs when the detector is tripped.
6. Set Enable After to specify how many cycles will be executed before the detector begins to monitor the
selected signals.
7. Set Sensitivity to specify how much the signal must increase or decrease before a peak or valley is
determined.
8. Set Tolerance to specify a tolerance band for the peaks and valleys.
9. Set the Reference Type:
• Default will use the first peak and valley as the reference for the tolerance range.
• User-specified will use the values you enter as the reference for the tolerance range.

10. Set the Upper Reference and Lower Reference values.

11. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for additional detectors.

Configuring Return Home

About Return Home

You can configure the Return Home button to make it easier to return your actuators to a default or starting
position. When the hydraulics are active, clicking the Return Home button returns the actuator to the defined
home position.

434 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Note:
The Return Home button is not available while a test is running. When you click Return Home, the
Run indicator on the Basic TestWare display blinks.

Note:
If one or more of the channels is saturated when you click Return Home, a window appears that
allows you to override the saturation detectors. Allowing the override causes the command to step
to 110% of full scale and ramp to the defined end level in the defined time interval.

How to Define the Home Position

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click to open the Test Setup window.
2. In the Test Setup window, click the Home tab.
3. In the Channel list, click the desired channel.
4. In the Control Mode list, click the desired control mode.
5. In the Absolute End Level box, type the desired end level.
6. In the Time box, type the desired home command ramp time.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for other channels.

How to Use the Home Control

When hydraulics are active, click Home on the Basic TestWare main panel to ramp to the home position.

Configuring Test Counters

Test Counters
Current and Total counters reset to zero and start over when the segment count reaches 4294967296
(2147483648 cycles).
You can use the Test Counters panel to run a test that requires a preset number of cycles or segments.
The Test Counters panel can also be used to run your test for a limited cycle or segment count to help
you evaluate your test settings before running a longer test.
The Test Counters panel on the Basic TestWare window displays the following controls:

Item Description

Preset Specifies the number of cycles (or segments) your test will run. There is a check
box that enables or disables this counter. The check box is greyed out until a
cyclic command type is specified.
The counter only works with cyclic commands. You cannot enter half cycles or
an odd number of segments in the Preset counter box.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 435

Basic TestWare Application

Item Description

Current Displays the number of cycles (or segments) that passed since you clicked the
Run button. When this counter reaches the Preset count, the test stops.
Current cycle count is not automatically reset when you click the Run button on
the Station Controls panel. Click the Current reset button

to reset the current count.

Total Displays a second counter that can be used to monitor the total number of cycles
or segments.

Logging counter events

The following counter actions are written to the message log:
• Resetting the Current or Total counters.

In each case, the Total counters, Current counters, and Preset counter values are logged with a time and
date stamp.

How to Configure a Test Counter

The callouts in the following graphic correspond to the numbered steps in the procedure below.

Configure a Test Counter

1. Select the Enable check box on the Test Counters panel.

2. Type a preset count in the Preset box, and then set the units. (This is the number of cycles or segments
that your test will run.)
3. Click the Reset buttons for both the Current and Total counters.
When the Current counter reaches the Preset count, the test stops. (At this point you can evaluate your
test, perform any required maintenance, or change your test parameters.) If desired, you can reset the
Current counter and run the test again. The Total counter can be used to maintain the ongoing count.

436 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Running a Test

How to Start a Basic TestWare Test

Click the Program Run button on the Station Controls panel to start the command and counters, and begin
acquiring data.
If a tapered wave shape is selected for “Cyclic” command generation, the segment generator will soft start
the segment generator as specified in Begin/End Times on the Command Options tab on the Channel
Options window (Station Manager).

How to Hold a Basic TestWare Test

Click the Program Hold button on the Station Controls panel to pause the test command generator and
stop data acquisition.

How to Stop a Basic TestWare Test

Click the Program Stop on the Station Controls panel to stop the test command generator, stop data
acquisition, and stop the segment counters.
Note:
If a tapered wave shape is selected for “Cyclic” command generation, the segment generator will
soft stop the segment generator as specified in Stop (Taper Times) on the Command Options tab
on the Channel Options window (Station Manager).

Working with Test Files

How to Open a Test File

1. On the Open Test button, click Open Test to display the Open Test window.
2. Select the test file you want, and then click Open to open the file.

How to Save a Test File

On the Save Test button, click Save to save your test file. To save the file with a different name, click Save
As.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 437

Basic TestWare Application

Note:
Basic TestWare automatically appends “tst” to the file name you enter. If you do not want to include
the tst extension, type a period (.) at the end of your file name.

How to Preview a Test

On the Print Test button, click Print Preview for an on-screen view of the current test configuration. A
toolbar facilitates access and display of test changes.
Note:
Print Preview allows you to preview the test configuration currently in memory, but this configuration
may not have been saved to a test file.

Items preceded by an asterisk (*) have been modified since the configuration file was open or after the
last save. In addition, you can choose to highlight these changes by clicking the Enable Change Highlighting
button on the Print Preview toolbar.

Print Preview Toolbar

Print Preview Toolbar

Item Description

Next Change Goes to the next change on the Print Preview window.

Previous Change Goes to the previous change on the Print Preview window.

Refresh Allows you to see current test configuration changes without closing and
reopening the Print Preview window. The current change(s) are highlighted.

Enable/Disable Changed Allows you to enable or disable highlighting of test configuration changes.
Highlighting

Print Prints the current test configuration.

438 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

How to Print a Test

Click the Print icon on the Basic TestWare Print Preview window toolbar or click Print Test on the Print
Test icon on the Basic TestWare toolbar, to print the current test configuration.
Click Print to File on the Basic TestWare toolbar Print Test button to save the current test configuration as
a separate text file.

About Message Logs

Message Logs record test events as they occur, including:
• File events
• Resource mismatches
• Hydraulic and station state changes
• Detector activity

When you save a new station test file, the Basic TestWare application automatically creates a Message
Log file to record events that occur during the current test.
The Basic TestWare application saves the Message Log file in your Basic TestWare folder. The Basic
TestWare application names the Message Log file, using the station test name with a log extension.
Closing the Basic TestWare application closes the Basic TestWare Message Log file. When the test
reopens and station activity resumes, new messages are appended to the old.

Auto-archiving
When the Message Logs window accumulates 1000 messages, it automatically saves these messages
to an archive file and then clears them from the Message Logs window.

Message log file naming

The first archived file is named test file name000.log, the second is named test file name001.log, and so
on. This continues until a file is named test file name499.log, and then it starts again with test file
name000.log
Note:
The maximum number of archive log files that can be saved for a particular test is 500.

Once you reach 500 archive log files, additional log files overwrite the oldest log files in order (typically
archiving restarts at test file name000.log).
When a log file is saved (either manually or automatically), a log entry is made noting the archive file. This
entry includes a time/date stamp and information on where the file was saved. This entry becomes the
first entry in the current log.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 439

Basic TestWare Application

Caution:
Too many messages combined with the auto-archive feature can use up all disk space.
Running out of disk space can stop your test and result in data loss.
If you think your test may generate an excessive number of message log entries, you should
filter the messages written to the Basic TestWare message log with the Test Log tab in the
Test Setup window.

Message Log Toolbar

The Message Logs window toolbar has graphic buttons to control its operations.

How to Open a Message Log

On the Basic TestWare Toolbar, click to display the Message Logs window
Note:
The Message Logs window is disabled if no test file is loaded or a newly created test file has not
been saved.

On the Message Logs window toolbar, click to open an archived message log. On the Open Message
Log File window, select the required archived message log file, then click Open

How to Print a Message Log

1.
In the Basic TestWare Toolbar, click .
2.
In the Message Logs window, click .
3. In the Message Log Print window box:
a) As needed, click Print Range selections to define what is printed.
b) As needed, click Print Filters to apply Severity and Source filters to what is printed.

440 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

c) Click OK to print the log.

How to Print the Message Log to File

1.
In the Basic TestWare Toolbar, click .
2.
In the Message Logs Toolbar, click .
3. In the Message Log Print to File window box:
a) As needed, click Print Range selections to define what is printed to file.
b) As needed, click Print Filters to apply Severity and Source filters to what is printed to file.
c) Click OK to save the file. In the displayed window, specify the File Name and its location. By default,
the file is saved as a text (.txt) file.

How to Add a User Entry to the Message Log

1.
In the Basic TestWare Toolbar, click .
2.
In the Message Logs Toolbar, click .
3. In the Message Log-Add Entry window:
a) Select a Message Severity level.
b) Select a Message Log source to specify an existing log file.
c) Enter the required message in Message Text.
d) Click Add to enter the message.

How to Delete a User Entry from the Message Log

Only user entries can be deleted.
1.
In the Basic TestWare Toolbar, click .
2. In the Message Logs window, highlight the user entry to be deleted.
3.
In the Message Logs Toolbar, click .
4. In the Delete Confirmation window, click OK to delete the selected entry.

How to Define What Messages Are Logged

Use the following procedure to specify the types of messages that are logged into the Basic TestWare test
log:
1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click Test Setup.
2. Click the Test Log tab on the Test Setup window.
3. Under Minimum Severity, select the least severe level of messages logged.
4. Under Source:
• Select This Application Only to log only Basic TestWare messages.
• Select All Applications to log both Basic TestWare and Station Manager messages.

5. If needed, under Archive Auto Deletion, click Delete Older Than to enable automatic deletion and then
enter the number of days.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 441

Basic TestWare Application

How to Manually Archive All of the Messages in the Message Log

1.
In the Basic TestWare Toolbar, click .
2.
In the Message Logs Toolbar, click to archive the file.
3. In the Archive Confirmation window, click Yes.
The Message Logs window displays a message showing when the file was archived and its name and
location.

How to Manually Archive Part of the Messages in the Message Log

1.
In the Basic TestWare Toolbar, click .
2. In the Message Log window, select a message you wish to archive, so that it is highlighted. In the next
step, the highlighted message—and all messages that precede it—will be archived.
3.
In the Message Logs Toolbar, click to archive the file.
4. In the Archive Confirmation window, click Yes.
The Message Logs window displays a message showing when the file was archived and its name and
location.

Controls and Displays

Basic TestWare Main Display

When you start the Basic TestWare application within Station Manager, the Basic TestWare main display
opens with an untitled test configuration

442 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

CAllout Item Description

1 Toolbar Provides quick access to frequently used

commands and displays.

Test Name Displays the name of the currently opened test.

Data File Displays the name of the data file currently in use.

2 Test Command Controls Provides controls to set up a test command. After

the initial command is defined, you can adjust the
slider controls on the display while the test is
running as follows:
• For cyclic commands you can adjust the target
setpoint, amplitude, and frequency.
• For monotonic commands you can adjust the
end level and ramp time.

Wave Shape Allows you to select the required wave shape for
the test command.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 443

Basic TestWare Application

CAllout Item Description

Compensator When multiple channels are enabled, only the

compensators available on all enabled channels
will be available in this list.
Allows you to activate a compensator for the test
command.

3 Test Counters Establishes a preset count that can be repeated,

while maintaining two counters that monitor the
current count and the total count for the test.

4 Peak Detectors Monitors the detector actions you have set for a
channel. Indicator colors are as follows:
• Grey indicates that all detectors are set to
Disabled.
• Green indicates that all enabled detectors are
set to Station Power Off, Interlock, Program
Interlock, Program Stop, Program Hold, or
Custom Actions.
• White indicates that one or more detectors are
set to Indicate.
• Red indicates that a detector has been tripped.

The reset button

clears the detector action after the detector trips

5 Return Home button Click the Return Home button to return your
actuators to a default or starting position. This
button is not available while a test is running.

Basic TestWare Toolbar

Clicking the Basic Testware toolbar buttons display the Basic TestWare windows and tabs described in
the following pages.

444 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Test Setup Window

Access

Basic TestWare toolbar >

Use the Test Setup window’s tabs to define Basic TestWare tests.

Command tab
Use the Command tab to define the program attributes for your test command. The controls in this window
change depending on whether you select a cyclic or monotonic command.

Command Tab

Item Description

Type Specifies the command type (Monotonic or Cyclic).

Channel Allows you to select a control channel for the test command from a list of
all station channels.

Control Mode Specifies the control mode for the selected control channel.

Target Setpoint Cyclic commands only—Sets the target mean level.

Amplitude Cyclic commands only—Sets the command amplitude.

Frequency Cyclic commands only—Sets the command frequency.

The maximum frequency is limited to 20% of the system rate.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 445

Basic TestWare Application

Item Description

Wave Shape Cyclic commands only—Sets the command wave shape.

End Level Type Monotonic commands only—Sets the end level of the command. Each
channel can have a different end level.
The end level value depends on the end level type selection, which may
be Absolute or Relative. Absolute values are relative to zero. Relative
values are relative to the current output.

End Level value The end level value can be changed while a test is running, but the end
level type cannot.

Time/Rate Monotonic commands only—Defines the ramp of the command. The

command ramp can be defined in terms of time or as a ramp rate. The
ramp starts at the current actuator position and ends at the specified end
level. Each channel can have a different time/rate. The time/rate value can
be changed while a test is running, but the end level type cannot.

Compensator Specifies a compensator for your command signal.

Start Action Start Action specifies a system action at the beginning of a test. Done
Action specifies a system action at the end of a test. For information about
Done Action
system actions.
The specified action executes only if a predefined test endpoint is reached,
as defined by a preset cycle count, or the end levels for each monotonic
channel have been reached.

About the Data Acquisition Tab

Use the Data Acquisition tab to configure how data is acquired during your test. The Basic TestWare
application supports four types of data acquisition: timed, peak/valley, running max/min, and level crossing.
Note:
In the Signals Available list, Date is an integer number of days since Jan 0, 1900, Time of Day is a
fraction of a day since midnight. Both signals are float values that can be imported into Microsoft
Excel, formatted as separate date and time columns, and added together to form one date/time
column. Both signal values correspond to time stamps in the station log.

Timed Data Acquisition

Timed data acquisition records the values of selected signals at user-specified time intervals as Time
Between Points or as a frequency (Sample Rate). For example, if you want to acquire data for the selected
signals every second, set the Time Between Points value to 1 second.

446 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Timed Data Acquisition Tab

Item Description

Type Timed (selected for this description)

Signals Available/Signals The Signals Available list displays the names of signals that are accessed
Included using the current station. Highlight each signal in the list that you want to acquire
data from. Click the > button to move the signal to the Signals Included list.
To remove signal names from the Signals Included list, highlight the name of
each signal that you want to remove, and then click the < button.
The order of the signal names in the Signals Included list determines the order
in which the signals are recorded in the data file.

Time Between Points Specifies the time interval between data acquisitions.
When you enter a time increment, the Basic TestWare application may change
your entry slightly to reflect your controller’s system clock rate.

Sample Rate Specifies the sample rate frequency for data acquisitions.
Basic TestWare may change the entered frequency slightly to reflect the
resolution of your controller’s system clock rate. For instance, if you type in
“1000 Hz” and press the enter key, BTW may change the number to 1024 Hz.

Buffer Size Specifies the maximum number of data elements the buffer will store (1 to
16000).

Buffer Type Specifies a buffer type: Linear or Circular.

How to Configure Peak/Valley Data Acquisition

1. On the Basic TestWare toolbar, click to open the Test Setup window.
2. In the Test Setup window, click the Data Acquisition tab.
3. In the Type list, click Peak/Valley.
4. Double-click on each signal name that you want to collect data on. The selected signal name will move
to the Signals Included list. You can also click on the signal name, and then click the > button.
5. In the Master Signal list, click the signal name that will be monitored for peaks and valleys.
6. Set the Sensitivity and Buffer Size parameters.
Sensitivity specifies how much the signal must increase or decrease before a peak or valley is recorded.
Sensitivity settings should be used to prevent signal noise from being misinterpreted as peaks or valleys.

7. Select the Buffer Type used.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 447

Basic TestWare Application

Running Max/Min Data Acquisition

When Running Max/Min data acquisition is active, Basic TestWare monitors the selected signals for
maximum and minimum values achieved. When Basic TestWare is stopped, it writes these
maximum/minimum values to the data file.

Running Max/Min Data Acquisition Tab

Item Description

Type Running Max/Min

Signals Available/Signals The Signals Available list displays the names of signals that are accessed
Included using the current station. Highlight each signal in the list that you want to acquire
data from. Click the > button to move the signal to the Signals Included list.
To remove signal names from the Signals Included list, highlight the name of
each signal that you want to remove, and then click the < button.
Note:
The order of the signal names in the Signals Included list determines
the order in which the signals are recorded in the data file.

Level Crossing Data Acquisition

Level Crossing data acquisition records the selected signal values when the master signal changes by the
level increment you specify.
For example, suppose you want to acquire data every time the displacement signal moves 2 millimeters:
1. First, you would make the desired displacement feedback signal the Master Signal.
2. Then you would set the Level Increment to two millimeters.
3. Select signals to be stored in the data file. The Master Signal need not be one of them.

Now, when the master signal reaches signals at two millimeter intervals (for example, 2mm, 4mm, 6mm),
signal values will be recorded for all of the selected signals.
Note:
Do not set the level increment below the level of any signal noise.

Level Crossing Data Acquisition Tab

Item Description

Type Level Crossing

448 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Item Description

Signals Available/Signals The Signals Available list displays the names of signals that are accessed
Included using the current station. Highlight each signal in the list that you want to acquire
data from. Click the > button to move the signal to the Signals Included list.
To remove signal names from the Signals Included list, highlight the name of
each signal that you want to remove, and then click the < button.
The order of the signal names in the Signals Included list determines the order
in which the signals are recorded in the data file.

Master Signal Specifies the signal that is monitored for level changes.

Level Increment Defines how much the signal must change before acquiring data.

Buffer Size Specifies the maximum number of data elements the buffer will store.

Buffer Type Specifies a buffer type: Linear or Circular.

Data File Tab

Use the Data File tab to specify where to save the data that is acquired during your test.

Data File Tab

Item Description

Destination File Specifies whether data is saved to the default data file or a user-specified data
file.
The default data file name is “btw-station name.dat” and it is saved in the default
directory (as specified in the Project Settings of the Project Manager).

File Name Enter the File Name of the test file for which you are acquiring data. The default
file is the currently selected file. Click the Browse button for a list of available
test files. You can also create a new data file by entering a new file name.

Data Header This header is written at the top of every buffer. You should provide a brief
description of your test in the data header.

Data File Mode Specifies if new data is appended to or overwrites the old data.

Data File Format Specifies the format of the data file: Plain, Excel, or Lotus.
Plain results in space-delimited test data. This is most useful for direct printouts.
Lotus results in comma-delimited test data, with text strings in double quotes
(sometimes referred to as the CSV format). Use this format when importing
data files into Lotus 1-2-3.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 449

Basic TestWare Application

Item Description

Excel results in tab-delimited test data. Use this format when importing data
files into Microsoft Excel.

Home Tab
Use the Home tab to define a home position and transition time for your station actuator(s).

Home Tab

Item Description

Channel Specifies the actuator drive channel that the Home command is programmed
to control.

Control Mode Specifies the control mode for the channel.

Absolute End Level Specifies the value and units of the channel.

Time Specifies the amount of time it takes the actuator to move from the current
position to the specified Absolute End Level for the channel.

Peak Detectors Tab

Use the Peak Detectors tab to define peak detectors that can monitor an input signal for peak/valley
changes.

Peak Detectors Tab

Item Description

Signal Selection

Channel Specifies the channel that will be monitored by the peak detector.

Signal Specifies the signal that will be monitored by the peak detector.

Detector Parameters

Action Specifies the action that occurs when the detector is tripped.

Enable After Specifies how many cycles will be executed before the detector begins to
monitor the selected signals. This allows the signals to stabilize before they
are monitored.

450 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Item Description

Sensitivity Specifies how much the signal must increase or decrease before a peak or
valley is determined. Sensitivity settings should be used to prevent signal noise
from being misinterpreted as peaks or valleys.

Tolerance Specifies a tolerance band for the peaks and valleys. If a peak or valley occurs
outside the tolerance band, the action (specified in the Action list) occurs.

Reference Type Specifies how the upper and lower reference values are established. The
selections are Default and User-specified.
Default—Basic TestWare uses the first peak and valley values as the reference.
User-specified—The user specifies the upper and lower reference values which
are kept unchanged until the test stops.

Upper Reference Specifies the upper (peak) reference value (reference type must be
user-specified).

Lower Reference Specifies the lower (valley) reference value (reference type must be
user-specified).

Peak Det. Summary Tab

Use the Peak Det. Summary tab to determine the current status of each sensor signal.

Peak Det. Summary Tab

Item Description

Signal Specifies the sensor feedback signal monitored by a limit detector.

Over Indicates when a signal peak is above its “peak reference” tolerance band or
a signal valley is below its “valley reference” tolerance band

Under Indicates when a signal peak is below its “peak reference” tolerance band or
a signal valley is above its “valley reference” tolerance band.

Test Log Tab

Use the Test Log tab to select the level and source of the messages that are logged to the Basic TestWare
test log. Automatic deletion of archived log files of a specified age can also be selected here.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 451

Basic TestWare Application

Test Log Tab

Item Description

Message Capture

Minimum Severity Allows you to select the level of messages logged.

Source Allows you to select the source of your logged messages.

Select This Application Only to log only Basic TestWare messages.
Select All Applications to log messages from both Basic TestWare and Station
Manager.

Archive Auto Deletion Allows you to automatically delete old archived log files.
Click the Delete Older Than check box and select the age (days) of the archive
log file required for automatic deletion.

Message Logs Window

Access

Basic TestWare toolbar >

The Message Logs window records station and test events as they occur. Events that can be logged
include file events, resource mismatches, hydraulic status changes, station state changes, and detector
activity.

Message Log

Item Description

Toolbar Controls basic Message Logs window functions.

Open Displays the Open Message Log File window, used to open an archived
message log.

Save Saves the current message log. You are given the option to save all messages
or just selected messages.

Close Closes any open archived message logs.

Print Prints the current message log.

452 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Basic TestWare Application

Item Description

Print to File Displays the Message Log Print To File window where you can save your log
as a text (*.txt) file.

Add Entry Displays the Message Log-Add Entry window used to add your own messages
to the message log.

Delete Entry Deletes selected messages that were added by the user.

Copy Copies the selected entries to the clipboard.

Display Options Enable All Display Options, Date/Time, Severity, and Source selections control
the details displayed in the message log.

Log Select to display the Station Manager log, the Basic TestWare log, or other
open archive logs.

Scroll to new entry Check this box to automatically scroll to the newest Message Log entry.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 453

Station Desktop Organizer
Topics:

• How to Start the Station Desktop Organizer Manually....................................................................456

• How to Start the Station Desktop Organizer Automatically.............................................................456
• About Positioning the Station Desktop Organizer...........................................................................457
• How to Move the Station Desktop Organizer Taskbar.....................................................................457
• About the Station Desktop Organizer Menu....................................................................................457
• How to Hide Station Windows.........................................................................................................458
• How to Display Hidden Station Windows........................................................................................459
• How to Start an Application from the Station Desktop Organizer....................................................459
• How to Quit the Station Desktop Organizer....................................................................................459
• How to Refresh the Station Desktop Organizer Display..................................................................460
• Station Buttons and Action Menus..................................................................................................460
• Hide and Show Buttons...................................................................................................................460
• Stop Button......................................................................................................................................461
• Status Indicators..............................................................................................................................462

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 455

Station Desktop Organizer

How to Start the Station Desktop Organizer

Manually

If the Station Desktop Organizer did not start automatically when you started the Station Manager application,
you can start it manually from the Start menu or from Applications on the Station Manager File Menu.
To start the Station Desktop Organizer manually:

From the desktop

From the desktop: Start > Programs > MTS controller product name (for example, “MTS FlexTest GT”) >
Applications > Station Desktop Organizer.
When you start the Station Desktop Organizer, it automatically loads any open stations in the organizer
taskbar. If no stations are currently open, a button labeled Start Station Manager appears on the organizer
taskbar. Click this button to start the Station Manager application.

From MTS applications

• On the Project Manager tool bar, click the Station Desktop Organizer icon, or from the Applications
menu, click Station Desktop Organizer.
• From the Station Manager Applications menu, click Station Desktop Organizer.

How to Start the Station Desktop Organizer

Automatically

FlexTest 60, FlexTest 100, FlexTest 200, FlexTest IIm, FlexTest CTC, FlexTest CTM, and FlexTest GT
controllers are configured (by default) to start automatically when you start the Station Manager application.
For TestStar IIs, TestStar IIs AP, and TestStar IIm systems, you can configure the Station Desktop Organizer
utility to start automatically when you start the Station Manager application as follows:
1. Right-click the taskbar handle, title bar, or open task bar area to access the Station Desktop Organizer.
2. Select Properties on the Station Desktop Organizer menu.
3. Select the Start Station Desktop Organizer automatically check box to enable auto startup.
4. Click OK.

456 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Desktop Organizer

About Positioning the Station Desktop

Organizer

The first time you start the Station Desktop Organizer, it docks on the bottom of your Windows desktop.
The organizer taskbar can be docked on the upper, lower, right, or left edge of the desktop, or it can be
placed in a floating position anywhere on your screen.

Docked Taskbar

Floating Taskbar

How to Move the Station Desktop Organizer

Taskbar

Click the taskbar handle, the title bar, or on an open taskbar area, and then drag it to the desired location.
When you move the Station Desktop Organizer to a floating position, a title bar is added above the first
station. When you move the taskbar towards the edge of the desktop, it docks on that edge.
Note:
If you want to position the taskbar near the desktop edge without docking it, press and hold Ctrl
while dragging the taskbar.

To resize the floating taskbar horizontally, drag the right or left edge of the taskbar.

About the Station Desktop Organizer Menu

Right-click the taskbar handle, title bar, or open taskbar area to access the Station Desktop Organizer
menu.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 457

Station Desktop Organizer

Station Desktop Organizer Menu

Item Description

Refresh Station List Loads any new stations into the Station Desktop Organizer.
In the Properties window, you can set the organizer to refresh the
station list automatically. By default, the organizer will refresh every
five seconds.

Properties Opens the Properties window. Use this window to edit, enable, or
disable the following taskbar properties:
• Automatically refresh station list every seconds allows you to set
the Station Desktop Organizer to refresh the station list
automatically. By default, this property is enabled and set to
refresh the station list every five seconds.
• Always on top is enabled by default to ensure that the Station
Desktop Organizer taskbar is displayed on top of any other
windows you have open.
• Clicking “Show” hides other stations is enabled by default to hide
all station windows except the windows for the current station
when you click .
• Display the Stop button is enabled by default to display on the
Station Desktop Organizer.
• Start Station Desktop Organizer automatically is enabled by
default (FlexTest systems only) to automatically start Station
Desktop Organizer when Station Manager is started. For TestStar
systems, you must enable this property if desired.

About Station Desktop Organizer Displays version and copyright information.

Exit Station Desktop Organizer Quits the Desktop Organizer.

How to Hide Station Windows

Click the Hide button to hide all of the station windows for that station.
When you click Hide, all windows for the current station are hidden and their related icons are removed
from the Windows taskbar.

458 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Desktop Organizer

How to Display Hidden Station Windows

Click the Show button to display all of the station windows for that station.
When you click , all the windows for the current station are restored to their last locations and their
related icons are returned to the Windows taskbar. If the window was minimized when the station was
hidden, the window will restore to a minimized position when you click .
Note:
If clicking “Show” hides other stations is enabled on Station Desktop Organizer Properties, all station
windows except windows for the current station will be hidden.

Note:
An indicator next to each window name displays whether the window is currently hidden.

If you only want to display a particular station window, click the station button, and then select the name
of the window you want to display.

How to Start an Application from the Station

Desktop Organizer

If no stations are currently open, click Start Station Manager to start the Station Manager application. If a
station is currently loaded in the organizer taskbar, click the station button, and point to Start Application
to access a list of available applications.

How to Quit the Station Desktop Organizer

There are three ways to quit the Station Desktop Organizer:

• Click on the organizer taskbar, press Alt+F4, and then click Yes on the exit window.
• Right-click the taskbar handle, title bar, or open taskbar area to access the organizer menu, and then
left-click Exit Station Desktop Organizer.
• Click the Close button.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 459

Station Desktop Organizer

Note:
The close button appears on floating taskbars only.

How to Refresh the Station Desktop Organizer

Display

Right-click the taskbar handle, title bar, or open taskbar area to access the organizer menu, and then
left-click Refresh Station List.
Note:
In the Properties window, you can set the organizer to refresh the station list automatically. By
default, the organizer will refresh every five seconds.

Station Buttons and Action Menus

The name of each open station appears on a station button. Click the button to access a station-specific
action menu.

From the station action menu you can:

• Navigate through the windows that are open for each station.
• Start other MTS applications such as Station Manager, Station Builder, Profile Editor, MultiPurpose
TestWare, and Basic TestWare. When applicable, the current configuration will be loaded into the
application as required.

Hide and Show Buttons

You can use the hide and show buttons to hide or show all station windows with a single click.

460 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Desktop Organizer

Desktop organizer icons

Icons (to the right of the hide/show buttons) indicate whether windows are currently hidden for that station.
See the following table for icon descriptions.

Display Icon Descriptions

Icon Description

When the station windows are all visible, the display shows a solid outline
of several windows.

When the station windows are all hidden, the display appears dimmed.

If a station has some windows displayed and some windows hidden, the
display shows a combination of solid and dimmed images.
This display results when:
• You start another application for a station that is hidden.
• A pop-up status window appears for a hidden station.
• You use the station action menu to show particular windows for a
hidden station.

Stop Button

The stop button can be used to stop any program currently running on the station.
Note:
In the Station Desktop Organizer Properties window, you can specify whether or not the Stop button
is displayed on the organizer taskbar.

Clicking on the organizer taskbar has the same effect as clicking on the Station Manager Station
Controls or the Stop button on the remote station controller (RSC).

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 461

Station Desktop Organizer

Status Indicators

This portion of the Station Desktop Organizer taskbar indicates the following items:
• The application actively in control of the station
• The test state
• The station hydraulics status
• The station interlock status

Test indicator
The Test LED displays the current program status.

Indicator Color Status

Red Stopped

Yellow Holding

Green Running

Power indicator
The Pwr LED displays the highest power setting for any HSM or servomotor on the station. If the station
is configured with an HPU only, the LED displays the greatest HPU power setting.

Indicator Color Highest Power Setting

Green High

Yellow Low

Black Off

Interlock indicator
The Intlk LED indicates the interlock status for the station. This includes station interlocks and software
interlocks.

462 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Station Desktop Organizer

Indicator Color Interlock Status

Red Interlock is tripped (Open)

Black No interlock (Closed)

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 463

Working With Units
Topics:

• Series 793 Software Units Overview...............................................................................................466

• Unit Selection Example...................................................................................................................469
• Units in MPT....................................................................................................................................470

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 465

Working With Units

Series 793 Software Units Overview

Selecting a default Unit Assignment Set during installation

You can select a default Unit Assignment Set while installing Model 793.00 System Software, as shown.

Changing the default Unit Assignment Set

After installation, you can change your selection as follows:
• In the Station Manager application: Station Options > Unit Selection
• In the Project Manager application: Tools > Project Settings > Station Manager > Default Unit Set
• By re-installing your software

Default Unit Assignment Set considerations for Series 793 applications

The default Unit Assignment Set you select during installation affects Series 793 applications as follows:
• In the Station Builder application, new station configurations always use SI units as the default unit
assignment set (regardless of the unit assignment set selected during installation). You can change
units as desired while creating a station configuration. Existing station configurations always open with
the saved units.
• In the Station Manager application, display units are based upon the units assigned to the station
configuration file with the Station Builder application, or with the units used in the selected parameter
set. Changes to units made during calibration will not overwrite the original configuration file created
in the Station Builder application, even though changes will be immediately visible on the Function
Generator.
When setting up the Scope, the display units reflect the station configuration created with the Station
Builder application. If you load a parameter set in which units have been changed, you will have to
reconfigure the Scope and Meters accordingly.

466 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Working With Units

Note:
Any changes to the default unit set require that you close ALL Series 793 software applications,
including the DSP Simulator and System Supervisor, for changes to take effect.

• In the MultiPurpose TestWare application, new test procedures always use the default unit assignment
set selected during installation (regardless of the units saved with the station configuration). You can
change units as desired while creating a test procedure file. Existing test procedures always open with
the saved units.

More about units and the Station Builder application

When creating a new station, you can assign a dimension and display units for the following station
resources:
• Control Modes
• Stabilization
• Inputs
• Auxiliary Inputs
• External Command
• Calculated Outputs

Ensure that the dimensions and units for these selections are consistent.

More about units and the Project Manager application

After installation, the Project Manager application is the best place to make a universal change to the
default unit assignment set. To change the unit set:
1. Select Tools > Project Settings.
2. Select Default Unit Set.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 467

Working With Units

3. Select the unit set you want to change to from the drop-down menu.
4. Click OK.
5. Close all Series 793 Software applications.
When you restart the Series 793 Software, the default unit set will be changed.

More about units and the Station Manager application

To change the default unit set in the Station Manager application:
1. Select Tools > Station Options > Unit Selection tab.
2. Select a new unit set.
3. Click Set Default.
4. Shut all Series 793 related applications, including the DSP Simulator and Demo Supervisor.
Upon restart, the selected unit set will be applied.

Unit Set Editor

Another location within the Station Manager application that can change units is the Unit Set Editor (Tools
> Unit Set Editor) . Use the Unit Set Editor to edit unit sets or to create new custom unit sets. Apply the
new unit set using any of the above methods. Changes made in the Unit Set Editor are not automatically
applied universally.

Unit set descriptions

• CGSSET - Centimeters-Grams-Seconds—Units are based on centimeters, grams, and seconds.
• ENGSET - U.S. Engineering Units—Units are based on customary U.S. engineering units with
force-related units in kips.

468 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Working With Units

• ENGSETSM - U.S. Engineering Units (small)—Units are based on customary U.S. engineering units
with force-related units in lbf.
• SISET - SI (Systeme International d’Unites)—Units are based on international system of units (metric)
with force related units in kN.
• SISETSM - SI (Systeme International d’Unites) - small—Units are based on international system of
units (metric) with force-related units in N.
• SYSDEF - System Units Definition—Contains units used by the hardware.

You can also edit existing sets or create user-defined sets.

Units and the Function Generator

If you click the control labels on the Function Generator and change the Display Unit, the change will be
immediately visible. You can save this view as a parameter set. These changes do not alter the station
configuration file. If you re-open the station configuration with the default parameter set, previous changes
will not hold. If you re-open the station configuration in the Station Builder application, default units will
remain what they were when the station configuration was created.

Unit Selection Example

Suppose your lab works almost exclusively in SI units, but you occasionally need to run a test with English
units. The following example will explain how to set up your system and make changes.
1. During installation, select SI Units as the default Unit Assignment Set.
2. When you create configuration files in the Station Builder application, consistently assign SI units as
display units.
3. When you open the configuration in the Station Manager application, display units on the Function
Generator will reflect the units assigned in the station configuration file (SI units).
4. To set up the scope and meters:
a. When you select the channel and signal in the Meter Setup window, the display mode engineering
units selection will automatically change to reflect the units in the station configuration file.
b. In the Scope window, once you select the correct channel and signal, the unit field will update
according to the units assigned in the station configuration file.

To change display units and work with English units:

• You can create a new station configuration and consistently assign units.
or:
• You can make changes on the Function Generator (with the initial configuration) and save the changes
as a parameter set.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 469

Working With Units

Units in MPT

By default, the MultiPurpose TestWare application uses the unit set:

• Selected during installation, or
• Selected with the Project Manager application (Tools > Project Settings > Station Manager > Default
Unit Set), or
• Selected with the Station Manager application (Tools > Station Options > Unit Selection)

The MultiPurpose TestWare application does not automatically use the units assigned in the station
configuration file.

Selecting units with the MPT Options Editor

The “Use Station Unit Assignment Set” checkbox in the Unit Selection page of the MPT Options Editor is
selected by default, as shown. To prevent the MultiPurpose TestWare application from using the default
Unit Assignment Set selected for the station, click to clear the checkbox and select a new unit assignment
set.

MPT Data Acquisition processes

The Output Units page in all MPT Data Acquisition parameter windows offers two options:
• Current Unit Assignment Set (default), and
• Other Unit Assignment Set.

The Current Unit Assignment Set option uses the Unit Set selected in the Station Manager application.
The Other Unit Assignment Set option allows you to choose an alternate set. Choosing another unit set
will convert acquired data to the selected units.

470 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Working With Units

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 471

Acceleration Compensation
Topics:

• About Acceleration Compensation..................................................................................................474

• How to Configure Acceleration Compensation................................................................................474

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 473

Acceleration Compensation

About Acceleration Compensation

Acceleration compensation is an option that is typically used in test that:

• Have a moving force transducer
• Apply loads at high frequencies
• Apply loads using massive grips or fixturing
• Use a load washer for feedback
Note:
Acceleration compensation must be optimized whenever you change fixturing or make other
major mechanical changes.

The acceleration compensation applied to force input signals minimizes unwanted feedback from motion
caused by a mass attached to the force transducer. The unwanted effects of this motion increase
exponentially as the test frequency increases.
The acceleration compensation option requires an accelerometer mounted to the load cell and additional
conditioning hardware. During a typical operation, the conditioned accelerometer signal is inverted and
summed with the feedback signal to null out any motion-induced load feedback.

How to Configure Acceleration Compensation

Acceleration compensation must be optimized whenever you change fixturing or make other major
mechanical changes.
1. Remove any installed specimen.
2. In the Station Manager window’s Toolbar, select an access Level of Tuning.
3. In the Station Manager window’s Display menu, click Station Setup to display the Station Setup window.
4. In the Station Setup window’s Navigation pane, locate and click the Channels control mode that will
use acceleration compensation.
5. In the Station Setup window, click .
6. In the Inputs panel, click the Accel tab.
7. In the Station Manager window’s Toolbar, click ..
8. Set up the Scope window to display the command and force feedback signals for the channel using
acceleration compensation.
9. In the Station Manager window’s Navigation pane, click .
10. Set up a tuning program in the Function Generator panel.
a) For Channel, click the channel using acceleration compensation.
b) For Control Mode, select a displacement control mode.
c) For Command Type, click Cyclic.

474 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Acceleration Compensation

d) For Target Setpoint, set 0 cm.

e) For Amplitude (±), select an amplitude appropriate for the test.
f) Set Frequency to approximately 80% of the test frequency.
g) For Wave Shape, click Sine.
h) For Compensator, click APC or PVC.

Warning:
Hydraulic pressure application can cause high force actuator motion and hardware
position changes.
High force actuator motion can cause personal injury or damage to your equipment or
specimen.
Ensure that all equipment and personnel are clear of all system fixtures before you
apply hydraulic pressure to the system.

11. Apply station hydraulic pressure.

12. Start the tuning program.
13. Adjust the acceleration compensation.
In the Station Setup window’s Accel tab, adjust Acceleration Compensation to minimize feedback.
If Acceleration Compensation has an additive or no effect on the feedback signal, for Polarity click
Invert.

14. To save the values, go to the Station Manager window’s File menu and click Save Parameters.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 475

Command Line Shortcuts
Topics:

• Station Manager Shortcuts..............................................................................................................478

• Station Builder Shortcuts.................................................................................................................480
• System Loader Shortcuts................................................................................................................481
• Basic TestWare Shortcuts...............................................................................................................482
• Decorator-Based Command Line Format.......................................................................................483
• Precedence-Based Command Line Format....................................................................................484
• How to Create Shortcuts.................................................................................................................486
• How to Edit and Test Shortcuts.......................................................................................................486

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 477

Command Line Shortcuts

Station Manager Shortcuts

Creating command line shortcuts greatly reduces the number of steps it takes to get your station open
and running. For Station Manager, you can use a shortcut to automatically specify the following station
parameters:
• Project folder
• Configuration file name
• Parameter set
• Interlock chain
• Station views
• RSC (remote station control)—optional, not available on all systems
• User access level and password
• .hwi file name
• Test system name
• Controller name
• Import parameters file name

Shortcut command line

To create a Station Manager shortcut command line, first specify the application (stmgr), then the desired
station options.
The syntax of the shortcut command line is critical. If you do not use a supported command-line format,
the shortcut will not work.
To view a list of available Station Manager command-line options, enter stmgr /H from the command line.
These options are also described in the following table.
Note:
If the parameter name contains spaces (for example, test 257.000), the name must be enclosed in
quotation marks (“test 257.000“).

The Station Manager application supports two command-line formats: decorator-based and precedence
based.

478 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Command Line Shortcuts

Station Manager Command-Line Options

Description Option Abbreviation1 Default value Example

Configuration file /Station /St None /St practice.cfg

name

Parameter set name /ParameterSet /Par Parameter set last /Par “set 1”
used by configuration

Interlock number /Interlock /I Interlock last used by /I 1

configuration

RSC name2 /RSC /R RSC detected /R RSC-1

Restore view /View /V Default view /V default /V saved /V

no

User access level /User /U Operator /U Tuning

Password3 /Password /Pas None /Pas Tuning

.hwi file name /hwi /Hw None /Hw tsiis.hwi

System name /System /Sy None /Sy “810 mat test”

Controller name (to /Controller /Cont None /Cont “Control A”

connect to)

Import parameters file /Import None None /Import Aero1.txt

Launch application /Launch None None /Launch BTW

Launch Project /Project (Project None None /Launch Project1

name)

No Restart (saved /NoRestart None None

applications)

Display the Station ? or /Help /H

Manager
command-line options

1 Option names can be abbreviated to anything that is unique.

2 Optional—not available on all systems.
3 The password parameter is case-sensitive.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 479

Command Line Shortcuts

Command line example

Stmgr /St test.cfg /Par “param set 1” /I 1 /V saved /U tuning /Pas Tuning

Station Builder Shortcuts

For Station Builder, you can use a shortcut to automatically specify the following parameters:
• Configuration file name
• Controller name (to connect to)
• .hwi file name
• Project name

Shortcut command line

To create a Station Builder shortcut command line, first specify the application (stbd), then the desired
station options.
The syntax of the shortcut command line is critical. If you do not use a supported command-line format,
the shortcut will not work.
To view a list of available Station Builder command-line options, enter stbd /H. These options are also
described in the following table.
Note:
If the parameter name contains spaces (for example, test 257.000), the name must be enclosed in
quotation marks (“test 257.000“).

The Station Builder application supports two command-line formats: decorator-based and precedence
based.

Station Builder Command-Line Options

Parameter Prefix Abbreviation4 Default value Example

Configuration file /Station /St None /St practice.cfg

.hwi file name /hwi /Hw None /Hw tsiis.hwi

Controller name (to /Controller Cont None /Cont “Control A”

connect to)

Launch Project /Project (Project None None /Launch Project1

name)

4 Option names can be abbreviated to anything that is unique.

480 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Command Line Shortcuts

Parameter Prefix Abbreviation4 Default value Example

Display the Station ? or /Help /H

Builder command-line
options

Command line example

Stbd /St stat1.cfg

System Loader Shortcuts

For System Loader, you can use a shortcut to automatically launch a simulated DSP or supervisor,
load/unload a simulated system, and specify the controller name.

Shortcut command line

To create a System Loader shortcut command line, first specify the application (sysload), then the desired
station options.
The syntax of the shortcut command line is critical. If you do not use a supported command-line format,
the shortcut will not work.
To view a list of available Station Builder command-line options, enter sysload /H. These options are also
described in the following table.
Note:
If the parameter name contains spaces (for example, test 257.000), the name must be enclosed in
quotation marks (“test 257.000“).

The System Loader application only supports the decorator-based command-line format.

System Loader Command-Line Options .

Description Option Abbreviation5 Default value Example/note

Launch simulated /DSP /DSP None Used with simulated

DSP load only

Launch simulated /Sup /Sup None Used with simulated

Supervisor load only

Minimize launched /Minimize /Min None Used with simulated

applications load only

4 Option names can be abbreviated to anything that is unique.

5 Option names can be abbreviated to anything that is unique.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 481

Command Line Shortcuts

Description Option Abbreviation5 Default value Example/note

Load simulated /Simulation /Sim None

system

Controller name (to /Controller /Cont None /Cont “Control A”

connect to)

Unload simulated /UnloadSimulation /Un None

system

Sysload open after /NoExit /NoE None

load completed

Display the System ? or /Help /H None

Loader
command-line
options

Command line example

Sysload /Cont “Control A”

Basic TestWare Shortcuts

For Basic TestWare, you can use a shortcut to automatically specify the following parameters:
• Test name
• Station name
• System name
• Controller name (to connect to)

Shortcut command line

To create a Basic TestWare shortcut command line, first specify the application (btw), then the desired
station options.
The syntax of the shortcut command line is critical. If you do not use a supported command-line format,
the shortcut will not work.
To view a list of available Station Builder command-line options, enter btw /H. These options are also
described in the following table.

5 Option names can be abbreviated to anything that is unique.

482 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Command Line Shortcuts

Note:
If the parameter name contains spaces (for example, test 257.000), the name must be enclosed in
quotation marks (“test 257.000“).

The Basic TestWare application supports two command-line formats: decorator-based and precedence
based.

Basic TestWare Command-Line Options

Description Option Abbreviation6 Default value Example

Test name /Test /T None /T FirstTest

Station (to connect /Station /St None /St practice.cfg

to)

System name /System /Sy None /Sy “810 mat test”

Controller name (to /Controller /Cont None /Cont 001

connect to)

Display the BTW ? or /Help /H

command-line
options

Command line example

btw /Cont 001

Decorator-Based Command Line Format

The decorator-based command line format requires a prefix to identify each parameter.
When you are creating a decorator-based command line, keep in mind:
• The order of the parameters is not important.
• Prefixes can be spelled out or abbreviated in the command line.
• The prefix and the parameter must be separated by a space.
• If the parameter name contains a space (for example, parameter set 2), it must be enclosed in quotation
marks.

Decorator-based command line example

Use the following example as a reference when you create your decorator-based command line.

6 Option names can be abbreviated to anything that is unique.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 483

Command Line Shortcuts

Assume you want to start Station Manager with the following command-line options:
• Configuration file name = test.cfg
• Parameter set name = parm set 1
• Interlock chain = 1
• Restore views = saved
• User access level = tuning
• Password = Tuning (case-sensitive)

The decorator-based command line should look like this:

C:\tsiis\ntbin\Stmgr.exe /St test.cfg /Par “parm set 1” /I 1 /V saved /U tuning /Pas Tuning
Keep in mind:
• There must be a space between the original command line entry and your first prefix.
• Each parameter must be preceded by the correct prefix.
• If the parameter name contains a space, the parameter name must be enclosed in quotation marks.
• Password is the only parameter that is case-sensitive.

Precedence-Based Command Line Format

The precedence-based command line format does not require prefixes. This format is simpler, however,
parameters must be listed in a specific order.
When you are creating a precedence-based command line, keep in mind:
• Parameters must be defined in the proper order.
• The parameters must be separated by a space.
• You do not have to define all parameters, but if you want to specify a parameter that is recognized later
in the order, you have to define all of the preceding parameters.
• If the parameter name contains a space (for example, parm set 2), it must be enclosed in quotation
marks.

Command-line parameter order

In a shortcut command line, options are recognized in the following order:
Station Manager
1. Configuration file name
2. Parameter set name
3. Interlock number
4. RSC name—optional, not available on some systems

484 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Command Line Shortcuts

5. Restore view option

6. User access level
7. User access level password
8. .hwi file name
9. System name
10. Controller name
11. Import parameters file name
12. Application to launch
13. Project

Station Builder
1. Configuration file name
2. .hwi file name
3. Controller name
4. Project

Basic TestWare
1. Test name
2. Station name
3. System name
4. Controller name
Note:
For Basic Testware, the Project is passed with the /Project flag.

Precedence format example

Use the following example as a reference when you create your precedence-based command line.
Assume you want to start Station Manager with the following command-line options:
• Configuration file = test.cfg
• Parameter set = parm set 1
• Interlock chain = 1
• RSC = rsc-1
• Restore views = no
• User access level = tuning
• Password = Tuning (case-sensitive)

The precedence-based command line with these options should look like this:

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 485

Command Line Shortcuts

C:\tsiis\ntbin\Stmgr.exe test.cfg “parm set 1” 1 rsc-1 no tuning Tuning

Keep in mind:
• There must be a space between the original command line entry and your first parameter.
• If the parameter name contains a space, the parameter name must be enclosed in quotation marks.
• Password is the only parameter that is case-sensitive.

Omitting parameters
Since precedence-based parameters are recognized in a specific order, the command line will not work if
you omit parameters. However, you can omit one or more parameters in your precedence-based command
line if you include prefixes for each parameter listed after the omitted parameter.
For example, if you want to omit the interlock chain, RSC, and restore view parameters in the above
example, you must use the user access level and password prefixes (/U, /Pas) to complete the command
line.
C:\tsiis\ntbin\Stmgr.exe test.cfg “parm set 1” /U Tuning /Pas Tuning

How to Create Shortcuts

Before you can create the shortcut command line, you need to create a shortcut.
1. On any folder (or on the desktop): Right-click, then select New/Shortcut.
2. Using the displayed Create Shortcut wizard, browse to the folder where your system software is installed
(C:\Program Files\MTS 793\ntbin).
3. Continue browsing to the ntbin folder, then click on the application for which you are creating a shortcut
(for example, Stmgr). Click OK.
4. Add the desired options to the command line displayed on the wizard using the required syntax and
format. Click Next.
5. If you want a shortcut name different than the one selected by the wizard, enter it now, then click Finish.

How to Edit and Test Shortcuts

Edit the shortcut command line to define your desired station settings.
1. Right-click the shortcut icon you created, and then click Properties.
2. In the Properties window, click the Shortcut tab.
3. In the Target box, type your command line.
There must be a space between the application file name (for example, Stmgr.exe) and your command
line addition.

4. Click OK.
5. To test your shortcut command line, double-click the shortcut icon you created.

486 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

System Performance
Topics:

• System Performance Values...........................................................................................................488

• RPC Sampling Rates.......................................................................................................................489

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 487

System Performance

System Performance Values

The following table illustrates typical system performance values for various station/channel configurations
of Series 793 Controllers:
Note:
Limitations may apply to realize rates shown. Factors that may adversely affect data acquisition
rates include host computer processor speed, controller processor speed, on-board scope usage,
and the number of channels of data acquisition

System Rates

Controller Number of Potential Control Channels System Rate (Hz)

Stations

FlexTest 40 1 1-2 6144

FlexTest 40 1 3-4 4096

FlexTest 60 6 1-2 6144

FlexTest 60 6 3-4 4096

FlexTest 60 6 5-8 2048

FlexTest 100 8 1-2 6144

FlexTest 100 8 3-4 4096

FlexTest 100 8 5-8 2048

FlexTest 100 8 9 -16 2048

FlexTest 200 8 1-2 6144

FlexTest 200 8 3-4 4096

FlexTest 200 8 5-8 2048

FlexTest 200 8 9 -16 2048

FlexTest 200 8 17 - 32 2048

FlexTest 200 8 > 32 1024

488 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 System Performance

Controller Number of Potential Control Channels System Rate (Hz)

Stations

FlexTest SE 1 1 1024

FlexTest SE7 1 2 6144

TestStar IIs 1 1 6144

FlexTest IIm 4 16 1024

FlexTest GT 4 5-8 2048

FlexTest GT 4 3-4 4096

FlexTest GT 2 2 6144

RPC Sampling Rates

For RPC systems, as the selected system rate decreases, additional sampling rates are available. .

System rate 4096

Sampling rates:
• 204.8
• 409.6
• 512
• 1024
• 2048
• 4096

System rate 2048

Sampling rates:
• 102.4
• 204.8
• 409.6
• 512

7 Applies only to FlexTest SE Controllers equipped with MTS Model 498.96-1B/2B processors.

MTS Series 793 Control Software | 489

System Performance

• 1024
• 2048

System rate 1024

Sampling rates:
• 102.4
• 128
• 204.8
• 256
• 409.6
• 512
• 1024

490 | MTS Series 793 Control Software

 Index

Index
.hwi file name 479–480 Actions tab
.hwi files action group panel 169
created by MTS 56 digital output panel 168
how to change 52 active fdbk 393
how to find available .hwi files 52 active mode 191, 246, 313, 328, 334, 341–342
active mode excitation failure 220
493.14 2SVD S3-J4 71 active P gain 240, 243
493.15 3SVD S3-J5 71 active scope traces
493.21 DUC S3-J5 72 how to examine 415
493.21B DUC S3-J7 72 actuator
manually positioning 329
493.25 DUC S12-J-4 72
type 246
493.45 A/D 1 S7-J11 72
adaptation state
493.46 D/A 1 S6-J13 71
controls 259
493.47 Encoder S12-J7 72
Adaptive Harmonic Cancellation (AHC) compensator 85,
493.57 A/D 1 S7-J15 72
258
493.59-1 U2 absolute 1 S7-J17 72
adaptive harmonic cancellers
493.59-1 U2 incremental 1 S7-J11 72
convergence rate 258
493.59-1 U2 Temposonics III 1 S7-J13 72
frequency 258
493.72 DI T1-J3 72
frozen 259
493.72 DO T1-J4 71
harmonics 259
494.16 2SVD S5-J1B 71
tracking 259
494.16 3SVD S5-J1A 71 Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC)
494.16 DUC S4-J1A 72 compensators 261
494.21 DUC S6-J2A 72 configuring 271
494.25 DUC S6-J3A 72 Adaptive Inverse Control (AICX) compensators 269
494.26 DUC S4-J2A 72 adaptive state 275
494.41 D/A 1 71 Adjustments tab—CLC control modes 240
494.45 A/D 1 S4-J4A 72 Adjustments tab—PIDF control modes 238
494.46 D/A 1 S4-J3A 71 AHC
494.47 encoder S6-J2A 72 theory 258
494.47 encoder velocity S6-J2A 72 AHC compensators
793 application access 48 how to set up 259
AIC
A coefficients reference 263
setup summary 263
A/D inputs 72 theory 261
abs. error 394 AIC compensators
absolute end level 450 how to set up 264
accel gain 199 AICX
Accel tab 199 coefficients reference 271
accel. comp 199 setup summary 271
acceleration compensation AICX compensators
configuring 474 how to set up 271
how to configure 474 ALC
access level 123, 203, 364 theory 273
action groups 170 ALC theory 273
Action Lists tab 166 allow exclusive control at any access level 140
action messages 176 ampl. convergence control 274
actions 196, 292, 297 amplitude 334, 445

491
Index

Amplitude and Phase Control (APC) Basic TestWare (continued)

configuring 257 how to start a test 437
Amplitude and Phase Control (APC) compensators 256 how to stop a test 437
amplitude MIN/MAX 274 main display 442
amplitude plot example 425 preview test configuration 438
analyze data points on a scope 416 print a test 439
anlg out (Model 493.42 System I/O board) 71 print preview, toolbar 438
anticipation 262, 270 Return Home control 434
APC 83, 256 shortcuts 482
APC compensators test setup 49, 51, 445
how to set up 257 toolbar 444
application control panels 115 begin/end time settings 151
applications 45 begin/end times with a command process 152
Applications menu 40, 134 benefits of default folder locations in projects 33
Arbitrary End-Level Compensation (ALC) bit offset 182
about 273 buffer
configuring 275 size 410, 447, 449
Arbitrary End-Level compensators type 447, 449
how to set up (ALC) 275 buffers, Basic TestWare 431
Arbitrary Level Control (ALC) 84 built-in arithmetic functions 380
archive auto deletion 136–137, 452 butterworth filter type 386
archiving consideration for upgrade installations 38
arrays 382
auto offset 211–212, 331
C
auto zero 213, 218 C-Stop 119, 158, 309, 326
auto-archiving 344, 439 C-Stop Interlock 158, 326
auto-high control 138, 245 cal type 164, 204
auto-low control 139, 245 calculated analog inputs 105
auto-scale control 402 calculated analog outputs 105
auto-scale mode 407 calculated digital inputs 105
auto-sizing 408 calculated digital outputs 105
auto-tuning control panel 246 calculated input and output resources 354
auto-tuning type 246 calculated inputs
auxiliary input about analog inputs 105
how to change signal names 280 Calibration tab 389
how to configure 279 saturated 323
how to monitor 280 calculated outputs
available channels 146 about 105
available channels/modes 145–146 Calculation tab 388
drive parameters 388
B drive signals 234
fullscale min/max 388
back, next, finish controls 48 values 387
background color 408 Calculation Editor
base control mode (Cascaded PIDF and Dual Compensation operators 379
modes only) 239 parameters definition panel 363, 365
Basic TEDS 198 window 357
Basic TEDS (Series 494 hardware only) 163 calculation errors 362
Basic TestWare calculation grammar
application overview 428 arrays 382
BTW (abbreviation for Basic TestWare) 34 error handling 362
buffers 431 literal numbers and expressions 378
files (.tst) 35 simple expression
how to hold a test 437 about 377

492
 Index

calculation grammar (continued) channel limited channel (CLC) control mode (continued)
simple expression (continued) tuning 242
built-in functions 380–382 Channel Lists tab 146
comments 377 channel low 283
data types 378 channel options 134
operators 379 Channel Options window 144
user-defined functions 362, 385 Channel Status panel
variables 381 Channel Summary tab 191
calculation helpful hints 359 Drive tab
calculation parameters dual valve driver 229
example 364 Channel Summary tab 191
panel 389 channel tuning settings
window 363 how to access 237
calculation protection 360 channel/group 313
calculation variables Channels panel
access 365 Control Modes tab 64
calculations External Command tab 64
how to set up for two matrixed channels 373 General tab 64
calibration 123 chebyshev filter type 386
calibration data 203 circular buffer 431
calibration data for replacement sensors 203 clear offset 331
calibration data for TEDS sensors 223 clip (x, clipMin, clipMax) 383
calibration file range definition 161 color of indicator 288
calibration files 34 command 393
calibration files folder 33 command frequency 394
calibration process 202 command line example 480–483
calibration schedules 202 Command tab 445
Calibration tab 203, 281 command type 334
calibration values 164 command-line parameter order 484
CAN Bus comment 188
CAN Bus editor 173 comments 378
inputs and outputs 181 comp. command signal 393
message settings 177, 179 compensation
setup procedure 175 about 248
signal settings 181 acceleration 474
category pane 50, 52–53 Adaptive Inverse Control (AIC)
CE velocity limitation 300 configuring 271
Change View Scope button Amplitude and Phase Control (APC)
how to use 399 about 256
changing .hwi files 52 configuring 257
channel compensator settings Arbitrary End-Level (ALC)
how to access 247 about 273
channel dimension control 145 configuring 275
channel drive settings Null Pacing
how to access 227 about 249
channel groups Peak/Valley Compensation (PVC)
Master Command 236 about 254
channel high 283 configuring 255
channel input settings Peak/Valley Phase (PVP)
how to access 192 about 276
channel limited channel (CLC) control mode configuring 277
about 96 compensation application 249
adjustments 240 compensation types 91
how to create 96 compensator 64, 248–249, 335, 341, 444, 446
specimen installation 328 compensator types 248

493
Index

compiler errors 362 Data Acquisition tab 446

conditioner 165 data file
conditioner serial number 198 and buffers 431
Conditioner tab settings for three-stage valve drivers 233 format 449
conditioner type 198 header 432
conditioners header (Basic TestWare) 432
full-range 292 mode 449
config 34 tab 449
config folder 33 data file format
configuration Excel 450
file 480 Lotus 449
file associated with project 144 Microsoft Excel 450
file name 479 data file header 432
file not associated with project 144 data file mode 449
configuration file data file options
corrupted 107 how to specify 432
control channel 246 Data File tab 449
control mode 167–168, 246, 313, 328, 334, 340, 445, data files and buffers 431
450 data header 449
control modes tab 64 data point crosshairs/display box 416
Controlled Stop 158, 326 data point display box 415
controller name (to connect to) 479–480, 482–483 data points on a scope
controller output limit 245 how to analyze 416
controller resources data range 165
about 73 data types 378
controller settings 46 data types, for calculation 378
conventions 23 decorator-based command line format 483
convergence rate control 255–256, 262, 277 default
copy current set to reference set 259 folder locations in projects 33
count 393 password
counter how to clear 314
logging events 436 project status 45
crossover freq 262 sensor file location 195
current shunt value 209 settings 395
current signal list 155 station configuration file locations 58
current value 213, 364, 366 test file locations 429
custom action view
how to define 169 how to restore 125
custom actions views 125
configuring 283 delay action 169
defining 169 Delta K 206
settings 167 demonstration mode
cyclic command how to start 124
how to define 430 Desktop Organizer icons 461
destination file 449
D detector actions 288, 290
detector indicator colors 434
D gain 239 detector list 154
D/A outputs 71 Detector Lists tab 154
data acquisition (Basic TestWare) detector parameters 450
about 431 detector settings
level crossing 448 how to access 286
running max/min 448 detector status indicators 288
timed 446 detectors
about 287

494
 Index

detectors (continued) Drive Panel settings—two-stage valves 228

errors dual valve driver settings 229
about 297 dynamic null pacing 249, 253
monitoring 299
setting 296
how to set up 289
E
limits edit and test shortcuts 486
about 291 edit value control 50, 52–53
setting 289 editing
monitoring 288 signal lists 282
reset 289 elastomer DUC 199
settings electrical zero
how to determine 288 considerations 214
determining the parameter set being used 127 how to shift 218
device 183 messages 214
dialog box 215 offset 213
dig out 1 (Model 493.42 and Model 494.41 and Model 494.44 electronic documentation 135
System I/O boards) 71 elliptic filter type 386
digital input actions 284 enable using switch “RSA Enable” 313
digital input detectors 283 enable when active (default) 220
digital input/output signals 282 enable/disable changed highlighting 438
digital inputs encoder and sonic transducer conditioners 72
how to configure 283
end level type 446
digital inputs/outputs
end level value 446
about 282
end time control 152
actions 282
error detectors
how to monitor 283
how to monitor 299
manually triggering outputs 285
how to set 296
responses, configuring 283
error signals 297
digital output panel 168
error(errorId) 383
digital output signals
errors
how to manually control 285
about 297
digital outputs
configuration file 107
how to configure 285
in calculations 362
digital universal conditioners (DUC) 72
monitoring 299
dimension 198, 363, 366
setting 296
dimensions, for calculations 378
event type 166
discrete excitation 206
Event-Action Editor
display BTW command-line options 483
about 165
display hidden station windows 459
Action Group panel 169
display Master Span on main window 138
Action Lists panel 166
Display menu 133
Delay panel 169
display mode 408–409, 424
Digital Output panel 168
display name 75, 363, 366
Message panel 167
display resolution 424
Stop At Level panel 168
dither amplitude 228–230, 388
window 165
dither frequency 228, 230
examine active scope traces 415
DOF 59
examine stored scope traces 416
done action 446 example script
Drive panel FIR filters 387
3-stage valve
IIR filters 386
Conditioner tab 233
example script for FIR filters 387
Inner Loop tab 232
example script for IIR filters 386
calculated output 234
two-stage valves 228

495
Index

Excel filter
data file format 450 type 386
excitation (p-p) 209 filter functions 386
excitation (p-p) for DC conditioners 206 Filter tab 242
excitation (peak) 233 FIR filters 387
excitation (peak) for AC conditioners 206 FL filter 239
excitation failure actions 220 FlexTest 40 82
excitation failure detection 219 FlexTest 60/100/200 controllers 82
excitation failure mode and actions FlexTest GT/TestStar IIm controllers 81
how to define 221 FlexTest IIm/CTC controllers 81
excitation failure mode settings 219 FlexTest SE controllers 81
excitation frequency 233 folder name 49
Existing Project tab 47 folders and values pane 50, 52
existing Series 793 users 38 form
exit Station Desktop Organizer 458 problem submittal 22
expand (Select Project window only) 49 forward loop filter types
export parameter sets 130 band-stop 242
export parameters 129, 132 low pass 242
expression 358, 389–390 forward/inverse convergence rate control 269
expressions, in calculations 377 freq convergence 275
external command channels 145 frequency
external command inputs min/max 275, 334
about 340 plot
enable/run 341 how to set 412
settings 340 Frequency Plot Mode tab 410
External Command tab 144 FRF frequency plot type 413
external event actions 302 FRF Frequency Plot Type 413
external readout full scale 392
how to configure a signal 202 full-range conditioners 293
external readouts 392 fullscale min/max
externally conditioned input signal for calculated outputs 388
how to configure 201 Fullscale tab 281
Function Generator
how to synchronize with scope 404
F programming 335
F gain 239 random function 339
F2 gain 239 wave shapes 337
feedback functions
auto offset 330 for calculations, built-in 380
configuring external 201 user-defined, in calculations 362, 385
correcting invalid 323
invalid active G
correcting 323
manual offset 330 gain 205, 209, 233
out of range 319 gain/Delta K
saturated 319 range definition 161
feedback (saturated) gain/linearization
applying hydraulics 323 range definition 161
field size 182 gate interlock
field type 182 about 325
file definition 163 actions 325
file name 449 reset 326
file pane 44 Graph tab 407
grid color 408
group name 145–146

496
 Index

H impulse response 262, 270

indicate 284, 290, 302
handset 64, 139 initial
Handset Options tab 139 .hwi files created by MTS 56
hardware interface file 56 limit detectors 294
hardware interface files (.hwi) limit settings 294
about 65 station configuration 56
hardware resource inner loop gain 232
conflicts 108 inner loop rate 233
hardware tab 219 inner loop tab settings for three-stage valve drivers 232
Hardware tab 281 input
harmonics 259 how to assign a sensor file 195
Help 46 input and output types 181
Help menu (Station Manager) 135 input LEDs 350
hidden station windows input resources 63
how do display 459 input settings 193
hide input signal
application 155 saturated 320
channel information 155 inputs panel
HSMs 138 Accel. tab 199
protected expressions state 360 Calibration tab 203
station windows 458 Shunt tab (force) 209
windows with the SDO 458 integrator inhibit 245
Hide and Show buttons 460 integrator limit 244
high/low 283 interlock 119, 221, 284, 291, 302, 309, 315, 319, 383
hold 148, 150 Interlock
Home control 435 C-Stop 158, 326
home position, defining (BTW) 435 interlock chain 64
Home tab 450 interlock indicator 462
house pressure 317–318 interlock number 479
HSM internal name 75, 363, 366
read-only 318 invalid sensor assignments 196
HSM power control invalid sensor-file assignment 195
FlexTest IIm/CTC controllers 81
FlexTest SE controllers 81–82
GT/TestStar IIm controllers 81 L
TestStar IIs controllers 81 last calibration date 198
hydraulics LED state (Series 494 Hardware only) 198, 229, 232
about 315 level crossing data acquisition
applying with saturated channel 323 how to configure 433
hydraulics/powers 168 level increment 449
license requirements 81, 105, 354–355
I limit 243
limit detectors
I gain 239 how to enable 295
iclip (x, iclipMin, iclipMax) 383 how to set 294
if (control structure) 384 limit lines 409
IIR filters 386 limiting P gain control 240
import a parameter set 130 Limiting tab 244
import parameters 128, 132 limits
import parameters file 479 about 291
import-export files 34 monitoring 288
import-export files (.txt) 35 setting 289
importing and exporting protected calculations 361 line color 409

497
Index

line style 409 menu (continued)

linear buffer 431 Station Manager (continued)
linearization data 214 Help 135
Linearization Data window settings 165 Tools 134
list filter 142, 154 Menu bar 44
literal numbers and dimensions 378 message capture 136, 452
load simulated system 482 message ID 178–179
local integrator control 245 Message Log
Lock button 360 Basic TestWare
auto-archiving 439
log 347, 453
define logged messages 441
log files 344
opening 440
logged events 344
print to file 441
Lotus data file format 449
printing 440
low battery actions 301
file naming 439
low rate 82
how to add a user entry 441
low/high 283
how to manually archive all messages in the Message
Log 442
M how to print 440
how to print to file 441
main window always on top 138
Station Manager
managing station views 125
auto-archiving 344
manual command
manual archiving 349
positioning actuator 329
printing 347
Manual Command window
setting what gets logged 348
using Park/Ride buttons 332
user entry
manual offset
adding 348
feedback 330
deleting 348
manual zero 213
window 345
manuals 19
toolbar 440
marker coordinate/slope display 417
window 452
marker pair delta display 417
message severity 349
master command 145
master command group message text 349
creating channel groups 236 messages
how to define which are logged 441
how to create 236
meter
selecting channel groups 337
adding 421
Master Command tab 145
how to configure 422
master gain (option) 120, 310
how to delete 425
master signal 449
meter controls 418
Master Span 120, 310, 343
Meter Setup button 421
Master Span group
meter toolbar 420
how to create 237
meter type control 418, 423
mathematical errors 362
meter view
matrix two channels calculations 371
how to reset 424
Max/Min data acquisition
how to save 424
how to configure 433
meters
Max/Min Data Acquisition 448
configuring 422
memory considerations 143
deleting 425
menu
Station Desktop Organizer window 419
main 460 Microsoft Excel data file format 450
Station Manager minimize all 134
Applications 134 minimize launched applications 481
Display 133 mod (x,y) 383
mode to tune 246

498
 Index

Model 493.42 System I/O board 71 output LEDs 350

model filter count control 258 output limit enable 228, 230
Monitor Mux Output (FlexTest IIm and FlexTest CTC output min/max 230
controllers) 232 output resources 63
monotonic command
how to define 430
mouse operations for scopes 405
P
MPT (abbreviation for MultiPurpose TestWare) 34 P gain 239
MTS Echo 64 pan-zoom control mouse operations for scopes 405
multiple .hwi files 52 parameter set
multiple parameter sets 126 how to determine which is being used 127
multiple user, multiple project environments 37 how to export 130
MultiPurpose TestWare how to import 130
(Edit Only) 134 how to preview changes 129
considerations 93 how to save calibration data 197
procedure templates (default.000) 35 management 126
specimen files 35 name 479
test procedures (.000) 35 saving 127
mV/V pos tension or mV/V pos comp calibration settings parameter settings 126
how to set 162 parameters definition
panel 363, 365
N Park/Ride
controls 155
neg. compression (mV/V pos tension only) 205 digital output 158
neg. tension (mV/V pos compression only) 205 setting values 157
new project 45, 49 setting values as group 329
no restart (saved applications) 479 using 155
null pacing compensators using Manual Command 332
how to set up 253 password
null pacing timeout 167 for RSA 313
numbers, for calculations 378 Peak Det. Summary tab 451
peak detectors
O how to configure 434
Peak Detectors tab 450
offset Peak/Valley compensation (PVC)
auto offset 330 configuring 255
electrical zero 213 Peak/Valley compensators properties 255
how to clear 331 Peak/Valley data acquisition
settings 212 how to configure 432, 447
signals, scope 404 Peak/Valley Phase (PVP) compensation
offset considerations 212 configuring 277
offset zero settings Peak/Valley Phase (PVP) compensators
how to access 210 how to set up 277
Offset/Zero tab 212 Peak/Valley Phase compensators properties 277
omitting parameters 486 perform a shunt calibration check 208
on-line low battery actions 302 phase 233
open parameters 127, 132 phase (AC only) 206
open station 132 PIDF control modes 238
operating band 262, 270 piston area ratio 228, 230
operators, calculation editor 379 plot mode 398
optional compensators 249 plug and play 223
optional remote setpoint adjust 299 point picking 408
out-of-range feedback 319–320 polarity 199, 204, 228–230, 234, 300, 388
output Delta-K 228, 230 pos. compression (mV/V pos compression only) 205

499
Index

pos. tension (mV/V pos tension only) 205 project.793 settings 36

post-crash data 144 properties 458
power 64, 168, 191 protect this expression feature 360
power indicator 462 protected calculations 360–361
pre-emphasis filter 262 pulse width 168
precedence format example 485 PVC 84, 254
precedence-based command line format 484 PVC compensators
prefix signal names with channel name 63 how to set up 255
Print Preview toolbar 438 PVP 84
print to file 129, 133
printer setup 133 R
printing
message log 440 ramp
parameters 129, 132 tapered 337
preview window 129 tapered wave shape 338
preview window toolbar (BTW) 438 time 167
tests 439 time settings 149
the Message Log to file 441 wave shape 337
to file 129, 133 range definition
procedure template gain/delta K 161
folder 33 gain/linearization 161
procedures (MPT subfolder) 34 mV/V pos compression 162
Profile Editor application 134 mV/V pos tension 162
profile files (.blk) 35 range example 293
profiles 35 ranged conditioners 293
program and control 235 ranges in sensors 292
program and control channel 78 ranges, sensor 293
program hold 285 rate (outputs only) 178
program hold interlock 221, 284, 291, 303 rate input selection 233
program interlock 383 read-only HSM
program only 235 apply hydraulics 319
program only channels Readout Adjust panel 278
how to create 87 readout devices 392
program only control mode 235 readouts
program outputs how to configure 278
about 234 Readouts Summary panel 278
adjusting 234 Real-time control 112
program stop 285 reconfigurable signals 280
program stop interlock 221, 284, 291, 303 Remote Setpoint Adjust
program w/feedback 235 about 299
program with feedback channel configuring 299
about 79 enable/disable (password control) 313
program-only channel how to configure controls 300
how to create 87 knob panel 300
project null pace band adjustment 245
file viewer 45 rescale control 401
folder icons 29 reset
folder pane 44 all control 275
home 49 fwd control 270
name 47 inv control 270
settings 46 meter view 424
settings file 29 reset/override control 119, 309
Project Manager resolution 204, 300
access 48 restore 197, 206, 210

500
 Index

restore a default view 125 Scope (continued)

restore a saved view 125 how to set up user-specified limits 418
restore view 132, 479 how to size the window 399
restrict application access 60 how to synchronize with Function Generator 404
results 247, 358 image files (.emf) 36
resume 148, 150 images 35
Return Home control offsets 404
about 434 offsetting signals 404
defining home position 435 plot
Rig Command frequency, setting up 412–413
how to configure 157 time, setting up 411
setting values 157 rescale 401
setting values as group 329 same scale 402
using 155 scope setup,saving 392
Rig Command (option) 328 setting up 394
Rig Command (park/ride) 155 settings 395
RMS Amplitude (±) 334 Setup window 406
rollover running time signal 393 time scale, adjusting 403
rollover time signal 393 time signals, viewing 416
RPC sampling rates 489 toolbar controls 396
RSA enable control 313 Trace Settings tab 409
RSC name 479 window controls 395
RSC tab 154 Scopes and Meters 392
RTR Data (outputs only) 178 script for FIR filters 387
RTR Frame (outputs only) 178 script for IIR filters 386
running time 393 scroll to new entry 347, 453
Segment Generator options 341
S sensitivity 255, 277, 424
sensor calibration data
S gain 239 how to save to a transducer ID module 226
S2 gain (system option) 239 sensor calibration data formats 194
same scale control 402 sensor calibration file (.scf) 36
sample rate 142, 447 sensor file
sampling rate 399, 410 assigning 195
saturated calculated input signal 323 create 159
saturated feedback how to create 159
applying hydraulics 323 sensor file assignments 195
save 197, 206, 209 Sensor File Editor 135
save as 197 Sensor File Editor settings 162
save parameters 128, 132 sensor file name 198
save parameters as 128, 132 sensor file save options 196
save to 197 sensor input
save view 132 how to assign a transducer ID module 225
saved view sensor polarity 164
how to restore 125 sensor ranges
scale traces 401 how to select 293
scaling 182 limit detectors 292
Scope sensor ranges and limit detectors 292
about 394 sensor signals 393
data acquisition 395 Sensor tab settings 198
Frequency Mode tab 410 sensors
general mouse operations 405 assigning a file 203
Graph Settings tab 407 assigning a sensor file 195
how to set detector limits 418 creating a sensor file 159

501
Index

sensors (continued) sine tapered 337

ranges 292 sine tapered wave shape 338
transducer ID 225 sine wave shape 337
transducer ID, saving data to 226 single user, single project environments 37
serial connections, update rates on 82 sizing the Scope window 399
Series 793 application access 48 solution 372, 375
service port output Span
Model 494.16 only 229 adjusting 343
Model 494.16 VD/DUC only 231 specify data file options 432
Model 494.16/.25/.26 only 198 specimen
TestStar IIs, TestStar IIm, FlexTest GT Controllers 230 installation 329
set as default project 48–49 specimens (MPT subfolder) 34
set default 137 square
set user-specified scope limits 418 tapered 337
setpoint tapered wave shape 338
adjusting 343 wave shape 337
setpoint null pace band 245 stabilization 2 filter (system option) 243
setpoint null pacing 251 stabilization filter 243
setpoint/span time settings 152 stabilization filter types
Setting Description pane 50, 52–53 1 Hz high-pass 243
Settings and Values pane 53 stabilization2 100
shifting a conditioner’s electrical zero 218 standard project template 43
shortcut command line 478, 480–482 start action 446
shortcuts start an application from the Station Desktop Organizer 459
editing command line 486 starting
how to create 486 Demonstration mode 124
how to edit and test 486 Station Desktop Organizer 456
show grid 408 Station Desktop Organizer automatically 456
show protected expressions state 360 Station Desktop Organizer manually 456
show references 239 Station Manager application 121
shunt calibration check static null pacing
how to perform 208 how it works 249
shunt calibration checks 207 Station Builder
shunt calibration resistors 207 controller resources 65, 73
shunt calibration verification 202 display vs. internal name 75
shunt reference value multi-station testing 108
how to update 208 reconfigurable signals 102
Shunt tab 209 shortcuts 480
Shutdown Recorder station buttons and action menus 460
data (.dat) 36 station configuration file
data (.log) 36 multiple station resource conflicts 108
how to configure 143 station configuration file (.cfg) 36
Shutdown Recorder tab 141 station configurations in projects 58
Signal Auto Offset window 331 Station Controls panel 117, 306
signal list Station Controls settings 300
displaying 281 Station Desktop Organizer
editing 282 Hide/Show buttons 460
signal selection 450 hiding windows 458
signal value 331 how to move the taskbar 457
signals available/signals included 447–449 how to quit 459
signals in the station signals list how to refresh the display 460
how to define 281 how to start an application from the 459
simple expression 377 how to start automatically 456
sine 337 how to start manually 456

502
 Index

Station Desktop Organizer (continued) support

launching 456 phone 21
moving the taskbar 457 technical 19
positioning 457 sweep 335
refreshing the display 460 sweep freq 247
starting 456 switching plot modes 395
starting an application 459 Sync Current Channel 226
starting manually 456 synchronize the Function Generator and Scope 404
station input resources 67, 77 sysload open after load completed 482
station integrator control (parameter set) 138 system controls (all stations) 139
Station Log tab 136 system loader shortcuts 481
Station Manager system name 479, 483
application 112 system performance values 488
demonstration mode 124 system rate 82
menu bar 114 system settings 46
message pane 116 system with calculated outputs 316
Print Preview window 129, 133 systems without hydraulic power 315
shortcuts 478
window 113
Station Options window
T
Station Log tab 136 taper and ramp times 147
Station View Options tab 137 taper time settings 147
station panel 64 target setpoint 334, 341, 445
station parameter sets 125 technical support 19
station power 120, 310 TEDS sensor
station power control 306 how to assign calibration data 223
station power off 220, 284, 290, 302 how to replace with a non-TEDS sensor (series 494
station select 245 hardware only) 224
station setup 133, 223 temp control 1-1 input 72
station setup access 286 temp control 1-1 output 71
station setup settings 299 temp control 1-4-Input 73
Station Setup window 190 temperature control 71–72
station signals temperature controllers
how to display 281 how to program 87
station signals for scopes and meters 392 Template tab 47
Station Signals panel test
Calibration tab 281 command controls 443
Full Scale tab 281 control 306
Hardware tab 281 how to preview 438
station state information 36 how to print 439
Station View Options tab 137 test counter
station views how to configure 436
about 124 test file
how to manage 125 how to open 437
saving and restoring 125 how to save 437
station windows test files (Basic TestWare)
how to hide 458 about 429
status indicators 462 test files in projects 429
Stop at Level 168 test indicator 462
Stop button 461 Test Log tab 451
stored scope traces test monitoring 306
how to examine 416 test name 443, 483
strain control calculations 375 test procedure state information 36

503
Index

test setup (Basic TestWare) units (continued)

Command tab 445 changing the defaultunit assignment set 466
Detectors Setup tab 450 considerations for 793 applications 466
Detectors Summary tab 451 example 469
Test Log tab 451 Function Generator 469
Test Setup window 445 how to select unit assignment set 186
testing shortcuts 486 overview 466
TestStar IIs controllers 81 Project Manager 467
thumbwheel direction 140 Scope 398
thumbwheel speed 139 Station Builder 467
time between points 142, 447 Station Manager 468
time plot unit assignment set 137
how to set up 411 unit assignment sets 137
time/rate control 446 Unit Selection tab 136
timed data acquisition unit set descriptions 468
how to configure 432 Unit Set Editor 135, 468
toolbar unload simulated system 482
Basic TestWare 46, 444 unnamed calculations 362
Station Controls panel 117, 306 unrecoverable errors (calculations) 362
tools menu (Station Manager) 134 update 209
total duration 142 update rate
total samples 142 about 82
trace settings (scope) 409 using serial connections 82
Trace tab 409 using serial connectors 82
trace time 399 update the shunt reference value 208
traces upgrade installations 38
how to scale 401 upper limit/lower limit 240, 246, 409
track convergence rate 258 UPS
train convergence rate 258 actions 301
transducer ID delay 301
assigning 225 delay actions 301
saving data to module 226 external event actions 302
transducer ID modules (Series 493 Conditioners only) 194 low battery actions 301
transducer ID modules (Series 493 Conditioners Only) 225 on-line low battery actions 302
transition sources 147 usable range 211
transition states 147 user access level 479
transitions times between run, stop, and hold 147 user interface changes to the Calculation Editor 360
true strain control 376
tuning 123
tuning panel V
Adjustments tab
value (multibyte fields only) 178
channel limited channel (CLC) control modes 240
Values tab 281
PIDF control modes 238
valve balance 228, 230, 388
PIDF control mode
valve balance 1/2 229
Filter tab 242
valve drivers 71
Valve tab settings for three-stage valve drivers 230
U variables, in calculations 381
velocity limiter 300
UAS comment 136
view
UAS file 188
how to save 125
understanding station configurations 56, 58
virtual channel
uninterruptable power supply (UPS) actions 302
how to set up 355
uninterruptable power supply (UPS) settings 301
virtual output 71
units
virtual output and calculated input resources 66
about the Unit Assignment Set (UAS) Editor 187

504
 Index

W X
Wago A/D 1-1 72 X-Y value method 416
Wago D/A 1-1 71 X/Y plot
Wago DI 1-1 72–73 how to set up 414
Wago DO 1-1 71
wave shapes Y
ramp 337
ramp tapered 338 Y maximum/Y minimum 399
random function 339 Y-axis 410
sine 337
sine tapered 338 Z
square 337
square tapered 338 zero clamp PIDF control mode 97
while (control structure) 384 zero shift 216

505
Index

506
MTS Systems Corporation
14000 Technology Drive
Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55344-2290 USA
Toll Free Phone: 800-328-2255
(within U.S. or Canada)
Phone:952-937-4000
(outside the U.S. or Canada)
Fax 952-937-4515
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.mts.com

ISO 9001 Certified QMS